[{"_1":2,"_3":-5,"_4":-5},"loaderData",{"_5":6,"_7":-5,"_8":9,"_10":11},"actionData","errors","root",{"_1561":1562,"_1563":1564,"_1565":1566,"_1567":1568,"_1569":1570,"_1571":1572,"_1573":1574,"_1575":1576,"_1577":1578},"routes/($locale)","routes/($locale).docs",{"_41":42,"_43":44},"routes/($locale).docs.$",{"_12":13},"page",{"_14":15,"_16":17,"_18":19,"_20":21,"_22":23},"id","einsteiger-2-leiter","title","The LoDi system and two-rail","excerpt","The LoDi system working with two-rail track.","fullPath","getting-started/two-rail","content",[24,25],{"_26":36,"_37":38,"_39":40},{"_26":27,"_28":29,"_30":31,"_32":33,"_34":-7,"_35":-7},"type","image","src","https://cms.lokstoredigital.de/api/media/file/einsteiger-2-leiter-01-3446d6.jpg","alt","einsteiger-2-leiter-01-3446d6.jpg","align","left","maxWidth","caption","heading","level",3,"text","This page is still being written…","flatDocs",[1423,1424,1425,1426,1427,1428,1429,1430,1431,1432,1433,1434,1435,1436,1437,1438,1439,1440,1441,1442,1443,1444,1445,1446,1447,1448,1449,1450,1451,1452,1453,1454,1455,1456,1457,1458,1459,1460,1461,1462,1463,1464,1465,1466,1467,1468,1469,1470,1471,1472,1473,1474,1475,1476,1477,1478,1479,1480,1481,1482,1483,1484,1485,1486,1487,1488,1489,1490,1491,1492,1493,1494,1495,1496,1497,1498,1499,1500,1501,1502,1503,1504,1505,1506,1507,1508,1509,1510,1511,1512,1513,1514,1515,1516,1517,1518,1519,1520,1521,1522,1523,1524,1525,1526,1527,1528,1529,1530,1531,1532,1533,1534,1535,1536,1537,1538,1539,1540,1541],"searchIndex",[45,46,47,48,49,50,51,52,53,54,55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67,68,69,70,71,72,73,74,75,76,77,78,79,80,81,82,83,84,85,86,87,88,89,90,91,92,93,94,95,96,97,98,99,100,101,102,103,104,105,106,107,108,109,110,111,112,113,114,115,116,117,118,119,120,121,122,123,124,125,126,127,128,129,130,131,132,133,134,135,136,137,138,139,140,141,142,143,144,145,146,147,148,149,150,151,152,153,154,155,156,157,158,159,160,161,162,163],{"_14":1418,"_20":1419,"_16":649,"_18":1420,"_168":1421,"_39":1422},{"_14":1405,"_20":1406,"_16":1407,"_18":1408,"_168":1409,"_39":1410},{"_14":1399,"_20":1400,"_16":1401,"_18":1402,"_168":1403,"_39":1404},{"_14":1387,"_20":1388,"_16":1389,"_18":1390,"_168":1391,"_39":1392},{"_14":1381,"_20":1382,"_16":1249,"_18":1383,"_168":1384,"_39":1385},{"_14":1375,"_20":1376,"_16":1377,"_18":1378,"_168":1379,"_39":1380},{"_14":1369,"_20":1370,"_16":1371,"_18":1372,"_168":1373,"_39":1374},{"_14":1354,"_20":1355,"_16":594,"_18":1356,"_168":1357,"_39":1358},{"_14":1342,"_20":1343,"_16":1344,"_18":1345,"_168":1346,"_39":1347},{"_14":1333,"_20":1334,"_16":699,"_18":1335,"_168":1336,"_39":1337},{"_14":1327,"_20":1328,"_16":1329,"_18":1330,"_168":1331,"_39":1332},{"_14":1317,"_20":1318,"_16":1319,"_18":1320,"_168":1321,"_39":1322},{"_14":1311,"_20":1312,"_16":1313,"_18":1314,"_168":1315,"_39":1316},{"_14":1298,"_20":1299,"_16":798,"_18":290,"_168":1300,"_39":1301},{"_14":1284,"_20":1285,"_16":520,"_18":1286,"_168":1287,"_39":1288},{"_14":1272,"_20":1273,"_16":406,"_18":1274,"_168":1275,"_39":1276},{"_14":1257,"_20":1258,"_16":1259,"_18":1260,"_168":1261,"_39":1262},{"_14":1251,"_20":1252,"_16":1253,"_18":1254,"_168":1255,"_39":1256},{"_14":960,"_20":1244,"_16":351,"_18":1245,"_168":1246,"_39":1247},{"_14":1239,"_20":1240,"_16":303,"_18":1241,"_168":1242,"_39":1243},{"_14":1230,"_20":1230,"_16":1231,"_18":1232,"_168":1233,"_39":1234},{"_14":1225,"_20":1226,"_16":406,"_18":1227,"_168":1228,"_39":1229},{"_14":15,"_20":21,"_16":17,"_18":19,"_168":1223,"_39":1224},{"_14":1217,"_20":1218,"_16":1219,"_18":1220,"_168":1221,"_39":1222},{"_14":1180,"_20":1181,"_16":1182,"_18":1183,"_168":1184,"_39":1185},{"_14":1173,"_20":1174,"_16":1175,"_18":1176,"_168":1177,"_39":1178},{"_14":1167,"_20":1168,"_16":1169,"_18":1170,"_168":1171,"_39":1172},{"_14":1157,"_20":1158,"_16":1159,"_18":1160,"_168":1161,"_39":1162},{"_14":1144,"_20":1145,"_16":315,"_18":1146,"_168":1147,"_39":1148},{"_14":1131,"_20":1132,"_16":1133,"_18":1134,"_168":1135,"_39":1136},{"_14":1122,"_20":1123,"_16":751,"_18":1124,"_168":1125,"_39":1126},{"_14":1112,"_20":1113,"_16":1114,"_18":1115,"_168":1116,"_39":1117},{"_14":1106,"_20":1107,"_16":1108,"_18":1109,"_168":1110,"_39":1111},{"_14":1100,"_20":1100,"_16":1101,"_18":1102,"_168":1103,"_39":1104},{"_14":1088,"_20":1089,"_16":1090,"_18":1091,"_168":1092,"_39":1093},{"_14":1080,"_20":1081,"_16":1082,"_18":308,"_168":1083,"_39":1084},{"_14":1064,"_20":1065,"_16":1066,"_18":1067,"_168":1068,"_39":1069},{"_14":1047,"_20":1048,"_16":1049,"_18":1050,"_168":1051,"_39":1052},{"_14":1033,"_20":1034,"_16":1035,"_18":1036,"_168":1037,"_39":1038},{"_14":1027,"_20":1028,"_16":1029,"_18":1030,"_168":1031,"_39":1032},{"_14":1021,"_20":1022,"_16":1023,"_18":1024,"_168":1025,"_39":1026},{"_14":1005,"_20":1006,"_16":649,"_18":1007,"_168":1008,"_39":1009},{"_14":1000,"_20":1001,"_16":520,"_18":1002,"_168":1003,"_39":1004},{"_14":981,"_20":982,"_16":983,"_18":984,"_168":985,"_39":986},{"_14":975,"_20":976,"_16":977,"_18":978,"_168":979,"_39":980},{"_14":959,"_20":960,"_16":961,"_18":962,"_168":963,"_39":964},{"_14":950,"_20":951,"_16":952,"_18":953,"_168":954,"_39":955},{"_14":937,"_20":938,"_16":847,"_18":939,"_168":940,"_39":941},{"_14":928,"_20":929,"_16":930,"_18":931,"_168":932,"_39":933},{"_14":917,"_20":918,"_16":919,"_18":920,"_168":921,"_39":922},{"_14":908,"_20":909,"_16":910,"_18":911,"_168":912,"_39":913},{"_14":893,"_20":894,"_16":895,"_18":896,"_168":897,"_39":898},{"_14":878,"_20":879,"_16":880,"_18":881,"_168":882,"_39":883},{"_14":866,"_20":867,"_16":868,"_18":869,"_168":870,"_39":871},{"_14":860,"_20":861,"_16":862,"_18":863,"_168":864,"_39":865},{"_14":845,"_20":846,"_16":847,"_18":848,"_168":849,"_39":850},{"_14":839,"_20":840,"_16":841,"_18":842,"_168":843,"_39":844},{"_14":833,"_20":834,"_16":835,"_18":836,"_168":837,"_39":838},{"_14":812,"_20":813,"_16":814,"_18":815,"_168":816,"_39":817},{"_14":807,"_20":807,"_16":808,"_18":809,"_168":810,"_39":811},{"_14":796,"_20":797,"_16":798,"_18":799,"_168":800,"_39":801},{"_14":790,"_20":791,"_16":204,"_18":792,"_168":793,"_39":794},{"_14":779,"_20":780,"_16":781,"_18":782,"_168":783,"_39":784},{"_14":766,"_20":767,"_16":768,"_18":769,"_168":770,"_39":771},{"_14":749,"_20":750,"_16":751,"_18":752,"_168":753,"_39":754},{"_14":734,"_20":735,"_16":736,"_18":737,"_168":738,"_39":739},{"_14":719,"_20":720,"_16":721,"_18":722,"_168":723,"_39":724},{"_14":713,"_20":714,"_16":715,"_18":716,"_168":717,"_39":718},{"_14":697,"_20":698,"_16":699,"_18":700,"_168":701,"_39":702},{"_14":691,"_20":692,"_16":693,"_18":694,"_168":695,"_39":696},{"_14":684,"_20":685,"_16":686,"_18":687,"_168":688,"_39":689},{"_14":678,"_20":679,"_16":680,"_18":681,"_168":682,"_39":683},{"_14":659,"_20":660,"_16":661,"_18":662,"_168":663,"_39":664},{"_14":647,"_20":648,"_16":649,"_18":650,"_168":651,"_39":652},{"_14":634,"_20":635,"_16":636,"_18":637,"_168":638,"_39":639},{"_14":626,"_20":627,"_16":628,"_18":629,"_168":630,"_39":631},{"_14":612,"_20":613,"_16":614,"_18":615,"_168":616,"_39":617},{"_14":592,"_20":593,"_16":594,"_18":595,"_168":596,"_39":597},{"_14":578,"_20":579,"_16":580,"_18":581,"_168":582,"_39":583},{"_14":569,"_20":570,"_16":571,"_18":572,"_168":573,"_39":574},{"_14":557,"_20":558,"_16":559,"_18":560,"_168":561,"_39":562},{"_14":544,"_20":545,"_16":546,"_18":547,"_168":548,"_39":549},{"_14":538,"_20":539,"_16":540,"_18":541,"_168":542,"_39":543},{"_14":531,"_20":532,"_16":533,"_18":534,"_168":535,"_39":536},{"_14":518,"_20":519,"_16":520,"_18":521,"_168":522,"_39":523},{"_14":504,"_20":505,"_16":506,"_18":507,"_168":508,"_39":509},{"_14":497,"_20":498,"_16":499,"_18":500,"_168":501,"_39":502},{"_14":485,"_20":486,"_16":487,"_18":488,"_168":489,"_39":490},{"_14":467,"_20":468,"_16":469,"_18":470,"_168":471,"_39":472},{"_14":459,"_20":460,"_16":461,"_18":462,"_168":463,"_39":464},{"_14":441,"_20":442,"_16":443,"_18":444,"_168":445,"_39":446},{"_14":435,"_20":436,"_16":437,"_18":438,"_168":439,"_39":440},{"_14":428,"_20":429,"_16":430,"_18":431,"_168":432,"_39":433},{"_14":414,"_20":415,"_16":416,"_18":417,"_168":418,"_39":419},{"_14":404,"_20":405,"_16":406,"_18":407,"_168":408,"_39":409},{"_14":393,"_20":394,"_16":395,"_18":396,"_168":397,"_39":398},{"_14":384,"_20":385,"_16":386,"_18":387,"_168":388,"_39":389},{"_14":371,"_20":372,"_16":373,"_18":374,"_168":375,"_39":376},{"_14":365,"_20":366,"_16":367,"_18":368,"_168":369,"_39":370},{"_14":349,"_20":350,"_16":351,"_18":352,"_168":353,"_39":354},{"_14":337,"_20":338,"_16":339,"_18":340,"_168":341,"_39":342},{"_14":331,"_20":332,"_16":333,"_18":308,"_168":334,"_39":335},{"_14":325,"_20":326,"_16":327,"_18":328,"_168":329,"_39":330},{"_14":313,"_20":314,"_16":315,"_18":316,"_168":317,"_39":318},{"_14":305,"_20":306,"_16":307,"_18":308,"_168":309,"_39":310},{"_14":295,"_20":296,"_16":297,"_18":298,"_168":299,"_39":300},{"_14":287,"_20":288,"_16":289,"_18":290,"_168":291,"_39":292},{"_14":268,"_20":269,"_16":270,"_18":271,"_168":272,"_39":273},{"_14":259,"_20":260,"_16":261,"_18":262,"_168":263,"_39":264},{"_14":253,"_20":254,"_16":255,"_18":256,"_168":257,"_39":258},{"_14":244,"_20":245,"_16":246,"_18":247,"_168":248,"_39":249},{"_14":235,"_20":236,"_16":237,"_18":238,"_168":239,"_39":240},{"_14":226,"_20":227,"_16":228,"_18":229,"_168":230,"_39":231},{"_14":218,"_20":219,"_16":220,"_18":221,"_168":222,"_39":223},{"_14":208,"_20":209,"_16":210,"_18":211,"_168":212,"_39":213},{"_14":202,"_20":203,"_16":204,"_18":205,"_168":206,"_39":207},{"_14":196,"_20":197,"_16":198,"_18":199,"_168":200,"_39":201},{"_14":180,"_20":181,"_16":182,"_18":183,"_168":184,"_39":185},{"_14":164,"_20":165,"_16":166,"_18":167,"_168":169,"_39":170},"con-open-source","lodi-con/open-source","Open source components","The free components inside the LoDi-Con and their licences.","headings",[171,172,173,174,175,176,177,178,179],"The firmware of the LoDi-Con uses a number of open source components, listed below:\nLittleFS\nVersion: 2.0.0\nCopyright: 2015-2020 Espressif Systems (Shanghai) PTE LTD\nLicence: Apache 2.0 (http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0)\nTFT_eSPI\nVersion: 2.4.71\nLicence: FreeBSD License\neither expressed or implied, of the FreeBSD Project.\nFastLED\nVersion: 3.5.0\nLicence: The MIT License (MIT)\nCONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.\nuuid-log\nVersion: 2.1.4\nLicence: GNU General Public License v3.0 (https://github.com/nomis/mcu-uuid-log/blob/main/COPYING)\nCopyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. \nPNGdec\nVersion: 1.0.1\nCopyright: Copyright (c) 2021 BitBank Software, Inc.\nAuthor: Larry Bank\nLicence: Apache 2.0 (http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0)\nesp32_arduino_sqlite3_lib\nVersion: 2.3\nLicence: Apache 2.0 (http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0)\nAuthor: Arundale Ramanathan\nTJpg_Decoder\nVersion: 1.0.5\nLicence: FreeBSD License\neither expressed or implied, of the FreeBSD Project.\nminiz-esp32\nVersion: 0.0.1\nMaintainer: Larry Bernstone\nLicence: The MIT License (MIT)\nTHE SOFTWARE.\nAdafruit FT6206 Library\nVersion: 1.0.6\nAuthor: Limor Fried/Ladyada for Adafruit Industries.\nLicence: The MIT License (MIT)","LittleFS","TFT_eSPI","FastLED","uuid-log","PNGdec","esp32_arduino_sqlite3_lib","TJpg_Decoder","miniz-esp32","Adafruit FT6206 Library","con-15-lok-bilder","lodi-con/loco-images","Creating loco images","Producing your own locomotive images in the right format and getting them onto the LoDi-Con.",[186,187,188,189,190,191,192,193,194,195],"Introduction\nThe LoDi-Con lets you bring in your own locomotive images in JPEG and PNG format. They may be up to 190 × 48 pixels in size. In the case of PNG a transparent background is even allowed. The guide below describes how to produce your own locomotive images.\nGIMP\nProducing locomotive images is explained using GIMP. This capable free graphics program runs on Windows, Linux and macOS and can be downloaded freely at https://www.gimp.org/downloads/.\nOther similarly capable programs can be used to produce locomotive images as well.\n lodi-con-15-lok-bilder-01-721dc8.png\nWhat the image has to meet\nThe locomotive image can be taken with any phone camera. What matters is good lighting without shadows or highlights, and a sharp picture. Beyond that, keep an eye on the horizontal alignment — although that can also be corrected in GIMP afterwards.\nA white background, or one that contrasts as strongly as possible with the colour of the locomotive, is recommended. For larger collections, building a light box with a fixed camera mount makes sense.\nPicture from the phone camera (roughly cropped) Picture from the phone camera (roughly cropped)\n lodi-con-15-lok-bilder-03-68d66a.png\nEditing steps\nHorizontal alignment\nAfter opening the image in GIMP it should first be aligned horizontally. To do that, add a horizontal guide at the height of the track: Image ►Guides ►New Guide … . You can read the approximate position off the ruler on the left.\n lodi-con-15-lok-bilder-04-0b5fc5.png\nThen choose the menu entry Image ►Transform ►Arbitrary Rotation … and correct the alignment of the image against the guide and the track.\n lodi-con-15-lok-bilder-05-4e2224.png\n lodi-con-15-lok-bilder-06-63dd75.png\nRemoving the background\nThis step is optional. It is not needed for producing JPEG images.\nFirst an alpha channel has to be added to the image if it does not have one yet; it holds the transparency information. Choose Layer ►Transparency ►Add Alpha Channel. If the entry is greyed out, the alpha channel is already there.\nThen choose the fuzzy select tool from the toolbox.\n lodi-con-15-lok-bilder-07-05583a.png\nSet the tool up as follows:\n lodi-con-15-lok-bilder-08-8dcf55.png\nThen click the background. The area to be deleted is outlined.\n lodi-con-15-lok-bilder-09-01cbb1.png\nNow press the Del key. The selected area is deleted and replaced by transparency.\n lodi-con-15-lok-bilder-10-1cf11a.png\nRepeat this for every other area of background. Take care that no white edges are left over, and experiment with the threshold of the fuzzy select tool.\n lodi-con-15-lok-bilder-11-52d56d.png\n lodi-con-15-lok-bilder-12-6968a6.png\nIncreasing the contrast\nThe next step raises the contrast of the image, for the best possible result on the display. Choose the Colors ►Levels dialog for this.\nIn the dialog, move the arrows in the input levels area so that they cover only the colour range actually used.\n lodi-con-15-lok-bilder-13-08f753.png\nAfter confirming the dialog, the colours of the image look distinctly stronger.\n lodi-con-15-lok-bilder-14-e3c5be.png\n lodi-con-15-lok-bilder-15-02bd2a.png\nCropping the image\nThis step fits the image to the size of the locomotive. Select a rectangular area around the locomotive that is as tight as possible and crop the image to it with Image ► Crop to Selection.\n lodi-con-15-lok-bilder-16-b21d61.png\nYou may want to save this image first, so that you can produce further formats from it.\n lodi-con-15-lok-bilder-17-4072d7.png\nScaling the image\nNow the image is scaled to its final size. Choose Image ►Scale Image … for this. For long locomotives you can set the width to 190 pixels; the height follows automatically. For short locomotives it is better to set the height to 48 pixels. Take care not to exceed the maximum image size of 190 × 48 pixels.\n lodi-con-15-lok-bilder-18-1d5206.png\nAfter scaling, the result looks roughly like this:\n lodi-con-15-lok-bilder-19-a306a6.png\n lodi-con-15-lok-bilder-20-a286b7.png\nExporting the image\nThe last step saves the image in the target format. Use File►Export As … for this.\nThe file type is set by the extension: choose .png for PNG and .jpg for JPEG. After clicking Export, the export options for that format are asked for.\nFor JPEG choose the following settings:\n lodi-con-15-lok-bilder-21-cbdbf6.png\nFor PNG the following settings should be used:\n lodi-con-15-lok-bilder-22-11dbca.png\n lodi-con-15-lok-bilder-23-0d9cbe.png\nUploading locomotive images to the LoDi-Con\n lodi-con-15-lok-bilder-24-125353.png\nOnce the image has been edited it can be transferred to the LoDi-Con with the LoDi-ProgrammerFX. How that works is explained here.\nAfter uploading to the LoDi-Con, a PNG with transparency looks like this:\n lodi-con-15-lok-bilder-25-09f565.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","GIMP","What the image has to meet","Editing steps","Horizontal alignment","Removing the background","Increasing the contrast","Cropping the image","Scaling the image","Exporting the image","Uploading locomotive images to the LoDi-Con","con-14-technische-daten","lodi-con/technical-data","Technical data","Dimensions, display, battery and radio characteristics of the LoDi-Con.",[],"Dimensions:\nLength 136 mm\nWidth 74 mm\nHeight 46 mm (measured over the rotary knob)\nWeight:\nLoDi-Con A = 220 grams (with battery pack)\nLoDi-Con B = 180 grams (without batteries)\nDisplay:\n3.2\" TFT LCD display with capacitive touch\nResolution 240x320 pixels\nContrast 500:1\nBrightness 280 cd/m²\nRotary control:\nEncoder with 24 steps plus push button.\nWLAN:\nIEEE 802.11 at 2.4 GHz b/g/n\nPassword up to 32 characters\nBattery pack (LoDi-Con A only):\nLithium polymer pack, 3.7 volts 3000 mAh, 1S1C. Maximum charging current 1 amp. Maximum discharge current 1.5 amps.\nThe maximum operating voltage is 5 volts.\nThe LoDi-Con is very frugal; in our real-world tests we measured run times of up to\n10 hours. With batteries and cells, watch out for sufficient capacity (mAh) — the less there is, the shorter the run time.\nLoDi-Con A:\nThe USB-C connector can be fed from any common USB-C cable with a 5-volt power supply.\nThe maximum load of the USB power supply may be up to 3 amps.\nThe LoDi-Con cannot be charged over USB-C PD; it has to be supplied over USB at 5 volts. PD chargers are mostly used for laptops and tablets.\nLoDi-Con B:\nCan be used with:\nAAA alkaline batteries (run time up to 6 hours) AAA NiMH cells of 1100 mAh (run time up to 4-5 hours) AAA Li-ion cells of 750 mAh (run time up to 3 hours)\nNot suitable for children under 14.\nThe LoDi-Con uses a number of open source components.\n lodi-con-14-technische-daten-01-db29ea.png\nNotes on disposing of batteries\nIn connection with selling batteries, or supplying devices\nthat contain batteries, we are obliged to point out the following:\nAs an end user you are legally obliged to return used batteries. You can return old batteries of a kind we carry, or have carried, as new batteries free of charge at our dispatch warehouse (dispatch address).\nThe crossed-out wheelie bin symbol means that batteries must not be put in household waste.\nPb = the battery contains more than 0.004% lead by mass Cd = the battery contains more than 0.002% cadmium by mass Hg = the battery contains more than 0.0005% mercury by mass\nPlease observe the above.\nLokstoredigital is registered with the Stiftung ear under the German Battery Act (BattG).\nAt the end of its life this product must not be disposed of with household waste. Please take it to a collection point for electrical equipment.\n lodi-con-14-technische-daten-02-d14bfb.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","con-13-firmwareupdate","lodi-con/firmware-update","Firmware update","Bringing the LoDi-Con up to date.",[]," lodi-con-13-firmwareupdate-01-775ac6.jpg\nLoDi-OS is looked after continuously — especially in the first months we will be presenting updates and improvements regularly.\nYou will hear about every change and update in our forum; the updates for the device are made available to you automatically.\n lodi-con-13-firmwareupdate-02-7687d0.png\n lodi-con-13-firmwareupdate-03-9b03f9.png\nTo install the update, first tap the \"house\".\nFrom there go to \"About\".\nThis window holds further menu entries such as:\n\"System information\" (details of the version number and the memory in use) \"Update firmware\" (where the currently available firmware is offered) \"Hardware test\" (where the complete hardware of the handheld, and the battery or pack voltage, can be checked.)\n lodi-con-13-firmwareupdate-04-bfe919.png\n lodi-con-13-firmwareupdate-05-09849d.png\n lodi-con-13-firmwareupdate-06-9641e9.png\nOnce you are in the \"Update firmware\" menu, the current version is shown — in our case v0.4.1. Below it a new version 0.4.2 is waiting. Tapping it starts the update straight away.\nAfter loading the new firmware the LoDi-Con restarts. The boot screen should now show the new firmware version.\n lodi-con-13-firmwareupdate-07-a20c15.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","lodi-verteiler-11-fach","hardware/accessories/lodi-verteiler-11-fach","LoDi-Verteiler 11-fach","The LoDi 11-way distribution board. Nothing special, but very useful day to day: a small distribution board or tie point for 11 poles, for extending cables.",[214,215,216,217],"The LoDi 11-way distribution board\n LoDi-Verteiler 11-fach\nThe LoDi 11-way distribution board. Nothing special, but very useful day to day: a small distribution board or tie point for 11 poles, for extending cables such as turnout drive cables and the like.\nSimply, quickly and securely mounted...\nFeatures of the LoDi 11-way distribution board\nA simple 11-way distribution strip with solder pads For extending wiring Perfect as a tie point for turnout drives, signals, lamps, track . . . Available in packs of ten\n1. The LoDi 11-way distribution board and its connections\nOut of our own long experience, and that of our partners who wire up customer layouts on site every day. Our small tie point for joining cables by solder pad.\nAny kind of cable can be quickly unsoldered and soldered back on . . .\nThe board has a screw hole so it can simply be mounted. It can also be glued, depending on the mounting situation on your layout.\n LoDi-Verteiler 11-fach — The LoDi 11-way distribution board and its connections\n LoDi-Verteiler 11-fach — The LoDi 11-way distribution board and its connections\n2. Technical data\nThe LoDi distribution board comes in several versions (3-way, 5-way, 7-way and 11-way). Each individual line is rated for a maximum of 5 amperes, regardless of the number of connections.\n0–60 volt AC or DC input\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length: 44 mm\nWidth 20 mm\nHeight 1.5 mm at its highest point\nWeight 2 g\n LoDi-Verteiler 11-fach — Technical data\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are glad to help.","The LoDi 11-way distribution board","Features of the LoDi 11-way distribution board","1. The LoDi 11-way distribution board and its connections","2. Technical data","con-12-online-datenbank","lodi-con/online-database","Online database","Taking locomotive data and images from the online database.",[224,225],"The online database provides images for locomotives and carriages. Anyone can upload their own images there and make them available to others. The LoDi-Con can use those images directly as long as it is online.\nThe database is at https://images.lokstoredigital.de.\nHere is how to set the online database up and use it:\nSetting up access\n lodi-con-12-online-datenbank-01-9ed001.png\n lodi-con-12-online-datenbank-02-17332a.png\nIn principle the online database can be used from the LoDi-Con without logging in — but then only public images are available.\nTo see private locomotive images as well, the e-mail address and password used to log in at https://images.lokstoredigital.de have to be entered.\nFirst tap the \"house symbol\" in the bar at the bottom.\nFrom there go to \"Settings\" > \"Device\" > \"Online database\".\nNow enter the e-mail address under \"E-mail\" and the password under \"Password\".\nAccess can be verified with the \"Check\" menu entry.\n lodi-con-12-online-datenbank-03-17d97a.png\nChoosing a locomotive image\n lodi-con-12-online-datenbank-04-55e061.png\n lodi-con-12-online-datenbank-05-a0ac96.png\n lodi-con-12-online-datenbank-06-dc8181.png\n lodi-con-12-online-datenbank-07-52ff47.png\n lodi-con-12-online-datenbank-08-77b4d2.png\nTo choose an image for a locomotive from the online database, start exactly as you would for an image already on the LoDi-Con:\nOpen the locomotive settings by clicking the \"house symbol\" and then choosing a locomotive under \"Settings\" > \"Locomotive database\". Another way is to click the spanner on a locomotive you have already selected.\nThen click the \"Image\" entry.\nIn the selection that appears, click \"[Online]\". The list of locomotive images for the filter currently set is fetched.\nThe \"[Filter]\" entry lets you refine your search. You can filter by image name, railway company, locomotive type — steam, electric and so on — and era.\nTo take an image for the locomotive, simply click it.\n lodi-con-12-online-datenbank-09-1333f4.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","Setting up access","Choosing a locomotive image","lodi-verteiler-7-fach","hardware/accessories/lodi-verteiler-7-fach","LoDi-Verteiler 7-fach","The LoDi 7-way distribution board. Nothing special, but very useful day to day: a small distribution board or tie point for 7 poles, for extending cables.",[232,233,234,217],"The LoDi 7-way distribution board\n LoDi-Verteiler 7-fach\nThe LoDi 7-way distribution board. Nothing special, but very useful day to day: a small distribution board or tie point for 7 poles, for extending cables such as turnout drive cables and the like.\nSimply, quickly and securely mounted...\nFeatures of the LoDi 7-way distribution board\nA simple 7-way distribution strip with solder pads For extending wiring Perfect as a tie point for turnout drives, signals, lamps, track . . . Available in packs of ten\n1. The LoDi 7-way distribution board and its connections\nOut of our own long experience, and that of our partners who wire up customer layouts on site every day. Our small tie point for joining cables by solder pad.\nAny kind of cable can be quickly unsoldered and soldered back on . . .\nThe board has a screw hole so it can simply be mounted. It can also be glued, depending on the mounting situation on your layout.\n LoDi-Verteiler 7-fach — The LoDi 7-way distribution board and its connections\n LoDi-Verteiler 7-fach — The LoDi 7-way distribution board and its connections\n2. Technical data\nThe LoDi distribution board comes in several versions (3-way, 5-way, 7-way and 11-way). Each individual line is rated for a maximum of 5 amperes, regardless of the number of connections.\n0–60 volt AC or DC input\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length: 30 mm\nWidth 20 mm\nHeight 1.5 mm at its highest point\nWeight 1.5 g\n LoDi-Verteiler 7-fach — Technical data\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are glad to help.","The LoDi 7-way distribution board","Features of the LoDi 7-way distribution board","1. The LoDi 7-way distribution board and its connections","con-11-clubmodus","lodi-con/club-mode","Club mode","Locking functions and running several handhelds on one layout.",[241,242,243],"Club mode lets you restrict the LoDi-Con, so that you can hand the device to someone else without worrying that its settings will be changed.\nDevice settings, locomotive configurations and accessories can all be locked.\nIt is also possible to lock the LoDi-Con down so that only one locomotive can be driven with it.\nHere is how to set club mode up:\nSetting a password\n lodi-con-11-clubmodus-01-68a998.png\n lodi-con-11-clubmodus-02-1c0570.png\n lodi-con-11-clubmodus-03-755b09.png\nTo restrict the LoDi-Con, a password has to be set first. While none is set, the LoDi-Con shows \"inactive\" next to \"Password\".\nFirst tap the \"house symbol\" in the bar at the bottom.\nFrom there go to \"Settings\" > \"Device\" > \"Club mode\".\nUnder \"Password\" you can now enter a password.\nThe password is a four-digit number. You have to enter this \"PIN\" twice before it is set.\n lodi-con-11-clubmodus-04-89c999.png\nLocking locomotives\n lodi-con-11-clubmodus-05-735bbf.png\n lodi-con-11-clubmodus-06-02e0f6.png\nThe locomotive menu can now be browsed on the LoDi-Con. Choose which locomotives should stay selectable and drivable.\nLocomotives not selected are then no longer shown in the locomotive list.\nTo lift the lock, choose \"Allow all locomotives\" in the locomotive selection list\n lodi-con-11-clubmodus-07-89f478.png\nLocking further settings\n lodi-con-11-clubmodus-08-45b5ee.png\nThe LoDi-Con can be restricted so far that all that remains is driving one locomotive and switching the device on and off.\nTo restrict the LoDi-Con further, there is a choice of:\nLock accessories = every turnout is locked Lock loco settings = the locomotive settings cannot be opened or changed Lock device settings = every setting of the LoDi-Con, and the firmware update, is locked\nTicking the respective option sets it.\nFrom then on you have to enter the password you set to reach the settings.\n lodi-con-11-clubmodus-09-ce3ab0.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","Setting a password","Locking locomotives","Locking further settings","lodi-verteiler-5-fach","hardware/accessories/lodi-verteiler-5-fach","LoDi-Verteiler 5-fach","The LoDi 5-way distribution board. Nothing special, but very useful day to day: a small distribution board or tie point for 5 poles, for extending cables.",[250,251,252,217],"The LoDi 5-way distribution board\n LoDi-Verteiler 5-fach\nThe LoDi 5-way distribution board. Nothing special, but very useful day to day: a small distribution board or tie point for 5 poles, for extending cables such as turnout drive cables and the like.\nSimply, quickly and securely mounted...\nFeatures of the LoDi 5-way distribution board\nA simple 5-way distribution strip with solder pads For extending wiring Perfect as a tie point for turnout drives, signals, lamps, track . . . Available in packs of ten\n1. The LoDi 5-way distribution board and its connections\nOut of our own long experience, and that of our partners who wire up customer layouts on site every day. Our small tie point for joining cables by solder pad.\nAny kind of cable can be quickly unsoldered and soldered back on . . .\nThe board has a screw hole so it can simply be mounted. It can also be glued, depending on the mounting situation on your layout.\n LoDi-Verteiler 5-fach — The LoDi 5-way distribution board and its connections\n LoDi-Verteiler 5-fach — The LoDi 5-way distribution board and its connections\n2. Technical data\nThe LoDi distribution board comes in several versions (3-way, 5-way, 7-way and 11-way). Each individual line is rated for a maximum of 5 amperes, regardless of the number of connections.\n0–60 volt AC or DC input\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length: 20 mm\nWidth 16 mm\nHeight 1.5 mm at its highest point\nWeight 1 g\n LoDi-Verteiler 5-fach — Technical data\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are glad to help.","The LoDi 5-way distribution board","Features of the LoDi 5-way distribution board","1. The LoDi 5-way distribution board and its connections","con-10-cv-programmierung","lodi-con/cv-programming","CV programming","Programming decoders in plain language — on the programming track and on the main (PoM).",[],"Why not programme your locomotives comfortably from the LoDi-Con…\nIn the properties of a locomotive we built in the option of simple or extended CV programming. Here is an example of how it works.\nIn this example we change CV 3 and CV 4 — the acceleration and braking times.\nTo programme a CV you need a command station that supports PoM (programming on main) or has a programming track output. In our example we use the LoDi-Rektor to write and the LoDi-S88-Commander LX to read the CVs out on the layout, in a block.\n lodi-con-10-cv-programmierung-01-f92f44.png\n lodi-con-10-cv-programmierung-02-4a70ac.png\n lodi-con-10-cv-programmierung-03-6ca384.png\nTo programme a CV, first go to the locomotive whose CV you want to change.\nTap the \"spanner\" to reach the settings of the locomotive.\nChoose \"CV programming\".\nYou go straight into the CV overview. Is the locomotive on the track? Is the power on? Then tapping \"Read\" should read the CVs of the locomotive out.\n lodi-con-10-cv-programmierung-04-2c3b83.png\n lodi-con-10-cv-programmierung-05-405b59.png\n lodi-con-10-cv-programmierung-06-d8530f.png\n lodi-con-10-cv-programmierung-07-7036b8.png\nCVs read successfully are shown in green.\nNow go to \"Acceleration time\". Another dialog opens in which you can set the CV.\nRepeat this for the \"Braking time\" (deceleration time).\nThe changed values are now shown in yellow, so the LoDi-Con shows you which CVs it is going to change.\n lodi-con-10-cv-programmierung-08-32818c.png\n lodi-con-10-cv-programmierung-09-1c277f.png\n lodi-con-10-cv-programmierung-10-2ddc5f.png\n lodi-con-10-cv-programmierung-11-972ac0.png\nTo commit the change to the decoder, go to\n\"Write changes\". The LoDi-Con asks once more whether it should write this data to the locomotive decoder. Confirm with \"Yes\" and the data is written.\nOnce written, the CVs are stored and shown in green again.\n lodi-con-10-cv-programmierung-12-e37f2f.png\nOther CVs can of course be changed with the LoDi-Con as well. We tried to keep it as clear as possible and followed the DCC standard in doing so.\nShould a CV not be in our list, you can also reach every CV by hand. Swipe until you come to \"CV register\".\nThere you can select the CV register as usual, enter the values and write the changes.\n lodi-con-10-cv-programmierung-13-0cea6c.png\n lodi-con-10-cv-programmierung-14-4c3725.png\n lodi-con-10-cv-programmierung-15-8145cc.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","lodi-verteiler-3-fach","hardware/accessories/lodi-verteiler-3-fach","LoDi-Verteiler 3-fach","The LoDi 3- and 5-way distribution board. Nothing special, but very useful day to day: a small distribution board or tie point for 3 and 5 poles, for extending cables.",[265,266,267,217],"The LoDi 3- and 5-way distribution board\n LoDi-Verteiler 3-fach\nThe LoDi 3- and 5-way distribution board. Nothing special, but very useful day to day: a small distribution board or tie point for 3 and 5 poles, for extending cables such as turnout drive cables and the like.\nSimply, quickly and securely mounted...\nFeatures of the LoDi 3- and 5-way distribution board\nA simple 3- or 5-way distribution strip with solder pads For extending wiring Perfect as a tie point for turnout drives, lamps, track . . . Available in packs of ten\n1. The LoDi 3-way distribution board and its connections\nOut of our own long experience, and that of our partners who wire up customer layouts on site every day. Our small tie point for joining cables by solder pad.\nAny kind of cable can be quickly unsoldered and soldered back on . . .\nThe board has a screw hole so it can simply be mounted. It can also be glued, depending on the mounting situation on your layout.\n LoDi-Verteiler 3-fach — The LoDi 3-way distribution board and its connections\n LoDi-Verteiler 3-fach — The LoDi 3-way distribution board and its connections\n2. Technical data\nThe LoDi distribution board comes in several versions (3-way, 5-way, 7-way and 11-way). Each individual line is rated for a maximum of 5 amperes, regardless of the number of connections.\n0–60 volt AC or DC input\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length: 20 mm\nWidth 16 mm\nHeight 1.5 mm at its highest point\nWeight 1 g\n LoDi-Verteiler 3-fach — Technical data\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are glad to help.","The LoDi 3- and 5-way distribution board","Features of the LoDi 3- and 5-way distribution board","1. The LoDi 3-way distribution board and its connections","con-09-gleisbild","lodi-con/track-plans","Building track plans","Building a track diagram in the LoDi-Con and switching from it.",[274,275,276,277,278,279,280,281,282,283,284,285,284,286],"The track diagram shows an area — a station, for instance — as a grid of track elements. It lets you throw turnouts and set signals. Occupancy is marked by colouring the track in question. Where local RailCom detectors are active, the address of the locomotive can be shown in a block field, and the locomotive can be taken onto the throttle from there.\nAny number of track diagrams can be created. A diagram can be between 10x8 and 50x50 elements in size. The visible area covers 10x8 elements; in larger diagrams it can be moved with your finger.\nOpening a track diagram\n lodi-con-09-gleisbild-01-189b86.png\nTrack diagrams are opened from the accessory screen, where they are always shown ahead of every other accessory. Clicking the icon of a diagram opens it.\n lodi-con-09-gleisbild-02-cb6895.png\n lodi-con-09-gleisbild-03-cc8f04.png\nThe track diagram is drawn as a grid. Where occupancy detectors are assigned, the tracks turn blue when occupied. Where RailCom-capable feedback modules are fitted, an occupied block shows the train name, provided the locomotive is RailCom-capable too.\nTurnout elements that carry an accessory are drawn in their current state. Clicking a turnout element throws that turnout.\nRailCom-capable locomotives can be selected by clicking the block directly. If the locomotive is not registered with the command station yet, it is created automatically.\nSwitching between track diagram and locomotive is possible straight from the two red buttons: accessories (bottom left) and locomotive screen (bottom right).\nCreating a track diagram\nCreating one from the accessory screen\n1. Select the red accessory icon at the bottom left.\n2. Press the '+' key at the top right.\n3. In the menu that appears, choose \"Track diagram\"\n4. After you are asked for a name for the diagram, it is created.\nCreating one from the article database\n1. In the main menu, choose Article database.\n2. Select the \"[New]\" entry.\n3. In the menu that appears, choose \"Track diagram\"\n4. After you are asked for a name for the diagram, it is created.\nEditing a track diagram\nAfter a track diagram is created, edit mode is already active. It can also be activated from the accessory screen by long-pressing the icon of the diagram.\n lodi-con-09-gleisbild-04-503871.png\nName\nThe name of the track diagram can be changed under this entry. It may be up to 32 characters long.\nWidth\nThe width of the track diagram can be set between 10 and 50 columns. Elements outside that range are not shown.\nHeight\nThe height of the track diagram can be set between 8 and 50 rows. Elements outside that range are not shown.\n[Edit]\nThe edit entry lets you add, change and delete track elements. For a better overview the diagram is drawn with a grid. The current cursor position is shown at the top right. The cursor can be moved by tapping the touch screen as well as with the rotary control.\nPressing the rotary control, or tapping, either creates a new element or starts editing an existing one.\n lodi-con-09-gleisbild-05-0c8a76.png\nClicking an empty element brings up a selection screen offering every permitted element type. Clicking one of them selects that type and the display returns to the track diagram, where the orientation can be changed with the rotary control. Pressing the control places the element.\n lodi-con-09-gleisbild-06-460580.png\n lodi-con-09-gleisbild-07-747f1d.png\nClicking an existing element brings up its settings menu.\nType: change the element type and its orientation. Accessory: choose the accessory to be switched when the element is clicked. Turnout streets can be given here as well. Feedback: assign a feedback module to the element. Every element can respond to feedback with a change of colour, which is how occupied track is shown. The block element additionally shows the locomotive name when the occupancy detector is RailCom-capable.\n lodi-con-09-gleisbild-08-66fcd5.png\n[Insert column]\n lodi-con-09-gleisbild-09-9233fc.png\nThis menu entry inserts columns into the track diagram. The green line marks the insertion point; it can be moved with the rotary knob or by tapping the diagram. After confirming with the knob, every element to the right of the green line moves one position to the right and the diagram grows by one column.\n lodi-con-09-gleisbild-10-1ca069.png\n[Delete column]\n lodi-con-09-gleisbild-11-c9f1b4.png\nThis menu entry deletes columns from the track diagram. The red line marks the deletion point; it can be moved with the rotary knob or by tapping the diagram. After confirming with the knob, every element coloured red is deleted and every element to the right of the line moves one position to the left. The diagram shrinks by one column.\n lodi-con-09-gleisbild-12-0e6b1a.png\n[Insert row]\n lodi-con-09-gleisbild-13-ceeddf.png\nThis menu entry inserts rows into the track diagram. The green line marks the insertion point; it can be moved with the rotary knob or by tapping the diagram. After confirming with the knob, every element below the green line moves one position down and the diagram grows by one row.\n lodi-con-09-gleisbild-14-87b893.png\n[Delete column]\n lodi-con-09-gleisbild-15-2f5c26.png\nThis menu entry deletes rows from the track diagram. The red line marks the deletion point; it can be moved with the rotary knob or by tapping the diagram. After confirming with the knob, every element coloured red is deleted and every element below the line moves one position up. The diagram shrinks by one row.\n lodi-con-09-gleisbild-16-05152e.png\n[Delete track diagram]\nThis menu entry deletes a track diagram.\n lodi-con-09-gleisbild-17-81db18.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","Opening a track diagram","Creating a track diagram","Creating one from the accessory screen","Creating one from the article database","Editing a track diagram","Name","Width","Height","[Edit]","[Insert column]","[Delete column]","[Insert row]","[Delete track diagram]","lodi-verteiler-2-9","hardware/accessories/lodi-verteiler-2-9","LoDi-Verteiler 2*9","Wir stellen vor:",[293,294,217]," LoDi-Verteiler 29\nIntroducing:\nThe LoDi distribution board series.\nOn the layout, and in other extra-low-voltage applications, you regularly need to split a line quickly and simply — a common return, say, or the positive pole of a model railway transformer that then feeds house lighting, and so on . . .\nThat is what we created the LoDi distribution board series for.\nWith these modules you can distribute the cables easily over screw terminals.\nPlease note: always work with ferrules where you can.\nYou will find those and the matching model railway cable in our LoDi shop shortly.\nFeatures of the LoDi distribution board 29\nA simple distribution strip with screw terminals, maximum 10 amperes at a maximum of 60 volts. Indication for AC and DC, and of which side carries the positive pole. Passes the incoming voltage on to the next board.\n1. The LoDi distribution board 29, its connections and LEDs\nThe LoDi distribution board has 29 output terminals. It is fed from the left-hand side, where there are two LEDs, one above and one below. Whichever voltage you want to distribute — AC or DC — the board shows it.\nYou can also see which side carries the positive pole, because the LED on that side lights green.\nWith AC and with a digital signal, both LEDs are lit.\n LoDi-Verteiler 29 — The LoDi distribution board 29, its connections and LEDs\n2. Technical data\nThe LoDi distribution board 29 carries a total of 10 amperes.\n0–60 volt AC or DC input\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length: 65 mm\nWidth 25 mm\nHeight 13 mm at its highest point\nWeight 15 g\n LoDi-Verteiler 29 — Technical data\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are glad to help.","Features of the LoDi distribution board 2*9","1. The LoDi distribution board 2*9, its connections and LEDs","con-08-geraeteeinstellungen","lodi-con/device-settings","Device settings","Display, language, network and everything else the LoDi-Con lets you set.",[301,302,303,237,220,304]," lodi-con-08-geraeteeinstellungen-01-e02b50.png\nA number of things can be adjusted on the LoDi-Con, namely:\nChange language Screen Time Driving Club mode Perform a factory reset\nThe menu speaks for itself, so we only go into the most important settings.\nScreen settings\n lodi-con-08-geraeteeinstellungen-02-e2e292.png\n lodi-con-08-geraeteeinstellungen-03-6d9760.png\n lodi-con-08-geraeteeinstellungen-04-232dbe.png\n lodi-con-08-geraeteeinstellungen-05-1ef664.png\nThe screen settings let you change the following:\n\"Orientation\" = auto-rotation on or off \"Brightness\" = maximum brightness \"Dim brightness\" = minimum brightness \"Dim time\" = how long until the display dims \"Switch-off time\" = when the LoDi-Con switches off \"Always on while charging\" = LoDi-Con A only; while the USB-C plug is in, the LoDi-Con will not switch off \"Knob brightness\" = sets the maximum brightness of the rotary control.\nTime\n lodi-con-08-geraeteeinstellungen-06-aa2ebe.png\n lodi-con-08-geraeteeinstellungen-07-28bbc3.png\n lodi-con-08-geraeteeinstellungen-08-379627.png\nThe LoDi-Con can show you the real time; where an internet connection is available it fetches it from a time server. You can set the time zone.\nDo you have a LoDi-Shift-Commander with room lighting control running? Then you can have the model time shown. To do that, tick \"Model time\" in the time mode.\nIf you would rather have no clock shown, set the tick to \"Off\".\nDriving\n lodi-con-08-geraeteeinstellungen-09-708a57.png\n lodi-con-08-geraeteeinstellungen-10-609adc.png\n\n lodi-con-08-geraeteeinstellungen-12-cd3a22.png\n lodi-con-08-geraeteeinstellungen-13-cb74c5.png\n lodi-con-08-geraeteeinstellungen-14-ec71ed.png\n lodi-con-08-geraeteeinstellungen-15-a13cc3.png\n\"Control mode\" and \"Driving mode\" are defaults for every newly created locomotive.\nThe control mode switches the rotary knob from AC mode to DC mode (further variants will follow).\nIn AC mode the speed rises clockwise and falls anticlockwise. To change direction the control has to be pressed once (a stop command, if the locomotive is still\nmoving). Press the knob once more and the direction changes. The direction can also be changed straight from the touch display.\nIn DC mode the control has to be turned to the left to run backwards. The direction is still changed by pressing the knob.\nThe driving mode can be switched from \"Normal\" to \"Shunting\".\nThat means that in shunting mode the control only turns back as far as speed step 1, and the locomotive only stops when the knob is pressed.\nClub mode\n lodi-con-08-geraeteeinstellungen-16-1fc20e.png\nClub mode is extensive enough that we gave it a section of its own; click here for it.\nOnline database\n lodi-con-08-geraeteeinstellungen-17-73aa7b.png\nThe online database is described in the separate chapter Online database.\nPerform a factory reset\n lodi-con-08-geraeteeinstellungen-18-bdce09.png\n lodi-con-08-geraeteeinstellungen-19-c4aab8.png\nThe last entry in the menu is \"Factory reset\".\nThis puts the LoDi-Con back into the state it was delivered in.\nCAUTION!!!\nEvery piece of data is deleted!\nBefore deleting, you can make a backup with the LoDi-ProgrammerFX; it can easily be transferred back into a LoDi-Con later.\n lodi-con-08-geraeteeinstellungen-20-678b93.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","Screen settings","Time","Driving","Perform a factory reset","lodi-verteiler-1-9","hardware/accessories/lodi-verteiler-1-9","LoDi-Verteiler 1*9","Wir stellen vor:",[311,312,217]," LoDi-Verteiler 19\nIntroducing:\nThe LoDi distribution board series.\nOn the layout, and in other extra-low-voltage applications, you regularly need to split a line quickly and simply — a common return, say, or the positive pole of a model railway transformer that then feeds house lighting, and so on . . .\nThat is what we created the LoDi distribution board series for.\nWith these modules you can distribute the cables easily over screw terminals.\nPlease note: always work with ferrules where you can.\nYou will find those and the matching model railway cable in our LoDi shop shortly.\nFeatures of the LoDi distribution board 19\nA simple distribution strip with screw terminals, maximum 10 amperes at a maximum of 60 volts.\n1. The LoDi distribution board and its connections\nThe LoDi distribution board 19 has nine terminals wired through. Only one conductor can be distributed per output. On the board each output is marked with a 1.\n LoDi-Verteiler 19 — The LoDi distribution board and its connections\n2. Technical data\nThe LoDi distribution board 19 carries a total of 10 amperes.\n0–60 volt AC or DC input\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length: 59 mm\nWidth 15 mm\nHeight 13 mm at its highest point\nWeight 7 g\n LoDi-Verteiler 19 — Technical data\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are glad to help.","Features of the LoDi distribution board 1*9","1. The LoDi distribution board and its connections","sw-lodi-dmx-interface","software/lodi-dmx-interface","LoDi-DMX-Interface","The LoDi-DMX-Interface is an Art-Net compliant network interface with 512 DMX channels which can be run over cable or Wi-Fi.",[319,320,321,322,323,324],"Settings and firmware update\nThe LoDi-DMX-Interface is an Art-Net compliant network interface with 512 DMX channels which can be run over cable or Wi-Fi.\nStandard DMX devices can be connected directly at the output through RJ45.\n1. The overview\n LoDi-DMX-Interface — Settings and firmware update\nThe device editor of the LoDi-DMX-Interface contains the following areas:\nDMX settings: the bus length is set here Network settings: setting the IP address Firmware: updating the LoDi-DMX-Interface's firmware\nNetwork settings\nSee the network settings in the section Commissioning LoDi devices.\n2. The DMX settings\nNode: the Art-Net universe is entered here. If you only have one LoDi-DMX-Interface in use, this figure stays at \"0\". Bus length: the available channels to be sent are entered here. By default all 512 are used. Status: if this box is ticked, the LoDi-DMX-Interface will start up again with the last state on the channels.\n3. Controlling DMX channels\nIn the LoDi-ProgrammerFX we have created a way of quickly controlling channels on the DMX net.\nClick Steuerung at the top of the Programmer; the LoDi-DMX-Interface is shown there under \"Schalten\". Click it and a new dialogue opens with which you can now test all the DMX channels with the slider.\n LoDi-DMX-Interface — Controlling DMX channels\n LoDi-DMX-Interface — Controlling DMX channels\n4. Firmware update\nFrom the LoDi-ProgrammerFX 2025.01 onwards there is an online updater for the devices' firmware. We show you here how to install firmware.\n LoDi-DMX-Interface — Firmware update\nFirst click the device that is to be updated, in this case the LoDi-DMX-Interface (1). A new menu item now appears in the bar at the top: \"Online-Update\".\nThe update dialogue opens and the server automatically searches for available updates.\nThen select the newest version shown (3) and click Install update (4). In the next dialogue the currently installed version and the version to be installed are shown to you once more.\nConfirm the process by clicking OK to start the update. Once the update is finished, the device restarts automatically. If the current version is already installed, the LoDi-ProgrammerFX will say so.\n5. Resetting the device\nThe LoDi-DMX-Interface can be reset to its factory settings if, for instance, the IP address has been changed and DHCP is disabled in the device. Or if you generally want to put the device back into its as-delivered state, that is possible with the \"Prog. IP\" button on the LoDi-DMX-Interface. Press the button for 11 seconds; the device restarts and is then in its as-delivered state.\n LoDi-DMX-Interface — Resetting the device\nAny questions still open?\nWould you simply like to ask us in person?\nOr go to our forum, where experienced users are glad to help you further.\ninfo@lokstoredigital.de","Settings and firmware update","Network settings","2. The DMX settings","3. Controlling DMX channels","4. Firmware update","5. Resetting the device","con-07-rueckmelder","lodi-con/feedback","Showing feedback","Using the feedback monitor to see occupied sections right on the handheld.",[],"Since the LoDi-Con can connect to feedback stations such as the LoDi-S88-Commander (LX), you can have the feedback modules shown on it. That is especially handy when you have to test something on or under the layout and would rather not carry a laptop along.\n lodi-con-07-rueckmelder-01-a63193.png\n lodi-con-07-rueckmelder-02-2f5ce0.png\nTo show the feedback modules, tap the command stations at the top left again.\nYou are shown the overview of command stations.\nNext tap the LoDi-S88-Commander LX.\nThe connection status is shown there. At the top there is now an entry called \"Feedback\"; select it.\n lodi-con-07-rueckmelder-03-9fa85e.png\n lodi-con-07-rueckmelder-04-a57bab.png\nYou are now in the feedback overview, where every feedback module is shown. The LoDi-Con reads the data from the LoDi-S88-Commander LX.\nNames given to modules are shown as well.\n lodi-con-07-rueckmelder-05-494f3a.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","lodi-verteiler-2-3","hardware/accessories/lodi-verteiler-2-3","LoDi-Verteiler 2*3",[336,312,217]," LoDi-Verteiler 23\nIntroducing:\nThe LoDi distribution board series.\nOn the layout, and in other extra-low-voltage applications, you regularly need to split a line quickly and simply — a common return, say, or the positive pole of a model railway transformer that then feeds house lighting, and so on . . .\nThat is what we created the LoDi distribution board series for.\nWith these modules you can distribute the cables easily over screw terminals.\nPlease note: always work with ferrules where you can.\nYou will find those and the matching model railway cable in our LoDi shop shortly.\nFeatures of the LoDi distribution board 23\nA simple distribution strip with screw terminals, maximum 10 amperes at a maximum of 60 volts.\n1. The LoDi distribution board and its connections\nThe LoDi distribution board 23 has nine terminals wired through. Only one conductor can be distributed per output. On the board each output is marked with a 1.\n LoDi-Verteiler 23 — The LoDi distribution board and its connections\n2. Technical data\nThe LoDi distribution board 23 carries a total of 10 amperes.\n0–60 volt AC or DC input\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length: 35 mm\nWidth 25 mm\nHeight 13 mm at its highest point\nWeight 10 g\n LoDi-Verteiler 23 — Technical data\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are glad to help.","Features of the LoDi distribution board 2*3","mt-43586-dosto","hardware/lighting/mt-43586-dosto","MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer","The head lighting of the double-deck coach from Märklin® and Trix® in traffic red as well as in white/blue is normally switched between yellow and red through a pickup changeover.",[343,344,345,346,347,348]," MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer\nThe head lighting of the double-deck coach from Märklin® and Trix® in traffic red as well as in white/blue is normally switched between yellow and red through a pickup changeover.\nFor the digital solution we have developed a 21-pin adapter board, which we call the MT-43586 V2 Dosto.\nYou can now decide for yourself which decoder is to be fitted to the board.\nWith the MT-43586 V2 Dosto adapter board we also offer cab lighting as well as further AUX outputs. The coach's interior lighting can be switched on and off directly through the plugged-in decoder.\nFeatures of the MT-43586 V2 Dosto\nSimple installation, optimised for double-deck coaches A precisely fitting design Cab lighting and provision for a high beam A connection for interior lighting The 21-pin MTC standard, for connecting any decoder\n1. The LoDi MT-43586 V2 boards\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — The LoDi MT-43586 V2 boards\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — The LoDi MT-43586 V2 boards\nThe Lokstoredigital MT-43586 V2 adapter board has several solder pads at which you can connect the existing lighting and the wheel or centre-rail pickups.\nIn the picture you see the connection order for the MT-43586 adapter board.\n(Clicking on the pictures enlarges them.)\nNo further resistors are needed for the LED lighting; all the necessary series resistors are already on the MT-43586 V2.\nThe MT-43586 fits the following Märklin® coaches:\n43586, 43583, 43599, 00763, 43475, 43476, 43570, 43575, 43470, 43576, 43583, 26533, 43573, 78478, 78379.\nThe MT-43586 fits the following Trix® coaches:\n24324, 24508, 21246.\nIf your coach's article number is not listed here, do get in touch with us.\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — The LoDi MT-43586 V2 boards\n2. Installing the MT-43856 V2 adapter board\nIf you can solder and have already lit one coach or another, the conversion should come easily to you. If you are a beginner, however, or do not feel up to a conversion, do get in touch with our partners.\nThey will be glad to make you an individual offer.\nYou can carry out the conversion yourself?\nThen let us begin.\nYou will need:\nA soldering iron with a fine tip, and solder A flat screwdriver A small, fine pair of side cutters as well as, if available, a wire stripper for fine cores. Superglue, to fix the boards lightly in place.\nYou can start the pictures as a small slideshow and enlarge them for a detailed view.\nWe will guide you step by step through a successful coach conversion with this description. If you notice while converting that steps or information are missing, do get in touch with us or visit our forum.\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — Installing the MT-43856 V2 adapter board\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — Installing the MT-43856 V2 adapter board\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — Installing the MT-43856 V2 adapter board\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — Installing the MT-43856 V2 adapter board\nFirst you have to open the body of the double-deck coach. That is very simple and is explained here in a few steps: please pull off the black rear bellows frame. As a rule it unclips very easily.\nAfter that the front buffers and the whole buffer beam also have to be removed.\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — Installing the MT-43856 V2 adapter board\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — Installing the MT-43856 V2 adapter board\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — Installing the MT-43856 V2 adapter board\nThe coach roof can now be lifted off already, but is still held by the side walls. These can simply be eased apart a little and the coach roof taken off.\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — Installing the MT-43856 V2 adapter board\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — Installing the MT-43856 V2 adapter board\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — Installing the MT-43856 V2 adapter board\nIn the next step the train destination display has to be removed from the old board. A small flat screwdriver is well suited to that.\nYou can start on one side of the display and then work on the other. That should have loosened the display enough for you to simply pull it off.\nNow remove the old board and unsolder the wires directly at the board.\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — Installing the MT-43856 V2 adapter board\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — Installing the MT-43856 V2 adapter board\nTwo extensions for the LED guide are also supplied with the MT-43856 board.\nThese now have to be plugged into the LED display you took out.\nAfter that you can plug the display into the MT-43856.\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — Installing the MT-43856 V2 adapter board\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — Installing the MT-43856 V2 adapter board\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — Installing the MT-43856 V2 adapter board\nAs delivered, the coach has a pickup changeover on the rear bogie.\nThat is no longer needed and can be removed, which also reduces the rolling resistance.\nRemove the changeover from the bogie entirely.\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — Installing the MT-43856 V2 adapter board\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — Installing the MT-43856 V2 adapter board\nNow check whether the disconnected wires are still usable. If they can no longer be used because of the heat, you should snip them back a little, strip them again and re-tin them.\nThe MT-43856 board has built-in cab lighting. You have to cut the opening for it out of the coach wall with a small cutter or fine side cutters; a small piece in the middle is enough.\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — Installing the MT-43856 V2 adapter board\nOn the coach wall against which the decoder sits there are 2 guide pins, which we have marked in red in the picture here.\nThese are not provided for on the MT-43856.\nYou can simply snip them off with small side cutters or mill them away with a small cutter.\nCAREFUL!\nPlease do not snip off the retaining jaws, as they are still needed to hold the MT-43856 against the coach wall. You can use a drop of superglue or double-sided adhesive tape to fix the board.\nTake care to let the superglue outgas for a few hours before you fit the coach roof.\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — Installing the MT-43856 V2 adapter board\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — Installing the MT-43856 V2 adapter board\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — Installing the MT-43856 V2 adapter board\nYou can now solder the wires to the board. It is advisable to do this with the board unclipped, since otherwise you would have to solder very close to the coach floor.\nAfter soldering, the board can be clipped into the coach or, as explained above, briefly fixed with superglue.\nNow plug a decoder of your choice onto the 21-pin MTC connector and reassemble the coach in the reverse order to the way you took it apart.\nMärklin make several versions of the front lighting. If you have yellow/red lighting fitted, it is switched through \"+\". In that case the wires have to be connected as follows: orange = GND\nGrey = W+ (yellow LED)\nYellow = R+ (red LED)\nIf the original LED board is white/red, they have to be switched through −, and the wires then have to be connected to the following pads: orange = U+\nGrey = W− (white LED)\nYellow = R− (red LED)\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — Installing the MT-43856 V2 adapter board\n3. Configuring the outputs\nWith an unprogrammed function decoder such as an ESU, the outputs are configured as follows: F0 = yellow/red light, F1 = destination display lighting, F2 = cab lighting, F3 = the decoder's output for interior lighting, F4 = provision for a separate high beam (a resistor needed here is already on the board)\nThe function mapping can of course be assigned freely. For how to configure your decoder, please refer to your decoder manufacturer's description.\n4. Connecting interior lighting\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — Connecting interior lighting\nIf you still have interior lighting fitted in the double-deck coach, you can connect it to the F3 connection of the\nMT-43586 V2 board.\nThat output runs straight from the decoder's function output to the F3 pad. It is not amplified further, so if you want to switch the whole train with it, you should check in your decoder's manual how much load it can switch.\nWith a current-carrying coupling it is possible to loop the purple and brown poles through to further coaches.\nDo watch your decoder's maximum output when doing so.\n5. Technical data\nDimensions: length 24.5 mm, height 23.5 mm, thickness 24 mm with the LED display. Weight: 11 grams. The MT-43586 V2 has a standard 21-pin MTC interface and can be fitted with all common locomotive or function decoders with a 21-pin interface.\n MT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer — Technical data\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are glad to help.","Features of the MT-43586 V2 Dosto","1. The LoDi MT-43586 V2 boards","2. Installing the MT-43856 V2 adapter board","3. Configuring the outputs","4. Connecting interior lighting","5. Technical data","sw-lodi-con","software/lodi-con","LoDi-Con","The LoDi-ProgrammerFX lets you transfer your own pictures into the LoDi-Con as well as create a backup of the",[355,356,357,358,359,360,361,362,363,364],"The LoDi-Con in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nThe LoDi-ProgrammerFX lets you transfer your own pictures into the LoDi-Con as well as create a backup of the\nLoDi-Con and load it back in later. The Programmer can copy locomotives to other command stations or take a screenshot of the LoDi-Con. We show you how that works in the text below.\n!!! Careful: this function is only available in \"expert mode\" and will be dropped with the online database. You can enable expert mode in the toolbar at the top of the LoDi-ProgrammerFX. !!!\n LoDi-Con — The LoDi-Con in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\n1. The overview\nOnce you have integrated the LoDi-Con into your network, you can display the LoDi-Con through the LoDi-ProgrammerFX from version 2022.12 onwards. Download and install the LoDi-ProgrammerFX for that.\n LoDi-Con — The overview\nWhen you now open the LoDi-ProgrammerFX, it will automatically search the network for compatible LoDi devices.\nIf you have other LoDi components, they are shown in the tree on the left.\nIn this example, though, we are working with a single LoDi-Con. Several LoDi-Cons can be shown as well.\nClicking the binoculars searches the network again.\n(The LoDi-Con has to be on the same network as the computer running the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.)\nClicking the \"LoDi-Con\" icon now opens the overview in the right-hand part of the Programmer.\n LoDi-Con — The overview\nIf the LoDi-Con is switched off and no longer reachable on the network, the device \"LoDi-Con\" is shown highlighted in red in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX. In that case you can keep editing the database. Once you have finished editing the database, switch the LoDi-Con back on and the background turns white again. The LoDi-Con is now connected to the LoDi-ProgrammerFX again.\n LoDi-Con — The overview\nModule. In this overview you can see the network settings. They cannot however be changed from the LoDi-ProgrammerFX, only on the LoDi-Con itself. You can view the settings here, though. Device database. Here the LoDi-Con's current database first has to be read in. On every \"Neu laden\", the LoDi-ProgrammerFX will create a backup with the date. Screenshot. In this menu item you can take a screenshot of the LoDi-Con and save it wherever you like.\n2. Reading out the database and selecting a command station\n LoDi-Con — Reading out the database and selecting a command station\nAs mentioned above, the LoDi-Con's database first has to be transferred into the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\nTo do that, click \"Neu laden\" (1)\nThe LoDi-ProgrammerFX creates a backup on every \"Neu laden\", so no data is lost if you should click the wrong thing.\n LoDi-Con — Reading out the database and selecting a command station\nOnce the database has been transferred successfully, the current date and time are shown at \"Geändert\".\nFrom now on the command stations stored in the LoDi-Con are available in the tree on the left under \"Zentralen\".\nA note for ESU ECoS users: locomotives loaded into the LoDi-Con through the ECoS are only shown temporarily; the locomotive list is not shown in the LoDi-Con's database, so locomotives have to be edited on the command station directly.\nNow click \"Zentralen\" (1) on the left under \"LoDi-Con\". A list of all the command stations created in the LoDi-Con now opens on the right-hand side. (The locomotives are stored in the command stations.)\n LoDi-Con — Reading out the database and selecting a command station\nCommand stations are already set up in the LoDi-Con by default. Even if you have several layouts, or take the LoDi-Con along to your club or to friends, all objects are always stored in the command station in question. That way locomotives of different gauges do not get in each other's way, for instance. Every command station is to be seen as a \"universe\" of its own. It is of course possible to copy locomotives from one command station to another.\n LoDi-Con — Reading out the database and selecting a command station\nIn our example we now see a LoDi-Con with various command stations.\nClicking an entry opens the connection window below, in which the stored IP address can be checked and changed if need be.\nThe \"Lokomotiven\" tab shows you straight away whether there are locomotives stored in the command station.\n LoDi-Con — Reading out the database and selecting a command station\nHave command stations in the list you no longer need? No problem — delete the command station higher up in the menu under \"Zentrale löschen\" or by right-clicking.\nCareful! All objects such as locomotives and accessories in the command station are deleted by this action. But do not worry: if a loaded backup is available, objects can be restored from the backup.\n3. Editing and creating locomotives\n!!! Editing locomotives is only possible in expert mode, since it is still in beta !!!\nTo be able to edit locomotives now, double-click the command station (1) whose locomotives are to be shown. The locomotives stored in it are then listed in the tree (2) under the \"Zentrale\".\n LoDi-Con — Editing and creating locomotives\nClicking the list of locomotives on the left-hand side in the tree opens a new tab in which the locomotives are now shown.\n LoDi-Con — Editing and creating locomotives\nNow click a locomotive to be edited, or add a new locomotive with the \"+ Neue Lok hinzufügen\" button at the top. An input area for a new locomotive opens in the lower part.\n LoDi-Con — Editing and creating locomotives\n LoDi-Con — Editing and creating locomotives\nFirst we give the locomotive a new name and enter the parameters such as address, data format,\nspeedometer and top speed.\nThe LoDi-ProgrammerFX makes it very easy to assign locomotive pictures or upload them to the device.\nThe LoDi-Con can handle .png and .jpeg.\nNow click \"Bild hinzufügen\" below\nThe file picker opens. Now select the picture you want to use.\nPlease also take care that the picture's file name is no longer than 16 characters.\nA picture size of up to 190 × 48 pixels is possible.\nIf you choose a larger picture, the ProgrammerFX will adapt it as best it can; of course it is better to stay in the right format from the start.\nWe offer a short description here of how to prepare locomotive pictures correctly for the LoDi-Con.\nGo here for: creating your own pictures\n LoDi-Con — Editing and creating locomotives\n LoDi-Con — Editing and creating locomotives\nThe F keys can now be assigned directly from the LoDi-ProgrammerFX as well. Click the F key \"Aktiv\" that is to be used. Double-clicking the type opens a drop-down field with all the possible function keys available. (This list is being extended continuously — an icon missing? Let us know.)\n LoDi-Con — Editing and creating locomotives\n LoDi-Con — Editing and creating locomotives\n LoDi-Con — Editing and creating locomotives\nClicking \"Anwenden\" enters the locomotive into the database,\nbut it still has to be transferred back to the LoDi-Con.\nScroll to point 6 for that.\n5. Copying locomotives and command stations\nThe function for copying locomotives and command stations is still in progress.\nFrom version 2.2023 onwards, locomotives can already be copied to another command station in the LoDi-Con; that function is also available on the LoDi-Con itself.\n6. Loading the database back onto the LoDi-Con after editing\nOnce you have changed data in the database, it has to be transferred back to the LoDi-Con. First click the LoDi-Con at the top left (1). You now see the database changes marked in red. Clicking \"Senden\" (3) now sends the database to the LoDi-Con. As a rule that only takes a few seconds.\n LoDi-Con — Loading the database back onto the LoDi-Con after editing\n LoDi-Con — Loading the database back onto the LoDi-Con after editing\nThe LoDi-Con now shows that a new database is to be written. You still have to confirm that with \"Ja\". The LoDi-Con now restarts.\nIf you click \"Nein\", the database is discarded and you then have to repeat the process in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\n7. Backup from the database\nIn progress . . .\n8. Overview of the LoDi-Con description\n1. Switching on for the first time / connecting to Wi-Fi\n2. Setting up command stations\n3. Setting up and driving a locomotive\n4. Multiple traction\n5. Switching turnouts and signals\n6. Creating routes\n7. Showing feedback modules\n8. Device settings\n9. CV programming\n10. Club mode\n11. Firmware update\n12. Properties in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\n13. Creating your own locomotive pictures\n14. Technical data\n LoDi-Con — Properties in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\n9. Download the LoDi-Con in the ProgrammerFX as a PDF\nHere you can download the summary of \"The LoDi-Con in the ProgrammerFX\" as a PDF.\nLoDi-Con in the ProgrammerFX Lokstoredigita PDF, 1.7 MB\n LoDi-Con — Download the LoDi-Con in the ProgrammerFX as a PDF\nAny questions still open?\nWould you simply like to ask us in person?\nOr go to our forum, where experienced users are glad to help you further.\n[info@lokstoredigital.de","The LoDi-Con in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX","1. The overview","2. Reading out the database and selecting a command station","3. Editing and creating locomotives","5. Copying locomotives and command stations","6. Loading the database back onto the LoDi-Con after editing","7. Backup from the database","8. Overview of the LoDi-Con description","12. Properties in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX","9. Download the LoDi-Con in the ProgrammerFX as a PDF","con-06-fahrstrassen","lodi-con/routes","Routes","Combining several switching commands into one route and triggering it at the push of a button.",[],"The LoDi-Con lets you define and call up routes. Waiting times, signals and other objects can be part of them.\n lodi-con-06-fahrstrassen-01-eebc3e.png\n lodi-con-06-fahrstrassen-02-aa8ff8.png\n lodi-con-06-fahrstrassen-03-58f2e8.png\n lodi-con-06-fahrstrassen-04-e86f80.png\nTo create a route you first have to go back to the turnout overview by tapping at the bottom left, or through:\nSettings > Article database.\nNow tap \"Turnout street\" to create a new one.\nFirst you have to give the turnout street a name.\n lodi-con-06-fahrstrassen-05-b00f97.png\n lodi-con-06-fahrstrassen-06-ed75d3.png\n lodi-con-06-fahrstrassen-07-c94345.png\nOnce you have entered a name and confirmed it, you reach the properties of the turnout street.\nHere — as with every other object — you can change the name or delete the object altogether.\nNow swipe down to the \"Waypoint\" entry.\n lodi-con-06-fahrstrassen-08-1d6807.png\n lodi-con-06-fahrstrassen-09-5cd3b0.png\n lodi-con-06-fahrstrassen-10-fbc2ca.png\n lodi-con-06-fahrstrassen-11-948363.png\n lodi-con-06-fahrstrassen-12-0afe24.png\nWe start with a signal: select it and set the target state for it.\nThen tap \"Add\" again. Now choose \"Waiting time\", for instance, to delay what follows.\n(A waiting time can last between 100 ms and 20 seconds, and several waiting times can be set one after another.)\nNow add any further objects to be switched, until your route is set the way you want it. The route can be tested straight away in the \"properties\" and corrected where needed.\n lodi-con-06-fahrstrassen-13-4d8b47.png\n lodi-con-06-fahrstrassen-14-a9c4c9.png\nThe turnout street \"Track 1\" has now been created. Tapping it starts the sequence; a blue dot shrinking in size shows the time passing. The turnout street should now be set.\n lodi-con-06-fahrstrassen-15-6fe3d1.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","lodi-ksm","hardware/driving/lodi-ksm","LoDi-KSM","Reverse loop module with automatic or manual control, RailCom capable, for scales Z to G.",[377,378,379,380,381,382,383]," LoDi-KSM(-P)\nWhy does a layout need a reverse loop module?\nReverse loop modules are generally only needed on two-rail systems.\nThe reverse loop module switches a reverse loop over automatically.\nAs the picture shows, a reverse loop occurs when a train reverses or turns within a loop of track and the power feed crosses over as it rejoins the track.\nHere you can see the red line crossing the power over the blue line.\nThat is what is called a reverse loop.\nTo avoid the short circuit that would result, you need a special switch or relay that reverses the polarity of the track supply inside the loop.\nScroll down to see how the device is used.\n LoDi-KSM(-P) — Why does a layout need a reverse loop module?\nFeatures of the LoDi-KSM(-P)\nA reverse loop module (KSM) for your digital layout, for scales from Z to G. The reverse loop module is independent of the track format. Our KSM is invisible to feedback modules, which means your detector does not report \"occupied\" just because the reverse loop module is connected to it. Only the locomotive triggers an occupancy report, as usual. The KSM is fully RailCom capable. The locomotive's RailCom data on channels 1 and 2 is returned through the KSM section itself. You can switch between automatic and manual mode; for that you need an ordinary turnout output on your decoder or LoDi-Operator. Our modules support the LoDi-KSM(-P) with LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC\n1. The LoDi-KSM(-P) and its connections\n LoDi-KSM(-P) — The LoDi-KSM(-P) and its connections\n(1): the track cable coming from the booster or command station connects here. (2): the reverse loop — the section of track inside the loop — connects here. (3): for manual operation through an accessory decoder.\n2. Wiring in detail\nHere you can see how it is wired to a LoDi-Booster.\nAny common command station and any manufacturer's booster can be connected to the LoDi-KSM(-P). The module works entirely on its own.\n LoDi-KSM(-P) — Wiring in detail\nThis example runs the LoDi-KSM(-P) through an occupancy detector.\nThat is what you need if you want your reverse loops reported back as occupied.\nOccupancy detectors from any manufacturer can be connected to the LoDi-KSM(-P).\n LoDi-KSM(-P) — Wiring in detail\n3. Connecting a LoDi-Operator or turnout decoder\n LoDi-KSM(-P) — Connecting a LoDi-Operator or turnout decoder\nAs mentioned already, the\nLoDi-KSM(-P) has a connection for a turnout decoder of any kind.\nThe next photo shows an example wired to a LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC.\nIf you want to switch the module's automation off, both DIP switches at (1) have to be set to \"off\". The module can then only be driven through the turnout terminals (Decoder IN).\nThe module has two operating modes that can be set:\nDIP switches ON / ON — the module runs in automatic mode, that is, it switches over as soon as it detects a load. Manual operation is available in automatic mode as well, which gives a second safeguard. DIP switches OFF / OFF — the LoDi-KSM works only through the Decoder IN terminal.\nLoDi-KSM(-P) modules from 6/2021 have a three-way DIP switch. DIP 1 turns the LED on and off; DIP 2 and 3 behave as described above.\n LoDi-KSM(-P) — Connecting a LoDi-Operator or turnout decoder\n4. Technical data\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length 8.9 cm\nWidth 10 cm\nHeight 3.5 cm\nWeight 83 grams\nAt the digital terminal, that is in digital operation, the decoder can be supplied with up to 26 volts.\nDo mind the specifications of your command station or booster manufacturer here.\nLoDi-KSM loadable by consumers with 3 amperes briefly and 2 amperes continuously\n LoDi-KSM(-P) — Technical data\nLoDi-KSM(-P) loadable by consumers with 6 amperes briefly and 4 amperes continuously\n LoDi-KSM(-P) — Technical data\n5. LoDi-KSM PDF download\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-KSM as a PDF.\nLoDi-KSM(-P) manual PDF, 1.0 MB — as of 27 January 2025","Why does a layout need a reverse loop module?","Features of the LoDi-KSM(-P)","1. The LoDi-KSM(-P) and its connections","2. Wiring in detail","3. Connecting a LoDi-Operator or turnout decoder","4. Technical data","5. LoDi-KSM PDF download","lodi-wd-diode","hardware/accessories/lodi-wd-diode","LoDi-WD-Diode","The LoDi-WD-Diode is an adapter board for wiring motor turnouts simply, so they can be connected to the LoDi-83-AC or the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC.",[390,391,392]," LoDi-WD-Diode\nThe LoDi-WD diode is an adapter board for wiring motor turnouts simply, to connect them to the LoDi-83-AC or LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC.\nFrom the three output leads the LoDi-WD diode rectifies the current so that a motor turnout drive can be driven directly with two wires.\n1. The LoDi-WD diode and its connections\n LoDi-WD-Diode — The LoDi-WD diode and its connections\nThe LoDi-WD diode connects directly to the LoDi-83-AC or LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC decoder.\nThen connect your motor drive to the two output terminals on the output carrying the LoDi-WD diode.\nAny motor and motor turnout can be driven this way; the run time of the output is set through the switching times in the LoDi-83-AC and LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC decoders.\n2. Wiring and installation examples\n LoDi-WD-Diode — Wiring and installation examples\n LoDi-WD-Diode — Wiring and installation examples\n LoDi-WD-Diode — Wiring and installation examples\n LoDi-WD-Diode — Wiring and installation examples\n LoDi-WD-Diode — Wiring and installation examples\n3. Technical data\nThe LoDi-WD diode carries a total of 2 amperes.\n0–60 volt AC or DC input\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length: 25 mm\nWidth 14 mm\nHeight 14 mm at its highest point\nWeight 7 g\n LoDi-WD-Diode — Technical data\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are glad to help.","1. The LoDi-WD diode and its connections","2. Wiring and installation examples","3. Technical data","lodi-wib-ice3-p","hardware/lighting/lodi-wib-ice3-p","LoDi-WiB ICE3-P","The ICE 3 is a truly impressive express train that delights younger model railwayers again and again. That is why we developed a board for this train that is very easy to fit.",[399,400,401,402,403,392],"LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE3-P\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P\nThe ICE 3 is a truly impressive express train that delights younger model railwayers again and again. That is why we developed a board for this train that is very easy to fit.\nWith the power car board you have light in the power car as well.\nIt offers a 21-pin MTC interface and can therefore be fitted with any 21-pin decoder you like.\nThe train can be run fully on a RailCom®-controlled layout.\nA changeover relay for the pickup changeover is provided for as an option, but is not needed on a computer-controlled model railway.\nFeatures of the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P as well as the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-3-P and -S\nSimple installation, optimised for vehicles with full RailCom capability. A precisely fitting design. The 21-pin MTC standard for connecting any decoder. Economical LED technology, perfectly lighting the PIKO® ICE 3.\nAn installation video from moba-tech\n \n1. The LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE3-P boards\nIn our shop you can choose between a complete set, individual LoDi-WiB ICE3-P boards for the compartment coaches, and the power car board LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-P.\nCompartment coach boards for the coaches as well as for the driving trailers.\nFront and rear view.\nYou can enlarge the pictures by clicking.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — The LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE3-P boards\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — The LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE3-P boards\nCAREFUL!\nOn the compartment coach boards there are 2 solder jumpers on the top of the board. They are open as delivered! You have to decide on one of the operating modes, since otherwise the board will not light.\nSJ1 = continuous operation; it is not switched through the decoder. SJ2 = used if you are using the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-P or -S. Here the decoder's AUX 3 will switch the train's interior lighting. (Careful: AUX 3 must not be an amplified channel; it has to be a TTL, that is a logic, output.)\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — CAREFUL!\nA power car board for the on-board restaurant.\nFront and rear view.\nYou can enlarge the pictures by clicking.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — CAREFUL!\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — CAREFUL!\n2. Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\nIf you can solder and have already lit one coach or another, the conversion should come easily to you. If you are a beginner, however, or do not feel up to a conversion, do get in touch with our partners.\nThey will be glad to make you an individual offer.\nYou can carry out the conversion yourself?\nThen let us begin.\nYou will need:\nA soldering iron with a fine tip, and solder, a cross-head screwdriver and a pair of tweezers, a small, fine pair of side cutters as well as, if available, a wire stripper for fine cores, Superglue, to fix the boards lightly in place.\nOne more word before we begin... Piko® make the ICE 3 in various versions. We noticed that the starter set versions in particular only pick up current in one driving trailer, and that the wires for passing current on to the power car were not fitted either.\nThese wires can simply be retrofitted.\nFor our conversion here we assume the three-rail version, on which all the wires are fitted.\nYou can start the pictures as a small slideshow and enlarge them for a detailed view.\nWe will guide you step by step through a successful coach conversion with this description. If you notice while converting that steps or information are missing, do get in touch with us or visit our forum.\nThe compartment coaches. Let us start with the compartment coaches. For practised hands these should be convertible in less than 10 minutes. You need the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P for the conversion.\nAlways keep this in mind when converting!\nIf you are also gluing figures in and/or working with superglue to fix things, do not fit the coach roofs back onto the coaches straight away.\nSuperglue needs at least 1–2 hours to outgas completely.\nClosing them too soon could otherwise lead to milky or tarnished glazing.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\nFirst unscrew the coach.\nOn the underside of the bogies there is a cross-head screw on the left and on the right (shown with the green arrow).\nIn the first step, remove these.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\nTurn the coach over and lift the roof off it. If it sticks a little, rock the roof carefully back and forth until the upper body comes free.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\nFive cores are carried from one side to the other through the current-carrying couplings.\nYou can now thread these out and cut them in the middle.\nThe current is carried from one side to the other across the board.\nThread all the wires back until they can be connected directly at the coupling.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\nFor easier handling we have developed dedicated holders for the boards. They can be fixed with a small drop of superglue if they should be too loose.\nTake care that this holder does not fit at the point on the coach roof where a pantograph is installed.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\nShorten the wires to about 6 cm, measured from the coupling, twist them and tin the ends.\nNow you can push the board's holder onto the coach and then clip the board into the holder.\nSince this coach has a pantograph, we can only fit the retaining clip on one side here; a small drop of superglue on the other side gives sufficient fixing.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\nNow tin the board's pads with solder and solder the wires according to their colour, as printed on the board, on both sides of the coach.\nAfter soldering, the wires are bent lengthwise over the board; that way they stay flexible with the coupling drawbar and do not break off at the solder point.\nNow reassemble the coach.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\nA buffer capacitor can be fitted to the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P for analogue or digital operation. The board already has the necessary charging electronics. In the middle of the board there are the solder connections for an electrolytic capacitor. Capacitors from 25 volts can be used; it should have at least 100 µF.\nThere is a + on the board.\nWATCH THE POLARITY OF THE CAPACITOR!!!\nTo activate the capacitor in analogue mode, it is enough to close solder bridge SJ1; the board will then light continuously, in analogue as well as digital mode.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\nIf you want to switch through the decoder in the power car and fit a capacitor, both solder bridges, SJ1 and SJ2, have to be closed. The negative pole at the rectifier also has to be cut.\nLook at the board more closely: at capacitor C3 the rectifier's negative pole runs towards the lettering. Here you can cut the negative pole with small side cutters. Switching then happens through the decoder ground, and the capacitor can be charged.\nThe on-board bistro (power car)\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\nIn the on-board bistro, where the motor is fitted, we will now install the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-P.\nThe power car we show can differ from the one in your train, since various versions of this power car were built. You need the LoDi-WiB Motor ICE3-P (-S) for the conversion.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\nThe power car has 2 cross-head screws at the same place as the compartment coach, which you first have to undo. After that the roof can be taken off in the same way as on the compartment coach.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\nNow remove the boards inside the power car. The capacitors and chokes fitted also all have to be removed.\nCheck this carefully and make sure both terminals at the motor are clear and no other components are connected to them.\nThe wires are shortened to about 6 cm from the coupling, the same length as on the compartment coach, and unsoldered.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\nTwo connecting wires are supplied with the power car board in the large set. You first have to solder them to the board.\nAfter that you can connect the motor with the wires.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\nNow fit the board holders supplied and clip the boards into them. If one should be loose, you can fix it with a small drop of superglue.\nNow solder the pads on the board and solder the wire to the matching colour marking on the board.\nFinally, bend the wires over in the same way as in the compartment coach.\nNow plug a decoder of your choice onto the 21-pin MTC interface.\nNow reassemble the power car in the reverse order to the way you took it apart.\nIf you want to fit a sound decoder in your ICE 3, you can connect a loudspeaker directly to the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-P.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\nIf you ordered a pickup changeover as well, you can switch it off with 4 solder bridges that you can set on the board. With these bridges the pickup changeover is disabled.\nNow fit a decoder of your choice onto the motor board. In our tests we use an ESU LokPilot 5, but you are welcome to use sound decoders or decoders from other manufacturers. Take care, though, that the decoder does not have an amplified AUX 3, or that it can be switched to TTL, that is to a logic output.\nF0 = white at the front, red at the rear. AUX 1 and 2 = driving the relay for the pickup changeover. AUX 3 = coach light on/off. The following 21-pin decoders have been tested: ESU LokPilot 5 multi-protocol / 59619\nESU LokPilot 5 DCC / 59629\nESU LokSound 5 / 58419\nMärklin mSD and mLD decoders. Using other decoders? No problem — do let us know which decoder you run the board with and we will add it to the list :)\nThe driving trailers\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\nThe two driving heads of the Piko® ICE 3 are converted very quickly and easily. See which steps are needed.\nYou need the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P for the conversion.\nThe driving trailer we show can differ from the one in your train, since various versions of this train were built.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\nLike all the other coaches in the ICE 3 series, the driving trailer too has 2 cross-head screws at the points marked with green arrows, which you first have to undo. The roof cannot however be lifted off as easily as on the other coaches.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\nWhen taking the coach roof off, first lift it upwards at the rear of the coach. You will now notice that the whole thing jams at the front part of the coach. Those are the light guides. The roof simply has to be pushed forwards and away now.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\nNow that we have lifted the body off, we turn to the coupling end of the ICE 3 coach. There, pull the blue and black wires out about 1 cm. Now cut the wires so that enough slack is left between the coupling and the WiB.\nNext we fit the spacers supplied with the set. The first is fitted at the end where the coupling is. You can lay the wires through the notch in the holder, as shown in the picture. The second holder is pushed in further forward.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\nOn the underside of the board there is a further solder point, the VCC connection. It is used so that the directional lighting can be switched through the decoder. First connect the blue wire coming from the coach to VCC, as seen in the picture.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\nAs the next step, solder the blue wire coming from the coupling to the Blue pad on top of the board, and the two black wires to the Black pad, as seen in the picture.\nPlease do not fix the board with glue.\nIf you use the mfx or Motorola data format on your command station, flickering can occur in the train. In that case the red wire also has to be connected to the board in the driving trailers (that is, the right-hand wheel pickup or the centre-rail pickup).\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\nWhen reassembling the train the board has to be able to slide, since we have to push the light guides back in as we did when taking it apart. The board therefore has to be able to move inside the coach.\nWhen reassembling, the front part of the coach first has to be threaded downwards into the light guide (see the red arrow). After that the coach roof can be pushed onto the coach.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set\n3. Technical data\nDimensions of the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P: length 240 mm, width 12 mm, thickness 0.7 mm. Weight: 8 grams. Dimensions of the LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE3-P: length 244 mm, width 12 mm, or 20 mm at its widest point.\nThickness 0.7 mm. Weight: 13 grams, or 15 grams for the (-S) version.\nThe LoDi-Motor ICE3-P (-S) has a standard 21-pin MTC interface and can be fitted with all common locomotive or function decoders with a 21-pin interface.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-P — Technical data\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are glad to help.","LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE3-P","Features of the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P as well as the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-3-P and -S","1. The LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE3-P boards","CAREFUL!","2. Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3-P set","sw-lodi-shift-commander","software/lodi-shift-commander","LoDi-Shift-Commander","The LoDi-Shift-Commander is the interface between all the LoDi operators and the model railway software. Like the LoDi-Rektor or the LoDi-S88-Commander LX, it was developed for the highest efficiency in use.",[319,320,410,411,412,413],"Settings and firmware update\nThe LoDi-Shift-Commander is the interface between all the LoDi operators and the model railway software. Like the LoDi-Rektor or the LoDi-S88-Commander LX, it was developed for the highest efficiency in use.\nThere are 2 buses on the LoDi-Shift-Commander: the first bus is the \"fast\" one and the second the \"slow\" one. A total of up to 60 LoDi operators can be connected to the LoDi-Shift-Commander.\nAll devices belonging to the LoDi-Shift-Commander are marked in purple. That principle is applied in the device tree as well.\n1. The overview\n LoDi-Shift-Commander — Settings and firmware update\nThe device editor of the LoDi-Shift-Commander contains the following areas:\nBus settings: setting the LoDi-Shift-Commander's two SC buses Network settings: setting the IP address Firmware: updating the LoDi-Shift-Commander's firmware\nBus 1 and bus 2: the two SC buses can be run either as a light bus (fast) or as a switching bus (slow). Bus 1 can only be used as a light bus, bus 2 as both a light and a switching bus. Depending on the setting, not only the number of outputs changes but other properties as well:\nFast (96 outputs): this setting is used mainly for light signals and lighting effects. Each output can be dimmed in 64 steps between off and on. The repeat rate is 100 Hz. We recommend connecting LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL modules to this bus. Slow (384 outputs): this setting is used for switching outputs such as turnouts or mechanical signals. All LoDi controller modules, such as the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED, can only be run on the light bus.\nTurnout starting position: sets how the turnouts are initialised when the LoDi-Shift-Commander starts. No initialisation: the turnouts are not driven. That makes sense if the model railway control software switches the turnouts into the right position itself at startup. Restore the last state: the turnouts are brought into the position last switched. Run through all positions once: every possible state is reached once for every turnout. After that the last known state is restored. That is useful above all for motor turnout drives which can only travel in one direction from the mid position.\nThe \"Anwenden\" button applies all the settings and writes them to the device. The device then restarts automatically.\nNetwork settings\nSee the network settings in the section Commissioning LoDi devices.\n2. The bus overview and assignment\n LoDi-Shift-Commander — The bus overview and assignment\nThe LoDi-Shift-Commander is a layout's switching centre. It controls turnouts, signals, lighting effects and the room lighting.\nAll devices belonging to the LoDi-Shift-Commander are marked in violet. That principle is applied in the device tree as well.\nThe LoDi-Shift-Commander is shown in the device tree as follows:\nLoDi-Shift-Commander: this is where the LoDi-Shift-Commander's device and network settings live Bus 1: this bus is always run as a light bus. It has 96 outputs in total and suits light signals and lighting effects. If too many modules are connected, the surplus modules on the bus are not detected. Bus 2: depending on the device setting, this bus is run in two different modes: Light bus: 96 dimmable outputs Switching bus: 384 non-dimmable outputs\nNormal operator modules: map the outputs directly and are configured uniformly. Example: the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL Controller modules: provide special functions and, depending on the type, have a dedicated setup interface. These modules can only be run on the switching bus (bus 2 as a switching bus). Example: the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED (room lighting control)\nTo open the settings for a device, bus 1 or bus 2, it is enough to click the corresponding entry in the device tree. The corresponding dialogue opens in the main area.\nTo get an overview of which device is behind which entry, you can hold the mouse over the entry in the device tree for a few seconds. The device is then shown with its picture as a tooltip.\nBus 1 and bus 2\nThe bus 1 and bus 2 nodes represent the LoDi-Shift-Commander's two SC bus connections. Below the bus nodes, the devices are shown in the order in which they were found starting from the SC bus connection.\nWhen reading the modules in, it is checked whether the number or the kind of modules has changed. If a deviation from the last stored bus configuration is found, both buses are switched off. The bus with the deviating bus configuration is highlighted in red. On the LoDi-Shift-Commander the bus LEDs flash.\nThis functionality makes sure the signals come out at the right output when work is done on the bus. It is therefore to be understood as a protective measure.\nTo put the bus back into service, you have to click the corresponding bus node and assign the modules correctly in the bus dialogue that appears.\nA deviating bus configuration before assignment LoDi-Shift-Commander — Bus 1 and bus 2\nIn the screenshot above, a module has been added to the bus. In that case it is enough to press the \"Automatisch Zuordnen\" button.\nIf the automatic assignment does not do the job, remaining modules can be assigned by hand with drag and drop or through the context menu.\nThe colour coding of the modules is as follows:\nYellow: the module stays on the bus. Green: the module has been added. Red: the module has been removed from the bus.\nTo find out how the modules have been assigned, you can hold the mouse over a module. Its counterpart is then highlighted.\nThe \"Zurücksetzen\" button undoes all the assignments made previously.\nWhen the \"Anwenden\" button becomes active, the new bus configuration can be applied. When applying it, the commands on the modules are moved or removed with the modules. Once it has been applied successfully, both buses are active again.\nThe bus configuration after assignment LoDi-Shift-Commander — Bus 1 and bus 2\n3. Firmware update\nFrom the LoDi-ProgrammerFX 2025.01 onwards there is an online updater for the devices' firmware. We show you here how to install firmware.\n LoDi-Shift-Commander — Firmware update\n LoDi-Shift-Commander — Firmware update\n LoDi-Shift-Commander — Firmware update\n LoDi-Shift-Commander — Firmware update\nFirst click the device that is to be updated, in this case the LoDi-Shift-Commander (1). A new menu item now appears in the bar at the top: \"Online-Update\".\nThe update dialogue opens and the server automatically searches for available updates.\nThen select the newest version shown (3) and click Install update (4). In the next dialogue the currently installed version and the version to be installed are shown to you once more.\nConfirm the process by clicking OK to start the update. Once the update is finished, the device restarts automatically. If the current version is already installed, the LoDi-ProgrammerFX will say so.\n3. LoDi operators\nSee LoDi operators and LoDi-Light-Operator\n LoDi-Shift-Commander — LoDi operators\nAny questions still open?\nWould you simply like to ask us in person?\nOr go to our forum, where experienced users are glad to help you further.\ninfo@lokstoredigital.de","2. The bus overview and assignment","Bus 1 and bus 2","3. Firmware update","3. LoDi operators","lodi-watchdog","hardware/switching/sc-system/lodi-watchdog","LoDi-Watchdog","Watches the switching system and cuts the transformer supply as soon as a fault appears — for layouts running unattended and for bridged limit switches.",[420,421,422,423,424,425,426,427]," hardware-schalten-lodi-watchdog-01-2a7063.png\nStraight to the shop\nWhat is the LoDi-Watchdog for?\nCustomers often tell us that they bridge the limit switches in their solenoid drives, or would like to, for safety's sake. We know the problem all too well, especially on large layouts: up to 70% of the faults behind a turnout that will not throw come down to the limit switches. They are of course a safety feature and protect the drive from being destroyed by too much current or too long a switching time.\nBut once those limit switches have been removed or bridged and a fault occurs in the system, the LoDi-Watchdog can cut the power straight at the transformer. Every decoder is then dead.\nOn top of that the LoDi-Watchdog detects every fluctuation on the bus — caused for instance by a faulty network cable or an unterminated bus. A bus that is cut is noticed immediately, and the LoDi-Watchdog can even pass the fault straight on to the model railway software over a feedback channel.\nSo who exactly needs a LoDi-Watchdog?\nEveryone running their layout unattended who wants the greatest possible safety for it together with a simple fault indication — and, as mentioned at the start, everyone who has bridged their limit switches.\nWhat the LoDi-Watchdog does\nIt watches the switching system and shuts the transformer system down as soon as it detects a fault. Manual operation is possible. Switches up to 4 amps. With a feedback output for additional monitoring.\n1. The LoDi-Watchdog and its connections\n hardware-schalten-lodi-watchdog-02-f6d720.png\n(1) The transformer or power supply is connected here. (2) This is where you connect the LoDi-Operators to be monitored. (3) An output of a decoder (LoDi-Operators) is connected to terminal (1 2). Two consecutive connections are needed (feedback out). This is where the watchdog can be monitored with a feedback module.\n2. LEDs on the LoDi-Watchdog\n hardware-schalten-lodi-watchdog-03-94ab95.png\nThe LoDi-SC-Watchdog has 2 LEDs to help you read the state of the device and understand faults more quickly.\n(1) Orange LED: lights as soon as the LoDi-Watchdog receives power over the AC In terminal. If this LED blinks, there is no voltage at the output terminal. (1) Red LED: lights as soon as the LoDi-Watchdog has detected a fault on the bus, or when there is no signal at terminal (1 2). (2) Button: the LoDi-Watchdog can be operated by hand with this button. You can use it to control the voltage at the AC Out terminal. The LEDs then show: orange steady, red blinking.\n3. Connecting to the transformer and the LoDi-Operator\nThe LoDi-Watchdog is connected to the transformer together with the last LoDi-Operator on the bus. The point is that as soon as the bus fails — because a network cable was pulled, an SC-Booster is not plugged in, or a LoDi-Shift-Commander has stopped working — this is detected and the power is taken off the turnout decoders immediately.\n hardware-schalten-lodi-watchdog-04-23f5b8.png\nFirst we connect the transformer to the last device on the bus. That can be any LoDi-Operator (AC, DC or 16-SD-FL).\nThen we connect the decoder's supply lead to the watchdog as well, or via the LoDi-Operator as shown in the picture above. Please make sure the lead from the transformer to the LoDi-Watchdog has enough cross-section (0.75 mm² minimum). Ordinary model railway transformers deliver 3 amps and more.\n hardware-schalten-lodi-watchdog-05-a3723f.png\n hardware-schalten-lodi-watchdog-06-f37464.png\nNext the LoDi-Watchdog is connected to the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL. Use your usual cable colours for turnouts and accessories; 0.25 mm² is enough here.\n4. Connecting to the turnout decoder system\nNow we can connect the LoDi-Operators that supply the turnouts to the AC Out terminal as well. The LoDi-Watchdog delivers 4 amps at most. As a rule turnouts are not all thrown at the same moment, so that is normally enough for a fully populated bus (47 LoDi-Operators 4-WD-AC, for example).\n hardware-schalten-lodi-watchdog-07-3792cd.png\n5. Setting the LoDi-Watchdog up in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nTo make the LoDi-Watchdog known to the LoDi-Shift-Commander, navigate in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX to the last module on the bus — in our example that would be a LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL.\n hardware-schalten-lodi-watchdog-08-9b52b9.png\nNow click the last operator on the bus. We have connected the LoDi-Watchdog to terminals 1 and 2. In the LoDi-ProgrammerFX you will find the watchdog under \"Lamps\", at the bottom under \"W\". Drag it out of the list onto channels 1 and 2.\nThe LoDi-Watchdog is active straight away. You can also bind the object into your model railway control software. With aspect 1 the LoDi-Watchdog is off, which also switches off the voltage at the AC Out terminal.\n6. The LoDi-Watchdog on a feedback module\nUsing the Feedback Out terminal on the LoDi-Watchdog, its state can be monitored from the model railway software through a LoDi-RM-16+ or a LoDi-8-GBM, for example.\n hardware-schalten-lodi-watchdog-09-701521.png\n5. Download the LoDi-Watchdog as a PDF\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-Watchdog hardware as a PDF file.\n hardware-schalten-lodi-watchdog-10-d1f2ad.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","What the LoDi-Watchdog does","1. The LoDi-Watchdog and its connections","2. LEDs on the LoDi-Watchdog","3. Connecting to the transformer and the LoDi-Operator","4. Connecting to the turnout decoder system","5. Setting the LoDi-Watchdog up in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX","6. The LoDi-Watchdog on a feedback module","5. Download the LoDi-Watchdog as a PDF","con-zentrale-lenz","lodi-con/command-stations/lenz","Lenz with LAN interface","Setting up the Lenz command station with LAN interface in the LoDi-Con.",[434],"Setting up the Lenz command station with LAN interface in the LoDi-Con\n lodi-con-zentrale-lenz-01-fe2bf3.png\nThe LoDi-Con can be connected to the Lenz LAN interface.\nWith the LoDi-Con, locomotives and turnouts can be driven and CVs configured.\nHow that works is explained below:\nFirst the Lenz command station with its LAN interface has to be on the same network as the LoDi-Con, so make sure both devices are on it. If you have questions about that, do get in touch.\n lodi-con-zentrale-lenz-02-e4b558.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-lenz-03-22ec27.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-lenz-04-8af154.png\nFirst tap the \"house\"; this icon always takes you back to the main screen.\nThere press Settings > Command station >\nFrom there go to Settings > Command station >\nUnfortunately the Lenz station cannot be found on the network. Its IP address therefore has to be known and entered into the LoDi-Con by hand.\n lodi-con-zentrale-lenz-05-d6931e.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-lenz-06-bf6bd8.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-lenz-07-ae7efc.png\nOnce the LoDi-Con has found no devices, you can enter the IP address of the station yourself.\nTo do that, tap \"New command station\".\nThe IP address of the Lenz LAN interface has to be known and entered in this form. Then choose the protocol — in this case \"XPN\" for the Lenz system.\nConfirm by tapping the green tick at the bottom.\n(Devices shown green in the \"Search for command stations\" overview are already known to the LoDi-Con.)\n lodi-con-zentrale-lenz-08-57bc01.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-lenz-09-cf35a6.png\n\n lodi-con-zentrale-lenz-11-a33103.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-lenz-12-970904.png\nWith the Lenz station, the LoDi-Con can programme locomotive CVs over RailCom or on the programming track.\nIn the station overview, the first entry \"Prog mode\" programmes over the programming track directly.\n lodi-con-zentrale-lenz-13-439e91.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","Setting up the Lenz command station with LAN interface in the LoDi-Con","con-05-weichen","lodi-con/turnouts-and-accessories","Turnouts and accessories","Adding and operating turnouts, signals and accessories in the LoDi-Con.",[],"Before you can throw a turnout, you have to create an object on the LoDi-Con, just as you did for locomotives.\n(These steps are unnecessary if you use the LoDi-Shift-Commander: it transfers every object into the LoDi-Con automatically, and nothing further is needed.\nFor more see \"Setting the LoDi-Shift-Commander up in the LoDi-Con\".)\n lodi-con-05-weichen-01-7b2799.png\n lodi-con-05-weichen-02-16293d.png\n lodi-con-05-weichen-03-c692db.png\nTo set a turnout up, tap the turnout symbol at the bottom left.\nYou are now in the turnout overview.\nTap the \"+\" at the top right to create a new object.\nYou are now in the selection menu.\nThis list already holds a number of objects, among them:\nTurnouts Colour light and semaphore signals Lighting\nThe filter, which is available when choosing objects as well, lets you narrow the list down.\nNow choose an object to create; in this example we take a left-hand turnout.\n lodi-con-05-weichen-04-9c1865.png\n lodi-con-05-weichen-05-404d52.png\n lodi-con-05-weichen-06-10b959.png\n lodi-con-05-weichen-07-827d71.png\nYou go straight into the properties of the turnout.\nThere you can change:\nDelete object (tapping delete removes the object again.) Name Type Switching time\nFurther down the menu the states of the object can be changed (swapping right/left, for instance).\nThe states can be tested straight from the properties.\nOnce you have finished editing the object, you can leave this dialog. Tap the turnout symbol at the bottom left again and you are back in the overview.\nTapping the newly created turnout switches it between its states.\nIf an object has more than two states, tapping it shows them as a list to choose from.\n lodi-con-05-weichen-08-4ce05e.png\nThe last active locomotive can also be driven straight from the accessory overview.\nThe most recently active locomotive is always shown, so you can keep it under control while working with turnouts.\n lodi-con-05-weichen-09-b50865.png\n lodi-con-05-weichen-10-c0a8d3.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","lodi-booster-10a-plus","hardware/driving/lodi-booster-10a-plus","LoDi-Booster 10A+","Up to 14.99 amperes continuous, maximum current adjustable through the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.",[447,448,449,450,451,452,453,454,455,456,457,458]," LoDi-Booster 10A+\nWhen it has to be more still...\nDepending on how large your layout is, enough current has to be provided. Not only that — ideally you should also have some short-circuit logic, so that a single short does not take the whole layout down.\nWe have many years of experience with these amplifiers in small layouts, large layouts and show layouts, and can now present our LoDi-Booster 10A+. The booster for every scale from 0 upwards.\nA perfect fit for garden railways!\nA powerhouse delivering up to 14.99 amperes of output current!\nFeatures of the LoDi-Booster 10+\nIt supplies the current needed to run the digitally controlled locomotives and the turnouts, as well as every other consumer on the layout. In the event of a short circuit on the layout (caused by a derailed coach or locomotive, for instance) the booster cuts the power to the layout to prevent further damage to the rails or the rolling stock. Thanks to the built-in intelligence of the LoDi-Booster 10A+, only the affected sections are switched off in the event of a short, and this is reported back to the control software in use. The rest of the layout can keep running without risk of damage to the rolling stock. The LoDi-Booster 10A+ has one output channel with a double screw terminal for easy wiring. (If you need more, you have to connect a corresponding number of further LoDi-Booster 10A+ units to secure the supply.) On layouts monitored with RailCom, the LoDi-Booster provides the RailCom cutout, which carries the RailCom return channel. The maximum current is easy to set. Does your power supply only deliver 8 amperes? No problem — simply set that in our LoDi-ProgrammerFX or directly on the LoDi-Con. Straightforward configuration through the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\n1. The LoDi-Booster 10A+ and its connections\nLike its smaller brothers, the LoDi-Booster 10A+ works with the LoDi bus (formerly µCon bus). The LoDi-Rektor is needed as the booster command station.\n LoDi-Booster 10A+ — The LoDi-Booster 10A+ and its connections\nThe booster has the following connections:\n(1) Programming button: every booster has its own address through which it is addressed on the bus. To set a new address the button has to be pressed first. The address is then assigned through the commissioning software LoDi-ProgrammerFX. (2,3) LoDi bus input: the µCon bus is fed into this socket. LoDi bus OUT: further LoDi bus components connect here. The output also supplies power for other bus devices such as the LoDi-CV-Programmer and the LoDi-TrainSpeed. (4) Track output A: the track output can carry 14.99 amperes continuously. (5) Power supply connection: (please use only high-quality power supplies! Lokstoredigital accepts no liability for damage caused by inferior power supplies, and the warranty is void in that case.)\n2. LEDs and programming button of the LoDi-Booster 10A+\nThe LED indicators on the LoDi-Booster 10A+ give you information that helps with troubleshooting and with setting the device up.\n(2) BUS LED = shows the state of the LoDi bus. When the bus signal is detected, the LED lights with a short pulsing interruption. (2) DCC LED = this LED is lit continuously as soon as the booster receives a signal over the bus — DCC, Motorola or M3 alike. If no bus cable is plugged in, or the µCon-Manager or the LoDi command station is switched off, the DCC LED flashes rapidly. (3) Short on track A = this LED indicates a short circuit at the booster output. As soon as a short is detected, the LED starts to flash. (3) On for track A = as soon as this LED is lit at the output, the output stage in the booster is active, meaning power is present at that output. (1) Prog. button = there is a prog. button on the booster. It switches the booster, or rather its output stages, on and off.\n LoDi-Booster 10A+ — LEDs and programming button of the LoDi-Booster 10A+\nA short tap of the button switches the track outputs off and on again. The ON LED for track A goes out or lights up accordingly.\nThe prog. button is also used to programme the address. The LoDi bus provides 63 addresses. Held for more than 3 seconds, the bus and DCC LEDs flash red and green alternately. This can be interrupted by pressing the button again, or it ends when a new address is sent to the LoDi-Booster 10A+ over the µCon bus. Once the LoDi-Booster 10A+ understands the signal, programming ends and it returns to normal operation.\n3. The fan on the LoDi-Booster 10A+\n LoDi-Booster 10A+ — The fan on the LoDi-Booster 10A+\nThe LoDi-Booster 10A+ has a built-in fan. This fan is controlled by temperature and load. As soon as the temperature inside the device rises, or current is drawn at the output, the fan automatically speeds up and slows down.\nThe fan never stops entirely; it keeps turning at low speed even when idle.\nPlease make sure that no objects get inside the device through the slots. Screws and the like could cause an internal short circuit and destroy the device.\nThe ventilation grille protects against the spinning fan.\nThe booster should be mounted so that the warm air can flow through it. Allow enough space for the air coming in and going out; 5 cm of clearance on each side is enough.\nThe air is pushed through the device from right to left.\n4. Connecting a power supply\nThe LoDi-Booster 10A+ is delivered WITHOUT a power supply.\nPower supplies with the following ratings can be used: 12–24 volts DC at 8–20 amperes.\nTake care to use a high-quality power supply such as Meanwell or another branded unit.\nPlease do not use power supplies of unclear origin.\nIMPORTANT! Please check whether the power supply you are using bonds the earth conductor to the negative output. If it does, that power supply must not be used, as it could otherwise lead to ground loops.\nImproper use of power supplies can damage the electronics.\n5. Connecting to the LoDi bus\n LoDi-Booster 10A+ — Connecting to the LoDi bus\nThe LoDi bus is a bus developed specifically to cover long distances without losing the data signal. You can connect 63 LoDi bus components in total to the LoDi-Rektor.\nDevices on the LoDi bus have to be plugged in one after another; the bus does not allow for a star topology.\nThe following example shows how the booster is supplied with information by the LoDi-Rektor.\nIn this case the LoDi-Rektor provides the data for the booster and sends it over the LoDi bus.\nBeyond that, the LoDi-Booster 10A+ can also deliver data to the LoDi-Rektor and thus to the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\nThat data can include current measurement per channel, voltage measurement, short on A, and device temperatures.\nBesides the various short-circuit sensitivities, the address can also be set on the booster through the LoDi-Rektor with the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\nThe RailCom cutout can be switched off on the LoDi-Booster. You will find more on that in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX section.\nThe LoDi bus can manage 63 devices in total, and the patch cables may run to more than 1500 metres. On garden railways in particular that makes it very neat to create individual booster stations.\nThe LoDi-Booster can also be hung on the bus, where it can supply the current for switching turnouts, for instance. Important note: the LoDi-Booster and the LoDi-Booster 10A+ must not be run mixed together. The high output of the LoDi-Booster 10A+ could damage the smaller LoDi-Booster.\nThe LoDi-Booster 10A and the LoDi-Booster 10A+, on the other hand, can be used together in one system without trouble.\n LoDi-Booster 10A+ — Connecting to the LoDi bus\n6. Connecting to the track\n20 amperes is of course a great deal of power. With the 20 ampere version in particular, sufficient cable cross-section is therefore essential. We recommend never going below 0.75 mm².\n LoDi-Booster 10A+ — Connecting to the track\nOn the LoDi-Booster 10A+ we use a double terminal. It carries the common twice on the left and the positive conductor twice on the right.\nWith the LoDi-Booster 10A and 10A+ the commons may be joined through the track.\n LoDi-Booster 10A+ — Connecting to the track\n7. Connecting to the track through feedback modules\nThe LoDi-Booster 10A+ is an excellent match for feedback modules that are RailCom capable. In this example we take the LoDi-8-GBM-P, a RailCom capable feedback module that can carry 10 amperes per channel.\n LoDi-Booster 10A+ — Connecting to the track through feedback modules\nThe diagram shown here has two feedback modules, each connected to one of the booster's double outputs. The cable cross-section should not be below 0.75 mm². There is no separation of the common here; that is not important with the LoDi system, but it can be done if you wish.\nPlease note that you need feedback modules that can take the booster's load. In this case the module has to carry 10 amperes per channel.\nHow many feedback modules you need depends entirely on your layout and on the software you work with. If you need help here, do get in touch with us or with our service partners.\n8. Dividing the layout into booster sections\nWith the intelligent booster system we bring logic to the track, so that a short circuit does not bring the whole layout to a stand. The data is passed to the control software, which then knows where the short happened and holds trains before they enter other booster areas that are shorted or switched off. For that you naturally have to divide up your layout, or rather the track plan. One booster output is available per device. That means you can secure very good logic and operating sequences with only a few units. Here is a small example of a division.\n LoDi-Booster 10A+ — Dividing the layout into booster sections\nIn this example we use four LoDi-Boosters, which gives us four power sections. The different circuits are colour-coded. If a short is now detected in one of these areas, that is passed to the LoDi-Rektor, which forwards the affected track section to the control software. The rest of the layout keeps running where possible.\n9. Technical data\n LoDi-Booster 10A+ — Technical data\nThe LoDi-Booster 10A+ has a total output of 14.99 amperes.\nIt has thermal overload and temperature protection, which makes sure the LoDi-Booster 10+ takes no damage when overloaded.\nDimensions:\nLength: 130 mm\nWidth: 115 mm\nHeight: 45 mm\nWeight: 225 g\nThis table gives you a rough estimate of the current draw.\n LoDi-Booster 10A+ — Technical data\n10. Setting up the LoDi-Booster 10A+ in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nand updating the firmware Here is how to set up the LoDi-Booster\n LoDi-Booster 10A+ — Setting up the LoDi-Booster 10A+ in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\n11. LoDi-Booster 10A+ PDF download\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-Booster 10A hardware and software as a PDF.\nLoDi-Booster 10A+ manual PDF, 1.7 MB — as of 17 February 2025","Features of the LoDi-Booster 10+","1. The LoDi-Booster 10A+ and its connections","2. LEDs and programming button of the LoDi-Booster 10A+","3. The fan on the LoDi-Booster 10A+","4. Connecting a power supply","5. Connecting to the LoDi bus","6. Connecting to the track","7. Connecting to the track through feedback modules","8. Dividing the layout into booster sections","9. Technical data","10. Setting up the LoDi-Booster 10A+ in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX","11. LoDi-Booster 10A+ PDF download","beleuchtung","hardware/lighting","Lighting","Lighting on the layout — light signals, lamps, LEDs and effects.",[465,466],"Lighting and conversion boards\n Lighting — Lighting and conversion boards\nLED lighting boards and custom-made lighting for coaches and locomotives have been part of the Lokstoredigital range from the very beginning.\nAfter we put more of our focus on developing and manufacturing control hardware using the latest technology, we now have to note that — despite countless lighting systems on the market — there is still room for improvement here.\nThat is where we come in, offering our customers ways of improving their vehicle lighting.\nTogether with moba-tech e.K. (Sven Heine) from Deidesheim, we present our solutions here.\nMany thanks also go to Helge's Modellbahn Technik, who is likewise actively involved in the development.\n Lighting — Lighting and conversion boards\nLighting for the\nMärklin® and Trix ICE 3\n Lighting — Lighting and conversion boards\nLighting for the Piko® ICE 3\n Lighting — Lighting and conversion boards\nLighting for the ICE Experimental from Märklin®\n Lighting — Lighting and conversion boards\nLighting for the ICE 1 and 2 from Märklin® and Trix®\n Lighting — Lighting and conversion boards\n Lighting — Lighting and conversion boards\nLighting for the EWIII\n Lighting — Lighting and conversion boards\nThe LoDi-WiB-A v2\nA simple but high-quality lighting board for all common model railway coaches from H0 upwards.\n Lighting — Lighting and conversion boards\n Lighting — Lighting and conversion boards\n Lighting — Lighting and conversion boards\nMT-43586 V2 conversion board for the Märklin® double-deck driving trailer\n Lighting — Lighting and conversion boards\n Lighting — Lighting and conversion boards\nThe LoDi-21MTC(-S) board\nOffers maximum flexibility for your vehicles, and the wiring looks neat and tidy.\nConversion boards\nLoDi-21MTC(-S) The LoDi-21MTC(-S) board. Would you like to convert your old locomotives simply and quickly, without having to do without the latest decoder technology?\nLoDi-WiB-A v2 The LoDi-WiB-A v2 is a high-quality lighting board for running model railway vehicles in analogue and digital mode.\nLoDi-WiB-EWIII The LoDi-WiB-EWIII is a high-quality, precisely fitting lighting board for digital operation.\nLoDi-WiB ICE Exp The LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp conversion — a new life for the Märklin ICE Experimental. The Märklin ICE Experimental is a model train that many collectors and enthu\nLoDi-WiB ICE-M Every model railwayer should know the ICE 1 and 2 from Märklin® and Trix®. The younger generation in particular enjoys running it on the layout\nLoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) The ICE 3 from Märklin and Trix has been a fixture of countless model railway layouts for many years. The older versions in particular are still widespread and\nLoDi-WiB ICE3-P The ICE 3 is a truly impressive express train that delights younger model railwayers again and again. That is why we developed a board for this train\nMT-43586 V2 double-deck driving trailer The head lighting of the double-deck coach from Märklin® and Trix® in traffic red as well as in white/blue is normally switched between yellow and re","Lighting and conversion boards","Conversion boards","lodi-mono-servo-dcc-h","hardware/switching/dcc-system/lodi-mono-servo-dcc-h","LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H","A small servo decoder for single servos, with frog polarisation.",[473,474,475,476,477,478,479,480,481,482,483,484]," LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H\nSimply a small servo decoder . . . For individual servos, quickly fitted, the\nthe LoDi-Mono-Servo-Dual-H can also be run without digital voltage, from DC or AC alone. Over RailCom the decoder can be read quickly and its CVs configured.\nThanks to the built-in frog polarisation, no further hardware has to be bought.\nFeatures of the LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H\nA single-channel servo decoder for small to medium servos. With built-in frog polarisation for the frogs of the turnouts. Connections for external push buttons and LEDs for a signal box panel. The decoder listens to the DCC format and can be read and configured over RailCom. Also usable stand-alone with DC or AC!\n1. The LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H and its connections\n LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H — The LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H and its connections\n(1) Connection to DCC, that is to a booster, feedback module or directly to a command station. Connection for the turnout frog. (2) Connection for servos with a 3-pin plug. (3) A push button for external operation and external LEDs for position indication can be connected here.\n2. LEDs and button on the LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H\nThe LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC has one LED, which we call INFO. It shows the following status by flashing:\n LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H — LEDs and button on the LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H\n(1) When the DCC signal comes on, the info LED flashes briefly, after which it stays lit. As soon as the decoder receives a valid command for itself, the LED flashes three times briefly. CV requests over RailCom are likewise shown with a triple flash. (2) The button is for programming the DCC base address. It can also be used for manual operation.\n3. Connecting to DCC\nAs mentioned above, the LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H can be connected to several power sources.\nThe first example shows it connected to a LoDi-Booster.\nCAREFUL! For reliable switching of DCC accessories, a separate circuit or booster output should always be used. One booster output can run 40 LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H units. (With decoders that need their own transformer current, the number is over 150 depending on the manufacturer, since the LoDi-Booster then only has to provide the data for the decoder.)\nThe LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H takes the current for switching directly from the booster. As a rule a servo needs no more than 100 mA for small tasks. Because DCC commands are processed one after another, there are no problems with the power provided even with many switching tasks.\n LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H — Connecting to DCC\n4. Connecting the servo\n LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H — Connecting the servo\nIn most cases a servo has a cable with three conductors.\nThese are:\nYellow or orange, which carries the data signal Red, carrying 5 volts, which supplies the servo with the voltage it needs. Black or brown, which carries the servo's common.\nThe colours can differ further, so check your servo's documentation if you are unsure.\nAt (1) you see the connection for the servo on the decoder. Negative is at the top. The socket is pushed straight onto the decoder's pins. (2) represents the servo.\n LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H — Connecting the servo\n5. Connecting the frog\nWith turnouts in two-rail use, many track systems call for frog polarisation, because the polarity of the frog changes.\nTo take care of that switching, the LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H has a built-in relay that reverses the polarity at a turnout's frog.\nThis switching point can also be adjusted through a CV if wanted.\n LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H — Connecting the frog\nThis picture shows the layout of a turnout whose frog has to be reversed.\n(shown here in pink)\n6. CV list and settings\nThe LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H is set through CVs.\nIf you have the LoDi-Rektor with a LoDi-Booster or CDE booster connected, you can write the CVs over PoM (programming on main) with the LoDi-ProgrammerFX from version 2.2.\nThe decoder can equally be programmed with any conventional command station that has a DCC programming output or handles PoM.\nSetting the DCC address: you have now installed the decoder successfully, the DCC cable is plugged in, and the LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H now glows green continuously to show it is ready.\nAs delivered, the decoder responds to turnout or accessory address 1.\nIf you want to change an address quickly, proceed as follows: there is a programming button on the decoder as described above. Press it for 3 seconds. The info LED starts to flash quickly, telling you the decoder is ready for a new address.\nNow send the new address from the control software, directly at a command station or in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX (the LoDi-Rektor is required), in the turnout field under DCC.\nThe decoder takes the address, the INFO LED stops flashing and glows steadily again. It is now reachable at the address you chose.\nSetting the CVs: as mentioned several times, the LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H can be programmed over PoM (programming on main). In most applications there are three CVs to consider.\n1 × position A = CV 33, value 0–255\n2 × position B = CV 34, value 0–255\n3 × speed = CV 41, the speed at which the servo moves, 0–255\nThese values can be read back later over RailCom.\n8. Stand-alone version\nThanks to the stand-alone version, the decoder can be supplied with ordinary DC up to 20 volts and AC up to 16 volts.\nIts information, such as servo positions 1 and 2 and the speed, first has to be set through a command station.\n LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H — Stand-alone version\n9. Connecting external push buttons\nThe LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H has a button of its own which, as described above, is used to set the digital address. A short tap of the button switches the position between A and B, that is, throws a turnout manually, for instance.\nIn addition the decoder can be operated through an external button. It makes no difference whether it runs on digital or analogue power.\nThere are four solder pads on the decoder for that.\nFrom left to right:\n1. GND = common, blue in the diagram.\n2. Aux1 = external button, which has to be switched against the common, black in the diagram.\n3. Aux2 = external LED for position 1 (Aux switches +; a 220 ohm series resistor is also needed).\n4. Aux3 = external LED for position 2 (Aux switches +; a 220 ohm series resistor is also needed).\nInstead of a push button, a toggle switch can be used to change the position. That then has to be set in CV 11.\n LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H — GND = common, blue in the diagram.\n10. Technical data\nDimensions:\nProperty Value\nLength 5.6 cm\nWidth 6.8 cm\nHeight 2.5 cm\nWeight 32 grams\nIn digital operation the decoder can be run at up to 22 volts.\nDo mind the specifications of your command station or booster manufacturer here.\nThe decoder can be run on 20 volts DC or 16 volts AC.\nLoadable by a servo with 1 ampere peak and 400 mA continuous\nFrog polarisation loadable with 4 amperes per output.\n11. LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H PDF download\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H as a PDF.\nLoDi-Mono-DCC-H manual PDF, 1.7 MB","Features of the LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H","1. The LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H and its connections","2. LEDs and button on the LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H","3. Connecting to DCC","4. Connecting the servo","5. Connecting the frog","6. CV list and settings","8. Stand-alone version","9. Connecting external push buttons","1. GND = common, blue in the diagram.","10. Technical data","11. LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H PDF download","lodi-sc-booster","hardware/switching/sc-system/lodi-sc-booster","LoDi-SC-Booster","A compact bus booster for the SC bus.",[491,492,493,494,495,496]," LoDi-SC-Booster\nThe LoDi-SC-Booster is a compact bus booster for the SC bus. When decoders are chained together with patch cables, the voltage can drop with every further LoDi-Operator, and with longer patch cables too. With a total SC bus length of up to 200 metres in particular, that can cause problems. If more than 16 LoDi-Operators are connected to the Shift-Commander, we recommend using the LoDi-SC-Booster to secure a reliable supply.\nFeatures of the LoDi-SC-Booster\nIt supplies the current needed for further SC bus components. Up to 16 further modules are possible. The power supply is included.\n1. The LoDi-SC-Booster and its connections\n LoDi-SC-Booster — The LoDi-SC-Booster and its connections\nThe LoDi-SC-Booster is needed for larger installations of more than 25 LoDi-Operators.\nAnother 16 LoDi-Operators can be attached to the system, provided enough free channels remain.\nIn a fully built-out installation a maximum of three LoDi-SC-Boosters are needed.\n(1) The bus coming from the last LoDi-Operator connects here. (2) Here you connect further LoDi-Operators in your system.\n2. LEDs on the LoDi-SC-Booster\n LoDi-SC-Booster — LEDs on the LoDi-SC-Booster\nThe LoDi-SC-Booster has two LEDs to help you read the state of the device and understand faults more quickly.\n(1) SC bus IN: the LED lights as soon as the bus coming from the last LoDi-Operator is plugged in here. (2) SC bus OUT: as soon as the power supply is connected, this LED lights and signals power on the bus.\n3. Connecting the power supply\n LoDi-SC-Booster — Connecting the power supply\nA high-quality micro-USB power supply is included.\nYou can also use your own USB supply, or a free USB port on the computer, as long as it can deliver at least 1 ampere.\n4. Connecting the LoDi-SC-Booster to the SC bus\nIn the picture you can see the LoDi-SC-Booster fitted. It has been integrated into an existing bus.\n LoDi-SC-Booster — Connecting the LoDi-SC-Booster to the SC bus\nThe last example picture shows SC bus 1 and 2 taken to their limits. The order of the modules is entirely irrelevant here.\nOnly with the LoDi-Light-Controller should you take care that it is connected to bus 2.\nWhat matters is that you integrate a new LoDi-SC-Booster into the system after every 16th module.\n LoDi-SC-Booster — Connecting the LoDi-SC-Booster to the SC bus\nThe bus length, or rather the number of modules, is very easy to work out.\nOn bus 1 you have 96 channels available.\nHere you could connect 12 LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC or AC units, for instance, since each module needs 8 channels.\nOn the slow bus you have 384 channels available. That would be 48 LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC or DC units, LoDi-Light-Controller 4-C-LED or LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL units.\nAs you can see, our system lets you work very flexibly.\n5. LoDi-SC-Booster PDF download\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-SC-Booster hardware as a PDF.\nLoDi-SC-Booster manual PDF, 1.1 MB","Features of the LoDi-SC-Booster","1. The LoDi-SC-Booster and its connections","2. LEDs on the LoDi-SC-Booster","3. Connecting the power supply","4. Connecting the LoDi-SC-Booster to the SC bus","5. LoDi-SC-Booster PDF download","lodi-ga-10k-3-leiter","hardware/accessories/lodi-ga-10k-3-leiter","LoDi-GA 10k 3-Leiter","The LoDi-GA 10k 3-rail is a board used for wagon detection on three-rail track when you run the LoDi-8-GBM as an occupancy detector.",[503,252,217]," LoDi-GA 10k 3-Leiter\nThe LoDi-GA 10k 3-rail is a board used for wagon detection on three-rail track when you run the LoDi-8-GBM as an occupancy detector with RailCom.\nIt can be mounted directly under the track, with simple wiring to solder pads.\nFeatures of the LoDi-GA 10k 3-rail\nBoard with a 10k resistor built in For wagon detection on three-rail track with occupancy reporting Available in packs of ten\n1. The LoDi 5-way distribution board and its connections\nOut of our own long experience, and that of our partners who wire up customer layouts on site every day. Our small tie point for joining cables by solder pad.\nAny kind of cable can be quickly unsoldered and soldered back on . . .\nThe board has a screw hole so it can simply be mounted. It can also be glued, depending on the mounting situation on your layout.\n LoDi-GA 10k 3-Leiter — The LoDi 5-way distribution board and its connections\n2. Technical data\nThe LoDi 5-way distribution board carries a total of 5 amperes.\n0–60 volt AC or DC input\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length: 20 mm\nWidth 16 mm\nHeight 1.5 mm at its highest point\nWeight 1 g\n LoDi-GA 10k 3-Leiter — Technical data\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are glad to help.","Features of the LoDi-GA 10k 3-rail","lodi-wib-ice3-m","hardware/lighting/lodi-wib-ice3-m","LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St)","The ICE 3 from Märklin and Trix has been a fixture of countless model railway layouts for many years. The older versions in particular are still widespread and still convince with their looks and their running qualities. Technically, though, many of these trains come from a time when analogue con…",[510,511,512,513,514,515,516,517,392],"LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE3-M(-St)\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St)\nThe ICE 3 from Märklin and Trix has been a fixture of countless model railway layouts for many years. The older versions in particular are still widespread and still convince with their looks and their running qualities. Technically, though, many of these trains come from a time when analogue control, filament bulbs or early Motorola decoders were the standard.\nThat is exactly where our LoDi-WiB system for the Märklin and Trix ICE 3 comes in. It is not simply new lighting, but a complete replacement of the original boards in the train. That turns a technically outdated model back into an up-to-date ICE 3 which fits into modern digital layouts without trouble. Analogue trains too can be run digitally for the first time this way, while older decoders can be replaced with current technology.\nDespite the many ICE 3 versions Märklin have produced over the years, the train is built on a very uniform platform. That is exactly what we take advantage of: our boards are designed so that they can be used in all Märklin ICE 3 versions, regardless of the year of manufacture or the original equipment. The conversion is clean, with no makeshift solutions and no compromises in operational reliability.\nThe result is an ICE 3 that convinces visually, is technically up to date and serves reliably on modern, RailCom®-capable digital layouts too, whether it is an old collector's piece or a long-standing resident of the layout.\nFeatures of the LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-ST), LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M and -S\nA precisely fitting replacement for the original boards A 21-pin MTC interface for modern decoders Support for modern RailCom®-capable digital layouts Power-saving LED technology with even illumination One system for all Märklin and Trix ICE 3 versions, regardless of the year of manufacture Better illumination, especially in the driving trailers\n1. A short introduction to the boards, and connection information\nIn our shop you can choose between individual boards and sets; in detail we explain the following boards:\n1. The LoDi-WiB ICE3-M for the compartment coaches\n2. The LoDi-WiB ICE3-St for the driving trailers\n3. The power car board LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M (-S), where the S stands for pickup changeover.\nThe layout, and where which wires have to be connected. Here you will now find the list of article numbers of the Märklin and Trix ICE 3 our board can be run with. If your article number is not among them, do get in touch with us.\nThe LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE3-M(-ST) fits the following Märklin® coaches, power cars and driving trailers:\nMärklin 34780 – ICE 3M electric multiple unit, class 406 Märklin 37780 – ICE 3, class 406 Märklin 37781 – ICE 3M export model (Netherlands) Märklin 37783 – ICE 3, class 403 Märklin 37785 – ICE 3MF \"VfB Stuttgart\" Märklin 37786 – ICE 3MF class 406 Märklin 37788 – ICE 3, class 403 Märklin 37789 – ICE 3MF transparent Märklin 37784 – ICE 3 Railbow Trix 22784 – ICE 3 Railbow Trix 22300 – ICE 3, class 406 NS, 5-part\nAs well as the add-on coaches:\nMärklin 43734, 43737, 43746, 43747, 43735, 43736, 43716, 43744, 43747, 43737, 43717, 43739, 43727 Trix 23391,\nThe ICE 3 driving trailers. The LoDi-WiB ICE3-M-St was developed specifically for the driving trailer of the ICE 3. It is made to fit exactly and can be installed in a few steps.\nBecause it is longer than the board originally fitted, the front part of the train is lit evenly as well, which makes for a noticeably more coherent light picture.\nThe arrangement of the wires has not changed, so no wires in the train have to be altered.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — The power car board LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M (-S), where the S stands for pickup changeover.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — The power car board LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M (-S), where the S stands for pickup changeover.\nThe compartment coaches. Compared with the original board, the LoDi-WiB ICE3-M is noticeably narrower. The arrangement of the LEDs is adjusted so that even and ideal illumination of the coach interior is achieved. Here too nothing has to be changed in the coupling wiring.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — The power car board LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M (-S), where the S stands for pickup changeover.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — The power car board LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M (-S), where the S stands for pickup changeover.\nThe power car board. The LoDi-Motor-WiB ICE3-M(-S) replaces the original power car board completely and extends the Märklin ICE 3 with modern decoder technology as well as flexible, up-to-date lighting functions.\nSuits all common ICE 3 models from Märklin and Trix A 21-pin MTC interface for modern locomotive decoders A prepared loudspeaker connection on the board Available optionally with a relay for the pickup changeover (the LoDi-Motor-WiB ICE3-M-S version) Lighting on both sides of the on-board restaurant Separately switchable interior lighting for the bistro and the coaches Support for the polarity-reversing circuit of older ICE 3 models for the front lighting Alternatively usable with the direct negative switching of the front lighting on modern versions (the lighting logic is switched over with solder bridges)\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — The power car board LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M (-S), where the S stands for pickup changeover.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — The power car board LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M (-S), where the S stands for pickup changeover.\n2. Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\nIf you can solder and have already lit one coach or another, the conversion should come easily to you. If you are a beginner, however, or do not feel up to a conversion, do get in touch with our partners and have them draw up an individual offer for you.\nYou can carry out the conversion yourself?\nThen start with these instructions.\nYou will need:\na soldering iron with a fine tip, and solder, a cross-head screwdriver and a pair of tweezers, a small, fine pair of side cutters as well as, if available, a wire stripper for fine cores, superglue, to fix the boards or the cable holder lightly in place.\nYou can start the pictures as a small slideshow and enlarge them for a detailed view.\nWe will guide you step by step through a successful coach conversion with this description. If you notice while converting that steps or information are missing, do get in touch with us or visit our forum.\nThe driving trailers, the LoDi-WiB ICE3-M-St. We now start with the driving trailer; as a rule there are two of them to do.\nFor practised hands these should be converted in less than 10 minutes.\nYou need the LoDi-WiB ICE3-M-St for the conversion.\nAlways keep this in mind when converting!\nIf you are also gluing figures in and/or working with superglue to fix things, do not fit the coach roofs back onto the coaches straight away.\nSuperglue needs at least 1–2 hours to outgas completely.\nOtherwise this could lead to milky or tarnished glazing.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\nThe coaches are not screwed together — neither the compartment coach, nor the driving trailer, nor the power car.\nThe body is held solely by latching lugs.\nTo open it, pull the body outwards a little at the bottom, carefully. Then start at one side of the coach and release the lower part from the upper body step by step. On the driving trailer the body has to be pulled off towards the rear.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\nFirst the original board has to be removed. In our example it is still a board with filament bulbs. You can recognise it by the light guide mounted directly on the board. Your board may look somewhat different, but the basic principle is always the same.\nAs the first step we remove the light guide. It is merely clipped into the board and can be carefully released.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\nOn the driving trailer the wires are soldered both on the top and, on the coupling side, underneath — directly beneath the light guide.\nWe start by unsoldering the wires on the top of the board one after another, and then release the wires on the coupling side of the old board beneath the light guide.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\nNow lay the LoDi-WiB ICE3-M-St into the coach. On our boards all the wires are soldered on the top. The board sits exactly in the coach, but can be fixed additionally with a small drop of superglue if needed.\nThe wires are then soldered to the board on both sides according to the given wire colours.\nIf the original front lighting is kept, either the brown-green or the brown-red wire is left unsoldered at the front end.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\nWe also offer matching front lighting for the ICE 3 as a replacement. You will find it in our shop under \"ICE 3 Märklin\".\nFitting the front lighting is very simple and can be done straight away at this stage. To do that, first remove the old lighting. Open the seating unit at the front of the train as well as the lower part of the coach. The seats do not have to be taken out completely, since the old lighting is easy to reach and can be pulled out.\nDepending on the version, two or three wires are soldered to the old lighting. In the normal version we do not use the high beam, since that channel is used for the interior lighting.\nConnect the orange wire to VCC and the purple wire to red or white. There are two jumper bridges.\nIf you are using the original Märklin motor board, jumpers have to be set at JP1 and JP2.\nThe LoDi-Motor-WiB ICE2-M, by contrast, can be run to the DCC standard or through polarity reversal as used originally by Märklin. We still recommend using polarity reversal, that is closing jumpers JP1 and JP2. CAREFUL: the front lighting has no series resistors. Bear that in mind when connecting the board. If you use the LoDi conversion set for the ICE 3, the series resistors are directly on the driving trailer board.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\nOnce you have fitted the LoDi-WiB ICE3-M-St, the coach roof can be put back onto the driving trailer. Start by placing the roof at the end of the coach with the cab and then press it in carefully all round until it has latched fully.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\nOn the driving trailer the original front lighting is run through a polarity-reversing circuit. There are versions in which a high beam can be switched as well. That function is no longer available with our boards, since the control line needed for it is deliberately used for switching the interior lighting.\nWe will be offering front lighting of our own shortly. In keeping with the prototype, it will be fitted with warm white rather than yellow LEDs.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\nThe compartment coaches, the LoDi-WiB ICE3-M\nThe compartment coaches are converted much like the driving trailer, and the conversion is done in a few steps. We proceed as follows:\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\nRemove the coach roof as on the driving trailer, by carefully easing the coach body apart a little at the bottom. Start at one side of the coach and release the lid step by step until the roof is completely separated from the coach.\nThen remove the light guide from the board to get access to the wires and be able to unsolder them.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\nNow lay the LoDi-WiB ICE3-M into the coach. The board is somewhat narrower than the original version, but fits the existing holder exactly. If needed you can fix the board additionally with two small drops of superglue.\nThen solder the wires back on. Observe the given wire colours. Depending on the train or coach, the green-brown wire may also be green-red or in another colour combination.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\nSome newer models of the coaches already have LEDs fitted from the factory. That lighting can of course be kept. Anyone wanting more uniform and harmonious illumination can nevertheless swap the original board for the LoDi-WiB ICE3M.\nThe conversion is the same as described above, except that there is no light guide here.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\nFitting a buffer capacitor\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards\nOn the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-St) there is a connection for a buffer capacitor, C1 or C2.\nThere you can connect a buffer capacitor from 100 µF at 25 or 35 volts. You will get the best result with a 330 µF 25-volt capacitor.\nThe LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-St) has a charging circuit for gentle charging. That way your booster does not go straight into a short circuit when switched on.\n2. Installing the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M(-S)\nAs mentioned already, Märklin make the ICE 3 in a great many different generations and designs. Fundamentally, though, the power car is relatively easy to convert on every version.\nThe only slightly greater effort is that the motor has to be taken out. Two suppression capacitors are connected directly at the motor, running from motor + and motor − to the locomotive body and thus to the track ground. These capacitors have to be removed, since they would otherwise impair the RailCom signal. In that case either RailCom information could be lost, or faulty signals would be sent back to the track.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M(-S)\nFirst we open the power car; like the other coaches it is bent apart a little from below and lifted out of the body from underneath.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M(-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M(-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M(-S)\nYou should now see the large decoder board fitted originally (different on Trix, with an 8-pin interface).\nThis board is removed completely. It is fixed with two cross-head screws. Turn it over; on one side there is a light guide beneath which the wires are led into the board. Like on the other coaches, this light guide also has to be removed. Now unsolder all the wires from the board.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M(-S)\nUnderneath, the motor wires — the green and blue ones — are soldered to the original board. They now have to be removed from the board as well.\nConverting the motor. Now we come to the slightly more demanding part of the conversion: the motor has to be taken out to get at the suppression capacitors.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M(-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M(-S)\nTo reach the motor, the plastic interior fittings first have to be taken out. That is easiest with a small screwdriver, with which the retaining lugs are pressed in carefully so the plastic part can be taken out.\nTake care that the coupling then hangs free. There is a small spring there which can come loose easily and likes to disappear unnoticed, usually never to be found again 🙂\nOnce you have removed the body, 6 cross-head (Phillips) screws have to be undone.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M(-S)\nAfter that the metal part can be taken out, revealing the motor beneath it. It merely lies loose in the frame and can now be carefully lifted out.\nTake care that the cardan shafts to the bogies can slide out with it. They have to be threaded back in correctly later. In any case a function test should be carried out afterwards. If necessary, the cardan shafts can also be fitted back into the bogies from below.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M(-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M(-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M(-S)\nTo isolate the motor from the track ground, the capacitors on the motor board have to be adjusted. There are three capacitors on the motor board in total. Of these, C2 and C3 have to be removed. C1 and the black chokes may stay on the board.\nOnce the capacitors are removed, the motor is put back into its holder and the cardan shafts reconnected. Then place the metal housing back onto the motor and screw it down with the six cross-head screws.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M(-S)\nNow the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M can be fitted. Start with the motor wires and solder them to the solder points marked for them.\nThe board only fits into the power car one way round. Like the original, it is later fixed with 2 cross-head screws.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M(-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M(-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M(-S)\nOnce the board is fixed, the wires on the right and left sides can be connected as marked.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M(-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M(-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M(-S)\nNow let us turn to the solder bridges. Depending on the front lighting fitted in the train, the matching solder bridge has to be set.\nThere is a simple way of telling which kind of front lighting is fitted in your ICE 3.\nYellow/red front lighting (1): if the front lighting of your ICE 3 is yellow/red, solder bridges Gelb_Front 1–4 have to be set on the board. (That is a polarity-reversing circuit as used in all older models up to about 2015.)\nWhite/red front lighting (2): if the ICE 3 already has white/red front lighting, solder bridges Front_R_Weiß, Front_R_Rot, Front_L_Weiß and Front_L_Rot have to be set.\n(Usually on newer trains, mostly with an mfx decoder.)\n!!! CAREFUL !!!\nOnly the matching solder bridges may be set. On no account may all the solder bridges be set at the same time, as that will destroy the locomotive decoder.\n!!! CAREFUL !!!\nFor our build we now use an ESU LokPilot 5; it has to be a decoder without amplified AUX 3 and 4, so not an MKL. The function mapping of the AUX outputs is as follows: F0 = red/white directional lighting, AUX 1 = pickup changeover position 1\nAUX 2 = pickup changeover position 2\nAUX 3 = output for the coach lighting, total load 1.5 amperes. AUX 4 = output for the on-board bistro light. The decoder can be programmed in the power car.\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M(-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-St) — Installing the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M(-S)\n3. Technical data\nDimensions of the LoDi-WiB ICE3-M: length 242 mm, width 18 mm, thickness 1.55 mm. Weight: 16 grams. Suitable for digital and analogue AC operation.\nFrom 7 to 24 volts.\nDimensions of the LoDi-WiB ICE3-M-St: length 215 mm, width 23 mm, thickness 1.55 mm. Weight: 18 grams. Suitable for digital and analogue AC operation.\nFrom 7 to 24 volts.\nDimensions of the LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE3-M-S: length 239 mm, width 23.5 mm, thickness 1.55 mm. Weight: 25 grams, or 27 grams for the (-S) version.\nSuitable for digital operation.\nFrom 7 to 24 volts.\nThe LoDi-Motor ICE3-M(-S) has a standard 21-pin MTC interface and can be fitted with all common locomotive or function decoders with a 21-pin interface.\nManual for LoDi lighting WiB ICE 3 PDF, 1.6 MB","LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE3-M(-St)","Features of the LoDi-WiB ICE3-M(-ST), LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M and -S","1. A short introduction to the boards, and connection information","1. The LoDi-WiB ICE3-M for the compartment coaches","2. The LoDi-WiB ICE3-St for the driving trailers","3. The power car board LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M (-S), where the S stands for pickup changeover.","2. Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE3 boards","2. Installing the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE3-M(-S)","sw-lodi-s88-commander","software/lodi-s88-commander","LoDi-S88-Commander LX","The LoDi-S88-Commander LX is the link between the feedback modules and the model railway software. Like the LoDi-Rektor or the LoDi-Shift-Commander, it was developed for the highest efficiency in use. Thanks to today's 32-bit dual-core processor it is more powerful than ever.",[319,356,320,524,525,526,527,528,529,530],"Settings and firmware update\nThe LoDi-S88-Commander LX is the link between the feedback modules and the model railway software. Like the LoDi-Rektor or the LoDi-Shift-Commander, it was developed for the highest efficiency in use. Thanks to today's 32-bit dual-core processor it is more powerful than ever.\nThe LoDi-S88-Commander LX serves two S88.2 buses, each of which can be fitted with 48 16-way feedback modules. It is fully backwards compatible with the previous S88 and S88N.\nAll devices belonging to the LoDi-S88-Commander LX are marked in blue. That principle is applied in the device tree as well.\nThis information page applies to the S88-Commander and the S88-Commander LX.\n1. The overview\n LoDi-S88-Commander LX — The overview\nThe device editor of the LoDi-S88-Commander LX contains the following areas:\nS88 settings: determines the behaviour of the S88 bus and of the occupancy messages; beyond that, with a LoDi-8-GBM-P connected, the rain mode can be enabled here as well as QoS or the speeds run. Network settings: setting the IP address, using DHCP, enabling Wi-Fi. Firmware: updating the LoDi-S88-Commander LX's firmware\nNetwork settings\nSee the network settings in the section Commissioning LoDi devices.\n2. The device editor\nS88 settings\nBus configuration: determines the behaviour of the S88 bus. The following settings are possible: Merge buses 1 and 2 by address: the two S88 bus connections are shown as one bus. The LoDi-S88-Commander proceeds as follows: The addresses of the LoDi feedback modules are used. All other feedback modules get their S88 address from their order on the bus. The addresses of all the modules on bus 1 are assigned first, then those of all the modules on bus 2. Separate buses 1 and 2: the two buses are shown separately and there are no changes to the addresses. (Only on old versions of the LoDi-S88-Commander) µCon S88-Master compatibility mode: in this mode the LoDi-S88-Commander behaves like the µCon S88-Master from LSdigital. This mode allows the LoDi-S88-Commander to be run with older model railway control software.\nFast: the highest speed Normal: the speed defined by the S88 standard Slow: slower than the S88 standard\nNone: the occupancy message is passed on immediately Short (100 ms): the occupancy message has to be active for 100 ms before it is passed on. Medium (1 s): the occupancy message has to be active for 1 s before it is passed on. Long (2.5 s): the occupancy message has to be active for 2.5 s before it is passed on.\nAll settings are applied by pressing the \"Anwenden\" button. The device then restarts.\n3. The device tree\n LoDi-S88-Commander LX — The device tree\nThe LoDi-S88-Commander LX collects the signals from the occupancy detectors and passes them on to the model railway control software.\nAll devices belonging to the LoDi-S88-Commander LX are marked in blue. That principle is applied in the device tree as well.\nThe LoDi-S88-Commander LX is shown in the device tree as follows:\nLoDi-S88-Commander LX: this is where the LoDi-S88-Commander LX's device and network settings live S88 bus: the S88 bus serves the connected occupancy detectors. The context menu contains the item \"Module Suchen\". It lets the S88 bus be scanned for new devices. Occupancy detectors: below the S88 bus, the occupancy detectors found are shown in address order.\nTo open the settings for a device, bus 1 or bus 2, it is enough to click the corresponding entry in the device tree. The corresponding dialogue opens in the main area.\nTo get an overview of which device is behind which entry, you can hold the mouse over the entry in the device tree for a few seconds. The device is then shown with its picture as a tooltip.\n4. The S88.2 bus\n LoDi-S88-Commander LX — The S88.2 bus\nThe S88.2 bus dialogue shows all the devices connected to the S88.2 bus. It is divided into two areas:\nThe upper area serves to programme the S88.2 address and the module name of LoDi feedback modules. In the lower area the modules found on the S88.2 bus are shown in a table. Module name: the name assigned to the occupancy detector Address: the occupancy detector's current address Status: shows the status of all the occupancy detector's channels. On a LoDi-8-GBM occupancy detector, the upper 8 short-circuit reporting channels are shown in red so they can be told apart more easily.\nThe S88.2 bus dialogue lets you change the S88.2 addresses of the connected LoDi occupancy detectors. Proceed as follows:\nEnter an S88.2 address and a module name. The module name may be 16 characters long. Press the \"Prog.\" button on the LoDi occupancy detector to be programmed for at least 3 seconds. The current address is shown flashing in the LoDi occupancy detector's display. Now press the \"Anwenden\" button.\nA version number is also shown for every module. Every module has its own firmware version shown. If an update is available, that is shown in the overview as well.\n5. Firmware update\nFrom the LoDi-ProgrammerFX 2025.01 onwards there is an online updater for the devices' firmware. We show you here how to install firmware.\n LoDi-S88-Commander LX — Firmware update\n LoDi-S88-Commander LX — Firmware update\n LoDi-S88-Commander LX — Firmware update\n LoDi-S88-Commander LX — Firmware update\nFirst click the device that is to be updated, in this case the LoDi-S88-Commander LX (1). A new menu item now appears in the bar at the top: \"Online-Update\".\nThe update dialogue opens and the server automatically searches for available updates.\nThen select the newest version shown (3) and click Install update (4). In the next dialogue the currently installed version and the version to be installed are shown to you once more.\nConfirm the process by clicking OK to start the update. Once the update is finished, the device restarts automatically. If the current version is already installed, the LoDi-ProgrammerFX will say so.\n6. Resetting the device\nThe LoDi-S88-Commander LX can be reset to its factory settings if, for instance, the IP address has been changed and DHCP is disabled in the device. Or if you generally want to put the device back into its as-delivered state, that is possible with the Prog. IP button. Press the button for 11 seconds; the device restarts and is then in its as-delivered state.\n7. Occupancy detectors\nSee LoDi-8-GBM, LoDi-8-GBM-P and LoDi-RM-16+.\n LoDi-S88-Commander LX — Occupancy detectors\n LoDi-S88-Commander LX — Occupancy detectors\n LoDi-S88-Commander LX — Occupancy detectors\n LoDi-S88-Commander LX — Occupancy detectors\nAny questions still open?\nWould you simply like to ask us in person?\nOr go to our forum, where experienced users are glad to help you further.\ninfo@lokstoredigital.de","2. The device editor","S88 settings","3. The device tree","4. The S88.2 bus","5. Firmware update","6. Resetting the device","7. Occupancy detectors","con-zentrale-ecos","lodi-con/command-stations/ecos","ESU ECoS","Setting up the ECoS in the LoDi-Con.",[537],"The ECoS and the LoDi-Con :)\n lodi-con-zentrale-ecos-01-be5e5b.png\nAs one of the first network-capable command stations on the market, the ECoS is now supported by the LoDi-Con too — and setting it up could hardly be simpler.\nIn this guide we show you step by step how to connect the LoDi-Con to the ESU ECoS command station.\nThe ECoS has to be on the same network as the LoDi-Con, so make sure both devices are on it. If you have questions about that, do get in touch or visit our LoDi forum.\n lodi-con-zentrale-ecos-02-59cb08.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-ecos-03-7e3538.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-ecos-04-e515ab.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-ecos-05-5f59c3.png\nFirst tap the \"house\"; this icon always takes you back to the main screen.\nThere press Settings > Command station >\nFrom there go to Settings > Command station >\n lodi-con-zentrale-ecos-06-87c0a0.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-ecos-07-cdc7d1.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-ecos-08-90c96e.png\nNow select the station that was found and give it a name. Confirm with the \"green tick\".\n(Devices already shown in green in the \"Search for command stations\" overview are known to the LoDi-Con.)\n(To be able to use the LoDi-Con as a controller for the ECoS, you have to tick \"Allow another controller to take over a locomotive\" in the ECoS under Setup1 > Driving + switching.)\n lodi-con-zentrale-ecos-09-5fddc1.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-ecos-10-3ff840.png\nThe LoDi-Con now connects to the ECoS.\nEvery connected command station is now shown in the top left corner of the display.\nIf everything has worked so far, a new ECS symbol now appears at the top left. If that ECS is steady, the connection is up. If it blinks, the LoDi-Con could not reach the ECoS, or it is trying to establish a connection.\nTapping the top left takes you to the overview of command stations, which also shows whether the connection is active or not. If there are several stations, select the ECoS here. You can also check whether a connection exists and call up the version number, the IP address and the UDP port.\n lodi-con-zentrale-ecos-11-49e030.png\nAs soon as the LoDi-Con has established a connection to the ECoS, the locomotives and accessories are shown on the LoDi-Con directly. Those articles are not stored on the LoDi-Con, but locomotives and accessories can be created on it at any time; those stay on the LoDi-Con permanently and are created on the ECoS as well.\n\n lodi-con-zentrale-ecos-13-757ec8.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-ecos-14-073dbc.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","The ECoS and the LoDi-Con :)","con-04-mehrfachtraktion","lodi-con/multiple-traction","Multiple traction","Combining two or more locomotives into one consist and driving them together.",[],"The LoDi-Con makes it easy to form multiple traction with up to 6 other locomotives.\nEvery locomotive function can be shown at the same time!\n lodi-con-04-mehrfachtraktion-01-0f326a.png\n lodi-con-04-mehrfachtraktion-02-611f61.png\nTo form multiple traction, first select the lead locomotive. Then tap the \"spanner\" at the top right to reach the locomotive properties.\nSwipe down until you reach \"Multiple traction\".\n lodi-con-04-mehrfachtraktion-03-03cfb4.png\n lodi-con-04-mehrfachtraktion-04-4a3dbf.png\n lodi-con-04-mehrfachtraktion-05-92b118.png\nYou are now in the menu where you can bring a locomotive from the database into the consist.\nAs soon as you have chosen the other locomotive, it appears in the multiple traction overview.\nThis menu lets you adjust the direction of travel of every locomotive in the consist.\n lodi-con-04-mehrfachtraktion-06-7b88bf.png\n lodi-con-04-mehrfachtraktion-07-c6c6db.png\nWhen you switch back to the locomotive overview, another DCC address appears in the bar at the bottom in a different colour. That is the second locomotive in the consist. The locomotive functions of the attached locomotive are shown with a blue outline as well.\nYou therefore have immediate access to every function in the consist.\nFurther locomotives added are given further colours. To reach every function, swipe down.\n lodi-con-04-mehrfachtraktion-08-5af369.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","api-ucon-bus","api/ucon-bus","µCon bus","The bus the LoDi devices use to talk to each other.",[550,551,552,553,554,555,556],"General\nThe µCon bus is built as a current loop. Every device on it sends and receives on the same line. Transmission is half duplex, so only one transmitter may ever be active.\nTransmission uses UART at a baud rate of 65200 baud, 8n1.\nThe checksum (CRC) is the XOR of every preceding byte.\nBus timing\nThe bus timing is set by the LoDi-Rektor. It also sends every command. A µCon device may only transmit once it has been addressed, and the answer has to come within 600 µs.\nCommands that need no answer are sent twice, with a gap of 600 µs between the two packets.\nIf a slave does not know a command, or was not addressed, it has to ignore every byte that follows until a pause of 300 µs is detected in the data stream.\nPacket needing no answer\nRektor write \nRektor data Header Addr 0..n x data CRC Header Addr 0..n x data CRC \nTime 600µs 26µs 160µs 160µs 0..n x 160µs 160µs 600µs 160µs 160µs 0..n x 160µs 160µs \nPacket needing an answer\nRektor write \nRektor data Header Addr n x data CRC \nSlave write \nSlave data Header Addr n x data CRC\nTime 600µs 26µs 160µs 160µs n x 160µs 160µs <600µs 26µs 160µs 160µs n x 160µs 160µs\nGeneral commands\nGeneral commands have to be understood and answered by every µCon device, although the answer may differ from device to device.\nµCon Read Version\nThis command is sent by the LoDi-Rektor to identify a device newly detected on the bus.\nThe LoDi-Rektor sends:\nHeader Addr CRC\n0xB0 1..63 0x00 .. 0xFF\nAn addressed device answers:\nHeader Addr Device type Major Minor CRC\n0xB1 1..63 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0x00 .. 0xFF\nDevice type:\n0x01: µCon-Booster 0x02: µCon-Railspeed 0x03: LoDi-Booster 0x04: LoDi-CDE 0x05: LoDi-TrainSpeed 0x06: LoDi-Booster 10A 0x07: LoDi-Booster 20A 0x08: LoDi-DC-Car-Booster\nµCon Device-Poll\nThis command is sent onto the bus by the LoDi-Rektor at regular intervals for every device address. An addressed µCon device has to answer it. That is how changes on the bus are detected.\nThe LoDi-Rektor sends:\nHeader Addr CRC\n0xE1 1..63 0x00 .. 0xFF\nAn addressed booster answers:\nHeader Addr Status Current 1 Current 2 CRC\n0xF2 1..63 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0x00 .. 0xFF\nThe status is bit-coded.","General","Bus timing","Packet needing no answer","Packet needing an answer","General commands","µCon Read Version","µCon Device-Poll","lodi-booster-10a","hardware/driving/lodi-booster-10a","LoDi-Booster 10A","Booster with 10 amperes continuous for large scales, RailCom capable, power supply included.",[563,564,565,566,451,452,453,454,455,456,567,568]," LoDi-Booster 10A\nWhen it may be a little bit more...\nDepending on how large your layout is, enough current has to be provided. Not only that — ideally you should also have some short-circuit logic, so that a single short does not take the whole layout down.\nWe have many years of experience with these amplifiers in small layouts, large layouts and show layouts, and can now present our LoDi-Booster 10A. The booster for every scale from 0 upwards.\nA perfect fit for garden railways!\nA powerhouse delivering 10 amperes of output current, with a high-quality, powerful supply included.\nA small update at the end of 2025: the programming button was moved to the front; nothing else about the device changes :)\nFeatures of the LoDi-Booster 10A\nIt supplies the current needed to run the digitally controlled locomotives and the turnouts, as well as every other consumer on the layout. In the event of a short circuit on the layout (caused by a derailed coach or locomotive, for instance) the booster cuts the power to the layout to prevent further damage to the rails or the rolling stock. Thanks to the built-in intelligence of the LoDi-Booster 10A, only the affected sections are switched off in the event of a short, and this is reported back to the control software in use. The rest of the layout can keep running without risk of damage to the rolling stock. The LoDi-Booster 10A has one output channel with a double screw terminal for easy wiring. (If you need more, you have to connect a corresponding number of further LoDi-Booster 10A units to secure the supply.) On layouts monitored with RailCom, the LoDi-Booster provides the RailCom cutout, which carries the RailCom return channel. Straightforward configuration through the LoDi-Programmer.\n1. The LoDi-Booster 10A and its connections\nLike its smaller brother, the LoDi-Booster 10A works with the LoDi bus (formerly µCon bus). The LoDi-Rektor is needed as the booster command station. (The LoDi-Booster 10A can no longer be run with the µCon-Manager.)\nThe booster has the following connections:\n(1) Programming button: every booster has its own address through which it is addressed on the bus. To set a new address the button has to be pressed first. The address is then assigned through the commissioning software LoDi-ProgrammerFX or the LoDi-Con. (From the late-2025 version the programming button is at the front of the device.) (2) LoDi bus input: the LoDi bus is fed into this socket. LoDi bus OUT: further LoDi and µCon components connect here. The output supplies power for the LoDi-CV-Programmer and the LoDi-TrainSpeed. (3) Track output A: the track output can carry 10 amperes continuously, with a peak of 11.8 amperes. (4) Connection for the supplied power supply: (please use only the supplied power supply! Lokstoredigital accepts no liability for damage caused by other power supplies, and the warranty is void in that case.)\n LoDi-Booster 10A — The LoDi-Booster 10A and its connections\n LoDi-Booster 10A — The LoDi-Booster 10A and its connections\n2. LEDs and programming button of the LoDi-Booster\nThe LED indicators on the LoDi-Booster give you information that helps with troubleshooting and with setting the device up.\n(2) BUS LED = shows the state of the LoDi bus. When the bus signal is detected, the LED lights with a short pulsing interruption. (2) DCC LED = this LED is lit continuously as soon as the booster receives a signal over the bus — DCC, Motorola or M3 alike. If no bus cable is plugged in, or the LoDi-Rektor is switched off, the DCC LED flashes rapidly. (3) Short on track A = this LED indicates a short circuit at the booster output. As soon as a short is detected, the LED starts to flash. (3) On for track A = as soon as this LED is lit at the output, the output stage in the booster is active, meaning power is present at that output. (1) Prog. button = there is a prog. button on the booster (older version at the back; from late 2025 at the front, to the right of the power connector). It switches the booster, or rather its output stages, on and off.\n LoDi-Booster 10A — LEDs and programming button of the LoDi-Booster\nA short tap of the button switches the track outputs off and on again. The ON LED for track A goes out or lights up accordingly.\nThe prog. button is also used to programme the address. The LoDi bus provides 63 addresses. Held for more than 3 seconds, the bus and DCC LEDs flash red and green alternately. This can be interrupted by pressing the button again, or it ends when a new address is sent to the LoDi-Booster 10A over the LoDi bus. Once the LoDi-Booster 10A understands the signal, programming ends and it returns to normal operation.\n3. The fan on the LoDi-Booster\n LoDi-Booster 10A — The fan on the LoDi-Booster\nThe LoDi-Booster 10A has a built-in fan. This fan is controlled by temperature and load. As soon as the temperature inside the device rises, or current is drawn at the output, the fan automatically speeds up and slows down.\nThe fan never stops entirely; it keeps turning at low speed even when idle.\nPlease make sure that no objects get inside the device through the slots. Screws and the like could cause an internal short circuit and destroy the device.\nThe ventilation grille protects against the spinning fan.\nThe booster should be mounted so that the warm air can flow through it. Allow enough space for the air coming in and going out; 5 cm of clearance on each side is enough.\nThe air is pushed through the device from right to left.\n4. Connecting a power supply\n LoDi-Booster 10A — Connecting a power supply\nThe LoDi-Booster 10A is delivered with a high-quality Meanwell power supply. This unit has been tested for use with the LoDi-Booster 10A.\nPlease do not use other power supplies of unclear origin.\nImproper use of power supplies can damage the electronics.\nA mains cable is included in the delivery as well.\nThe power supplies are available in the following voltages:\n20 volts = for gauge 1, G, 0, H0 (Märklin)\nAt the stated voltage the power supply provides the following current:\n20 volts = 11.8 amperes\n5. Connecting to the LoDi bus\n LoDi-Booster 10A — Connecting to the LoDi bus\nThe LoDi bus (formerly µCon bus) is a bus developed specifically for boosters, to cover long distances without losing the data signal. You can connect 63 LoDi bus components in total to the LoDi-Rektor.\nThe bus is open and can be downloaded straight from our website by developers.\nDevices on the LoDi bus have to be plugged in one after another; the bus does not allow for a star topology.\nThe following example shows how the booster is supplied with information by the LoDi-Rektor.\nIn this case the LoDi-Rektor provides the data for the booster and sends it over the LoDi bus.\nBeyond that, the LoDi-Booster 10A can also deliver data to the LoDi-Rektor and thus to the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\nThat data can include current measurement per channel, voltage measurement, short on A, and device temperatures.\nBesides the various short-circuit sensitivities, the address can also be set on the booster through the LoDi-Rektor with the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\nThe RailCom cutout can be switched off on the LoDi-Booster. You will find more on that in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX section.\nThe LoDi bus can manage 63 devices in total, and the patch cables may run to more than 1500 metres. On garden railways in particular that makes it very neat to create individual booster stations.\nThe LoDi-Booster can also be hung on the bus, where it can supply the current for switching turnouts, for instance. CAREFUL! The LoDi-Booster and the LoDi-Booster 10A must not be used mixed together for running trains. With its power, the LoDi-Booster 10A would destroy the smaller LoDi-Booster.\n LoDi-Booster 10A — Connecting to the LoDi bus\n6. Connecting to the track\n10 amperes is of course a great deal of power. With the 10 ampere version in particular, sufficient cable cross-section is therefore essential. We recommend never going below 0.75 mm².\n LoDi-Booster 10A — Connecting to the track\nOn the LoDi-Booster 10A we use a double terminal. It carries the common twice on the left and the positive conductor twice on the right.\nWith the LoDi-Booster 10A the commons may be joined through the track.\n LoDi-Booster 10A — Connecting to the track\n7. Connecting to the track through feedback modules\nThe LoDi-Booster 10A is an excellent match for feedback modules that are RailCom capable. In this example we take the LoDi-8-GBM-P, a RailCom capable feedback module that can carry 10 amperes per channel.\n LoDi-Booster 10A — Connecting to the track through feedback modules\nThe diagram shown here has two feedback modules, each connected to one of the booster's double outputs. The cable cross-section should not be below 0.75 mm². There is no separation of the common here; that is not important with the LoDi system, but it can be done if you wish.\nPlease note that you need feedback modules that can take the booster's load. In this case the module has to carry 10 amperes per channel.\nHow many feedback modules you need depends entirely on your layout and on the software you work with. If you need help here, do get in touch with us or with our service partners.\n8. Dividing the layout into booster sections\nWith the intelligent booster system we bring logic to the track, so that a short circuit does not bring the whole layout to a stand. The data is passed to the control software, which then knows where the short happened and holds trains before they enter other booster areas that are shorted or switched off. For that you naturally have to divide up your layout, or rather the track plan. One booster output is available per device. That means you can secure very good logic and operating sequences with only a few units. Here is a small example of a division.\n LoDi-Booster 10A — Dividing the layout into booster sections\nIn this example we use four LoDi-Boosters, which gives us four power sections. The different circuits are colour-coded. If a short is now detected in one of these areas, that is passed to the LoDi-Rektor, which forwards the affected track section to the control software. The rest of the layout keeps running where possible.\n9. Technical data\n LoDi-Booster 10A — Technical data\nThe LoDi-Booster has a total output of 10 A on one output rated at 10 A.\nPeak = 11.8 A\nIt has thermal overload protection, which makes sure the LoDi-Booster 10A takes no damage when overloaded.\nDimensions:\nLength: 130 mm\nWidth: 115 mm\nHeight: 45 mm\nWeight: 225 g\nThis table gives you a rough estimate of the current draw.\n LoDi-Booster 10A — Technical data\n10. Setting up the LoDi-Booster 10A in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nand updating the firmware Here is how to set up the LoDi-Booster\n LoDi-Booster 10A — Setting up the LoDi-Booster 10A in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\n11. LoDi-Booster 10A PDF download\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-Booster 10A hardware and software as a PDF.\nLoDi-Booster 10A manual PDF, 1.5 MB — as of 4 June 2021","Features of the LoDi-Booster 10A","1. The LoDi-Booster 10A and its connections","2. LEDs and programming button of the LoDi-Booster","3. The fan on the LoDi-Booster","10. Setting up the LoDi-Booster 10A in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX","11. LoDi-Booster 10A PDF download","raumlicht","hardware/room-lighting","Room lighting","Control room lighting through the LoDi system.",[575,576,577],"Foreword\nWe offer two different solutions for room lighting.\nIn the beginning we used DMX controllers exclusively for the LED strips.\nThat works well in principle, but we quickly found there was room for improvement. For that reason we developed the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED specifically for the SC bus.\nIt drives the LEDs at 100 Hz with 1024 steps, against the 255 steps of DMX. That makes the light four times smoother to dim than with DMX.\nIn stage technology there is a wealth of equipment driven over DMX. Devices such as moving heads — with which a rising sun or moon can be staged — or a fog machine, laser, strobe and much more can all be driven over DMX.\nIf you are not sure which devices you need, send us a message through our contact form or by email to\nRoom lighting SC\n Room lighting — Room lighting SC\nRoom lighting SC\nThe SC bus based switching system is our own development and is best understood as a high-speed switching bus. The individual devices on this bus are connected to one another with patch cables, and up to 480 switching channels can be driven from a single LoDi-Shift-Commander. Room lighting control — for large rooms as well — is equally straightforward with the SC system.\nRoom lighting DMX\n Room lighting — Room lighting DMX\nRoom lighting DMX\nDMX is the most widely used standard for stage technology and for controlling room lighting.\nDMX Controlling room lighting over DMX.","Foreword","Room lighting SC","Room lighting DMX","lodi-mono-servo-dcc","hardware/switching/dcc-system/lodi-mono-servo-dcc","LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC","A small servo decoder for single servos.",[584,585,586,476,477,587,588,589,482,590,591]," LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC\nSimply a small servo decoder . . . For individual servos, quickly fitted, the\nthe LoDi-Mono-Servo-Dual can also be run without digital voltage, from DC or AC alone. Over RailCom the decoder can be read quickly and its CVs configured.\nFeatures of the LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC\nA single-channel servo decoder for small to medium servos. Connections for external push buttons and LEDs for a signal box panel. The decoder listens to the DCC format and can be read and configured over RailCom. Also usable stand-alone with DC or AC!\n1. The LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC and its connections\n LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC — The LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC and its connections\n(1) Connection to DCC, that is to a booster, feedback module or directly to a command station. (2) Connection for servos with a 3-pin plug. (3) A push button for external operation and external LEDs for position indication can be connected here.\n2. LEDs and button on the LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC\nThe LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC has one LED, which we call INFO. It shows the following status by flashing:\n LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC — LEDs and button on the LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC\n(1) When the DCC signal comes on, the info LED flashes briefly, after which it stays lit. As soon as the decoder receives a valid command for itself, the LED flashes three times briefly. CV requests over RailCom are likewise shown with a triple flash. (2) The button is for programming the DCC base address. It can also be used for manual operation.\n3. Connecting to DCC\nAs mentioned above, the LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC can be connected to several power sources.\nThe first example shows it connected to a LoDi-Booster.\nCAREFUL! For reliable switching of DCC accessories, a separate circuit or booster output should always be used. One booster output can run 40 LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC units. (With decoders that need their own transformer current, the number is over 150 depending on the manufacturer, since the LoDi-Booster then only has to provide the data for the decoder.)\nThe LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC takes the current for switching directly from the booster. As a rule a servo needs no more than 100 mA for small tasks. Because DCC commands are processed one after another, there are no problems with the power provided even with many switching tasks.\n LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC — Connecting to DCC\n4. Connecting the servo\n LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC — Connecting the servo\nIn most cases a servo has a cable with three conductors.\nThese are:\nYellow or orange, which carries the data signal Red, carrying 5 volts, which supplies the servo with the voltage it needs. Black or brown, which carries the servo's common.\nThe colours can differ, however, so check your servo's documentation if you are unsure.\nAt (1) you now see the connection for the servo on the decoder. Negative is at the top. The socket is simply pushed straight onto the decoder's pins. (2) represents the servo.\n LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC — Connecting the servo\n5. CV list and settings\nThe LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC is set through CVs.\nIf you have the LoDi-Rektor with a LoDi-Booster or CDE booster connected, you can write the CVs over PoM (programming on main) with the LoDi-ProgrammerFX from version 2.2.\nThe decoder can equally be programmed with any conventional command station that has a DCC programming output or handles PoM.\nSetting the DCC address: you have now installed the decoder successfully, the DCC cable is plugged in, and the LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC\nnow glows green continuously to show it is ready.\nAs delivered, the decoder responds to turnout or accessory address 1.\nIf you want to change an address quickly, proceed as follows: there is a programming button on the decoder as described above. Press it for 3 seconds. The decoder starts to flash quickly, telling you it is ready for a new address.\nNow send the new address from the control software, directly at a command station or in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX (the LoDi-Rektor is required), in the turnout field under DCC.\nThe decoder takes the address and stops flashing. From now on it is reachable at the address you chose.\nSetting the CVs: as mentioned several times, the LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC can be programmed over PoM (programming on main). In most applications there are three CVs to consider.\n1 × position A = CV 33, value 0–255\n2 × position B = CV 34, value 0–255\n3 × speed = CV 41, the speed at which the servo moves, 0–255\nThese values can be read back later over RailCom.\n6. Stand-alone version\nThanks to the stand-alone version, the decoder can be supplied with ordinary DC up to 20 volts and AC up to 16 volts.\nIt should first receive its information, such as servo positions 1 and 2, from a command station, and the speed should be set.\n LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC — Stand-alone version\n7. Connecting external push buttons\nThe LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC has a button of its own which, as described above, is used to set the digital address. A short tap of the button switches the position between A and B, throwing a turnout manually, for instance.\nIn addition the decoder can be operated through an external button. It makes no difference whether it runs on digital or analogue power.\nThere are four solder pads on the decoder.\nFrom left to right:\n1. GND = common, blue in the diagram.\n2. Aux1 = external button, which has to be switched against the common, black in the diagram.\n3. Aux2 = external LED for position 1 (Aux switches +; a 220 ohm series resistor is also needed).\n4. Aux3 = external LED for position 2 (Aux switches +; a 220 ohm series resistor is also needed).\nInstead of a push button, a toggle switch can be used to change the position. That then has to be set in CV 11.\n LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC — GND = common, blue in the diagram.\n8. Technical data\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length 5.6 cm\nWidth 6.8 cm\nHeight 2.5 cm\nWeight 31 grams\nIn digital operation the decoder can be run at up to 22 volts.\nDo mind the specifications of your command station or booster manufacturer here.\nThe decoder can be run on 20 volts DC or 16 volts AC.\nLoadable by a servo with 1 ampere peak and 400 mA continuous\n9. LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC PDF download\nLoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC manual PDF, 1.3 MB","Features of the LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC","1. The LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC and its connections","2. LEDs and button on the LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC","5. CV list and settings","6. Stand-alone version","7. Connecting external push buttons","8. Technical data","9. LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC PDF download","lodi-operator-4-c-led","hardware/switching/sc-system/lodi-operator-4-c-led","LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED","Room lighting control for small and large layouts alike.",[598,599,600,601,602,603,604,605,606,607,608,609,610,611],"The LoDi-Operator 4-C-LED\n LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED\nWith the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED we developed a device that has no real equal on the market.\nThis decoder is probably the most advanced room lighting decoder there is!\nYears of experience, both good and bad, have shown us how not to do it.\nWe took that as our cue to find a sensible solution that is easy to implement.\nThe result is a well thought-out device that will convince you too.\nFeatures of the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED\nA room lighting controller for the SC bus, for connection to the LoDi-Shift-Commander All outputs work at a frequency of 100 Hz and with 1024 dimming steps, which simulate a realistic sequence. (Other systems manage 255 dimming steps at most.) Four channels with a power of up to 5 amperes per output are available. That means it can carry up to 13 metres of LED strip (with 120 LEDs per metre). All common LED strips with an operating voltage between 12 and 24 volts can be connected to the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED. Manual operation is possible Freely configurable with the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\n LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED — Features of the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED\nVideos of the device\nVideos from partners\nWatch a video of the model railway at the Rothaarsteig.\nOur technology is already in use on that layout.\n \nVideos from customers\n \n1. The LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED and its connections\nThe LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED is a controller optimised for room lighting control with LED strips.\n LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED — The LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED and its connections\n(1) The DC needed for the LED strips is fed in here. ! ! ! CAREFUL, DC ONLY ! ! ! 24 volts maximum ! ! ! (2) This is the output for the individual LED strips. The RGB channels can be loaded with 5 A at most, the W channel with 10 A at most. In total, however, they must not exceed 20 amperes. (3) The SC bus from the LoDi-Shift-Commander is connected at the SC-OUT and SC-IN sockets. More on this in the section on connecting to the SC bus.\n2. LEDs and their display on the LoDi-Light-Controller 4-C-LED\n LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED — LEDs and their display on the LoDi-Light-Controller 4-C-LED\nThe LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED has several LEDs to help you recognise the state of the device and understand any faults more quickly.\n(1) BUS and POWER. The BUS LED lights as soon as the SC bus is plugged in and active. The POWER LED lights as soon as the input terminal is supplied with power. (2) RED, GREEN, BLUE, WHITE. These LEDs show which colour is currently active. That means you can always read off, right at the operator, which colour is currently being driven. (3) Manual operation; more on this at point X\n3. Connecting the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED to the SC bus\n LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED — Connecting the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED to the SC bus\nIn this picture you see the LoDi-Shift-Commander, shown here together with a connected operator.\nThe LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED is connected to SC bus Out 2. 384 channels are available here.\nThe LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED can only be run on bus 2!\nIt takes up 8 channels on the bus.\nThe LoDi-Shift-Commander is able to detect the connected decoders automatically.\nYou can then programme the assignment with our tool, the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nconfigure.\nThe bus has to be terminated at the last operator.\nThat means you always have to plug the terminating plug, called the bus terminator, into the last module.\n LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED — Connecting the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED to the SC bus\nIn this example you now see how the operators can be attached one after another.\nIt is important to take care to connect the network cables correctly. That is, from OUT to IN, as you can see in the picture.\nIn the last example picture you can see an SC bus 1 and 2 taken to their limit. The order of the modules is entirely immaterial here.\nOnly with the LoDi-Light-Controller should you take care that it is connected to bus 2.\nWhat matters is that you integrate a new LoDi-SC-Booster into the system after every 16th module.\n LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED — Connecting the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED to the SC bus\nThe bus length, or rather the number of modules, is very easy to calculate.\nOn bus 1 you have 96 channels available.\nHere you could connect 12 LoDi-Operators 4-WD-DC or AC, for instance, since each module needs 8 channels.\nOn bus 2, 384 channels are available to you. That would be 48 LoDi-Operators 4-WD-AC or DC, LoDi-Light-Controller 4-C-LED or LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL.\nAs you can see, our system lets you work very flexibly.\n4. Connecting the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED to the power supply\nThere are several ways of supplying the LoDi-Light-Operator, depending on the local power demand. For currents up to 8 A we offer a suitable power supply that you can connect yourself.\nFor that we supply an adapter with a cable for connecting directly to the LoDi-Light-Operator.\n(LINK power supply)\nWith 8 amperes you can supply a maximum of 10 metres of LED strip per LoDi-Light-Operator.\n LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED — Connecting the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED to the power supply\nFor higher currents we also supply a power unit up to 20 A, which must however be connected by an authorised specialist, since it has exposed mains terminals.\nWhen using this power supply, cables with larger cross-sections are required on the secondary side because of the current carrying capacity. We recommend using a double cable feed here, each of at least 2 × 1.5 mm², to minimise the voltage drop over longer runs.\nWhen buying, please take care to buy high-quality power supplies; we recommend and stock power supplies from MeanWell.\n!!! Careful !!!\nSince these power supplies use screw terminals with 230 volts on the primary side, this work has to be carried out by qualified personnel. Please get in touch with us, or with your electrician, if you have any questions.\n LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED — Connecting the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED to the power supply\n5. Connecting the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED to the LED strips\nMost LED strips in use only have thin cables fitted at the end. That is usually not enough for proper illumination. From 5 metres onwards the brightness even falls off sharply, so new feed points should be set.\nWith customers we usually use 2 LED strips: first a warm white one with 120 LEDs per metre, and an RGB LED strip, for which 60 LEDs per metre is plenty. We use 12-volt LED strips.\n(This information is only a recommendation. 24-volt LED strips and a matching power supply can of course be used as well.)\nWe also recommend using a cable size of at least 0.75 mm².\n LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED — Connecting the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED to the LED strips\n LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED — Connecting the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED to the LED strips\nSolder the cable directly to the LED strip; it has to be fed in again every 5 metres at the latest.\nA maximum length of 17 metres per LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED is permitted (only with the 20 A power supply).\n LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED — Connecting the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED to the LED strips\nTaken together, the LEDs make LED strips warm (120 LEDs per metre in warm white), so we strongly recommend installing the LED strips on at least an aluminium rail; they can be glued to it very well. The lighting market also offers U-profiles with a frosted cover, which diffracts the LED's light so that you do not look straight into the LED.\nWe also have suitable LEDs and profiles in our shop.\n6. Manual operation\n LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED — Manual operation\nOn the LoDi-Light-Operator there are 4 DIP switches and 2 buttons. They are there for manual operation. If the decoder has just been installed and you want to test it without a Shift-Commander, that is possible with the DIP and button controls.\nThe individual DIP switches are the 4 colours, that is\nred, green, blue and white.\n(Setting it by hand only works if the decoder is not connected to the bus and the DIP switches are at 0 when it is switched on.)\nThen supply the decoder with power, switch one or more DIP switches on and adjust the brightness with S1 and S2.\nIf a LoDi-Shift-Commander is plugged in, manual operation is overridden.\nThe LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED can also work as a stand-alone version. A light curve is already pre-installed. It is also possible to create your own light curve and upload it to the operator so it can then be run independently. To switch to stand-alone mode, the decoder must have no connection to the bus and DIP switches 1 and 4 have to be set.\nThe decoder now runs through its curve without a LoDi-Shift-Commander.\n7. Technical data\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length 8.9 cm\nWidth 10 cm\nHeight 3.5 cm\nWeight 120 grams\nPermitted from 12 to 24 volts DC. (DC ONLY!)\nOutput loading: RGB 5 amperes each, W 10 amperes, no more than 20 amperes in total.\n8. Setting up the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED in the LoDi-Programmer\nHere you can find out how to set up the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED\n LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED — Setting up the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED in the LoDi-Programmer\n9. LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED PDF download\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED hardware and software as a PDF.\nManual for the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED PDF, 1.5 MB","The LoDi-Operator 4-C-LED","Features of the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED","Videos of the device","Videos from partners","Videos from customers","1. The LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED and its connections","2. LEDs and their display on the LoDi-Light-Controller 4-C-LED","3. Connecting the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED to the SC bus","4. Connecting the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED to the power supply","5. Connecting the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED to the LED strips","6. Manual operation","7. Technical data","8. Setting up the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED in the LoDi-Programmer","9. LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED PDF download","lodi-s88-booster","hardware/feedback/lodi-s88-booster","LoDi-S88-Booster","A bus booster for long s88 runs and many participants.",[618,601,619,620,621,622,623,624,625]," LoDi-S88-Booster\nSometimes there simply is not enough current. . .\nThe S88 bus is probably the simplest way of carrying feedback information from the layout to the PC or the command station.\nUnfortunately, with too many modules or cables that are too long, the load on the bus becomes too great and reporting and transmission grow unstable.\nThat is why we developed the LoDi-S88-Booster.\nIt boosts the current, takes in the modules' data and reconditions it in real time, then passes it on cleanly and without degradation to the interface.\nFeatures of the LoDi-S88-Booster\nIt supplies the current needed for further feedback modules or occupancy detectors. Each booster allows another 12 S88 bus components to be run. The LoDi-S88-Booster does not only boost the current; it takes in the data received, refreshes it and drives it out anew. Even larger installations can therefore be run easily. With a power supply, or connected directly to a model railway transformer. Usable with S88.2 and s88N, and through the LoDi-S88 adapter with the old 6-pin s88 bus as well.\nVideos from partners\n \n1. The LoDi-S88-Booster and its connections\n LoDi-S88-Booster — The LoDi-S88-Booster and its connections\nThe LoDi-S88-Booster is needed for larger installations. If the number of modules on a bus exceeds ten, the bus can start to misbehave. A LoDi-S88-Booster should then be inserted.\n(1) The bus coming from the last LoDi-Operator connects here. (2) Here you connect further LoDi-Operators in your system.\n2. LEDs on the LoDi-S88-Booster\n LoDi-S88-Booster — LEDs on the LoDi-S88-Booster\nThe LoDi-S88-Booster has two LEDs to help you read the state of the device and understand faults more quickly.\n(1) S88 IN: the LED lights as soon as the power supply is connected. It signals that the booster is ready and that power is present. (2) S88 OUT: the bus towards the interface connects here. Once that is connected and the interface is running, this LED should be lit.\n3. Connecting the USB power supply\n LoDi-S88-Booster — Connecting the USB power supply\nThe LoDi-S88-Booster is available in two versions.\nThe USB power supply version comes with a high-quality USB supply included.\n4. Connecting a model railway transformer\n LoDi-S88-Booster — Connecting a model railway transformer\nThe LoDi-S88-Booster in the version connected to a model railway transformer.\nHere you have the option of connecting a common model railway transformer to your LoDi-S88-Booster.\nIt can be run on DC or AC. The voltage range is 12–24 volts DC or AC.\n5. Connecting to the S88.2, s88N and s88 bus\nIn the picture you can see the interface; in this example a LoDi-S88-Commander is fitted.\nA different interface can be used just as well. ANY s88 bus can be boosted.\n LoDi-S88-Booster — Connecting to the S88.2, s88N and s88 bus\nThe picture below shows an S88.2 bus fully built out. Depending on the interface and the S88.2, s88N and s88 modules connected, the maximum bus length can vary.\n LoDi-S88-Booster — Connecting to the S88.2, s88N and s88 bus\n6. Technical data\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length 8.9 cm\nWidth 10 cm\nHeight 3.5 cm\nWeight 83 grams\nPermissible from 12 to 24 volts DC or AC.\nLoadable by consumers with 1 ampere.\nThrough the AC/DC terminal on the LoDi-S88-Booster the supply voltage can be carried on to the next decoder. The current may be at most 10 amperes.\n7. LoDi-S88-Booster PDF download\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-S88-Booster as a PDF.\nLoDi-S88-Booster manual PDF, 1.2 MB","Features of the LoDi-S88-Booster","1. The LoDi-S88-Booster and its connections","2. LEDs on the LoDi-S88-Booster","3. Connecting the USB power supply","4. Connecting a model railway transformer","5. Connecting to the S88.2, s88N and s88 bus","6. Technical data","7. LoDi-S88-Booster PDF download","lodi-gleichrichter","hardware/accessories/lodi-gleichrichter","LoDi-Gleichrichter","Time and again, loads come up that should be supplied from a DC source.",[632,633,217]," LoDi-Gleichrichter\nTime and again there are consumers that ought to be fed from a DC source.\nA good example is the LED.\nIt is usually just connected to the transformer through a series resistor. Connected to an AC transformer, however, it flickers.\nWith the LoDi rectifier, motors and DC consumers can be run from an ordinary model railway transformer.\nFeatures of the LoDi rectifier\nA simple rectifier in 1.3 ampere and 3.4 ampere versions. Short-circuit proof Status indicator\n1. The LoDi rectifier and its connections\nThe ordinary model railway transformer, 0–24 volts AC, connects to the IN terminal.\nYour consumers connect to the OUT terminal.\n LoDi-Gleichrichter — The LoDi rectifier and its connections\n LoDi-Gleichrichter — The LoDi rectifier and its connections\n2. Technical data\nDepending on the version, the LoDi rectifier delivers a total output of 1.3 or 3.4 amperes.\nThe output of the LoDi rectifier is short-circuit proof and fully regulated.\n0–24 volt AC or DC input\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length: 45 mm\nWidth 20 mm\nHeight 16 mm at its highest point\nWeight 10 g\n LoDi-Gleichrichter — Technical data\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are glad to help.","Features of the LoDi rectifier","1. The LoDi rectifier and its connections","lodi-wib-ice-m","hardware/lighting/lodi-wib-ice-m","LoDi-WiB ICE-M","Every model railwayer should know the ICE 1 and 2 from Märklin® and Trix®. The younger generation in particular enjoys running it on the layout.",[640,641,642,643,644,645,646,392],"LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE-M\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M\nEvery model railwayer should know the ICE 1 and 2 from Märklin® and Trix®. The younger generation in particular enjoys running it on the layout.\nThat is why we have developed a LoDi-WiB set for the ICE as a retrofit, with a high-quality LED board that can simply be swapped in and can also light the vestibule area, otherwise unlit, through a jumper bridge.\nThe power car can be fitted with a 21-pin decoder.\nThe power car board comes in a version with a loudspeaker fitted for sound and/or a pickup changeover that can be controlled from the decoder.\nFeatures of the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-R) as well as the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M and -S\nSimple installation, optimised for vehicles with full RailCom capability. A precisely fitting design. Adjustable brightness through a potentiometer. The 21-pin MTC standard for connecting any decoder. Economical LED technology with ideal illumination and additional corridor lighting. Prepared for cab lighting on the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M(-S)\nAn installation video from moba-tech\n \n1. The LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE-M (-S) boards and the LoDi-WiB ICE2 St\nIn our shop you can choose between individual LoDi-WiB ICE-M boards for the compartment coaches or the power car board LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M (-S) on its own.\nCompartment coach boards for the coaches as well as for the on-board restaurant.\nHere you see a front and a rear view.\nYou can enlarge the pictures by clicking.\nNew version, mid-2025: from May 2025 we have revised the boards for the coaches and the on-board restaurant. They are now white, so as to reflect the light inside the coach better. The board layout has also been simplified and slightly reduced in size. The connections remain unchanged, which is why a complete revision of the manual was not necessary. SJ1 is dropped in the new version.\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — The LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE-M (-S) boards and the LoDi-WiB ICE2 St\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — The LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE-M (-S) boards and the LoDi-WiB ICE2 St\nThe previous version, from 2020 to early 2025\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — The LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE-M (-S) boards and the LoDi-WiB ICE2 St\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — The LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE-M (-S) boards and the LoDi-WiB ICE2 St\nThe LoDi-WiB ICE-M fits the following Märklin® coaches:\nICE 1: 3370, 33701, 3770, 37701, 37702, 37703, 39711, 39712. ICE 2: 36711, 36712, 37712, 29786, 29790, 29791, 29792, 29794, 29795, 33712.\nThe LoDi-WiB ICE-M fits the following Trix® coaches:\nICE: 21506, 22096.\nIf no current-carrying coupling is fitted to your coaches and power cars, you first have to retrofit one.\nLooking for the right couplings? Get in touch with us or with our service partners.\nYour train's article number not listed here? Do get in touch with us.\nA power car board for power cars with and without a motor.\nThe LoDi-Motor WiB-ICE-M(-S) fits all common ICE 1 and 2 with a high-performance motor or a 3-pole drum commutator motor. If you still have a 3-pole drum commutator motor fitted in your ICE, you should convert it to a 5-pole motor, or at least replace the field coil with a permanent magnet.\nFrom board version 1.50 onwards, the motor board has outputs for LEDs that can be switched positive, as well as the decoder's standard outputs, which are switched negative against U+.\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — The LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE-M (-S) boards and the LoDi-WiB ICE2 St\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — The LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE-M (-S) boards and the LoDi-WiB ICE2 St\nThe ICE 2 driving trailer. The LoDi-WiB ICE2-St was developed specifically for the driving trailer. It fits the driving trailer exactly and can be converted in a few steps. It has a 21-pin MTC interface and can be fitted with all common 21-pin function decoders.\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — The LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE-M (-S) boards and the LoDi-WiB ICE2 St\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — The LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE-M (-S) boards and the LoDi-WiB ICE2 St\n2. Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-R)\nIf you can solder and have already lit one coach or another, the conversion should come easily to you. If you are a beginner, however, or do not feel up to a conversion, do get in touch with our partners and have them draw up an individual offer for you.\nYou can carry out the conversion yourself?\nThen start with these instructions.\nYou will need:\na soldering iron with a fine tip, and solder, a cross-head screwdriver and a pair of tweezers, a small, fine pair of side cutters as well as, if available, a wire stripper for fine cores, superglue, to fix the boards or the cable holder lightly in place.\nYou can start the pictures as a small slideshow and enlarge them for a detailed view.\nWe will guide you step by step through a successful coach conversion with this description. If you notice while converting that steps or information are missing, do get in touch with us or visit our forum.\nThe compartment coaches. We now start with the compartment coach.\nFor practised hands these should be converted in less than 10 minutes.\nYou need the LoDi-WiB ICE-M for the conversion.\nAlways keep this in mind when converting!\nIf you are also gluing figures in and/or working with superglue to fix things, do not fit the coach roofs back onto the coaches straight away.\nSuperglue needs at least 1–2 hours to outgas completely.\nOtherwise this could lead to milky or tarnished glazing.\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-R)\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-R)\nFirst you have to pull off the coach covers at both ends of the coach.\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-R)\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-R)\nOnce both side jaws have been pulled off, you can release the upper part of the coach from the lower part. To do that you have to unclip the upper part a little from the coach floor.\nAfter that the coach roof can simply be lifted off.\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-R)\nNow first unsolder the wires from the original board and remove it from the coach's holder.\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-R)\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-R)\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-R)\nNow lay the LoDi-WiB ICE-M into the coach. Next, solder the wires.\nL = yellow (switching the light)\nO = brown (ground, wheel pickup)\nB = red (centre rail)\n(The wire colours can differ.)\n=================================== When using the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M(-S) the wiring changes, and is connected as follows: L = yellow (switching the light)\nO = red (centre rail)\nB = brown (ground, wheel pickup) (can also be omitted; more information further down under: Removing the ground spring.)\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-R)\nOn the board there is a small potentiometer with which you can set the brightness using a small cross-head screwdriver.\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-R)\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-R)\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-R)\nAs mentioned above, we have fitted two further LEDs on the board in the door vestibules, which are otherwise dark on the original.\nThese LEDs are off from the factory, not active, and have to be activated with a solder bridge.\nTo do that, take your soldering iron and a little solder and bridge the contact, as seen in the photo.\nNow reassemble the coach in the reverse order to the way you took it apart.\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-R)\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-R)\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-R)\nBecause the doors of the ICE coaches can be lit, you naturally then see the wires right inside the coach. As a rule that does not stand out on a passing train, but it can be done more neatly. That is why we designed this cable duct. It is simply attached directly to the edge with superglue.\nWhen gluing, take care that the cable is not lying in the channel; thread it through afterwards.\nYou may have to replace the wires if they are too stiff. The wires should also be laid in a counter-loop at the bottom, as shown in the picture. That offers two advantages: the coupling stays fully movable, and there is less movement at the solder joint.\nThe on-board restaurant. Since the new version 4.3 of the LoDi-ICE-M coach boards there is an additional version, the LoDi-ICE-M-R. As described above, LEDs have been added on the top of the board in the area of the on-board restaurant. These now light the upper part of the coach. Installation is as usual — you only have to watch the correct orientation of the roof, since this coach has both a short and a long window cut-out.\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-R)\nOn the version for the on-board restaurant there are four additional 3 mm LEDs on the top, arranged so that they light the upper part of the coach. As marked here, at (1) you see the short window section and at (2) the long window section.\nPlease take care that the roof and the board are correctly aligned. If you have swapped them — that is, (1) in place of (2) and vice versa — the roof may not fit properly. In that case please take the roof off again and check the alignment.\nFitting a buffer capacitor\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-R)\nOn the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-R) there are two connections for a buffer capacitor, C1 and C2.\nThere you can connect a buffer capacitor from 100 µF at 25 or 35 volts. You will get the best result with a 330 µF 25-volt capacitor.\nThe LoDi-WiB ICE-M has a charging circuit for gentle charging. That way your booster does not go straight into a short circuit when switched on.\nRemoving the ground spring for the ICE coach. The conversion above is shown and connected like the original. If you fit our LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M in the power cars/driving trailers, you can do without all the ground springs in the coaches. That reduces the rolling resistance enormously, so train lengths of 12 coaches are no problem even for a single power car.\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-R)\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-R)\nSimply remove the ground spring from the lower bogie and unsolder it at the top of the LoDi-WiB ICE-M. No further conversion has to be made; the LoDi-WiB ICE-M switches over by itself and is now connected only by the yellow and the red wire of the coupling.\n2. Installing the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M(-S)\nThere are several versions of the power cars, with a driving trailer as well as with a dummy power car.\nTo describe your train precisely here, you have to choose which train you want to convert.\nThe ICE 1 generation still has front lighting made of bulbs; the ICE 2 version mostly has LEDs already.\nClick on the picture showing your train.\nICE 1\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — ICE 1\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — ICE 1\nICE 2\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — ICE 2\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — ICE 2\n3. Technical data\nDimensions of the LoDi-WiB ICE-M, 2025 version: length 242 mm, width 18 mm, thickness 1.55 mm. Weight: 16 grams. Dimensions of the LoDi-WiB ICE-M: length 245 mm, width 22 mm, thickness 1.55 mm. Weight: 20 grams. Dimensions of the LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE-M-S: length 180 mm, width 29 mm, thickness 1.55 mm. Weight: 18 grams, or 19 grams for the (-S) version.\nThe LoDi-Motor ICE-M(-S) has a standard 21-pin MTC interface and can be fitted with all common locomotive or function decoders with a 21-pin interface.\n LoDi-WiB ICE-M — Technical data\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are glad to help.","LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE-M","Features of the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-R) as well as the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M and -S","1. The LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE-M (-S) boards and the LoDi-WiB ICE2 St","2. Installing the LoDi-WiB ICE-M(-R)","2. Installing the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M(-S)","ICE 1","ICE 2","sw-lodi-rektor","software/lodi-rektor","LoDi-Rektor","The LoDi-Rektor is a powerful command station developed specifically for use with computer-controlled layouts. Its network interface lets it be integrated into existing networks easily, and it can also be controlled conveniently with a Wi-Fi handheld throttle, without model railway software.",[319,356,320,297,653,654,655,656,657,658],"Settings and firmware update\nThe LoDi-Rektor is a powerful command station developed specifically for use with computer-controlled layouts. Its network interface lets it be integrated into existing networks easily, and it can also be controlled conveniently with a Wi-Fi handheld throttle, without model railway software.\nThe LoDi-Rektor has the LoDi bus (formerly the µCon bus) and can manage up to 62 LoDi bus components on it.\nIt can generate the following track signals: DCC, mfx® or Motorola.\nAll devices belonging to the LoDi-Rektor are marked in green. That principle is applied in the device tree as well.\n1. The overview\n LoDi-Rektor — The overview\nThe device editor of the LoDi-Rektor contains the following areas:\nDevice settings: determines the behaviour of the CDE connection as well as which track signal is to be generated after starting, and the booster Network settings: setting the IP address Firmware: updating the LoDi-Rektor's firmware\nNetwork settings\nSee the network settings in the section Commissioning LoDi devices.\nDevice settings\nCDE connection: the behaviour of the CDE connection is set here. There are five possible configurations: CDE input: the CDE connection is configured as an input. An external command station can be connected to it. The signals generated by that station are passed on to the boosters connected to the µCon bus. Booster faults are reported to the external command station through the connection. CDE output: the CDE connection is switched as an output. It puts out the track signals generated by the LoDi-Rektor. Boosters connected to the CDE connection put that signal onto the track. If a booster connected to the CDE connection produces a fault, it is reported to the LoDi-Rektor through the CDE connection. CDE output without E: treated like the CDE output, but E is not evaluated. CDE sniffer: CDE is set to input, the Rektor remains the command station, but in this configuration a DCC command station can be connected and kept in use for controlling. CDE disabled: the CDE connection is off. It neither generates booster signals nor responds to signals from other command stations or boosters.\n2. The device tree\n LoDi-Rektor — The device tree\nThe LoDi-Rektor is shown in the device tree as follows:\nLoDi-Rektor: this is where the LoDi-Rektor's device and network settings live LoDi bus: the LoDi bus serves the LoDi bus devices connected to it. LoDi bus devices: below the µCon bus, the LoDi bus devices found are shown in address order. Boosters newly plugged into the bus are detected and shown automatically. CDE: this node is only shown if the CDE connection has been configured as \"output\". It is shown as a booster below the µCon bus and reflects the status of the boosters connected to the CDE connection.\nTo open the settings for a device or bus, it is enough to click the corresponding entry in the device tree. The corresponding dialogue opens in the main area.\nTo get an overview of which device is behind which entry, you can hold the mouse over the entry in the device tree for a few seconds. The device is then shown with its picture as a tooltip.\n3. Driving, switching, CV programming\nTo be able to drive a locomotive or switch a turnout over DCC or Motorola, the booster voltage as well as the track signal first have to be switched on. With the LoDi-Rektor selected in the menu on the left, two entries appear at the far left of the menu bar at the top: booster voltage and track protocol. Both have to be green to put voltage onto the track.\n LoDi-Rektor — Driving, switching, CV programming\n LoDi-Rektor — Driving, switching, CV programming\nDriving\n LoDi-Rektor — Driving, switching, CV programming\nIn the menu bar you will find the entry \"Steuern\". When you click that entry, a dialogue with a selection opens. Depending on how many LoDi devices you have on your network, the control in question is offered to you here.\nIn this case we want to drive first. So click \"Fahren\" and then the command station, in this case the LoDi-Rektor.\n LoDi-Rektor — Driving, switching, CV programming\nOnce you have clicked the LoDi-Rektor, the throttle opens, modelled on the LoDi-Con. There you can now enter the locomotive number and call up the locomotive and its functions.\nThe throttle is detached from the LoDi-ProgrammerFX. That means you can place it freely on the screen, or even on another screen. Beyond that it is also possible to open further throttles, in order to control several locomotives at once, for instance.\n LoDi-Rektor — Driving, switching, CV programming\n LoDi-Rektor — Driving, switching, CV programming\nSwitching. To switch a turnout over DCC, Motorola or the LoDi-Shift-Commander, click \"Steuerung\" at the top of the dialogue again. Then select \"Schalten\". If any are present, you will now see all the command stations that can switch listed.\nIn our case we want to switch accessories over DCC or Motorola with the help of the LoDi-Rektor. So now click the LoDi-Rektor.\n LoDi-Rektor — Driving, switching, CV programming\nA further window now opens in which the turnouts can be switched. Sixteen turnouts can be driven at once. The 1–16 selection lets you move on to the next pairs of addresses.\n LoDi-Rektor — Driving, switching, CV programming\nCV programming. The CVs of locomotives and of accessory decoders can be configured through the LoDi-Rektor. The LoDi-Rektor does not have a programming track, but it can set the decoders' CVs over PoM (programming on main). Click \"Steuerung\" again, then go to \"Programmieren\" and select the LoDi-Rektor here again. The programming dialogue opens, in which you can now change the CVs for locomotives and accessories.\nIf you have a LoDi-CV-Programmer, you can also read the CVs of locomotives or accessory decoders. The locomotive decoder, the locomotive or the accessory decoder has to be connected to the programming track for that.\n LoDi-Rektor — Driving, switching, CV programming\n LoDi-Rektor — Driving, switching, CV programming\n LoDi-Rektor — Driving, switching, CV programming\n4. The LoDi bus overview\n LoDi-Rektor — The LoDi bus overview\nThe LoDi bus dialogue shows all the devices connected to the LoDi bus. It is divided into two areas:\nThe upper area serves to programme the booster address and the booster name. In the lower area the modules found on the µCon bus are shown in a table. LoDi module name: the name assigned to the µCon device LoDi address: the µCon device's current address Status: shows a booster's current status. It can also be switched at this point. The following states are possible: On: the booster channel is switched on Off: the booster channel is switched off Short circuit: the booster channel reports a short circuit\nThe LoDi bus dialogue lets you change the LoDi addresses of the connected devices. Proceed as follows:\nEnter a LoDi address and a LoDi module name. The module name may be 16 characters long. Press the \"Prog.\" button on the LoDi bus component to be programmed. In the table below, the corresponding booster is highlighted in red. Now press the \"Anwenden\" button.\nA precise description of how to configure the LoDi-Booster or LoDi-TrainSpeed and assign an address can be found here: LoDi-Booster, LoDi-Booster 10A and LoDi-TrainSpeed software descriptions.\n5. The CDE connection\n LoDi-Rektor — The CDE connection\nThe CDE node is only shown if the CDE connection has been configured as \"CDE output\" or \"CDE output without E\".\nIt shows the status of the boosters connected to the CDE connection.\n7. Firmware update\nFrom the LoDi-ProgrammerFX 2025.01 onwards there is an online updater for the devices' firmware. We show you here how to install firmware.\n LoDi-Rektor — Firmware update\n LoDi-Rektor — Firmware update\n LoDi-Rektor — Firmware update\n LoDi-Rektor — Firmware update\nFirst click the device that is to be updated, in this case the LoDi-Rektor (1). A new menu item now appears in the bar at the top: \"Online-Update\".\nThe update dialogue opens and the server automatically searches for available updates.\nThen select the newest version shown (3) and click Install update (4). In the next dialogue the currently installed version and the version to be installed are shown to you once more.\nConfirm the process by clicking OK to start the update. Once the update is finished, the device restarts automatically. If the current version is already installed, the LoDi-ProgrammerFX will say so.\n8. The Z21 compatibility mode\nFrom version 3.0.1 onwards, the LoDi-Rektor offers the option of connecting a Roco® Wi-Fi handheld throttle directly or through the Z21 app.\nTo do that you have to enter the LoDi-Rektor's IP address as the target or host address.\nBeyond that, the LoDi-Rektor can now be used with model railway control software such as TrainController®, Railcontrol or others that support the Z21 protocol. Please note here that boosters cannot currently be controlled individually over the Z21 protocol; the complete system can only be switched on and off with start/stop.\n LoDi-Rektor — The Z21 compatibility mode\nAny questions still open?\nWould you simply like to ask us in person?\nOr go to our forum, where experienced users are glad to help you further.\ninfo@lokstoredigital.de","2. The device tree","3. Driving, switching, CV programming","4. The LoDi bus overview","5. The CDE connection","7. Firmware update","8. The Z21 compatibility mode","api-lodi-con","api/lodi-con","LoDi-Con API","The protocol of the handheld controller.",[665,666,667,668,669,670,671,672,673,674,675,676,677],"Introduction\nThe commands the LoDi-Con understands are listed below. Communication with the device is explained in General API.\nBasic commands\nGetVersion\nThis command returns the device identifier and the FW version of the device.\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x20 0x0F 0x00 .. 0xFF\nPacket type Command Packet number Device type Major Minor Patch\n0x21 0x0F 0x00 .. 0xFF 0x13 \nThe device type is always 0x13 on the LoDi-Con.\nThe firmware version is made up of the three parts major, minor and patch. It is shown in the format \"v..\". Example: \"v0.5.7\"\nThe major version only changes when completely new hardware with different characteristics and a different feature set is released.\nThe minor version changes when the API is extended. Individual commands may also become incompatible.\nThe patch version changes for general bug fixes that do not touch the API.\nCloseConnection\nThis command should be sent before the connection is closed.\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x20 0x0C 0x00 .. 0xFF\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x21 0x0C 0x00 .. 0xFF\nDatabaseUploadStart\nThis command starts uploading a database to the LoDi-Con. The upload itself runs over the FTP interface.\nPacket type Command Packet number Action Length\n0x20 0xDE 0x00 .. 0xFF 0x01 24..31 16..23 8..15 0..7\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x21 0xDE 0x00 .. 0xFF\nThe length field defines the size of the database to be uploaded.\nDatabaseActivate\nThis command finishes uploading the database. The file size given earlier is checked; if it matches, a confirmation dialog is shown to the user on the LoDi-Con.\nPacket type Command Packet number Action\n0x20 0xDE 0x00 .. 0xFF 0x02\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x21 0xDE 0x00 .. 0xFF\nDatabaseDownloadStart\nThis command has to be sent before downloading the database from the LoDi-Con.\nPacket type Command Packet number Action\n0x20 0xDE 0x00 .. 0xFF 0x03\nPacket type Command Packet number Length\n0x21 0xDE 0x00 .. 0xFF 24..31 16..23 8..15 0..7\nThe length field gives the current size of the database file on the LoDi-Con.\nGetScreenshot\nRequests a screenshot of the current LoDi-Con screen. The image data itself is transmitted as events\nPacket type Command Packet number Mode\n0x20 0xDF 0x00 .. 0xFF 0..1\nThe mode field determines how many lines are transmitted per event.\n0: only ever one line is transmitted per event.\n1: several lines may be transmitted per event.\nPacket type Command Packet number Width Height\n0x21 0xDF 0x00 .. 0xFF Bit 8..15 Bit 0..7 Bit 8..15 Bit 0..7\nThe fields width and height give the number of pixels.\nOnce the command is acknowledged, the screenshot has been taken and is transmitted from the LoDi-Con as events.\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x23 0xDF 0x00 .. 0xFF\nEventScreenshot\nSends the lines of the screenshot to the control software.\nPacket type Command Event counter Line number Data\n0x22 0xDF 0x00 .. 0xFF Bit 8..15 Bit 0..7 16 bits per pixel\nThe line number field corresponds to the line in the screenshot\nPortrait: 0-319, 240 pixels of 16 bits follow\nLandscape: 0-239, 320 pixels of 16 bits follow.\nIf mode 1 is chosen, further lines may follow, each sent as the line number followed by the data. The maximum packet size is limited to 1500 bytes; how many lines were sent is derived from the packet size.\nBit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0\nR R R R R G G G G G G B B B B B\nSendUIInput\nSends a virtual user interface input to the LoDi-Con. (from v0.5.7)\nPacket type Command Packet number Type X Y C\n0x20 0xD2 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 255 Bit 8..15 Bit 0..7 Bit 8..15 Bit 0..7 0..255\nThe type field holds the kind of input. The fields X, Y and C are filled depending on the type.\n1: touch screen pressed – X: X pos, Y: Y pos\n2: touch screen released – X: X pos, Y: Y pos\n3: touch screen long-pressed – X: X pos, Y: Y pos\n4: knob pressed\n5: knob released\n6: knob long-pressed\n8: knob turned right\n9: knob turned left\n10: UI element clicked – X: X pos, Y: Y pos\n11: swipe – X: X distance, Y: Y distance (X or Y has to be 0)\n12: character input – C: ASCII code of the character\nEvery other type is used internally and is not passed on through the API.\nSpecial key codes for the C field when type=12:\n0x06: ACK – confirm, enter\n0x15: NACK – cancel\n0x08: DEL – delete\nFurther codes below 0x20 are used internally and should not be driven from outside.\nGetLogbook\nThis command asks for the logbook of the LoDi-Con. The logbook is transmitted as events. (from v0.5.7)\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x20 0xD3 0x00 .. 0xFF\nEventLogbook\nThis event is sent after the GetLogbook command is received, to transmit the current logbook. It is also sent unasked whenever a new entry is added to the logbook. (from v0.5.7)\nPacket type Command Event counter Timestamp Origin Level Text\n0x22 0xD3 0 .. 0xFF Bit 24..31 Bit 16..23 Bit 8..15 Bit 0..7 Up to 122 bytes\nThe timestamp field gives the time since the device started, in milliseconds.\nThe origin field holds the source of the entry.\n1: WLAN\n2: API\n3: FTP\n5: database\n10: command station\n11: LoDi-Rektor\n12: LoDi-S8-Commander\n13: LoDi-Shift-Commander\n14: Märklin CS2 or CS3\n15: ESU ECoS\n16: WiThrottle\n17: XpressNet\n18: z21\n20: locomotive\n21: accessory\nThe level gives the severity of the entry.\n0: emergency\n1: alert\n2: critical\n3: error\n4: warning\n5: notice\n6: info\n7: debug\n8: trace\nThe text is up to 122 characters long and is terminated with 0 if it is shorter than 122 characters.\nUp to 10 entries are sent with one event.\nShowLoco\nShows a locomotive on the screen of the LoDi-Con. It can then be driven from the LoDi-Con. Only locomotives that already exist are shown.\nPacket type Command Packet number Protocol AddrH Sub bit 7..4 / Main bit 3..0\n0x20 0xD4 0x00 .. 0xFF 0..3 Bit 0..7 Bit 8..14\nThe protocol field holds the track format to use.\n0: any\n1: DCC\n2: Motorola\n3: mfx\nAddrL and AddrH together give the address of the locomotive.\nIf the locomotive is found and shown, the LoDi-Con returns an ACK packet. Otherwise NACK is sent.\nLoDi-Con API Service Adobe Acrobat document, 118.1 KB","Introduction","Basic commands","GetVersion","CloseConnection","DatabaseUploadStart","DatabaseActivate","DatabaseDownloadStart","GetScreenshot","EventScreenshot","SendUIInput","GetLogbook","EventLogbook","ShowLoco","einsteiger","getting-started","Getting started","The LoDi system explained through small examples — for newcomers and old hands alike.",[],"Information for newcomers and old hands alike.\nOver the next pages we will bring our system and our philosophy closer to you through small examples.\nThe LoDi system was developed first and foremost for the computer-driven railway. It was meant to be technology built 100% around what a computer railwayman needs. We see the software as the centre of the intelligence, and we try to give it eyes, ears and hands.\nI run three-rail\n einsteiger-index-01-b203d2.jpg\nI run two-rail\n einsteiger-index-02-bb053d.jpg","con-zentrale-cs2","lodi-con/command-stations/cs2-cs3","Märklin CS2 and CS3","Setting up the Central Station 2 and 3 in the LoDi-Con.",[690],"Setting up the CS2/3 in the LoDi-Con\n lodi-con-zentrale-cs2-01-26a7e3.jpg\nThe LoDi-Con can connect to your CS2 or CS3.\nThe data of the CS2/3 can be transferred straight onto the LoDi-Con. With little effort you can drive all of your locomotives and accessories from the LoDi-Con.\nHere is how it works:\nFirst the CS2/3 has to be on the same network as the LoDi-Con, so make sure both devices are on it. If you have questions about that, do get in touch.\n lodi-con-zentrale-cs2-02-6265fc.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-cs2-03-fb901a.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-cs2-04-dff086.png\nFirst tap the \"house\"; this icon always takes you back to the main screen.\nThere press Settings > Command station >\nFrom there go to Settings > Command station >\n lodi-con-zentrale-cs2-05-e2e73a.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-cs2-06-ea71c6.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-cs2-07-df4f1a.png\nFor the CS2/3 to be found on the network, you have to switch its \"CAN\" option to \"Broadcast\". If you cannot change that, you have to enter the IP address into the LoDi-Con by hand. In our example we have switched to \"Broadcast\".\nNow select the station that was found, give it a name and confirm with the \"green tick\".\n(Devices shown green in the \"Search for command stations\" overview are already known to the LoDi-Con.)\n lodi-con-zentrale-cs2-08-9e31b9.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-cs2-09-1d6560.png\nThe LoDi-Con now connects to the CS2/3.\nEvery connected command station is now shown at the top left of the display.\nA new CS2/3 symbol should now appear at the top left. If that CS2/3 is steady, the connection is up. If it blinks, the LoDi-Con could not reach the CS2/3, or it is trying to establish a connection.\nTapping the top left takes you to the overview of command stations, which also shows whether the connection is active or not. If there are several stations, select the CS2/3 here.\nHere you can check whether a connection exists and call up the version number, IP address and UDP port.\n lodi-con-zentrale-cs2-10-42d9fa.png\n\n lodi-con-zentrale-cs2-12-92f607.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-cs2-13-98af04.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-cs2-14-5e2c8b.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-cs2-15-9093da.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","Setting up the CS2/3 in the LoDi-Con","con-03-lokomotiven","lodi-con/locomotives","Setting up locomotives and driving","Adding locomotives, assigning functions and driving with the rotary control.",[],"Foreword:\nBefore you can drive locomotives with the LoDi-Con, a locomotive has to be created.\nYou can also create and edit locomotives in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX and transfer them to another LoDi-Con. There are also command stations such as the CS2 and CS3 that send their locomotive data to the LoDi-Con.\nIn our case, though, we assume a standard DCC locomotive that is to be created on the LoDi-Con itself.\n lodi-con-03-lokomotiven-01-0e67c3.png\n lodi-con-03-lokomotiven-02-fa198d.png\nTo create a new locomotive, tap the \"house\".\nThere you will find a \"Locomotives\" tab; tap it.\nTapping the locomotive symbol at the bottom right takes you to the same menu.\n lodi-con-03-lokomotiven-03-39c87a.png\n lodi-con-03-lokomotiven-04-37febc.png\n lodi-con-03-lokomotiven-05-97fd50.png\n lodi-con-03-lokomotiven-06-555448.png\nTapping the \"+\" at the top right creates a new locomotive. First the locomotive address is entered. You also have to choose the data format to use; in our example we create a locomotive with the DCC address 9500.\nNow tap the green tick at the bottom.\nThe locomotive has now been created with 8 functions including the headlight, and should be drivable straight from the rotary control.\n(When choosing the MFX format, the SID of the locomotive is entered first; the LoDi-Con then asks you for the UID as well.)\n lodi-con-03-lokomotiven-07-789ef6.png\n lodi-con-03-lokomotiven-08-b5d263.png\n lodi-con-03-lokomotiven-09-9d10bf.png\n\n lodi-con-03-lokomotiven-11-18dd5e.png\n lodi-con-03-lokomotiven-12-96a2be.png\n lodi-con-03-lokomotiven-13-e64892.png\nThe LoDi-Con can call up to 68 locomotive functions plus the light. All of them can be given pictograms and assigned. To change them, scroll in the locomotive properties down to \"Function keys\".\nNow simply tap a function you want to change and pick the matching icon from the function overview.\nWe already offer a broad range of locomotive functions, and more will follow.\nA locomotive function can be a latching or a momentary function, and switching between the two is easy: tap the function again and the symbol changes to momentary. Tapping it once more sets it back to on/off.\n lodi-con-03-lokomotiven-14-58f41f.png\n lodi-con-03-lokomotiven-15-965d84.png\n(Missing a locomotive function? Let us know — get in touch here or in the forum)\n lodi-con-03-lokomotiven-16-12f79b.png\n lodi-con-03-lokomotiven-17-8cb386.png\n lodi-con-03-lokomotiven-18-99568b.png\nThe locomotive is now fully created; you can drive it with the throttle and call its functions from the touch display. If the locomotive has more functions, you reach them by swiping down on the locomotive screen.\nTapping the locomotive symbol at the bottom right takes you back to the locomotive overview.\nTo make shunting between 2 locomotives easier, the LoDi-Con switches between the last two selected locomotives when you press the locomotive symbol. To get back to the locomotive overview, hold the symbol at the bottom right for longer than 1 second.\n lodi-con-03-lokomotiven-19-6dcd8d.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","lodi-booster","hardware/driving/lodi-booster","LoDi-Booster","Dual booster with 2 × 2.3 amperes, RailCom capable, with an adjustable power supply — it puts the track voltage on the layout.",[703,704,565,566,451,452,705,706,707,708,709,710,711,712]," LoDi-Booster\nYour vehicles need power!\nDepending on how large your layout is, enough current has to be provided. Not only that — ideally you should also have some short-circuit logic, so that a single short does not take the whole layout down.\nWe have many years of experience with these amplifiers in small layouts, large layouts and show layouts, and can now present our LoDi-Booster.\nA dual booster with an adjustable power supply included!\nIn a class of its own — and RailCom capable above all!\nFeatures of the LoDi-Booster\nIt supplies the current needed to run the digitally controlled locomotives and the turnouts, as well as every other consumer on the layout. In the event of a short circuit on the layout (caused by a derailed coach or locomotive, for instance) the booster cuts the power to the layout to prevent further damage to the rails or the rolling stock. Thanks to the built-in intelligence of the LoDi-Booster, only the affected sections are switched off in the event of a short, and this is reported back to the control software in use. The rest of the layout can keep running without risk of damage to the rolling stock. The booster brings the voltage to the track so that the digital driving and switching commands reach every vehicle and accessory decoder on the layout. The LoDi-Booster has two channels, each providing 2.3 A. If you need more, you have to connect a corresponding number of further LoDi-Boosters to secure the supply. On layouts monitored with RailCom, the LoDi-Booster provides the RailCom cutout, which carries the RailCom return channel. A dual booster with 2.3 amperes per track output. The outputs can be bridged, which makes 5 amperes available. The current is easy to set through the LoDi-ProgrammerFX and the LoDi-Con.\n1. The LoDi-Booster and its connections\nThe LoDi-Booster works with the LoDi bus (formerly µCon bus). You need the LoDi-Rektor as the booster command station. It is a full command station, but through a CDE input it can also work as a booster station. Conventional command stations can then be connected without trouble.\nThe booster has the following connections:\n(1) Programming button: every booster has its own address through which it is addressed on the bus. To set a new address the button has to be pressed first. The address is then assigned through commissioning software such as the LoDi-ProgrammerFX or the LoDi-Con. (2,3) LoDi bus input: the LoDi bus is fed into this socket. LoDi bus OUT: further LoDi or µCon components connect here. The output supplies power for the LoDi-CV-Programmer and the TrainSpeed. (4,5) Track outputs A and B: the track outputs can carry 2.3 A continuously and 2.8 A peak. (6) Connection for the supplied power supply: (please use only the supplied power supply! Lokstoredigital accepts no liability for damage caused by other power supplies, and the warranty is void in that case.)\n LoDi-Booster — The LoDi-Booster and its connections\n LoDi-Booster — The LoDi-Booster and its connections\nThe LoDi-Booster received a small hardware update in September 2024. The track output terminals were merged to give more stability. The \"Prog\" button was also moved to the front.\n2. LEDs and programming button of the LoDi-Booster\nThe LED indicators on the LoDi-Booster give you information that helps with troubleshooting and with setting the device up.\n LoDi-Booster — LEDs and programming button of the LoDi-Booster\n LoDi-Booster — LEDs and programming button of the LoDi-Booster\nBUS LED = shows the state of the LoDi bus. When the bus signal is detected, the LED lights with a short pulsing interruption. DCC LED = this LED is lit continuously as soon as the booster receives a signal over the bus — DCC, Motorola or M3 alike. If no bus cable is plugged in, or the LoDi-Rektor is switched off, the DCC LED flashes rapidly. Short on track A and B = this LED indicates a short circuit at the booster output. As soon as a short is detected, the LED starts to flash. On for track A and B = as soon as this LED is lit at the respective output, the output stage in the booster is active, meaning power is present at that output. Prog. button = there is a prog. button on the booster. It switches the booster, or rather its output stages, on and off.\nA short tap of the button switches the track outputs off and on again. The ON LED for track A and B goes out or lights up accordingly.\nThe prog. button is also used to programme the address. The LoDi bus provides 63 addresses. Held for more than 3 seconds, the bus and DCC LEDs flash red and green alternately. This can be interrupted by pressing the button again, or it ends when a new address is sent to the booster over the bus. Once the booster understands the signal, programming ends and it returns to normal operation.\n3. The fan on the LoDi-Booster\n LoDi-Booster — The fan on the LoDi-Booster\nThe LoDi-Booster has a built-in fan. This fan is controlled by temperature and load. As soon as the temperature inside the device rises, or current is drawn at the output, the fan automatically speeds up and slows down.\nThe fan never stops entirely; it keeps turning at low speed even when idle.\nPlease make sure that no objects get inside the device through the slots. Screws and the like could cause an internal short circuit and destroy the device.\nThe ventilation grille protects against the spinning fan.\nThe booster should be mounted so that the warm air can flow through it. Allow enough space for the air coming in and going out; 5 cm of clearance on each side is enough.\nThe air is pushed through the device from right to left.\n4. Connecting a power supply\nUpdate 9/2024.\nFrom now on the LoDi-Booster is delivered with a high-quality ESU power supply. We took this step because we are thoroughly convinced of the quality of the ESU units. The voltage is set comfortably with a potentiometer, which makes the supply suitable for every scale. This power supply was tested specifically for use with the LoDi-Booster.\n LoDi-Booster — Connecting a power supply\nThe voltage is very easy to set on the power supply. There is a rotary potentiometer at the power output which you can adjust comfortably with a finger or, say, a coin.\nTo trim the voltage precisely, you can call up the voltage of the booster in question in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX and set the booster to your scale.\n LoDi-Booster — Connecting a power supply\n LoDi-Booster — Connecting a power supply\nPlease note: do not use other power supplies of unknown origin.\nImproper use of power supplies can damage the electronics.\nA mains cable is included in the delivery as well.\nThe power supplies are available in the following voltages: 22 volts = for gauge 1, G\n20 volts = for gauge 1, G, 0, H0 two-rail and three-rail. 15 volts = for H0 two-rail, H0m, H0e, TT, N\n14 volts = for scales smaller than N\nAt the stated voltage the power supply provides the following current: 7 amperes\n5. Connecting to the LoDi bus\n LoDi-Booster — Connecting to the LoDi bus\nThe LoDi bus (formerly µCon bus) is a bus developed specifically for boosters, to cover long distances without losing the data signal.\nThe bus is open and can be downloaded straight from our website by developers.\nDevices on the LoDi bus have to be plugged in one after another; the bus does not allow for a star topology.\nThe following example shows how the booster is supplied with information by the LoDi-Rektor.\nIn this case the LoDi-Rektor provides the data for the booster and sends it over the LoDi bus.\nBeyond that, the booster can also deliver data to the LoDi-Rektor and thus to the LoDi-ProgrammerFX or the control software.\nThat data can include current measurement per channel, voltage measurement, short on A and B, and device temperatures.\nBesides the various short-circuit sensitivities, the address can also be set on the booster through the LoDi-Rektor with the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\nThe RailCom cutout can be switched off on the LoDi-Booster. You will find more on that in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX section.\n6. Connecting old µCon system components\n LoDi-Booster — Connecting old µCon system components\n\nThe LoDi bus is fully compatible with the µCon bus by LSdigital. µCon components such as the Railspeed or a µCon booster can be integrated anywhere in an existing LoDi bus without trouble.\nPlease note, however: although both systems are compatible on the bus, mixing LoDi boosters and µCon boosters on the same track section is not recommended. With RailCom enabled on the LoDi-Booster in particular, interference with RailCom communication can occur.\nFor trouble-free operation it is advisable to supply track sections either entirely with LoDi boosters or entirely with µCon boosters. Older µCon boosters can, for instance, continue to supply DCC accessory decoders or a separate part of the layout.\n7. Connecting to the three-rail system\n LoDi-Booster — Connecting to the three-rail system\nOn three-rail layouts the track commons are not separated from one another. That is no problem for the LoDi-Booster; all commons may be joined.\nIn this picture you see the common brought together through the track. It makes no difference whether you run a common bus wire or join the commons only through the track.\nIn the example only the centre rail is separated.\nPlease always watch for sufficient cable cross-section, and for enough feed points on the layout.\nNo cable below 0.75 mm² should be used; the maximum cross-section for the screw terminals is 1.5 mm².\n LoDi-Booster — Connecting to the three-rail system\nThe LoDi-Booster has two separate outputs.\nThese let you divide your layout into logical sections. The built-in intelligent booster control can pass a short circuit through the LoDi-Rektor to the control software, so that only the section in which the short occurred is cut. All other sections can carry on unhindered.\nIf you have questions or are unsure about this, do turn to our forum or write us an email.\n LoDi-Booster — Connecting to the three-rail system\nIn the picture you see our new feedback module for three-rail track, the LoDi-RM-16+.\nThe module shown here produces the occupancy report from a measuring current of its own.\nBeyond that it also supplies the reporting track with the common through what is known as the diode trick.\nPlease always watch for sufficient cable cross-section from the booster to your feedback module.\nOther feedback systems can be integrated in a similar way.\nNo cable below 0.75 mm² should be used.\nRailCom feedback can be evaluated per block on the three-rail system too.\nModern control systems support this loco-specific reporting per block.\nImagine the centre rail simply becoming the common. Since the common on the layout may always be one, you do not have to separate the new common either.\nWhich means the centre rail is always joined throughout.\nIf you have already separated the centre rail on an existing layout, it can be joined again, or you can run the booster sections with the common separated.\n LoDi-Booster — Connecting to the three-rail system\nHere you see the normal standard method used with three-rail.\nSo the centre rail, RED, is B; the common rails above and below, BLUE, are O\n LoDi-Booster — Connecting to the three-rail system\nIn this example you see the upper side carrying the common, BLUE, that is O.\nThe centre rail stays RED, that is B.\nThe lower side of the track is now the detector for the common report, that is GREEN, as has been usual for reporting with the three-rail method.\n LoDi-Booster — Connecting to the three-rail system\nSo that the locomotive's RailCom data also reaches the control software per block, we have to route the current through a feedback module of the kind used on the two-rail system, applied here to the three-rail method.\nIt takes a little rethinking, but we know from numerous customers that this solution works perfectly.\nIt would of course also be possible to report through the centre rail; many of our customers do this very successfully on three-rail layouts still fitted with metal track.\nOne thing has to be borne in mind, though:\nThe locomotive entering the track, or a detection section, only reports once the pickup shoe arrives. Because the shoe sits in a different place on every locomotive, braking distances can shift from one locomotive to another.\nWith the method described above, by contrast, the report is triggered by the first current-carrying wheel.\n LoDi-Booster — Connecting to the three-rail system\nThis example shows the block division for three-rail systems with RailCom feedback.\nNote that every block and every route, or indeed individual turnouts, now needs its own detector connection.\nIf you use more than one detector per block, the wiring scheme naturally changes.\nMore detail on setting up the detectors can be found under the feedback modules in the feedback system and with our RailCom capable feedback module, the LoDi-8-GBM.\n8. Connecting to two-rail track\n LoDi-Booster — Connecting to two-rail track\nWith two-rail running the common lines are usually not joined to one another. There are variants built with a joined common, however. That makes no difference to the LoDi-Booster; the commons of all boosters may be joined.\nAs with three-rail, on the two-rail system you have to watch for sufficient cable cross-section, whatever the scale. Do not use cable below a cross-section of 0.75 mm².\nA short circuit can only be detected if enough current flows. Suitably thick cable ensures that.\nThe maximum cross-section for the screw terminals on the booster is 1.5 mm².\nMany customers have asked us in the past how they should divide up the booster circuits, how many circuits are needed and where the divisions are best placed.\nWith this example we show you how best to divide and feed.\nA simple test tells you whether there are enough circuits, and therefore feed points.\nCreate a short circuit on the track while it is powered. If it is no longer registered as a short, you should add another feed point and thereby another booster circuit. Without a further feed, in the event of a short the booster could put full power on the track and, together with the resistance of the track, no longer drive the voltage above the value at which the booster would detect a short.\nThe LoDi-Booster has monitoring built in, which additionally detects a short circuit in a flash.\nThe be-all and end-all of a smoothly running layout is the wiring.\n LoDi-Booster — Connecting to two-rail track\nThe LoDi-Booster has two separate outputs.\nThese let you divide your layout into logical sections. The built-in intelligent booster control can pass a short circuit through the LoDi-Rektor to the control software, so that only the section in which the short occurred is cut.\nAll other sections can carry on unhindered.\nThe common does not have to be separated on the track and can be joined between the LoDi-Boosters through the track itself.\n LoDi-Booster — Connecting to two-rail track\nThis example shows how you can supply a layout with the LoDi-Booster while feeding the current through the feedback modules. That is necessary on the two-rail system so that monitoring can take place.\nOut of the many two-rail detectors on the market, we decided to show you our own system.\nThe module shown here receives its voltage from the LoDi-Booster; outputs 1–8 on the LoDi-8-GBM now supply the individual blocks with booster current. As you can see, we have drawn the commons of the blocks in a lighter shade.\nBooster channel B feeds another occupancy detector supplying a further part of the layout.\nPlease always watch for sufficient cable cross-section from the booster to your feedback module.\nYou should not use cable below 0.75 mm².\nWe accept no liability for incorrectly laid-out blocks, as these have to be created specifically for the control software.\nIf you are unsure, friendly modellers in our forum will gladly help you.\n9. Dividing the layout into booster sections\nWith the intelligent booster system we bring logic to the track, so that a short circuit does not bring the whole layout to a stand. The data is passed to the control software, which then knows where the short happened and holds trains before they enter other booster areas that are shorted or switched off. For that you naturally have to divide up your layout, or rather the track plan. Two booster outputs are available per device. That means you can secure very good logic and operating sequences with only a few units. Here is a small example of a division.\n LoDi-Booster — Dividing the layout into booster sections\nIn this example we use two LoDi-Boosters, which gives us four power sections. The different circuits are colour-coded. If a short is now detected in one of these areas, that is passed to the LoDi-Rektor, which forwards the affected track section to the control software. The rest of the layout keeps running where possible.\n10. Bridging the LoDi-Booster outputs\nIf you run a larger staging yard on your layout, or work in a larger scale and need more than 2.3 amperes, you can bridge the two booster outputs.\nThat is no problem with the LoDi-Booster.\nConnect the outputs for track A and track B in parallel, that is bridged, to the track, as the diagram shows. That makes a maximum of 5 amperes available.\nPlease watch for a sufficient cable cross-section when doing so!\nUnder the Service heading you will find our recommendations for cable sizes and colours.\n LoDi-Booster — Bridging the LoDi-Booster outputs\n11. Technical data\n LoDi-Booster — Technical data\nThe LoDi-Booster has a total output of 5 A across two outputs of 2.3 A each.\n2 × 2.3 A plus peak = 5 A\nThe two outputs are logically separated from one another.\nIt has thermal overload protection, which makes sure the LoDi-Booster takes no damage when overloaded.\nDimensions:\nLength: 130 mm\nWidth: 115 mm\nHeight: 45 mm\nWeight: 275 g\nThis table gives you a rough estimate of the current draw.\n LoDi-Booster — Technical data\n12. Setting up the LoDi-Booster in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nand updating the firmware Here is how to set up the LoDi-Booster\n LoDi-Booster — Setting up the LoDi-Booster in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\n13. LoDi-Booster PDF download\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-Booster hardware and software as a PDF.\nLoDi-Booster manual PDF, 1.8 MB — as of 25 March 2025","Features of the LoDi-Booster","1. The LoDi-Booster and its connections","6. Connecting old µCon system components","7. Connecting to the three-rail system","8. Connecting to two-rail track","9. Dividing the layout into booster sections","10. Bridging the LoDi-Booster outputs","11. Technical data","12. Setting up the LoDi-Booster in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX","13. LoDi-Booster PDF download","zubehoer","hardware/accessories","Accessories","Cables, connectors and further additions around the LoDi system.",[],"Accessories around the LoDi system: measuring equipment, distribution boards, adapters and components that make wiring the layout easier.\nLoDi-TrainSpeed Introducing:\nLoDi-Switcher Introducing:\nLoDi-S88-Adapter The LoDi-s88 adapter, for easily bringing old S88 modules into the system.\nLoDi-RCS-Fun Extend what your model railway can do with the LoDi-RCS-Fun: a versatile RailCom transmitter and function decoder in one. Designed for locomotive\nLoDi-Gleichrichter Time and again there are consumers that ought to be fed from a DC source.\nLoDi-GA 10k 3-Leiter The LoDi-GA 10k 3-rail is a board used for wagon detection on three-rail track when you run the LoDi-8-GBM as an occupancy detector with RailCom\nLoDi-WD-Diode The LoDi-WD diode is an adapter board for wiring motor turnouts simply, to connect them to the LoDi-83-AC or LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC.\nLoDi-Verteiler 23 Introducing:\nLoDi-Verteiler 19 Introducing:\nLoDi-Verteiler 29 Introducing:\nLoDi-Verteiler 3-fach The LoDi distribution board, 3- and 5-way. Nothing special, but very useful day to day: a small distribution board or tie point for 3 and 5 poles, for extending cables such as\nLoDi-Verteiler 5-fach The LoDi distribution board, 5-way. Nothing special, but very useful day to day: a small distribution board or tie point for 5 poles, for extending cables such as turnout drives\nLoDi-Verteiler 7-fach The LoDi distribution board, 7-way. Nothing special, but very useful day to day: a small distribution board or tie point for 7 poles, for extending cables such as turnout drives\nLoDi-Verteiler 11-fach The LoDi distribution board, 11-way. Nothing special, but very useful day to day: a small distribution board or tie point for 11 poles, for extending cables such as turnout","lodi-dual-servo-dcc-h","hardware/switching/dcc-system/lodi-dual-servo-dcc-h","LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H","A dual servo decoder with frog polarisation.",[725,726,727,728,729,730,731,479,732,480,456,733]," LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H\nThe dual servo decoder, for when it may be a little bit more . . .\nFitted with a large power section, it is designed for small to large servos.\nOver RailCom the decoder can be read quickly and its CVs configured.\nThanks to the built-in frog polarisation, no further hardware has to be bought.\nIt can also be run analogue, on DC or AC.\nFeatures of the LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H\nA two-channel servo decoder for servos drawing more than 1 ampere. (2.5 amperes maximum in total.) With built-in frog polarisation for the frogs of the turnouts. The decoder listens to the DCC format and can be read and configured over RailCom. The servos can also be set without CVs, through the buttons or an external servo remote. Also usable stand-alone with DC or AC! A connection for a servo remote to set the servo positions.\nVideos about the device from YouTubers\nHere we show contributions from customers who use LoDi devices and have taken the time to create tutorials.\n \n \n1. The LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H and its connections\n LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H — The LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H and its connections\n(1) Connection to the transformer as well as to DCC, that is to a booster, feedback module or directly to a command station. (2) Connection of the turnout frogs (3) Connection for servos with a 3-pin plug. (4) A three-button remote can be connected here for external control. Beyond that the pin connector can also be used for external buttons on a control panel.\n2. LEDs and buttons on the LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H\n LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H — LEDs and buttons on the LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H\n(1) Servo LEDs; they show whether the servo is powered, or whether it is being addressed. (2) DCC (green LED) lights as soon as a DCC signal is present at the decoder. The info LED (red LED) lights as soon as voltage is present at the decoder. The info LED also flashes on a valid command, and to acknowledge reading or writing CVs. (3) Buttons for manual operation and for setting the DCC address and the servos.\n3. Connecting a transformer and DCC\nThere are several ways of supplying the LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H with power.\nWith servos that draw a lot of current, or servos that have to hold a sprung turnout blade constantly, the following variant is advisable.\n LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H — Connecting a transformer and DCC\nThe transformer shown here could equally be a DC supply, but please take care that the operating voltage lies in the range of 10–22 volts DC.\nOnce the decoder is supplied with power, it has to be able to receive its data. For that the decoder has to be connected to a command station or a booster. In the example here we use a LoDi-Booster.\n LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H — Connecting a transformer and DCC\nCAREFUL! For reliable switching of DCC accessories, a separate circuit or booster output should always be used.\nIf you only use small modelling servos, or switch the servos off once they have moved, the LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H can be used directly from a booster without trouble.\nA LoDi-Booster, for instance, provides 2.3 amperes, which is enough for up to 15 decoders. A single small servo usually draws no more than 100 mA. With DCC, switching commands are always processed one after another.\n LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H — Connecting a transformer and DCC\n4. Connecting the servos\n LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H — Connecting the servos\nIn most cases a servo has a cable with three conductors.\nThese are:\nYellow or orange, which carries the data signal Red, carrying 5 volts, which supplies the servo with the voltage it needs. Black or brown, which carries the servo's common.\nThe colours can differ further, so check your servo's documentation if you are unsure.\nAt (1) and (2) you see the connections for the servos on the decoder. Negative is on the left. The socket is pushed straight onto the decoder's pins.\n LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H — Connecting the servos\n5. Connecting the frogs\nWith turnouts in two-rail systems, many track systems call for frog polarisation, because the polarity of the frog changes when the turnout blade is thrown.\nTo take care of that switching, the LoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H has a built-in relay that reverses the polarity at a turnout's frog.\nThis switching point can also be adjusted through a CV if wanted.\n LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H — Connecting the frogs\nThis picture shows the arrangement of two connected turnouts whose frogs have to be reversed.\n(shown here in pink)\nIf the polarity of the frog is wrong, or there is a short circuit when the locomotive runs onto the frog, the connecting lead would strictly speaking have to be swapped. You can however simply swap the relay setting in CV 108 or 109.\n6. CV list and settings\nThe LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H is set through CVs.\nIf you have the LoDi-Rektor with a LoDi-Booster or CDE booster connected, you can write the CVs over PoM (programming on main) with the LoDi-ProgrammerFX from version 2.2.\nThe decoder can equally be programmed with any conventional command station that has a DCC programming output or handles PoM.\nIf you have a RailCom capable system, you can read the decoder's CVs live at any time.\nSetting the DCC address: you have now installed the decoder successfully, the DCC cable is plugged in, and the LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H now glows red continuously to show it is ready.\nAs delivered, the decoder responds to turnout or accessory address 1.\nIf you want to change an address quickly, proceed as follows: there is a programming button on the decoder as described above. Press it for 3 seconds. The info LED starts to flash quickly, telling you the decoder is ready for a new address.\nNow send the new address from the control software, directly at a command station or in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX (the LoDi-Rektor is required), in the turnout field under DCC.\nThe decoder takes the address, the info LED stops flashing and glows steadily again. It is now reachable at the address you chose.\nSetting the CVs: as mentioned several times, the LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H can be programmed over PoM (programming on main). In most applications there are three CVs per servo to consider.\n1 × position A = CV 33, value 0–255\n2 × position B = CV 34, value 0–255\n3 × speed = CV 41, the speed at which the servo moves, 0–255\nThese values can be read back later over RailCom.\n7. Setting the servos with the buttons and the remote\nThe decoder has three buttons; the Prog button sets the address quickly, as mentioned above.\nThe Left and Right buttons can be used for quick manual operation, or for fine-adjusting the servos.\n LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H — Setting the servos with the buttons and the remote\nProceed as follows: press the Prog button for 3 seconds, as you would to programme an address.\nThe info LED now flashes quickly again. The decoder could now also receive a new address.\nPress the Prog button again straight away; the LED for servo 1 should now flash in addition to the INFO LED\n(yellow LED).\nBy flashing, the yellow LED tells you that servo 1 can now be set.\nThe servo should also have moved to position 1. With the Left and Right buttons the position of servo 1 (Pos 1) can now be set. If Pos 1 is right, press the Prog button again to reach Pos 2. Set that with Left and Right as well.\nNext the speed of servo 1 can be set; servo 1 travels between the positions you set. Pressing Left makes it faster, pressing Right makes the servo move more slowly.\nOnce the speed is right, servo 1 is fully set.\nNow press the Prog button again and the decoder moves to servo 2. Repeat the steps above. After setting the parameters for servo 2, pressing the Prog button returns the decoder to normal mode.\nIf you want to test the servos again quickly, a short press on Left or Right changes the position you set for servo 1 or 2.\nThe decoder has a 5-pin programming output which can be used for a remote. If you have installed the decoder under the layout, for instance, the remote is very helpful when setting the servo positions.\n LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H — Setting the servos with the buttons and the remote\n8. Stand-alone version\nThanks to the stand-alone version, the decoder can be supplied with ordinary DC up to 22 volts and AC up to 16 volts.\n LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H — Stand-alone version\nExternal buttons can be connected through the Remote connections (shown in the picture as SProg.), those of a track diagram panel, for instance.\n LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H — Stand-alone version\nHere you see an example of the two external buttons connected. The blue lead is the shared common; the two black ones are the control leads for servos 1 and 2.\n9. Technical data\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length 8.9 cm\nWidth 10 cm\nHeight 3.5 cm\nWeight 97 grams\nIn digital operation the decoder can be supplied with up to 22 volts.\nDo mind the specifications of your command station or booster manufacturer here.\nThe decoder can be run on 20 volts DC or 16 volts AC.\nLoadable by servos with 3 amperes briefly and 2.5 amperes continuously.\nFrog polarisation loadable with 4 amperes per output.\n10. LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H PDF download\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H hardware as a PDF.\nBDA LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H PDF, 1.7 MB","Features of the LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H","Videos about the device from YouTubers","1. The LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H and its connections","2. LEDs and buttons on the LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H","3. Connecting a transformer and DCC","4. Connecting the servos","5. Connecting the frogs","7. Setting the servos with the buttons and the remote","10. LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H PDF download","lodi-operator-16-sd-fl","hardware/switching/sc-system/lodi-operator-16-sd-fl","LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k)","A powerful switching decoder for light signals, lamps, LEDs and effects.",[740,741,742,743,744,745,746,609,747,748]," LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k)\nThe LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL is a powerful switching decoder with 16 outputs in total, each providing 150 mA. This switching decoder is the perfect complement to the LoDi-Shift-Commander and is ideally suited to all kinds of light signals, LEDs, lamps and small motors. Thanks to the optional 1k version, LEDs can be connected quickly and easily without needing a series resistor.\nConfiguring the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL could hardly be simpler, thanks to the user-friendly LoDi-ProgrammerFX. That software lets you adjust the settings of the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL easily and quickly.\nFeatures of the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k)\nA DC decoder for the SC bus, for connection to the LoDi-Shift-Commander. Sixteen channels are available, each with 150 mA per output; the total of the connected channels must not exceed 2 A. You can connect light signals, LEDs, lamps, smaller motors, MP1 and MP5 as well as many other smaller loads to the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL. Easily configured with the LoDi-ProgrammerFX. In the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL 1k version with an integrated 1k resistor. That way LEDs can be connected directly to the decoder.\n1. The LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) and its connections\nThe LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) is a switching decoder connected to the LoDi-Shift-Commander. It can be run on the slow and on the fast bus.\n LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) — The LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) and its connections\nAbout the connections on the\nLoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k)\n(1) Here you can connect loads such as light signals, lamps and so on; you will find more on this in the wiring examples. (2) The AC/DC model railway transformer is connected here. IMPORTANT! Please only use authorised model railway transformers. (3) The SC bus from the LoDi-Shift-Commander is connected at the SC-OUT and SC-IN sockets. More on this in the section on connecting to the SC bus.\n2. LEDs on the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k)\nThe LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) has two LEDs to help you recognise the state of the device and understand faults more quickly.\n LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) — LEDs on the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k)\n(1) This LED lights when you connect the transformer voltage to the socket (2) The bus LED lights as soon as the SC bus coming from the LoDi-Shift-Commander is plugged in and that unit is powered.\n3. Connecting the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) to the SC bus\nThe LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) is connected to the SC bus coming from the LoDi-Shift-Commander.\nYou can see this in the first wiring picture here.\n LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) to the SC bus\nIn this picture you see the LoDi-Shift-Commander together with the decoder connected to it, here the\nLoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k).\nThe decoder is connected to SC bus Out 1. 96 outputs are available here.\nOn the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) you can use the connections as your layout requires. It does not matter whether you first connect a\nLoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) or a LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC or AC.\nThe LoDi-Shift-Commander is able to detect the connected decoders.\nYou can then programme the assignment with our tool, the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nconfigure.\nThe bus has to be terminated at the last operator.\nThat means you always have to plug the terminating plug, called the bus terminator, into the last module.\n LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) to the SC bus\nIn this example you see how the operators can be chained one after another.\nIt is important to take care to connect the network cables correctly. That is, from In to Out, as you can see in the picture.\nThe last example picture shows SC bus 1 and 2 taken to their limits. The order of the modules is entirely irrelevant here.\nOnly with the LoDi-Light-Controller should you take care that it is connected to bus 2.\nIt is important to add a new LoDi-SC-Booster to the system after every 16th module.\n LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) to the SC bus\nThe bus length, or rather the number of modules, is very easy to calculate.\nOn bus 1 you have 96 channels available.\nHere you could connect 12 LoDi-Operators 4-WD-DC or AC, for instance, since each module needs 8 channels.\nOn the slow bus you have 384 channels available. That would be 48 LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC or DC units, LoDi-Light-Controller 4-C-LED or LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL units.\nAs you can see, our system lets you work very flexibly.\n4. Connecting the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) to a model railway transformer\nThe LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) has 4 terminals.\nBoth do not have to be connected to the transformer; they serve to pass the power on.\nYou can start the cable at one decoder and keep passing it on to the next.\nAfter 15 decoders a new power feed should be provided.\nThis makes wiring the system easier.\nCAREFUL: do not choose cable below 0.75 mm².\nPlease watch the polarity of the power supply!\n LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) to a model railway transformer\n LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) to a model railway transformer\n5. Connecting the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) to loads\nThe LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL has sixteen channels, each of which can be loaded with 150 mA.\nLEDs with a series resistor, lamps, small motors (including the MP1), solenoids and much more can be run on it.\n LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) to loads\nOn the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) you will find 18 screw terminals.\nChannels 1–16, plus two marked with a +. The plus is the shared return for the 16 channels.\nThis means every connected lamp or load also has to be connected to that shared return.\nLet us look at a simple example. For switching we use 0.25 mm² cable, with black for the shared return and purple for switching the channels.\n LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) to loads\nIn this example you can see 3 lamps, all connected separately to the decoder. These could be street lamps, for instance, perhaps fitted with a neon effect and meant to be switched on one after another.\n LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) to loads\nIn the LoDi-ProgrammerFX the 16 channels are shown continuously.\nIn the decoder the first 3 channels are taken up by lamps; these are now placed in the first 3 channels in the Programmer as well.\nAs the next step we install another 3 lamps, but all 3 of them are now installed on a single channel. Those lamps will then all light up together.\n LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) to loads\n LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) to loads\nIn the LoDi-ProgrammerFX an ordinary dimmable lamp is now configured on channel 4.\nFinally you see a fully configured LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL. Various loads are now connected to it. Whether a signal, a traffic light or several lamps, the connections can all be configured entirely freely.\n LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) to loads\n LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) to loads\n6. The LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL 1k\nThe LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL 1k already has a 1 kilohm resistor built into each output.\nThat means you can connect LEDs and micro bulbs directly to the decoder without a series resistor.\nOn both side panels of the decoder there is a sticker reading \"1K Integriert\" (1k built in)\n LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) — The LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL 1k\n7. Technical data\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length 8.9 cm\nWidth 10 cm\nHeight 3.5 cm\nWeight 95 grams\nPermissible from 12 to 24 volts DC or AC.\nLoadable by loads with 150 mA per output.\nThe supply voltage can be passed on to the next decoder through the AC/DC terminal on the decoder. The current may be 10 amperes at most.\n8. Setting up the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL in the LoDi-Programmer\nHere you can find out how to set up the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL\n LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) — Setting up the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL in the LoDi-Programmer\n9. LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL PDF download\nManual for the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) PDF, 2.0 MB","Features of the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k)","1. The LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) and its connections","2. LEDs on the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k)","3. Connecting the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) to the SC bus","4. Connecting the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) to a model railway transformer","5. Connecting the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) to loads","6. The LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL 1k","8. Setting up the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL in the LoDi-Programmer","9. LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL PDF download","lodi-rm-16","hardware/feedback/lodi-rm-16","LoDi-RM-16+ v2","A feedback module with 16 inputs for three-rail track.",[755,756,757,758,759,760,761,762,763,456,764,765]," LoDi-RM-16+ v2\nA simple feedback module for the three-rail system — one that returns the common straight back on the reporting side (the diode trick), with the trick built in, so to speak, and the usual characteristics of a standard feedback module.\nFitted with the new s88.2 bus, the odyssey of shifting addresses ends: a fixed address is assigned and stored in the device itself.\nEvery output can be given a name and, where the control software supports it, read out directly.\nThe LoDi-RM-16+ is also an excellent fit as a push-button detector, or for car systems working with Hall sensors or reed contacts.\nUpdate late 2025: the LoDi-RM-16+ v2 remains essentially the same product — now with a modern 32-bit ARM CPU instead of an 8-bit AVR. Connections, protocols and behaviour are unchanged; existing installations work exactly as before. The new CPU brings shorter polling times and more robust signal detection. The module therefore gains performance and future-proofing without you having to change wiring or software.\nFeatures of the LoDi-RM-16+ v2\nThe LoDi-16-RM+ (v2) is a feedback module developed for use on the S88.2 or s88 bus. 16 feedback channels can be monitored per module. Built-in diodes allow the common to be returned to the separated reporting side on three-rail track. That means considerably better power supply to the locomotives within the detection section. The LoDi-RM-16+ (v2) is suitable for push buttons, Hall sensors, reed contacts and also turnout position feedback through limit switches. The LoDi-RM-16+ (v2) is easily configured through the LoDi-ProgrammerFX and has a display for checking the detectors directly and showing the module's address. Fully backwards compatible! The LoDi-RM-16+ (v2) can equally be run on s88N and, with an adapter, on an old s88 bus. There you will not have the full functions of the S88.2 bus, however.\n1. The LoDi-RM-16+ v2 and its connections\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — The LoDi-RM-16+ v2 and its connections\nAbout the connections on the LoDi-RM-16+ (v2)\n(1): the S88.2 bus connects here. The S88.2-OUT arrow points towards the interface, since this is where the data from the track is reported back to the computer. The LoDi-RM-16+ (v2) is of course s88N compatible too; you can simply integrate it into existing layouts, but will then not have all the benefits of the new S88.2 bus. (2): the 16 detection sections connect here, along with the common for measuring or feeding into the reporting track.\n2. The LoDi-RM-16+ v2 and its LEDs\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — The LoDi-RM-16+ v2 and its LEDs\n(1) DCC LED and BUS LED: the bus LED lights as soon as the S88.2 bus is plugged in and supplied with power. The bus LED then glows a light blue. (2) Display: during operation this shows the detector currently occupied. The dot to the right of the number shows whether the module has detected the bus.\n3. Connecting the LoDi-RM-16+ v2 to the S88.2 bus\nAs mentioned several times, the LoDi-RM-16+ (v2) carries the new S88.2 bus. That is provided by the LoDi-S88-Commander.\nWhen the module is run on an S88.2 bus, the following features are available to you:\nFeedback from the individual blocks with a display Free naming of the individual feedback channels and of the LoDi-RM-16+ itself. Freely addressable! The module now keeps its address; there are no more shifts on the bus.\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — Connecting the LoDi-RM-16+ v2 to the S88.2 bus\n4. Connecting the LoDi-RM-16+ v2 to the s88 and s88N bus\nThe LoDi-RM-16+ (v2) is fitted with the new S88.2 bus, which does not mean the module cannot also be run on conventional command stations with s88 or s88N.\nFeedback is available at all times. Addressing is assigned automatically over the s88 bus, as usual.\nHere you see a LoDi-RM-16+ (v2) connected to a µCon-s88 master. It makes no difference whether the LoDi-RM-16+ (v2) units are connected to bus 1, 2 or 3; they behave like perfectly ordinary s88 modules.\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — Connecting the LoDi-RM-16+ v2 to the s88 and s88N bus\nHere you see a LoDi-RM-16+ (v2) connected to an LDT-HSI. Any kind of s88N module can of course be hung in between.\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — Connecting the LoDi-RM-16+ v2 to the s88 and s88N bus\nIt is possible to connect the LoDi-RM-16+ (v2) to a conventional command station. To use the devices on an older station without the s88N connector, you need an adapter.\nWe offer the LoDi-S88 adapter for that, which can be used universally.\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — Connecting the LoDi-RM-16+ v2 to the s88 and s88N bus\n5. Connecting the LoDi-RM-16+ v2 to the three-rail track system\nIn this example you see the LoDi-RM-16+ (v2) connected to a common line coming from the booster, here the LoDi-Booster. The common line, which is also connected to the track, is joined to the inverted T on the LoDi-RM-16+, that is the common terminal.\nAlways watch for sufficient cable cross-section. We recommend avoiding a common line below 0.75 mm². Bear in mind that in the event of a short circuit the full short-circuit current has to be able to flow through the returned common.\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — Connecting the LoDi-RM-16+ v2 to the three-rail track system\nThe next example shows a small passing loop, fitted here with four detectors. We connected the booster to the centre rail and the common to the turnout entry and exit.\nWe also ran the common to the feedback module and to the earth symbol.\nHow many detection sections you need in a block depends on how many your control software requires. In this example we assume one per block; some software expects three per block, which increases the detector and wiring effort.\nIf you are unsure, do ask us or visit our LoDi forum, where there are always friendly helpers.\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — Connecting the LoDi-RM-16+ v2 to the three-rail track system\n6. Connecting the LoDi-RM-16+ v2 to reed contacts and push buttons\nAs described, the LoDi-RM-16+ (v2) suits the use of reed contacts for the common car systems, or as a push-button input for any kind of button operation.\nThe following diagram shows a reed contact switched through the LoDi-RM-16+ (v2).\nWe simply short the earth contact (inverted T) on the LoDi-RM-16+ (v2) against one of the input channels 1–16 through the reed contact.\nFor simplicity we have shown only four reed contacts here, but 16 reed contacts can be connected to one LoDi-RM-16+ (v2) without trouble.\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — Connecting the LoDi-RM-16+ v2 to reed contacts and push buttons\nPush buttons are connected exactly as reed contacts are: a contact is shorted between earth (inverted T) and the respective channel 1–16. The device then triggers the report and sends that information over the bus to the interface.\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — Connecting the LoDi-RM-16+ v2 to reed contacts and push buttons\n7. Connecting the LoDi-RM-16+ v2 to Hall sensors\nHall sensors are modern magnetic switches that have to be fed from an external supply.\nIn our example the external supply comes from a conventional model railway transformer through a LoDi rectifier.\nFor that we connect the Hall sensors with the red wire, positive pole, to the LoDi rectifier.\nThe common, that is the blue wire, is connected from the LoDi rectifier to the LoDi-RM-16+ (v2). That is the opposite pole for the detector to measure the Hall sensors against.\nTwo Hall sensors are shown here; 16 per module can of course be run.\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — Connecting the LoDi-RM-16+ v2 to Hall sensors\n8. The LoDi-RM-16+ v2 with a LoDi-S88-Booster\nAt some point there simply is no current left...\nIf you run more than 12 modules on one bus, a LoDi-S88-Booster would be advisable; it not only supplies the modules with fresh current, it reconditions the data as well.\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — The LoDi-RM-16+ v2 with a LoDi-S88-Booster\n9. Technical data\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length 130 cm\nWidth 115 cm\nHeight 4.5 cm\nWeight 167 grams\n! ! ! Careful ! ! ! The S88.2 bus may only be run at 5 volts. Do therefore check what voltage your S88 bus runs at. ! ! ! Careful ! ! !\nAt the digital terminal the detector can be supplied with 12 to 24 volts.\nDo mind the specifications of your command station or booster manufacturer here.\nLoadable by consumers with 5 amperes briefly and 3 amperes continuously per output.\nSuitable for every common scale.\n10. Setting up the LoDi-RM-16+ v2 in the LoDi-Programmer\nHere is how to set up the LoDi-RM-16+ v2\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — Setting up the LoDi-RM-16+ v2 in the LoDi-Programmer\n11. LoDi-16-RM+ PDF download\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-RM-16+ hardware and software as a PDF.\nLoDi-RM-16+ hardware manual PDF, 1.5 MB","Features of the LoDi-RM-16+ v2","1. The LoDi-RM-16+ v2 and its connections","2. The LoDi-RM-16+ v2 and its LEDs","3. Connecting the LoDi-RM-16+ v2 to the S88.2 bus","4. Connecting the LoDi-RM-16+ v2 to the s88 and s88N bus","5. Connecting the LoDi-RM-16+ v2 to the three-rail track system","6. Connecting the LoDi-RM-16+ v2 to reed contacts and push buttons","7. Connecting the LoDi-RM-16+ v2 to Hall sensors","8. The LoDi-RM-16+ v2 with a LoDi-S88-Booster","10. Setting up the LoDi-RM-16+ v2 in the LoDi-Programmer","11. LoDi-16-RM+ PDF download","lodi-rcs-fun","hardware/accessories/lodi-rcs-fun","LoDi-RCS-Fun","Extend what your model railway can do with the LoDi-RCS-Fun: a versatile RailCom transmitter and function decoder in one. Designed for locomotives without RailCom technology.",[772,773,774,775,776,777,778]," LoDi-RCS-Fun\n LoDi-RCS-Fun\n LoDi-RCS-Fun\nExtend what your model railway can do with the LoDi-RCS-Fun: a versatile RailCom transmitter and function decoder in one. Designed for locomotives without RailCom technology — certain Märklin models (MFX or DCC), for instance — the LoDi-RCS-Fun offers a simple retrofit that not only slots smoothly into the LoDi system but also provides eight additional switchable function channels for extended control. Compatible with DCC and MFX control systems, this decoder turns your locomotives into thoroughly modern, communicative and multifunctional models.\nFeatures of the LoDi-RCS-Fun\nRailCom capability: supports bidirectional communication for RailCom capable feedback systems. Allows reports such as address, status or other specific data. Support for the Smart Power Pack (SPP): lets the decoder run for up to 15 seconds without track power. Configurable through CVs for an adjustable start delay and running time. A range of output effects: offers numerous lighting and function effects such as flashing, dimming and special effects. Effects are set individually for each AUX output through CVs. Programmability: supports CV programming on the main (PoM) (RailCom) and on the programming track. Allows addresses, configuration variables and firmware updates to be set. Flexible output configuration: up to eight AUX outputs for a wide range of applications. Outputs configurable for LEDs, SPPs and other accessories. Protection and safety functions: overload protection for the outputs. Supports temperature monitoring and signal quality checking. Compact build: suitable for use in almost every scale thanks to its small dimensions and high voltage tolerance.\n1. Before we begin...\nA few notes before we start the conversion...\nInstalling and fitting the decoder calls for a soldering iron, and particular care to avoid damaging the decoder. Take care that the connections do not touch conductive material directly, to avoid short circuits. The decoder must always be mounted so that there are no shorts to the body or to other boards. Where necessary, wrap the decoder in heat-shrink tubing.\nIf you can solder and have fitted a decoder or lit a coach before, the conversion should come easily. If you are a beginner, or would rather not attempt it, do contact our partners — they can fit the LoDi-RCS-Fun into your models quickly.\n2. The LoDi-RCS-Fun and its connections\nAs described above, the LoDi-RCS-Fun has eight switchable AUX channels, of which F0V, F0R, AUX1 and AUX2 can each carry up to 250 mA. AUX3 to AUX6 are logic outputs and can each carry 10 mA. The total load on the decoder should not exceed 500 mA.\nTwo leads are already fitted to the decoder, one red and one black. That is the decoder's supply.\nThe decoder's numbering starts at 1.\nAUX1 and AUX2 = output switched by F1 as standard. Power output, up to 250 mA. Rail right = track connection to the centre rail or the right-hand rail. Rail left = track connection to the common or the left-hand side. Headlight and tail light = output switched by F0 depending on direction, power output up to 250 mA.\n LoDi-RCS-Fun\nAUX3 = logic output, up to 5 mA. AUX4 = logic output, up to 5 mA. AUX5 = logic output, up to 5 mA. Also used for SUSI. AUX6 = logic output, up to 5 mA. Also used for SUSI. GND = decoder common, connected to consumers that switch against the common. (AUX 3–6) U+ = decoder positive. Used for consumers that switch against positive (headlight, tail light, AUX1, AUX2).\n LoDi-RCS-Fun — The LoDi-RCS-Fun and its connections\n3. Using the function outputs.\nThe LoDi-RCS-Fun is not only a RailCom transmitter, it is a full function decoder with plenty of AUX channels, four of which can carry 250 mA each. (No more than 500 mA in total.)\nAnother four AUX channels are available on the back of the decoder as described above. These are logic outputs and are used for SUSI, or for charging a power pack.\nThey can equally be used to drive an LED.\nThe outputs on the main connection side of the decoder are amplified, meaning they switch the negative. In our first example we now have four LEDs with a 1 kilohm series resistor each. If the FL, FR, AUX1 and AUX2 outputs are to run an LED, series resistors are essential.\n LoDi-RCS-Fun — Using the function outputs.\nLamps or other small consumers can of course also be switched on the FL, FR, AUX1 and AUX2 outputs.\nThese can be switched against the respective channel from the blue U+ or through the track common (or the locomotive body).\n LoDi-RCS-Fun — Using the function outputs.\n LoDi-RCS-Fun — Using the function outputs.\n4. Fitting a LoDi-RCS-Fun into a locomotive\nThe LoDi-RCS-Fun has many uses; the additional AUX channels make it a good fit for coaches in particular. But it is primarily needed and used as a RailCom transmitter for locomotives in every scale. Many older decoders cannot do RailCom. If such a decoder works well but you still want RailCom, the LoDi-RCS-Fun is a good way to gain RailCom's advantages with that locomotive too.\nLet us take a Märklin locomotive that handles DCC and mfx, and also Märklin locomotives that only handle mfx and should still be detected over RailCom by the control software. We will now explain the conversion step by step.\nThe LoDi-RCS-Fun is connected directly to the track, or to the vehicle's pickups, and is then — as the schematic shows — connected to the track without any additional components. There should also be no capacitors in the vehicle between rail right (usually the red wire) and rail left (usually the black wire).\n LoDi-RCS-Fun — Fitting a LoDi-RCS-Fun into a locomotive\nWe now have a small locomotive, a DHG 500, as a more recent example.\n(For how to take the shell off your locomotive, please see the locomotive's own instructions.)\nWith the locomotive open, look for the wire connected to the centre rail pickup. In most cases that is a red wire. Here it is fitted to a choke. What matters now is that the LoDi-RCS-Fun must be fitted directly to the pickup. Slide the insulating sleeve back to do so.\n LoDi-RCS-Fun — Fitting a LoDi-RCS-Fun into a locomotive\nWith the wire exposed, the red wire of the LoDi-RCS-Fun has to be joined to the red wire from the locomotive. The locomotive's common must also be joined to the black wire of the transmitter. That common is usually the locomotive body; on this locomotive it is very easy, because there is a solder point right at the screw. A continuity tester helps to find the common.\nIf you need help, do get in touch with us or with our service partners.\n LoDi-RCS-Fun — Fitting a LoDi-RCS-Fun into a locomotive\nNext the LoDi-RCS-Fun is installed in the locomotive. Double-sided foam tape works best for that. In this case there is still enough room behind the cab. We stick the LoDi-RCS-Fun directly onto the existing decoder.\n LoDi-RCS-Fun — Fitting a LoDi-RCS-Fun into a locomotive\nCAREFUL!\nThe decoder must be adequately insulated in every case. That is why heat-shrink tubing is supplied with our decoder. We chose not to wrap the decoder in it here, because it would have to be cut open again if further outputs or an electrolytic capacitor were to be connected.\n5. Connecting a buffer capacitor or PowerPack (SPP) (optional)\nAn electrolytic capacitor or a PowerPack (SPP, Smart Power Pack) can be connected to the LoDi-RCS-Fun to support flicker-free running. This is optional and not needed if the LoDi-RCS-Fun is used purely as a RailCom transmitter.\nTo use an ordinary electrolytic capacitor there is a connection marked “+” on the back of the board. The GND (common) connection is beside it. Electrolytic capacitors between 220 µF and 2200 µF at 25 volts can be connected to these points. A charging resistor is already fitted on the decoder. The capacitor can be connected directly to the decoder.\n LoDi-RCS-Fun — Connecting a buffer capacitor or PowerPack (SPP) (optional)\nPlease note that connecting an electrolytic capacitor can interfere with reading CVs on an ordinary programming output. RailCom is not affected by this limitation.\nSmart Power Packs (SPP) let the LoDi-RCS-Fun stay powered for up to 15 seconds without power from the rails. That naturally depends on what the lighting draws and on the charge state of the capacitor.\nTo connect the PowerPack, use the three solder pads as shown in the photo. The white wire of the SPP can be connected to one of the logic outputs AUX3–AUX6. The red (V+) and black (GND) wires can be connected to the two V+ pads (on the underside) and the two GND pads (one below and one above).\nThe duration is set in CV222, in steps of 80 ms (default 255; CV value 80 ms = 20 seconds). Once that time has passed without a track signal, the decoder switches all outputs off, even if the SPP is not fully discharged. The functions resume only once the track signal returns.\n LoDi-RCS-Fun — Connecting a buffer capacitor or PowerPack (SPP) (optional)\nSPPs allow CVs to be read and written in the traditional way without having to be removed. Cutting the SPP source during programming happens automatically through the third wire (charge) of the FD Micro.\nOnce you have decided which output carries the charge connection to the SPP, effect 5 — that is, value 5 — has to be set on that AUX channel.\nTo avoid a very high draw when the booster power comes on while several SPP modules are in use, a start delay is strongly recommended (a different value for each decoder). The delay is set in CV221 in seconds and represents the time after which charging of the SPP module begins once the track is powered. When several decoders share the same track, these times should have different values so that not all SPPs start at once.\n6. CV list, settings, addresses\nThe LoDi-RCS-Fun is configured through CVs.\nThe decoder can be programmed with any conventional command station that has a DCC programming output or handles PoM.\nIf you have a RailCom capable system, you can read the decoder's CVs live at any time.\nWith our equipment that means the LoDi-S88-Commander LX and the LoDi-8-GBM(-P), as well as the LoDi-CV-Programmer. Because the LoDi-RCS-Fun has a very extensive set of CVs, we decided to offer the complete list here as a download and to explain only the most important points on this page.\nComplete CV list for the LoDi-RCS-Fun, as of 15 April 2024 PDF, 291.8 KB\nLoDi-RCS-Fun, 12 February 2025 PDF, 1.4 MB","Features of the LoDi-RCS-Fun","1. Before we begin...","2. The LoDi-RCS-Fun and its connections","3. Using the function outputs.","4. Fitting a LoDi-RCS-Fun into a locomotive","5. Connecting a buffer capacitor or PowerPack (SPP) (optional)","6. CV list, settings, addresses","lodi-wib-ice-exp","hardware/lighting/lodi-wib-ice-exp","LoDi-WiB ICE Exp","The LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp conversion — a new life for the Märklin ICE Experimental. The Märklin ICE Experimental is a model train that holds a special place for many collectors and enthusiasts. As the forefather of the ICE era, it has a charm all of its own.",[785,786,773,787,788,382,789],"LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE Exp\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp\nThe LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp conversion — a new life for the Märklin ICE Experimental. The Märklin ICE Experimental is a model train that holds a special place for many collectors and enthusiasts. As the forefather of the ICE era, it has a charm all of its own.\nNow there is a way to bring this historic train up to the latest state of the art: the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp conversion for the power cars and the LoDi-WiB ICE Exp for the intermediate coaches.\nThe LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp conversion is a set developed specifically for the older models in the Märklin ICE Experimental range (3371, 3771, 3671). With this set your trains can be converted to a modern 21-pin MTC interface and also get a ready-made place for a loudspeaker. The conversion is available in two versions, with or without pickup changeover.\nEven then, the models in the Märklin ICE Experimental range had special features: two coreless motors with a flywheel, 8-pole couplings movable in two axes, bellows for the coaches and an extremely sturdy construction.\nThe LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp conversion is a great way of upgrading the Märklin ICE Experimental and adapting it to the modern demands of a model railway. That preserves the train's nostalgic charm while letting you use the benefits of today's technology at the same time. This conversion set is an affordable alternative for everyone who owns a Märklin ICE Experimental.\nFeatures of the LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE Exp (-S)\nSimple installation, optimised for vehicles with full RailCom capability. A precisely fitting design for the power car, the coach and the trailer. The 21-pin MTC standard for connecting any decoder, with provision for a loudspeaker. Economical LED technology, perfectly lighting the ICE Experimental.\n1. Before we begin...\nA few notes before we start the conversion...\nYou can start the pictures as a small slideshow and enlarge them for a detailed view.\nWe will guide you step by step through a successful coach conversion with this description.\nIf you notice during the conversion that steps or information are missing, do get in touch with us or visit our forum.\nIf you can solder and have already lit one coach or another, the conversion should come easily to you. If you are a beginner, however, or do not feel up to a conversion, do get in touch with our partners.\nThey will be glad to make you an individual offer.\nYou can carry out the conversion yourself?\nThen let us begin.\nYou will need:\na soldering iron with a fine tip, and solder. a desoldering pump or desoldering braid. a flat screwdriver and a pair of tweezers. a small, fine pair of side cutters as well as, if available, a wire stripper for fine cores. superglue if needed.\n2. The LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp (-S)\nIn our shop you can choose between a complete set and individual LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp boards. The set also contains the dummy board for the second power car; no decoder has to be plugged onto it.\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp (-S)\nFirst we would like to explain the boards. To do that we start by looking at the underside of the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp.\nThe 21-pin MTC interface. This is where the decoder is plugged in. The coupling's original ribbon cable is soldered in here. The relay for switching the pickups over, only on the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp-S. A place to connect a loudspeaker. An additional connection for a loudspeaker.\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp (-S)\nThe top of the board, seen from above\nHere you can decide whether you want to supply the train through solder bridge SJ1, the pantograph, or SJ2, the pickup. The motor is connected at this point. A connection for the front (white/red light, AUX 3 for the cab, for instance, AUX 5 for the pantograph flasher).\nAUX 3 and 5 can be loaded with 150 mA.\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp (-S)\nNow let us begin the conversion.\nFirst the power cars have to be taken apart.\nTo take the train's body off, start by proceeding as follows:\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp (-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp (-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp (-S)\nOn the first power car, remove the coach bellows. Then turn the power car onto its side. You will now see a notch, which can be eased apart a little very nicely with a medium-sized flat screwdriver. The cover can then simply be taken off.\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp (-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp (-S)\nNext, at the rear bogie, the power car's body has to be bent outwards a little; you should hear a slight click, which means the roof has come free of the lower mounting.\nThe roof can now simply be taken off.\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp (-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp (-S)\nOf the two power cars there is a main power car (the female coupling in picture 1), which takes the decoder board, and a further power car (male coupling, 2), in which only the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp without an interface is fitted.\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp (-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp (-S)\nUnsolder all the wires from the original board.\nIn most cases they can simply be used again.\nThe ribbon cable should be desoldered carefully with a desoldering pump or desoldering braid. Take care that the soldering iron is not set too hot, or the flexible board could be damaged.\n(On some versions of the train a PTC was fitted directly at the motor. It has to be desoldered and the wire connected directly to the motor.)\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp (-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp (-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp (-S)\nNow that the power car is clear, the new board can be fitted. Thread the 8-pin header to which the coupling is attached into the board and fix it with one solder point. Solder the further solder points one after another. Install the decoder of your choice right away; in the picture you see an ESU LokSound with a loudspeaker. There is already a place for it on the board and it can be soldered straight onto the board.\nAfter that the two wires from the motor as well as the pickup are soldered to the boards and fixed again with the two screws.\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp (-S)\nOn the ICE Experimental the front lamps can be replaced by LEDs.\nThe necessary series resistors are already built into the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp.\nIf you do want to keep using the lamps, however, you have to bridge resistors R4 and R5 on the board.\nIn this case, though, we are using the LoDi-WiB ICE-M front, which fits the ICE 1 as well as the ICE Experimental.\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp (-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp (-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp (-S)\nTo remove the original lighting, place a screwdriver gently at the front and lever the old lighting unit out. For connecting we use the original wires, which we unsolder from the lighting unit and solder to the new LoDi-WiB ICE-M front.\nBrown wire = VCC > U+\nRed wire = Red > L_RT\nBlack wire = white > L_WS\nOnce all the wires are soldered on, the lighting unit can be pushed back into the power car's holder.\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp (-S)\nWith the main power car converted, the board without an interface has to be installed in the other power car. Proceed as with the main power car. Take care that the lighting's connecting wires as well as the motor connection have to be swapped so that the car runs in the same direction as the main power car.\nLikewise the tail light should of course glow red when the light on the main power car is white. So simply swap the lighting connections as follows: brown wire = VCC > U+\nRed wire = Red > L_WS\nBlack wire = white > L_RT\nThe decoder fitted has to be one without amplified AUX 3 and 4, so not an MKL. The function mapping of the AUX outputs is as follows: F0 = red/white directional lighting, AUX 1 = pickup changeover position 1\nAUX 2 = pickup changeover position 2\nAUX 3 = output at the front (cab lighting), 150 mA\nAUX 4 = output for coach lighting, total load 1.5 amperes. AUX 5 = output at the front (pantograph flasher), 150 mA\nIf the motor no longer runs properly...\n3. The LoDi-WiB ICE Exp (-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-WiB ICE Exp (-S)\nFitting it into the coach itself is very easy to handle, as you will see in the rest of the description.\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-WiB ICE Exp (-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-WiB ICE Exp (-S)\nAs with the power cars, the coach too has retaining clips at both ends which have to be levered out from below.\nOnce both retaining jaws are removed, the coach has to be pressed apart a little at the bottom; the body should then come off.\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-WiB ICE Exp (-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-WiB ICE Exp (-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-WiB ICE Exp (-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-WiB ICE Exp (-S)\nNow that the coach roof is off, the original lighting first has to be removed.\nThe retaining posts on which the original lighting is mounted should stay in the coach. We will install the LoDi-WiB ICE Exp on them later.\nPull carefully at the lighting unit and hold the post firmly as you pull the original lighting unit off.\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-WiB ICE Exp (-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-WiB ICE Exp (-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-WiB ICE Exp (-S)\nIdeally the whole thing now looks like this: the posts stand upright. You can now put an extra drop of superglue onto the post as well. It is very brittle and therefore has to be handled very carefully.\nOnce it is fixed on both sides, 2 contacts on both retaining posts still have to be bent aside. Otherwise they get in the way when installing the new board.\nThe two contacts can be bent a little towards the outside of the coach very easily with a screwdriver, as can be seen in the picture.\nIf the mountings break off as you pull, despite all your care, do not worry: they can be fixed back on with a small blob of superglue.\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-WiB ICE Exp (-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-WiB ICE Exp (-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-WiB ICE Exp (-S)\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-WiB ICE Exp (-S)\nThe LoDi-WiB ICE Exp can now be laid between the contacts. It is very important here that you watch for the correct marking for U+. As can be seen in the picture, it points towards the male coupling, to the right, with U+ at the top.\nNow solder the contacts to the board.\nTake care that, if you have used superglue in the coach to fix the mounting, you let the coach outgas sufficiently. Otherwise milky effects could appear in the coach glazing if the glue has not yet dried out.\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-WiB ICE Exp (-S)\nThe board fits all original Märklin coaches made for the Experimental. After the conversion you can now fit the coach roof again and push the retaining jaws back in at the sides. The bellows go on the female side of the coach.\n LoDi-WiB ICE Exp — The LoDi-WiB ICE Exp (-S)\n4. Technical data\nDimensions of the LoDi-WiB ICE Exp: length 170 mm, width 11 mm, thickness 1.55 mm. Weight: 7 grams. Dimensions of the LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE Exp: length 124 mm, width 27 mm, thickness 1.55 mm. Weight: 13 grams, or 15 grams for the (-S) version.\nThe LoDi-(Motor) ICE Exp (-S) has a standard 21-pin MTC interface and can be fitted with all common locomotive or function decoders with a 21-pin interface.\nFor use with decoders without MKL (unamplified AUX 3 and 4).\n5. LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE Exp download\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE Exp as a PDF.\nLoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE Exp, 25 April 2025 PDF, 1.4 MB","LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE Exp","Features of the LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE Exp (-S)","2. The LoDi-Motor WiB ICE Exp (-S)","3. The LoDi-WiB ICE Exp (-S)","5. LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE Exp download","sw-firmwareupdate","software/firmware-update","Since the LoDi-ProgrammerFX Late 2022 version was introduced, we have simplified the update process.",[204,795],"Firmware update\nSince the LoDi-ProgrammerFX Late 2022 version was introduced, we have simplified the update process.\nThe LoDi-ProgrammerFX handles the whole update procedure for you. Transferring files by hand is no longer necessary — the LoDi-ProgrammerFX checks automatically at startup whether new firmware versions are available.\nWhen new firmware is available, it is announced on the website or in the forum. The LoDi-ProgrammerFX tells you at startup that updates are available and shows you the latest firmware version in the respective devices. Your devices can then be updated straight from the LoDi-ProgrammerFX interface. Simply, quickly and without using any additional files.\nThanks to this automated update function you can be sure your devices always have the latest improvements and functions.\nSelect the device in question to find out how the update is carried out.\nLoDi-Rektor\n Firmware update — Firmware update\nLoDi-S88-Commander LX\n Firmware update — Firmware update\nLoDi-Shift-Commander\n Firmware update — Firmware update\nLoDi-DMX-Interface\n Firmware update — Firmware update\nLoDi-Booster\n Firmware update — Firmware update\nLoDi-8-GBM (V2) (-P)\n Firmware update — Firmware update\n Firmware update — Firmware update\nLoDi-Booster 10A\n Firmware update — Firmware update\nLoDi-RM16+\n Firmware update — Firmware update\nLoDi-Con\n Firmware update — Firmware update\nVideos about the update\n \ninfo@lokstoredigital.de","Videos about the update","sw-lodi-trainspeed","software/lodi-rektor/lodi-trainspeed","LoDi-TrainSpeed","Like the LoDi-Booster, the LoDi-TrainSpeed converts the control signal coming from the LoDi-Rektor over the LoDi bus.",[319,802,803,804,805,806],"Settings and firmware update\nLike the LoDi-Booster, the LoDi-TrainSpeed converts the control signal coming from the LoDi-Rektor over the LoDi bus.\nThe address as delivered is 48. Would you like to change the LoDi-TrainSpeed's address? Click here and go to point 1.\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Settings and firmware update\nImmediately after being hooked onto the LoDi bus, the LoDi-TrainSpeed is detected by the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\n1. Changing the LoDi-TrainSpeed's address\nAs delivered, the LoDi-TrainSpeed is set to address 48, as mentioned above. That can stay as it is and only has to be changed if you want to add a second LoDi-TrainSpeed to the system.\nFirst start the LoDi-ProgrammerFX and go to the LoDi bus (1); the following dialogue now opens:\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Changing the LoDi-TrainSpeed's address\nNow select the new address the device is to be given (2). A name for the device can then also be entered at (3).\nNow press button (4) on the LoDi-TrainSpeed for 3 seconds. The TrainSpeed now jumps into addressing mode. It signals this through the two LEDs (5), which flash alternately.\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Changing the LoDi-TrainSpeed's address\nNow the \"Anwenden\" button (6) in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX can be pressed. The TrainSpeed stops flashing immediately and has its new address set from now on.\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Changing the LoDi-TrainSpeed's address\nThe LoDi-TrainSpeed has now saved the new address and is shown on the bus again straight away.\n2. The LoDi-TrainSpeed's settings\nThe LoDi-TrainSpeed sends the raw data to the control software.\nNo further settings therefore have to be made on the LoDi-TrainSpeed.\nMost software solutions such as iTrain and Win-Digipet set the scale and length measurement themselves, as the software happens to need them.\nIf you do want to measure a locomotive without starting third-party software, you can also make these settings in the LoDi-TrainSpeed under the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\nThe parameters to be set are:\nScale: here you have to set your scale Length: if this box is ticked, the TrainSpeed will measure the length of the vehicle or train as well. Tolerance: if this box is ticked, the TrainSpeed will treat deviations of more than 5% as uneven running and therefore as an invalid measurement.\nCareful!\nChanges made here can be changed back by the control software.\nThat applies to the scale, the length and the tolerance measurement.\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — The LoDi-TrainSpeed's settings\n3. The measuring dialogue in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nIn essence, as mentioned in point 2 above, the LoDi-TrainSpeed is set from the model railway software. The LoDi-ProgrammerFX does not necessarily have to be active later either. For quickly measuring a locomotive and its speed after all, we have built a dedicated measuring dialogue into the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — The measuring dialogue in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nThis window now shows the LoDi-TrainSpeed as active and ready to measure.\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — The measuring dialogue in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — The measuring dialogue in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nWhen a locomotive runs into the sensor, the LoDi-ProgrammerFX shows which direction the locomotive is passing the sensor from.\nThe red LED on the\nLoDi-TrainSpeed now flashes as well, signalling an active measurement.\nAs soon as the locomotive reaches the second sensor, the LoDi-ProgrammerFX shows that immediately as well.\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — The measuring dialogue in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nOnce the measurement is successful, the LoDi-TrainSpeed will show the speed and the length (if enabled) as well.\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — The measuring dialogue in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\n4. Updating the LoDi-TrainSpeed's firmware\nJust like the LoDi-Booster, the LoDi-TrainSpeed as a LoDi bus component can be updated.\nTo check the firmware version, go to the TrainSpeed in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX and navigate down to the Firmware tab. From LoDi-ProgrammerFX version 2202 onwards, it is shown there automatically if new firmware is available.\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Updating the LoDi-TrainSpeed's firmware\nTo install the update onto the LoDi-TrainSpeed, however, it first has to be put into bootloader mode. To do that, first pull the network plug out of the LoDi-TrainSpeed.\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Updating the LoDi-TrainSpeed's firmware\nNow you have to hold button (1) on the LoDi-TrainSpeed down and plug cable (2) back in.\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Updating the LoDi-TrainSpeed's firmware\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Updating the LoDi-TrainSpeed's firmware\nThe TrainSpeed is now in the bootloader menu and can now have the new firmware flashed to it.\nNow navigate to the TrainSpeed in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\nIt is now found by the LoDi-ProgrammerFX in bootloader mode.\nIf the TrainSpeed shown in the bootloader does not appear in the LoDi bus overview, try the same procedure without any other bus participants, unhooking them from the bus so that only the TrainSpeed is still connected to the LoDi-Rektor.\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Updating the LoDi-TrainSpeed's firmware\nNow press the \"Aktualisiere Firmware\" or \"Update installieren\" button\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Updating the LoDi-TrainSpeed's firmware\nAfter opening it, the query window appears straight away, in which the current firmware is compared with the firmware to be loaded.\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Updating the LoDi-TrainSpeed's firmware\nNow you still have to confirm the update.\nAfter pressing the OK button, a progress bar now runs at the bottom right of the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Updating the LoDi-TrainSpeed's firmware\nThe LoDi-TrainSpeed reboots once after the update and then reports back on the LoDi bus as usual straight away. A quick check shows that the current firmware is now installed.\n5. Connecting and setting up the LoDi-TrainSpeed\nClick here to reach the LoDi-TrainSpeed hardware description.\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Connecting and setting up the LoDi-TrainSpeed\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Connecting and setting up the LoDi-TrainSpeed\nAny questions still open?\nWould you simply like to ask us in person?\nOr go to our forum, where experienced users are glad to help you further.\ninfo@lokstoredigital.de","1. Changing the LoDi-TrainSpeed's address","2. The LoDi-TrainSpeed's settings","3. The measuring dialogue in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX","4. Updating the LoDi-TrainSpeed's firmware","5. Connecting and setting up the LoDi-TrainSpeed","api","Device API","The communication protocols of the LoDi devices — for makers of model railway control software.",[],"This section holds the description of the communication protocols of our products. We are happy to answer any questions.\nGeneral protocol description LoDi-Rektor API LoDi-Shift-Commander API LoDi-S88-Commander API LoDi-Con API","api-lodi-s88-commander","api/lodi-s88-commander","LoDi-S88-Commander LX API","The protocol for feedback reporting.",[665,666,667,818,819,820,821,822,823,824,825,826,827,828,829,830,831,832],"Introduction\nThe device type is always 0x0A on the LoDi-S88-Commander.\nBasic commands\nGetVersion\nThis command returns the device identifier and the FW version of the device.\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x20 0x0F 0x00 .. 0xFF\nPacket type Command Packet number Device type Major Minor Patch\n0x21 0x0F 0x00 .. 0xFF 0x0A \nThis command reads the settings of the LoDi-S88-Commander.\nThis command reads the settings of the LoDi-Shift-Commander.\nThe major version only changes when completely new hardware with different characteristics and a different feature set is released.\nThe minor version changes when the API is extended. Individual commands may also become incompatible.\nThe patch version changes for general bug fixes that do not touch the API.\nDeviceConfigGet\nThis command reads the settings of the LoDi-S88-Commander.\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x20 0x35 0x00 .. 0xFF\nPacket type Command Packet number Length Speed On delay Off delay\nBus1 Bus2 Bus1 Bus2 Bus1 Bus2 Bus1 Bus2\n0x21 0x35 0x00 .. 0xFF 0..48 0..48 0..2 0..2 0,10, 100,250 0,10, 100,250 0,10, 100,250 0,10, 100,250\n \n Separate buses µCon compat. Use addresses Rain mode RailCom speed RailCom QoS Baud rate high Baud rate low\n 0..1 0 1 0..1 1 0..1 9500..11000\nThe fields length bus1 and length bus2 give the number of modules connected to the respective bus. A module is always 16 inputs long. A total of 96 modules may be connected.\nThe entries speed bus1 and speed bus2 hold the S88 bus speed.\n0: fast 1: normal 2: slow\nThe bus speed matters above all on long buses, to reach a high polling rate. The first clock of a bus cycle always keeps to the values defined in the S88 standard. Every module on the market should tolerate setting 1 (normal), since that matches the S88 standard. Setting 0 (fast) often works too. Every LoDi feedback module supports the fast setting.\nThe fields on delay bus1 and on delay bus 2 determine how quickly a detected occupancy should trigger. As a rule the value 0 (none) should be entered here.\n0: none 10: short (100 ms) 100: medium (1 s) 250: long (2.5 s)\nThe fields off delay bus1 and off delay bus 2 determine how long an occupancy report should stay active once no signal is detected any more. As a rule the value 100 (medium) should be entered here, to avoid a flickering occupancy report and to keep a large enough safety margin.\n0: none 10: short (100 ms) 100: medium (1 s) 250: long (2.5 s)\nThe separate buses field is not supported at present and should therefore be 0.\nThe µCon compatibility setting puts the LoDi-S88-Commander into a mode compatible with the µCon-S88-Master. The device opens an additional UDP port (11082) and listens there for µCon-S88-Master compatible commands. Every event is sent in the µCon-compatible format. Neither RailCom nor current measurement is available.\nThe use addresses field is not supported at present. It should be 1.\nS88 modules\nS88BusModulesGet\nReads every device connected to the two S88 buses, sorted by S88 address.\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x20 0xA0 0x00 .. 0xFF\nPacket type Command Packet number Count Module address 1 Module type Module address 2 Module address 3\n0x21 0xA0 0x00 .. 0xFF 0..192 0 .. 127 0, 0x31, 0x32 0 .. 255 0 .. 127\nThe count field carries the number of bytes that follow — taken twice, since two blocks of information follow, each as long as the value given in count.\nThe first block holds the modules actually scanned on the bus. A 0 in this block means a standard S88 module. S88.2 compatible modules carry the identifier 0x31 or 0x32 in module type.\n0x31 LoDi-8-GBM 0x32 LoDi-RM-16+ 0x34 LoDi-8-GBM-P\nModule address 1 is 0 for a standard S88 module. Otherwise it gives the address stored in an S88.2 compatible module.\nThe second block brings the addresses of every S88 module together. Each position in the block maps to the resulting address on the S88 bus. Since S88 modules are usually two bytes long, the same address therefore appears twice in a row. Module address 2 may additionally have its top bit set to show that this module is ready to receive a new address — that it is in programming mode. If module address 2 is 255, the module has not been given an address yet.\nS88ModulNameGet\nPacket type Command Packet number Module address\n0x20 0xA3 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 127\nThe module address field holds the S88 address of the module to be read.\nPacket type Command Packet number Length The length field determines the number of characters that follow in character 0 to character n. The resulting string is to be read as follows: .. BusNr names the bus to use. Within that bus, OperatorPos determines whose operator name is read. Each LoDi-Operator counts as one device.\n0x21 0xA3 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 16 \nThe length field determines the number of characters that follow in character 0 to character n. The resulting string holds the name of the module.\nS88ChannelNamesGet\nReads the channel names of an S88.2 compatible module.\nPacket type Command Packet number Module address\n0x20 0xA5 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 127\nPacket type Command Packet number Length The length field determines the number of characters that follow in character 0 to character n. The resulting string is to be read as follows: .. BusNr names the bus to use. Within that bus, OperatorPos determines whose operator name is read. Each LoDi-Operator counts as one device.\n0x21 0xA5 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 16 \nThe reply packet holds a list of the channel names in channel order. Each entry consists of the length followed by the characters. The total number of entries can be derived either from the module type of the module asked or from the packet length.\nThe length field determines the number of characters that follow in character 0 to character n. The resulting string holds the name of the channel\nModule status\nS88MelderGet\nReads the detectors of every module.\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x20 0x30 0x00 .. 0xFF\nPacket type Command Packet number Count Module address StatusHigh StatusLow\n0x21 0x30 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 96 0 .. 127 \nThe count field determines how many modules are sent afterwards.\nStatusHigh and StatusLow together give the bit-coded occupancy report of the module.\nS88LokAddrGet\nFetches the RailCom feedback for a particular channel of an S88.2 module.\nPacket type Command Packet number Module address\n0x20 0xA7 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 127\nPacket type Command Packet number Count Channel number LokAddrHigh LokAddrLow\n0x21 0xA7 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 64 0 .. 15 \nCount says how many locomotive reports will follow. The reports are in no particular order.\nThe fields LokAddrHigh and LokAddrLow give the DCC address and the direction of the locomotive.\nLokAddr = LokAddrHigh256 + LokAddrLow\nLokDirection = LokAddrHigh & 0x80\nS88CurrentLevelsGet\nReads the current measured on every channel of an S88.2 module.\nPacket type Command Packet number Module address\n0x20 0xAA 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 127\nPacket type Command Packet number Count Current\n0x21 0xAA 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 16 0 .. 255\nCount says how many channels will follow. The current measurements are sent in channel order.\nThe current field holds the measured current. This value is only an indicator and can be used to set the occupancy and short-circuit thresholds.\nEvents\nEvents are sent unasked to every active communication partner. As a rule they carry changes to the states listed under module status. Answers to CV commands sent to RailCom-capable locomotives also come back this way.\nEvent messages are numbered by the LoDi-S88-Commander from 0 to 255 in the packet number field. That is how a lost packet can be detected and the information refreshed with the status commands where needed.\nS88EventsActivate\nThis command enables events for a connection.\nPacket type Command Packet number Active\n0x20 0x01 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 1\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x21 0x01 0x00 .. 0xFF\nThe active field determines whether events are sent or not.\n0: do not send events (unsubscribe) 1: send events (subscribe)\nS88MelderEvent\nThis event carries changes in the occupancy report. Several changes can be transmitted at once,\nPacket type Event Packet number Count Module address Channel Status\n0x22 0x31 0x00 .. 0xFF 1 .. 127 1 .. 16 0 .. 1\nThe count field says how many reports will follow.\nIf nothing has changed at the detector, a keepalive is sent every 1 second as event 0x31 with change 0.\nEvery report holds the fields module address, giving the S88 address of the reporting module, channel, holding the reporting channel within the module, and status, showing whether the report is coming or going.\n0: report going, there is no locomotive in the block 1: report coming, a locomotive has entered the block\nS88LokAddrEvent\nThis event is sent when the RailCom feedback changes. It fires when a locomotive is newly detected in a block, or when a locomotive has not been detected in the block for a while (about 1 s).\nPacket type Event Packet number Count Module address Channel LokAddrHigh LokAddrLow Status\n0x22 0x3C 0x00 .. 0xFF 1 .. 127 0 .. 15 0 .. 1\nThe count field says how many reports will follow.\nEvery report holds the fields module address, channel, LokAddrHigh, LokAddrLow and status.\nThe module address holds the S88 address of the reporting module.\nThe channel field holds the channel within the module that triggered.\nThe fields LokAddrHigh and LokAddrLow together give the DCC address and the direction of the locomotive:\nLokAddr = LokAddrHigh256 + LokAddrLow\nLokDirection = LokAddrHigh & 0x80\nThe status field says whether this is a coming or a going report.\n0: the locomotive address was newly detected in the block. 1: the locomotive address has not been detected in the block for about 1 s.\nS88RawEvent\nThis event passes on data sent by an S88.2 module that was not processed elsewhere. At present it is only used for current measurement and module status.\nPacket type Event Packet number Count Module address Eventtyp_Kanal Status\n0x22 0x3A 0x00 .. 0xFF 1 .. 127 Type | 0 .. 15 0 .. 255\nThe count field says how many reports will follow.\nEvery report holds the fields module address, event type + channel, and status.\nThe module address holds the S88 address of the reporting module.\nThe Eventtyp_Kanal field holds the channel within the module that triggered together with the event type. It is coded as follows:\nEvent type = Eventtyp_Kanal / 16 Channel = Eventtyp_Kanal & 0x0F\nThe status field carries the contents of the report. How it is coded depends on the event type.\nEvent type Status\n0x10 Bit 0: prog mode active Bit 4: DCC power on Bit 5: RailCom signal found\n0x11 Bus voltage in steps of 0.02 V\n0x2X Current measurement\n0x3X Track quality 0..100%, from firmware v05.02.02\nTrack quality refers to the occupancy section, not to the locomotive. One of two methods is used to determine it:\nWithout RailCom: contact quality is derived from the jitter in the current measurement. With RailCom: while a locomotive is running, how often its RailCom is received when it is addressed in DCC is measured. Stationary locomotives are not considered.\nS88RailcomResponseEvent\nThis event is the answer to CV commands sent to a locomotive over DCC.\nPacket type Event Packet number Event type Module address Channel LokAddrHigh LokAddrLow Data\n0x22 0x3B 0x00 .. 0xFF 1 .. 127 0 .. 15 \nThe event type can take the following values:\n0x01: ACK, acknowledgement of a command (not implemented) 0x11: read CV byte, data holds the byte read 0x20: speed of the locomotive as reported by the decoder over RailCom DYN 0, 0..255 in km/h, from firmware v05.02.02 0x21: speed of the locomotive as reported by the decoder over RailCom DYN 1, 256 + data in km/h, from firmware v05.02.02 0x27: DCC quality as reported by the decoder over RailCom DYN 7, 0..100%, from firmware v05.02.02\nThe module address field encodes the S88 address of the S88.2 module.\nThe channel field gives the channel number within the module.\nThe DCC address of the locomotive is calculated from the two fields LokAddrHigh and LokAddrLow.\nLokAddr = LokAddrHigh256 + LokAddrLow\nLoDi-S88-Commander LX API Service Adobe Acrobat document, 160.3 KB","DeviceConfigGet","S88 modules","S88BusModulesGet","S88ModulNameGet","S88ChannelNamesGet","Module status","S88MelderGet","S88LokAddrGet","S88CurrentLevelsGet","Events","S88EventsActivate","S88MelderEvent","S88LokAddrEvent","S88RawEvent","S88RailcomResponseEvent","con-02-zentralen","lodi-con/command-stations","Setting up command stations","Adding a command station in the LoDi-Con — with a guide for each supported station.",[],"The LoDi-Con can be connected to several network-capable command stations at once.\nIf you have, say, a LoDi-Rektor and a LoDi-Shift-Commander, it can talk to both — and setting that up is very simple.\nTo find out how to bring your command station in, click the matching picture.\nLoDi-Rektor\nLoDi-Con Rektor \nLoDi-S88-Commander and (LX)\nLoDi-Con S88C \nLoDi-Shift-Commander\nLoDi-Con SC \nZ21 protocol\nand every command station that supports the Z21 protocol\nLoDi-Con Z21 \nCS 2/3\nLoDi-Con CS2 \nLenz command station with LAN interface\n lodi-con-02-zentralen-06-f4858c.png\nESU ECoS\nLoDi-Con ECoS \nWiThrottle\n lodi-con-02-zentralen-08-358823.png\nWiThrottle\nSome descriptions are still being written, as is the development of the command stations and control solutions described below.\nLocoNet\nLocoNet\n lodi-con-02-zentralen-09-b71c20.png\nLocoNet\n lodi-con-02-zentralen-10-fb6687.jpg","con-zentrale-z21","lodi-con/command-stations/z21","Stations using the Z21 protocol","Setting up the Roco z21 and other stations speaking the Z21 protocol.",[],"Tapping the top left takes you to the overview of command stations, which also shows whether a connection is active. You can now tap the LoDi-S88-Commander (LX) to see its IP address and status.\nSome manufacturers on the model railway market use or support the Z21 protocol.\nThe LoDi-Con, like the LoDi-Rektor, understands the Z21 protocol fully.\n lodi-con-zentrale-z21-01-4db68a.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-z21-02-2d6b92.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-z21-03-687cef.png\nTo connect a z21 to the LoDi-Con, proceed as follows:\nFirst tap the \"house\", which always takes you back to the main screen.\nFrom there go to Settings > Command station >\n lodi-con-zentrale-z21-04-25055e.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-z21-05-cd8777.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-z21-06-befcfa.png\nTo connect the LoDi-Shift-Commander to the LoDi-Con, proceed as follows:\nIf command stations are already listed here, you can click \"Search for command stations\".\nNow choose the z21 you want to connect to the LoDi-Con. In our example it is the top one.\n(Devices shown green in the \"Search for command stations\" overview are already known to the LoDi-Con.)\n lodi-con-zentrale-z21-07-ca83b3.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-z21-08-583621.png\nYou can change the name of the z21 if you like.\nThe LoDi-Con now connects to the LoDi-Rektor.\nThe LoDi-Con now connects to the z21.\nA new z21 symbol now has to appear at the top left. If that z21 is steady, the connection is up. If it blinks, the LoDi-Con has no connection to the z21 or is trying to establish one.\nTapping the top left takes you to the overview of command stations, which also shows whether a connection is active. If there are several stations, the z21 can be selected here.\n lodi-con-zentrale-z21-09-4dd788.png\nHere you can check whether a connection exists and call up the version number, IP address and UDP port.\nOver the z21 protocol, some command stations — the z21 included — offer a programming track. You reach it by tapping the z21 shown at the top left.\n\"Prog mode\" is shown at the top there.\nThat takes you straight into CV programming.\nHere you can read and write CVs.\nWe tried to lay the menu out as clearly and simply as possible.\n lodi-con-zentrale-z21-10-2ef2ec.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-z21-11-0b40f6.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-z21-12-eda433.png\nCommand station DCC 28 DCC 126 Accessories, standard Accessories, extended Power Programming track Note\nLoDi-Rektor (3.4.8) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ \nRoco z21 (1.43) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 1\nTams mc² (1.7.7) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 2\nYaMoRC (8.2.8) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 3,4\n1 On older firmware versions, enable \"Ignore loco info\" where necessary\n2 An active programming track is not shown\n3 The option \"Ignore wrong checksum\" has to be enabled\n4 Speed step feedback is one too low\n lodi-con-zentrale-z21-13-5beb29.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","lodi-cv-programmer","hardware/driving/lodi-cv-programmer","LoDi-CV-Programmer","Programmer for DCC and mfx® with a built-in booster up to 1 ampere, powered over USB-C PD.",[851,852,853,854,855,453,856,857,456,858,859]," LoDi-CV-Programmer\nThe time has finally come! 🎉 The LoDi-CV-Programmer is here!\nIt is the newest member of the LoDi bus family and plugs comfortably into the LoDi-Rektor or behind other LoDi bus devices. To keep it current we gave it modern USB-C PD technology — so the device's voltage can now be tailored to the job.\nAnd that is not all: besides being a programmer it can also serve as a small booster of up to 1 ampere. Best of all? Alongside the common DCC protocol it can also talk to mfx decoders — and of course we have thought ahead: DCC-A is in preparation! 🚀\nIn short: a real all-rounder for your layout! 🔧✨\nFeatures of the LoDi-CV-Programmer\nA professional programmer for the DCC and mfx® data formats. Prepared for the coming DCC-A data format. A fully integrated LoDi bus component from LoDi-Rektor version 03.04.05 onwards. Automatic registration of every mfx® capable locomotive. Full RailCom support — comfortable reading and writing of CVs on the main track. Convenient configuration of the LoDi DCC accessory decoders as well as decoders from other manufacturers. Modern power over USB-C PD (Power Delivery) with an output voltage adjustable from 9 to 20 V through the LoDi-Con or LoDi-ProgrammerFX. A built-in mini booster of up to 1 ampere output — ideal for smaller layouts.\n1. The LoDi-CV-Programmer and its connections\nThe LoDi-CV-Programmer is a versatile programmer that works seamlessly with the LoDi bus (formerly µCon bus). The LoDi-Rektor is needed as the central control unit.\nThe LoDi-CV-Programmer has the following connections:\n(1) LoDi bus input: the LoDi bus is fed into this socket. LoDi bus OUT: further LoDi bus devices connect here (2,3) Track output and programming track output: the track output can carry up to 800 mA continuously and 1.1 A peak. The programming track output is limited to a maximum of 500 mA during normal programming. (4) Connection for the supplied power supply: the LoDi-CV-Programmer has a USB-C PD connector. That means it has to run from a USB power supply that supports Power Delivery (PD). You will find more on that below in section 3 — connecting a power supply.\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — The LoDi-CV-Programmer and its connections\n2. LEDs and programming button of the LoDi-CV-Programmer\nThe LED indicators on the LoDi-CV-Programmer give you information that helps with troubleshooting and with setting the device up.\n(1) \"Short\" = this LED indicates a short circuit at the booster output. As soon as a short is detected, the LED starts to flash. \"On\" = as soon as this LED is lit at the respective output, the output stage of the LoDi-CV-Programmer is active, meaning power is present at that output. (2) \"DCC\" LED = this LED is lit continuously as soon as the booster receives a signal over the bus — DCC, Motorola or M3 alike. If no bus cable is plugged in, or the LoDi-Rektor is switched off, the DCC LED flashes rapidly. \"BUS\" LED = shows the state of the LoDi bus. When the bus signal is detected, the LED lights with a short pulsing interruption. (3) Programming button: every LoDi bus device has its own address through which it is addressed on the bus. To set a new address the button has to be pressed first. The address is then assigned through the commissioning software LoDi-ProgrammerFX or the LoDi-Con.\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — LEDs and programming button of the LoDi-CV-Programmer\nA short tap of the button switches the track output off and on again. The \"ON\" LED goes out or lights up accordingly.\nThe prog. button is also used to programme the address. The LoDi bus provides 63 addresses. Held for more than 3 seconds, the bus and DCC LEDs flash red and green alternately. This can be interrupted by pressing the button again, or it ends when a new address is sent to the LoDi bus device over the bus. Once the device understands the signal, programming ends and it returns to normal operation.\n3. Connecting a power supply\nUSB-C Power Delivery (PD) — flexible and safe power. The LoDi-CV-Programmer is delivered with a 45 watt USB-C PD power supply providing the following voltages:\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Connecting a power supply\n20 volts → for gauge 1, G, 0, H0 (Märklin)\n15 volts → for H0, H0m, H0e, TT, N\n12 volts → for scales smaller than N\n9 volts → for Z and smaller\nThe supplied power supply has been tested specifically for the LoDi-CV-Programmer and guarantees a stable, safe supply.\n⚠️ Please do not use power supplies of unclear origin, to avoid possible malfunction or damage.\nVoltage individually adjustable\nThe output voltage you want can be set comfortably through the LoDi-ProgrammerFX or the LoDi-Con. That way the LoDi-CV-Programmer can be matched perfectly to the scale you are working in.\nWhat is USB-C Power Delivery (PD)?\nUSB-C Power Delivery (PD) is an intelligent fast-charging and power protocol that can supply different devices at different voltages and power levels. Unlike conventional USB power supplies, which often deliver only one fixed voltage (5 V, say), a USB-C PD supply can negotiate the voltage needed dynamically — in our case, for different model railway scales.\nAdvantages of USB-C PD for the LoDi-CV-Programmer\n✔ Voltage freely adjustable: the voltage you need is easily set through the LoDi-ProgrammerFX or the LoDi-Con.\n✔ More power and efficiency: with 45 watts there is always enough headroom for operation.\n✔ Future-proof and universal: USB-C PD is an open standard that is spreading steadily — many new power supplies already carry it.\n✔ Protection against overload and wrong voltages: the PD standard protects connected devices against excessive voltage or the wrong supply.\nWhy not a conventional power supply?\nUnlike classic model railway supplies with one fixed output voltage, USB-C PD offers the flexibility to provide different voltages — ideal for universal use across different scales. Or indeed to protect the electronics in a locomotive after a digital conversion.\n4. Connecting to the LoDi bus\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Connecting to the LoDi bus\nThe LoDi bus — reliable communication between components. The LoDi bus (formerly µCon bus) was originally developed to carry data over long distances stably and without loss. While it was intended specifically for boosters at first, it has since grown into a versatile communication system for the various LoDi components.\nOn the LoDi bus the devices are connected one behind another in a line; star wiring is not provided for.\nFrom LoDi-Rektor firmware version 3.4.5 the LoDi-CV-Programmer is fully integrated into the bus and in continuous exchange with the LoDi-Rektor. The LoDi-Rektor supplies the LoDi-CV-Programmer with the control data it needs and sends it over the LoDi bus. But communication does not run in one direction only. The LoDi-CV-Programmer can also send data back to the LoDi-Rektor, which then feeds into the LoDi-ProgrammerFX, the LoDi-Con or the control software. That includes readings such as current and voltage measurements, short-circuit status monitoring, power supply monitoring and the current device temperature, among much else.\nThrough the LoDi-Rektor combined with the LoDi-ProgrammerFX and the LoDi-Con, numerous settings can be made for the LoDi-CV-Programmer. The short-circuit sensitivity can be adjusted, for instance, or the address managed.\n6. Connecting to the track\nWith the small booster built into the LoDi-CV-Programmer, small layouts with up to five locomotives can be run without trouble — depending, of course, on how much current the individual locomotives draw. In our tests with a compact layout and five trains, the LoDi-CV-Programmer handled operation reliably.\nDo bear in mind, though, that the LoDi-CV-Programmer was designed primarily as a programmer. The built-in booster is ideal for small test set-ups and running at low power. Endurance testing shows that a load of up to 0.8 A is optimal, while up to 1.1 A remains possible briefly.\nIf a larger layout or a higher current draw is wanted, a LoDi-Booster is the way to go. It provides a stable, capable supply and allows safe, reliable operation with several trains and additional lighting or digital consumers.\nCAREFUL!\nThe LoDi-CV-Programmer needs a separate supply and is electrically isolated from the LoDi-Booster or LoDi-Booster 10A. It is therefore not possible to drive from a booster-fed section straight across an insulated joint into the programming area. To avoid damage we recommend moving the vehicle into the programming area by hand or over an isolating track section.\nIf you have built a small test circuit and want to run it from the LoDi-CV-Programmer, you can use the main track output directly for that.\nPlease note that either the main track or the programming track can be active — never both at once!\nAt the programming track output the LoDi-CV-Programmer provides a maximum of 500 mA.\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Connecting to the track\n7. Connecting the programming track\nAs mentioned above, the LoDi-CV-Programmer has two outputs: the \"main track output\" (left) and the \"programming track output\".\nAt the programming track output you have up to 500 mA available for programming. The programming track should be a separate section of track on which you can programme one vehicle or decoder at a time, free of interference.\nIn our diagram we have set up a separate piece of track as a programming track in addition to our small running circuit.\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Connecting the programming track\nOne more important note on programming a locomotive on the programming track: why should there be only one locomotive on it?\nThe programming track is designed specifically to detect individual locomotives and to read or change their CV values (configuration data). For that to work reliably, the command station has to know unambiguously which locomotive it is talking to.\nIf several locomotives stand on the programming track at once, the following problems can arise:\nWrong responses: the command station receives contradictory signals and cannot identify the locomotive correctly. Faulty CV programming: changes might be written to the wrong locomotive — or not at all. Short circuit: if the total of 500 mA is exceeded by several vehicles on the programming track, nothing can be read or written.\nSo the rule is: 👉 only ever put one locomotive on the programming track — then everything runs reliably and safely.\n8. Connecting accessory decoders\nMany customers use accessory decoders on their layouts, such as the LoDi-83-AC or turnout and signal decoders from other manufacturers.\nWith the LoDi-CV-Programmer you can supply these decoders with digital information directly from the main track connection. That removes the need for a separate booster output for the accessories.\nDCC accessory decoders with RailCom support communicate bidirectionally through the LoDi-CV-Programmer. You can therefore read and programme the CVs of every connected RailCom capable accessory decoder live on the track. Beyond that, RailCom gives you immediate confirmation as soon as the decoder has carried out a switching command.\nAll LoDi DCC accessory decoders have RailCom and can therefore be configured fully through the LoDi-CV-Programmer.\nUp to 30 turnout decoders can be run from one LoDi-CV-Programmer. The number actually possible depends on the current draw of the connected decoders. The built-in current display of the LoDi-CV-Programmer keeps you informed of the present demand at all times.\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Connecting accessory decoders\nThe programming track naturally remains available while the main track output is used for decoders or a short running section, for instance.\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Connecting accessory decoders\nThe next picture shows a small complete set-up. Further components can of course be added as needed, feedback modules such as the LoDi-8-GBM, for example.\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Connecting accessory decoders\n9. Technical data\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Technical data\nThe LoDi-CV-Programmer has a total output of 1 A, of which 0.8 amperes are available continuously and up to 1.1 amperes briefly.\nIt has thermal overload protection, which makes sure the LoDi-CV-Programmer takes no damage when overloaded.\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length: 89 mm\nWidth 100 mm\nHeight 35 mm\nWeight 90 g\n10. Setting up the LoDi-CV-Programmer in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nand updating the firmware Here is how to set up the LoDi-CV-Programmer\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Setting up the LoDi-CV-Programmer in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\n11. LoDi-CV-Programmer PDF download\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-Booster hardware and software as a PDF.\nLoDi-CV-Programmer manual PDF, 1.5 MB — as of 15 September 2025","Features of the LoDi-CV-Programmer","1. The LoDi-CV-Programmer and its connections","2. LEDs and programming button of the LoDi-CV-Programmer","3. Connecting a power supply","4. Connecting to the LoDi bus","7. Connecting the programming track","8. Connecting accessory decoders","10. Setting up the LoDi-CV-Programmer in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX","11. LoDi-CV-Programmer PDF download","melden","hardware/feedback","Feedback","Report vehicles back to the control software through the LoDi-S88-Commander LX.",[],"Feedback for the digital model railway: the LoDi-S88-Commander LX as the network interface, and the feedback modules that deliver occupancy detection and RailCom data to the control software.\nLoDi-S88-Commander LX Update late 2022:\nLoDi-8-GBM v2 Update late 2022:\nLoDi-8-GBM-P v2 Update early 2025:\nLoDi-RM-16+ v2 A simple feedback module for the three-rail system — one that returns the common straight back on the reporting side (the diode trick), with a built-in\nLoDi-S88-Booster Sometimes there simply is not enough current. . .","lodi-dual-servo-dcc","hardware/switching/dcc-system/lodi-dual-servo-dcc","LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC","A dual servo decoder for two servos, driven over DCC.",[872,726,873,874,729,730,587,875,876,590,877]," LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC\nThe LoDi dual servo decoder, for when it may be a little bit more . . .\nFitted with a large power section, it is designed for small to large servos.\nOver RailCom the decoder can be read quickly and its CVs configured.\nIt can also be run analogue, on DC or AC.\nFeatures of the LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC\nA two-channel servo decoder for servos drawing more than 1 ampere. (2.5 amperes maximum in total.) The decoder listens to the DCC format and can be read and configured over RailCom. The servos can also be set without CVs, through the buttons or an external servo remote. Also usable stand-alone with DC or AC! A connection for a servo remote to set the servo positions.\nVideos about the device from YouTubers\nHere we show contributions from customers who use LoDi devices and have taken the time to create tutorials.\n \n \n1. The LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC and its connections\n LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC — The LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC and its connections\n(1) Connection to the transformer as well as to DCC, that is to a booster, feedback module or directly to a command station. (2) Connection for servos with a 3-pin plug. (3) A three-button remote can be connected here for external control. Beyond that the pin connector can also be used for external buttons on a control panel.\n2. LEDs and buttons on the LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC\n LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC — LEDs and buttons on the LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC\n(1) Servo LEDs; they show whether the servo is powered, or whether it is being addressed. (2) DCC (green LED) lights as soon as a DCC signal is present at the decoder. The info LED (red LED) lights as soon as voltage is present at the decoder. The info LED also flashes on a valid command, and to acknowledge reading or writing CVs. (3) Buttons for manual operation and for setting the DCC address and the servos.\n3. Connecting a transformer and DCC\nThere are several ways of supplying the LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC with power.\nWith servos that draw a lot of current, or servos that have to hold a sprung turnout blade constantly, the following variant is advisable.\n LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC — Connecting a transformer and DCC\nThe transformer shown here could equally be a DC supply, but please take care that the operating voltage lies in the range of 10–22 volts DC.\nOnce the decoder is supplied with power, it has to be able to receive its data. For that the decoder has to be connected to a command station or a booster. In the example here we use a LoDi-Booster.\n LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC — Connecting a transformer and DCC\nCAREFUL! For reliable switching of DCC accessories, a separate circuit or booster output should always be used.\nIf you only use small modelling servos, or switch the servos off once they have moved, the LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC can be used directly from a booster without trouble.\nA LoDi-Booster, for instance, provides 2.3 amperes, which is enough for up to 20 decoders. A single small servo usually draws no more than 100 mA. With DCC, switching commands are always processed one after another.\n LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC — Connecting a transformer and DCC\n4. Connecting the servos\n LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC — Connecting the servos\nIn most cases a servo has a cable with three conductors.\nThese are:\nYellow or orange, which carries the data signal Red, carrying 5 volts, which supplies the servo with the voltage it needs. Black or brown, which carries the servo's common.\nThe colours can differ, so always check your servo's documentation if you are unsure.\nAt (1) and (2) you see the connections for the servos on the decoder. Negative is on the left. The socket is pushed straight onto the decoder's pins.\n LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC — Connecting the servos\n5. CV list and settings\nThe LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC is set through CVs.\nIf you have the LoDi-Rektor with a LoDi-Booster or CDE booster connected, you can write the CVs over PoM (programming on main) with the LoDi-ProgrammerFX from version 2.2.\nThe decoder can equally be programmed with any conventional command station that has a DCC programming output or handles PoM.\nIf you have a RailCom capable system, you can read the decoder's CVs live at any time.\nSetting the DCC address: you have now installed the decoder successfully, the DCC cable is plugged in, and the LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC now glows red continuously to show it is ready.\nAs delivered, the decoder responds to turnout or accessory address 1.\nIf you want to change an address quickly, proceed as follows: there is a programming button on the decoder as described above. Press it for 3 seconds. The info LED starts to flash quickly, telling you the decoder is ready for a new address.\nNow send the new address from the control software, directly at a command station or in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX (the LoDi-Rektor is required), in the turnout field under DCC.\nThe decoder takes the address, the info LED stops flashing and glows steadily again. It is now reachable at the address you chose.\nSetting the CVs: as mentioned several times, the LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC can be programmed over PoM (programming on main). In most applications there are three CVs per servo to consider.\n1 × position A = CV 33, value 0–255\n2 × position B = CV 34, value 0–255\n3 × speed = CV 41, the speed at which the servo moves, 0–255\nThese values can be read back later over RailCom.\n6. Setting the servos with the buttons and the remote\nThe decoder has three buttons; the Prog button sets the address quickly, as mentioned above.\nThe Left and Right buttons can be used for quick manual operation, or for fine-adjusting the servos.\n LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC — Setting the servos with the buttons and the remote\nProceed as follows: press the Prog button for 3 seconds, as you would to programme an address.\nThe info LED now flashes quickly again. The decoder could now also receive a new address.\nPress the Prog button again straight away; the LED for servo 1 should now flash in addition to the INFO LED\n(yellow LED).\nBy flashing, the yellow LED tells you that servo 1 can now be set.\nThe servo should also have moved to position 1. With the Left and Right buttons the position of servo 1 (Pos 1) can now be set. If Pos 1 is right, press the Prog button again to reach Pos 2. Set that with Left and Right as well.\nNext the speed of servo 1 can be set; servo 1 travels between the positions you set. Pressing Left makes it faster, pressing Right makes the servo move more slowly.\nOnce the speed is right, servo 1 is fully set.\nNow press the Prog button again and the decoder moves to servo 2. Repeat the steps above. After setting the parameters for servo 2, pressing the Prog button returns the decoder to normal mode.\nIf you want to test the servos again quickly, a short press on Left or Right changes the position you set for servo 1 or 2.\nThe decoder has a 5-pin programming output which can be used for a remote. If you have installed the decoder under the layout, for instance, the remote is very helpful when setting the servo positions.\n LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC — Setting the servos with the buttons and the remote\n7. Stand-alone version\nThanks to the stand-alone version, the decoder can be supplied with ordinary DC up to 22 volts and AC up to 16 volts.\n LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC — Stand-alone version\nExternal buttons can be connected through the Remote connections (shown in the picture as SProg.), those of a track diagram panel, for instance.\n LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC — Stand-alone version\nHere you see an example of the two external buttons connected. The blue lead is the shared common; the two black ones are the control leads for servos 1 and 2.\n8. Technical data\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length 8.9 cm\nWidth 10 cm\nHeight 3.5 cm\nWeight 95 grams\nIn digital operation the decoder can be supplied with up to 22 volts.\nDo mind the specifications of your command station or booster manufacturer here.\nThe decoder can be run on 20 volts DC or 16 volts AC.\nLoadable by servos with 3 amperes briefly and 2.5 amperes continuously\n8. LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC PDF download\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC as a PDF.\nLoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC manual PDF, 1.4 MB","Features of the LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC","1. The LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC and its connections","2. LEDs and buttons on the LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC","6. Setting the servos with the buttons and the remote","7. Stand-alone version","8. LoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC PDF download","lodi-operator-4-wd-dc","hardware/switching/sc-system/lodi-operator-4-wd-dc","LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC","A switching decoder for all loads driven with DC.",[884,885,886,887,888,889,890,609,891,892]," LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC\nThe LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC — the ultimate switching decoder for all loads that work with DC! This switching decoder is able to deliver DC and can be fed with either AC or DC.\nThanks to its simple configuration in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX, installing the switching decoder is child's play.\nFeatures of the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC\nA DC decoder for the SC bus, for connection to the LoDi-Shift-Commander. Eight channels are available, each with 1 ampere; the total of the connected channels must not exceed 2 A. You can connect all common motor turnout drives, solenoid drives, lamps or LEDs to the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC. The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC is equally suitable for other loads that require DC, such as motors and geared motors, and is particularly suited to LEDs. Every output is separately protected against overload. Easily configured with the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\n1. The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC and its connections\nThe LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC is a switching decoder connected to the LoDi-Shift-Commander. It can be run on the slow and on the fast bus.\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC — The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC and its connections\nAbout the connections on the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC\n(1) Here you can connect loads such as turnouts, lamps and so on; you will find more on this in the wiring examples. (2) The AC/DC model railway transformer is connected here. IMPORTANT!!! Please only use authorised model railway transformers. (3) The SC bus from the LoDi-Shift-Commander is connected at the SC-OUT and SC-IN sockets. More on this in the section on connecting to the SC bus.\n2. LEDs on the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC\nThe LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC has two LEDs to help you recognise the state of the device and understand faults more quickly.\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC — LEDs on the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC\n(1) This LED lights when you connect the transformer voltage to the AC/DC socket (2) The bus LED lights as soon as the SC bus coming from the LoDi-Shift-Commander is plugged in and that unit is powered.\n3. Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC to the SC bus\nThe LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC is connected to the SC bus coming from the LoDi-Shift-Commander.\nYou can see this in the first wiring picture here.\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC to the SC bus\nIn this picture you see the LoDi-Shift-Commander together with the decoder connected to it, here the\nLoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC.\nThe decoder is connected to SC bus Out 1.\n96 outputs are available here.\nOn the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC you can use the connections as your layout requires. It does not matter whether you connect a LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC or a LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC first.\nThe LoDi-Shift-Commander is able to detect the connected decoders.\nYou can then programme the assignment with our tool, the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\nThe bus has to be terminated at the last operator.\nThat means you always have to plug the terminating plug, called the bus terminator, into the last module.\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC to the SC bus\nIn this example you now see how the operators can be chained one after another.\nIt is important to take care to connect the network cables correctly.\nThat is, from In to Out, as you can see in the picture.\nThe last example picture shows SC bus 1 and 2 taken to their limits. The order of the modules is entirely irrelevant here.\nOnly with the LoDi-Light-Controller should you take care that it is connected to bus 2.\nWhat matters is that you integrate a new LoDi-SC-Booster into the system after every 16th module.\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC to the SC bus\nThe bus length, or rather the number of modules, is very easy to calculate.\nOn bus 1 you have 96 channels available.\nHere you could connect 12 LoDi-Operators 4-WD-DC or AC, for instance, since each module needs 8 channels.\nOn the slow bus you have 384 channels available. That would be 48 LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC or DC units, LoDi-Light-Controller 4-C-LED or LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL units.\nAs you can see, our system lets you work very flexibly.\n4. Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC to the model railway transformer\nThe LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC has 4 terminals.\nBoth do not have to be connected to the transformer; they serve to pass the power on.\nYou can start the cable at one decoder and keep passing it on to the next.\nAfter 15 decoders a new power feed should be provided.\nThis makes wiring the system easier.\nCAREFUL: do not choose cable below 0.75 mm².\nPlease watch the polarity of the power supply!\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC to the model railway transformer\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC to the model railway transformer\n5. Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC to turnouts\nFor switching solenoid accessories we recommend the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC. Not because the 4-WD-DC could not do it, but because solenoid coils are better driven with AC than with DC. Roco make an under-table drive that can fall back when driven with AC. For those drives in particular we therefore recommend falling back on the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC.\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC to turnouts\n6. Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC to other loads\nVarious loads such as lamps, LEDs, small and medium motors as well as solenoid coils can be connected to the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC.\nFor switching we use 0.25 mm² cable. Black is used for the shared return, while purple serves to switch the channels.\nThis specific example shows street lighting connected. Individual lamps are connected to outputs 1, 2 and 3. On output 4 a street light with three lamps run in parallel is installed.\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC to other loads\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC to other loads\nIn the LoDi-ProgrammerFX we have now installed 4 lamps on the first 4 channels that can be dimmed.\nNext we install a small DC motor on output 5. We can drive it in 15 steps with the appropriate object, in this case \"Lamp Brightness\". That lets the output voltage be set in 15 steps.\nOn output 6 we install a lamp that is to act as candlelight.\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC to other loads\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC to other loads\n7. Technical data\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length 8.9 cm\nWidth 10 cm\nHeight 3.5 cm\nWeight 97 grams\nPermissible from 12 to 24 volts DC or AC.\nLoadable by consumers with 1 ampere.\nThe supply voltage can be passed on to the next decoder through the AC/DC terminal on the decoder. The current may be 10 amperes at most.\n8. Setting up the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC in the LoDi-Programmer\nHere you can find out how to set up the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC — Setting up the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC in the LoDi-Programmer\n9. LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC PDF download\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC as a PDF.\nLoDi-Operator 4 WD-DC, 13 February 2025 PDF, 1.6 MB","Features of the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC","1. The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC and its connections","2. LEDs on the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC","3. Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC to the SC bus","4. Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC to the model railway transformer","5. Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC to turnouts","6. Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC to other loads","8. Setting up the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC in the LoDi-Programmer","9. LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC PDF download","lodi-8-gbm-p","hardware/feedback/lodi-8-gbm-p","LoDi-8-GBM-P v2","A track occupancy detector with its own measuring current, for layouts without a continuous ground.",[899,900,901,902,903,904,905,609,906,907]," LoDi-8-GBM-P v2\nUpdate early 2025:\nOur LoDi-8-GBM-P gets an update too: the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2. It is now fully updatable and prepared for DCC-A.\nThe big brother of the LoDi-8-GBM v2 is the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2, in a completely reworked version developed specifically for large scales.\nGarden railway modellers who want to run their locomotives RailCom capable can now do so with the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2.\nIn garden railway use in particular it offers a very handy option of presets that can be called up with a mouse click — should you want to run the railway on a rainy day, for instance.\nFeatures of the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2\nThe LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 is an occupancy detector developed for the S88.2 bus. It serves 8 track sections, each of which can carry 10 amperes. (No more than 20 amperes in total.) All 8 track sections, that is detection channels, are RailCom capable and can be monitored over channels 1 and 2. (With channel 2 a maximum of 8 locomotives per detection channel can be identified.) Beyond that the occupancy detector also delivers a precise current draw per track section, and can even detect short circuits within the block itself. The LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 is easily configured through the LoDi-ProgrammerFX. It has a display for checking the detectors directly and showing the module's address. It is fully backwards compatible and can equally be run on s88N or, with an adapter, on an old s88 bus. There you will not have the full functions of the S88.2 bus, however. Prepared for DCC-A and fully updatable.\n1. The LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 and its connections\nAbout the connections on the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2:\n LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 — The LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 and its connections\n(1): the S88.2 bus connects here. The S88.2-OUT arrow points towards the interface, since this is where the data from the track is reported back to the computer. The LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 is of course s88N compatible too; you can simply integrate it into existing layouts, but will then not have all the benefits of the new S88.2 bus. (2): the block sections, or detection sections, connect at 1–8 here, and the booster IN voltage to their right at +. You will find more under track connection below.\n2. The LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 and its LEDs\n LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 — The LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 and its LEDs\n(1) DCC LED and BUS LED: the bus LED lights as soon as the S88.2 bus is plugged in and supplied with power. The bus LED then glows a light blue. The DCC LED lights as soon as booster voltage is present at the module. (2) Display: during operation this shows the detector currently occupied. The dot to the right of the number shows whether the module has detected the bus.\n3. Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 to the S88.2 bus\nAs mentioned several times, the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 carries the S88.2 bus. That is provided by the LoDi-S88-Commander LX. The patch cables between two modules may be up to 100 metres long; the S88.2 bus is a powerful feedback bus allowing total cable lengths of more than 1000 metres. Perfect for garden railways!\nThe LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 can be run mixed with the LoDi-8-GBM-P.\nWhen the module is run on an S88.2 bus, the following features are available to you:\nOccupancy reporting of the individual blocks with a display. Short-circuit detection for the individual blocks. This works through a further register, which means: should a short be detected on output 1.1, for instance, 1.9 is reported as occupied. The short can therefore already be displayed by any control software. Current measurement per detection channel, with the option of displaying it in the software. Setting the short-circuit thresholds per detection channel. Setting the current detection threshold per detection channel RailCom detection on channels 1 and 2 per detection channel (max. 8 locomotives per detection channel). Freely addressable — the module now keeps its address, there are no more shifts! Up to 96 modules can be connected to one LoDi-S88-Commander LX. All S88.2 modules from 2022 onwards are updatable and therefore future-proof.\n LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 — Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 to the S88.2 bus\n4. Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 to the s88 and s88N bus\nThe LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 is fitted with the new S88.2 bus, which does not mean the module cannot also be run on conventional command stations with s88 or s88N.\nThese functions are available to you when running on the old s88 bus:\nOccupancy reporting of the individual blocks with a display Short-circuit detection for the individual blocks, here too through a further register, which means: if a short is detected on output 1.1, for instance, 1.9 is reported as occupied. The short can therefore already be displayed by any control software.\nHere you see a LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 connected to an LDT-HSI. Any kind of s88N module can of course be hung in between.\n LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 — Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 to the s88 and s88N bus\nIt is possible to connect the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 to a conventional command station. To use the devices on an older station without the s88N connector, you need an adapter.\nWe offer the LoDi-S88 adapter for that, which can be used universally\n LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 — Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 to the s88 and s88N bus\n5. Connecting booster voltage to the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2\n LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 — Connecting booster voltage to the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2\nThe LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 has booster input terminals. A booster or a conventional command station has to be connected to these.\nThe LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 has two + terminals and eight − terminals in total.\nIf you use a LoDi-Booster 10A(+), you can connect the detector as shown in the picture. One pair of terminals (+, −) can carry 10 amperes.\nThe first example shows the LoDi-Booster 10A supplying the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 with power.\nPlease take care that the red wire, that is the + connection, is connected to the right-hand booster terminal at the output. If the red wire is on the other side, it can affect the RailCom signal.\nCareful! Never use cable cross-sections smaller than 0.75 mm²!\nWe recommend 1 mm².\n LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 — Connecting booster voltage to the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2\nA complete view, in which the modules' buses are now shown as well.\n LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 — Connecting booster voltage to the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2\nYour wiring might look like this, for instance. You can of course also have several detection modules supplied from one booster section. It always depends on how many locomotives are to be supplied by one booster at the same time.\n LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 — Connecting booster voltage to the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2\nYou can of course also connect boosters from other manufacturers to the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2. Some manufacturers offer boosters delivering more than 10 amperes of output current. If you have such a booster and need more current in total, we built a second + terminal into the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2.\nOperation with a maximum of 20 amperes is therefore possible with the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2.\n LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 — Connecting booster voltage to the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2\n6. Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 to the track\nOccupancy reporting for the track is easy to arrange with the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2, always depending on how many detection sections your control software needs.\nIn our diagram we assume one detector per block; entry and braking detectors could of course also be needed or wanted.\nThe common side can be separated or joined.\n LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 — Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 to the track\nIf you have no idea yet about your block sections, do contact us — we will help you plan the right division.\n7. Technical data\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length 130 cm\nWidth 115 cm\nHeight 4.5 cm\nWeight 185 grams\n! ! ! Careful ! ! ! The S88.2 bus may only be run at 5 volts. Do therefore check what voltage your S88 bus runs at. ! ! ! Careful ! ! !\nAt the digital terminal, the \"IN terminal\", the detector can be supplied with 12 to 28 volts.\nDo mind the specifications of your command station or booster manufacturer here.\nLoadable by consumers with 10 amperes briefly and 8 amperes continuously per output. (No more than 20 amperes in total.)\nSuitable for every common scale.\n8. Setting up the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nHere is how to set up the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2\n LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 — Setting up the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\n9. LoDi-8-GBM-P (v2) PDF download\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 and the LoDi-8-GBM-P hardware and software as a PDF.\nLoDi-8-GBM-P v2\nLoDi-8-GBM-P v2, 30 January 2025 PDF, 1.7 MB","Features of the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2","1. The LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 and its connections","2. The LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 and its LEDs","3. Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 to the S88.2 bus","4. Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 to the s88 and s88N bus","5. Connecting booster voltage to the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2","6. Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 to the track","8. Setting up the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX","9. LoDi-8-GBM-P (v2) PDF download","lodi-s88-adapter","hardware/accessories/lodi-s88-adapter","LoDi-S88-Adapter","The LoDi-s88-Adapter, for tying old S88 modules in simply.",[914,915,916,217],"The LoDi-S88 adapter\n LoDi-S88-Adapter\nThe LoDi-s88 adapter, for easily bringing old S88 modules into the system.\nMany modellers still have one or another old S88 module on their layout.\nWith our adapter you can bring these modules up to the N standard. In many control programs the old modules work well for push-button actions. The adapter is a real all-rounder and slots straight into an existing bus.\nFeatures of the LoDi-S88 adapter\nA simple adapter for every S88 standard bus. Conforms to s88, s88N, S88.2.\n1. The LoDi-S88 adapter, its connectors and LEDs\nFor bringing in old s88 modules with a 6-pin connector we have an adapter you can use as follows. The adapter works for one module or for several at once.\nThe LoDi-S88-Commander detects whether it is dealing with s88 modules or S88.2 modules.\nConventional command stations, or other interfaces on the market, can be connected directly. The adapter gives you a way from s88 to the newer s88N.\nThe LEDs on the LoDi-S88 adapter show whether the s88 bus is being supplied with power.\n LoDi-S88-Adapter — The LoDi-S88 adapter, its connectors and LEDs\n2. Technical data\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length: 55 mm\nWidth 23 mm\nHeight 16 mm at its highest point\nWeight 16 g\n LoDi-S88-Adapter — Technical data\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are glad to help.","The LoDi-S88 adapter","Features of the LoDi-S88 adapter","1. The LoDi-S88 adapter, its connectors and LEDs","lodi-wib-ewiii","hardware/lighting/lodi-wib-ewiii","LoDi-WiB-EWIII","The LoDi-WiB-EWIII is a high-quality, precisely fitting lighting board for digital operation.",[923,924,925,926,927,348]," LoDi-WiB-EWIII\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII\nThe LoDi-WiB-EWIII is a high-quality, precisely fitting lighting board for digital operation.\nMatched to the coach's compartments, it lights them all correctly, right through to the toilet and the vestibule.\nFeatures of the LoDi-WiB-EWIII\nSimple installation, optimised for vehicles with full RailCom capability.\nA lighting board for all Liliput EWIII series, or coaches up to 24 centimetres long The board can be separated for the driving trailer The brightness can be set from the main decoder Very low current draw, <15 mA Power transfer across the board (up to 4 poles)\n1. Connections on the LoDi-WiB-EWIII\nSeveral solder points are shown on the LoDi-WiB-EWIII, which we explain here:\nRed arrow = track right, abbreviated to TR Green arrow = AUX (decoder switching channel) Blue arrow = U+ from the decoder Black arrow = track left, abbreviated to TL\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — Connections on the LoDi-WiB-EWIII\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — Connections on the LoDi-WiB-EWIII\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — Connections on the LoDi-WiB-EWIII\n2. Installing the LoDi-WiB-EWIII\nIf you can solder and have already lit one coach or another, the conversion should come easily to you. If you are a beginner, however, or do not feel up to a conversion, get in touch with our partners; they will be glad to make you an individual offer.\nYou can carry out the conversion yourself?\nThen let us begin.\nYou will need:\nA soldering iron with a fine tip, and solder. A cross-head screwdriver and a pair of tweezers. A small, fine pair of side cutters as well as, if available, a wire stripper for fine strands. Superglue, to fix the boards or wires lightly in place. A small 1.5 mm drill bit.\nIn this example we are converting the AC version with a centre pickup; it differs only slightly from the DC version.\nThe driving trailer, the pilot coach, is converted first. In our example a LokPilot FX is fitted; you can use any function decoder with a 21-pin interface, and in most cases the decoder is already fitted.\nAlways keep this in mind when converting!\nIf you are also gluing figures in and/or working with superglue to fix things, do not fit the coach roofs onto the coaches straight away.\nSuperglue needs at least 1–2 hours to outgas completely.\nIf you fit the roof too soon, it could lead to milky or tarnished glazing.\n3. The driving trailer / pilot coach\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — The driving trailer / pilot coach\nFirst the coach has to be opened.\nTo do that, turn it upside down and spread it apart slightly in the middle. Now try to pull the lower chassis out a little. A bit of shaking and wiggling can help release the coach roof.\nThe driving trailer/pilot coach has to be pulled out towards the rear. Do watch out for the front steps, as they can break off very easily.\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — The driving trailer / pilot coach\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — The driving trailer / pilot coach\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — The driving trailer / pilot coach\nNow first remove the old coupling and unscrew the cross-head screw from the bogie. Note that the bogie can only be refitted one way round.\nAs the next step you should make a way through for the current-carrying coupling.\nIn the picture here we have marked with green arrows where it is best to drill through on the compartment coach.\nThe cable can be fixed to the drawbar with a little superglue.\nTake care that the cables can still move; they should on no account be too taut.\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — The driving trailer / pilot coach\nIn our example we have now removed the interior fittings, but that is not strictly necessary and only served for a better view here.\nNow that the current-carrying coupling is installed, the cables come out at the top right next to the mounting for the bogie; nothing further has to be drilled here.\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — The driving trailer / pilot coach\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — The driving trailer / pilot coach\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — The driving trailer / pilot coach\nIn the next step the connections for the LoDi-WiB-EWIII have to be made on the carrier board. Unfortunately no solder pads are provided here, so we take the voltage partly straight from the 21-pin interface.\nFirst remove the plastic cover over the decoder.\nNow carefully pull the decoder off.\nWe now use the DCC colours for connecting to the LoDi-WiB-EWIII, as described above as well: first we connect the green wire to AUX 1 of the 21-pin interface. That is pin 4 from the left, as can be seen in the picture.\nNext we need U+, which can be taken directly from the resistor.\nIf you now fit the rake with a 4-pole current-carrying coupling, you can take the track voltage on the right-hand side with a red and a black wire and run it to the LoDi-WiB-EWIII.\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — The driving trailer / pilot coach\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — The driving trailer / pilot coach\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — The driving trailer / pilot coach\nNow plug the decoder back in and reassemble the coach interior.\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — The driving trailer / pilot coach\nThe LoDi-WiB-EWIII is built for use in driving trailers and pilot coaches as well as in compartment coaches. For the pilot coach it is a little too long, which is why we separate the board at the cut lines marked on the WiB. You can see these clearly at the dividing line. Easiest is to cut through with larger side cutters or a small saw.\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — The driving trailer / pilot coach\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — The driving trailer / pilot coach\nNow lay the board in with the cut side towards the end of the pilot coach.\nYou can fix the board in the coach with a small drop of superglue.\nNow solder the wires on as described above.\nRed = TR\nBlack = TL\nGreen = GN\nBlue = BL\nOn the opposite side we connect the current-carrying coupling. Since we are using a 2-pole coupling here, we only use GN for AUX and BL for U+.\nTake care to connect the wires to the right places; reversing the polarity could otherwise destroy the decoder.\nNow reassemble the coach body.\n4. Converting the compartment coach\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — Converting the compartment coach\nOpen the roof as with the driving trailer/pilot coach.\nNext you now have to fit the current-carrying couplings into the coach. At least 2 poles have to be carried; a coupling with 4 poles would be ideal to ensure current pickup across the whole train, but that is not a must.\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — Converting the compartment coach\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — Converting the compartment coach\nNow first remove the old couplings and then unscrew the cross-head screw for the bogie. Note that the bogie can only be fitted one way round.\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — Converting the compartment coach\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — Converting the compartment coach\nAs the next step you should make a way through for the current-carrying coupling.\nIn the picture here we have marked with green arrows where it is best to come through on the compartment coach.\nYou are welcome to fix the cable to the drawbar with a little superglue.\nTake care that the cables can still move; they must on no account be too taut.\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — Converting the compartment coach\nThe board is now laid onto the coach roof. It can be fixed with a little superglue.\nNow solder the coupling to the board; we follow the driving trailer here, where we soldered the first board to the decoder with blue and green. All other compartment coaches have to be connected in exactly the same way.\nIn this example we solder GN to the grey wire for AUX and BL to the black one for U+.\nOnce both wires are soldered on, you can first test the coach, and then fit the roof onto it.\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — Converting the compartment coach\n5. Technical data\nProperty Value\nDimensions of the LoDi-WiB-EWIII\nLength 26.9 mm\nWidth 11 mm\nBoard thickness: 1.55 mm. Overall height: 3 mm. Weight: 16 grams. The LoDi-WiB-EWIII is built for digital operation; a decoder is needed in the driving trailer.\nCan be run from 7 to 25 volts DC.\n LoDi-WiB-EWIII — Technical data\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are glad to help.","Features of the LoDi-WiB-EWIII","1. Connections on the LoDi-WiB-EWIII","2. Installing the LoDi-WiB-EWIII","3. The driving trailer / pilot coach","4. Converting the compartment coach","sw-erstinbetriebnahme","software/commissioning","Commissioning","We use \"LoDi interface\" as the umbrella term for our control units — devices such as the [LoDi-Rektor](docs:lodi-rektor), the [LoDi-S88-Commander LX](docs:lodi-s88-commander), the [LoDi-Shift-Commander](docs:lodi-shift-commander), the [LoDi-DMX-Interface](docs:lodi-dmx-interface) and the LoDi-WS2…",[934,935,936],"Commissioning LoDi devices\nWe use \"LoDi interface\" as the umbrella term for our control units — devices such as the LoDi-Rektor, the LoDi-S88-Commander LX, the LoDi-Shift-Commander, the LoDi-DMX-Interface and the LoDi-WS28-Interface. They are delivered with a preset IP address. That address does not necessarily have to suit the home network it finds. Normally, though, the devices are found and shown by the LoDi-ProgrammerFX all the same.\nThe IP addresses as delivered are:\nLoDi-Rektor: 192.168.1.44 LoDi-S88-Commander LX: 192.168.1.88 (DHCP-capable) (Wi-Fi-capable) LoDi-Shift-Commander: 192.168.1.92 LoDi-DMX-Interface: 192.168.1.53 (DHCP-capable) (Wi-Fi-capable) LoDi-WS28-Interface: 192.168.1.98 (DHCP-capable) (Wi-Fi-capable)\nSome LoDi interfaces are Wi-Fi-capable. How to connect the devices over Wi-Fi is shown further down under point 2: Commissioning a Wi-Fi-capable LoDi interface.\n1. Commissioning a LoDi interface\nIf your home network is in the IP range 192.168.1.xxx, you can get straight to work and configure the devices. If, however, the devices are not shown at all or are shown highlighted in red, you are in a different network environment, and in that case you have to proceed as follows:\n Commissioning — Commissioning a LoDi interface\nCheck whether the device is connected to the router or switch through the port labelled Netzwerk with a standard network cable. Check whether the device is supplied with power through the Power connection.\nBoth points are met when the green LED at the Netzwerk port glows steadily.\nThe yellow LED may flash occasionally.\nIf the device is still not found by the LoDi-ProgrammerFX, a new IP address has to be assigned. To do that, select the entry \"IP-Adresse\" in the menu and continue with the network settings.\nIn the network settings you can first select the network interface to which the devices are connected as well. Normally this address should start with 192.168.xxx.xxx.\n Commissioning — Commissioning a LoDi interface\n Commissioning — Commissioning a LoDi interface\nThe following things have to be taken into account in the network settings:\nDevice name: this may contain 16 characters. Umlauts, special characters (apart from \"_\") and spaces are not allowed IP address: this has to suit the network the device is in. On most networks the IP address starts with 192.168.1. The last digit can be chosen freely, but must not clash with any other IP address on the network. If in doubt, compare the settings on your router. Network mask: normally this setting does not have to be edited. If in doubt, compare the setting on your router. Gateway: the first three digits of the gateway address are usually identical to the first three digits of the IP address. The last digit is usually 1 or 254. UDP port: this setting should only be changed in exceptional cases, since the supported model railway software would otherwise be unable to address the device. MAC address: all devices on the network have to have a unique MAC address. If you own several control units of the same type, the MAC address on one device has to be adjusted. Normally it is enough simply to raise the last digit by 1.\n Commissioning — Commissioning a LoDi interface\nOnce you have made all the settings, proceed as follows to apply the programming:\nPress the \"Prog.-IP\" button on the device. The LED next to the button glows red to confirm it is ready for programming. In the LoDi-ProgrammerFX, press the \"Anwenden\" button in the network settings. The settings are applied and the device restarts. Click the \"Geräte Suchen\" button in the toolbar.\nThe device or devices are now shown in the overview on the left. You can now start configuring the system.\n2. Setting up a Wi-Fi-capable LoDi interface\nThe LoDi-S88-Commander LX, the LoDi-DMX-Interface and the LoDi-WS28-Interface are Wi-Fi-capable and can communicate with the computer or the LoDi-Con over Wi-Fi. The interface in question is best connected to a router or to a dedicated Wi-Fi access point at your layout.\n Commissioning — Setting up a Wi-Fi-capable LoDi interface\nYou can recognise the Wi-Fi-capable LoDi interfaces by the small Wi-Fi symbol printed at the top left. If that symbol is missing, it is a LoDi interface without Wi-Fi.\nPlease watch for sufficient signal strength, especially with devices such as the LoDi-S88-Commander LX, where time-critical feedback is involved. We therefore recommend using a cable connection for the S88-Commander LX where possible. In the Programmer we point out that you should consider a cable connection if the signal strength is no longer sufficient.\nOn all Wi-Fi-capable devices, including the S88-Commander LX, a small Wi-Fi symbol showing the signal strength appears next to the device name in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX. Please watch that display to make sure the connection is stable.\n(We accept no liability for delayed messages and any resulting damage to rolling stock.)\nWith devices such as the LoDi-DMX-Interface and the LoDi-WS28-Interface, data transfer is not time-critical. They can therefore be integrated into the home or layout network over Wi-Fi very nicely as well.\nTo integrate the LoDi-S88-Commander, the LoDi-DMX-Interface and the LoDi-WS28-Interface into a Wi-Fi network, it is best to pick up your smartphone. You can however also configure the LoDi interface from a Wi-Fi-capable computer.\nFor the LoDi interfaces to be able to activate Wi-Fi, the network cable has to be removed. Only one connection can ever be active, either over cable or over Wi-Fi.\nTo integrate the LoDi interface into the Wi-Fi network, proceed as follows: remove the LoDi interface's yellow patch cable if it is plugged in, and supply the device with power through the USB-C socket. The device now starts and checks whether it can establish a connection over the cable. That process can take a moment. After that the LoDi interface switches to Wi-Fi mode, which is shown on the LoDi interface by the rear red LED now glowing red.\n Commissioning — Setting up a Wi-Fi-capable LoDi interface\n Commissioning — Setting up a Wi-Fi-capable LoDi interface\n Commissioning — Setting up a Wi-Fi-capable LoDi interface\nNow open the Wi-Fi configuration on your smartphone or computer and search for new networks. The LoDi interface in question will then be shown.\nNow select the interface to be configured. In this case we have used the LoDi-S88-Commander LX.\nNow start a browser and enter the IP address 192.168.4.1. Every LoDi interface is reachable at that IP address in direct mode.\nYou now reach the LoDi interface's start page. Here you can choose \"ConfigureWiFi\".\nThe LoDi interface now scans the networks and shows them to you.\nNow select the network you want here and enter its password. Then press \"Save\".\nThe LoDi interface now tries to connect to the network. Once connected successfully, the LoDi-ProgrammerFX should find the device on the network.\n Commissioning — Setting up a Wi-Fi-capable LoDi interface\n Commissioning — Setting up a Wi-Fi-capable LoDi interface\n Commissioning — Setting up a Wi-Fi-capable LoDi interface\n Commissioning — Setting up a Wi-Fi-capable LoDi interface\nIf the device no longer reports on the network, or your network has changed and the interface no longer reports in, the device can also be reset to its factory setting with the Prog-IP button. To do that, press the button on the interface for longer than 10 seconds. The device restarts and is now in its as-delivered state.\n Commissioning — Setting up a Wi-Fi-capable LoDi interface\n Commissioning — Setting up a Wi-Fi-capable LoDi interface\nAny questions still open?\nWould you simply like to ask us in person?\nOr go to our forum, where experienced users are glad to help you further.\ninfo@lokstoredigital.de","Commissioning LoDi devices","1. Commissioning a LoDi interface","2. Setting up a Wi-Fi-capable LoDi interface","sw-lodi-cv-programmer","software/lodi-rektor/lodi-cv-programmer","Like the LoDi-Booster, for instance, the LoDi-CV-Programmer converts the control signal coming from the LoDi-Rektor over the LoDi bus.",[319,942,943,944,945,946,947,948,949],"Settings and firmware update\nLike the LoDi-Booster, for instance, the LoDi-CV-Programmer converts the control signal coming from the LoDi-Rektor over the LoDi bus.\nThe address as delivered is 62. Would you like to change the LoDi-CV's address? Click here and go to point 1.\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Settings and firmware update\nImmediately after being hooked onto the LoDi bus, the\nLoDi-CV-Programmer is detected by the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\n1. Changing the LoDi-CV-Programmer's address\nAs delivered, the LoDi-CV-Programmer is set to address 62, as mentioned above. That can stay as it is and only has to be changed if you want to add a second LoDi-CV-Programmer to the system.\nFirst start the LoDi-ProgrammerFX and go to the µCon bus (1); the following dialogue now opens:\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Changing the LoDi-CV-Programmer's address\nNow select the new address the device is to be given (2). A name for the device can then also be entered at (3).\nNow press button (4) on the LoDi-CV-Programmer for 3 seconds. The LoDi-CV-Programmer now jumps into addressing mode. It signals this through the two LEDs (5), which flash alternately.\nNow the \"Anwenden\" button (6) in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX can be pressed. The CV-Programmer stops flashing immediately and has its new address set from now on.\nThe LoDi-CV-Programmer has now saved the new address and is shown on the bus again straight away.\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Changing the LoDi-CV-Programmer's address\n2. The LoDi-CV-Programmer's settings\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — The LoDi-CV-Programmer's settings\nThe LoDi-CV-Programmer stores its settings in internal memory.\nAll settings are applied and stored in the booster by pressing the \"Anwenden\" button.\nThis dialogue offers the following settings:\nActive firmware: this shows which firmware is currently installed on the device. Sensitivity: sets the time after which, once the short-circuit threshold is exceeded, a short circuit is detected. The actual sensitivity also depends on how often the short circuit occurs. Three-rail operators should set a higher threshold here to avoid problems when running over turnouts. very fast: 50 ms fast: 200 ms normal: 300 ms Individual short-circuit times up to 500 ms can also be entered in the sensitivity field.\nVoltage: the voltage for the USB-C PD power supply is set here. With the USB-C PD power supply supplied, the following voltages are available: 9, 12, 15 and 20 volts. Switch-on delay: the switch-on delay gives the waiting time before the track voltage is switched back on after a short circuit. Max current: here the maximum current limit can be set with a slider in 50 mA steps. Track protocols: here you can enable the protocols you would like to put out on the LoDi-CV-Programmer's track output. Sending the DCC-A identifier: support for the DCC-A standard, allowing locomotive or accessory decoders to be read out. mfx locomotive scan: here the automatic reading-in of an mfx locomotive can be switched on or off. Switch on automatically: if this option is set, the CV-Programmer automatically switches the track voltage back on after a short circuit, observing the waiting time defined in \"switch-on delay\". If this option is not set, the CV-Programmer's booster has to be switched back on manually, either from the software or by pressing the button on the CV-Programmer. RailCom support: if this option is set, the booster generates a RailCom cutout after every DCC packet. That is necessary in order to receive the data sent by the decoders in the LoDi-8-GBM feedback modules. Only set this option if you are using DCC or mfx® with RailCom.\n3. Status and displays\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Status and displays\nFrom LoDi-ProgrammerFX version 5.2025 onwards, the status of the boosters is shown directly in the status bar at the top. That does away with folding further tabs open, and the current status of active boosters is immediately visible.\nOn: the channel is switched on. If a track signal is present, the track voltage is switched through. Off: the channel is switched off. No track voltage is present. Short circuit: the channel reports a short circuit. The track voltage is switched off in this state. Programming output active: if the output is active, the status is set to green. Only either the main track or the programming track can be active.\nIn further fields, which can be folded open or closed at the bottom of the LoDi-ProgrammerFX, the LoDi-CV-Programmer can show current, voltage, temperature, locomotive search and the firmware version.\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Status and displays\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Status and displays\nThis area shows the current draw of the main track or the programming track, depending on which of the two outputs is currently active.\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Status and displays\nThis area shows the voltage present on the track.\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Status and displays\nThis area shows the temperature of the booster over time, measured directly at the output stage. The LoDi-CV-Programmer has no fan, so the temperature here can reach up to 95 degrees; should the temperature rise above 95 degrees, the CV-Programmer's output stage is switched off.\n4. Searching for a locomotive in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nThe new \"Lok suchen\" tab (1) in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX lets you identify the locomotive on the programming track quickly and easily. Simply choose whether you want to scan a DCC or an mfx locomotive. On DCC locomotives, CV values 1 or 17/18 are read out in order to determine the address quickly. Please make sure the locomotive is on the programming track so the scan runs smoothly.\nThe results of the scan are then shown in the new message window (2) at the bottom left, so you have all the relevant information in view straight away.\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Searching for a locomotive in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nAbout the UID of an mfx locomotive: when reading out an mfx locomotive you determine its unique UID. Note it down if need be, since it serves as a one-off identifier and can be used directly for all further settings. With the UID you have captured, you can enter and control your mfx locomotives in software such as iTrain, Win-Digipet or Stellwerk immediately.\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Searching for a locomotive in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Searching for a locomotive in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nTo be able to control a locomotive now, it first has to be added to the database under the LoDi-Rektor in the \"Lokomotiven\" tab. You do that by right-clicking, in the LoDi-CV-Programmer's message window, the locomotive that has been read in and is to be entered in the database, and then pressing \"Zu Lokdatenbank hinzufügen\".\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Searching for a locomotive in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Searching for a locomotive in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nOnce the locomotive has been entered in the database, you can right-click the locomotive you added and open the throttle directly to drive it.\n5. Updating the LoDi-CV-Programmer's firmware\nLike every other device on the LoDi bus, the LoDi-CV-Programmer can be updated through the LoDi-ProgrammerFX or the LoDi-Con. To update the CV-Programmer through the LoDi-ProgrammerFX, proceed as follows: first click the CV-Programmer (1) in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX's tree. At the bottom right you will now find the Firmware tab. There you see the firmware currently installed (FW 00.05, for instance).\nClick \"Online Update\" to search for available updates. A dialogue opens which checks on the online server whether a new version is available. That dialogue also lets you install older versions if need be.\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Updating the LoDi-CV-Programmer's firmware\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Updating the LoDi-CV-Programmer's firmware\nThen select the newest version shown, or the previous version (3) if available, and click Install update (4). In the next dialogue the currently installed version and the version to be installed are shown to you once more.\nUnlike the other LoDi bus devices, the LoDi-CV-Programmer does not have to be put into the bootloader by hand; that happens automatically here as soon as a firmware version is selected and installed.\nThe LoDi-CV-Programmer reboots once after the update and then reports back on the LoDi bus as usual straight away. A quick check shows that the current firmware is now installed.\n6. CV programming with the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nCV programming over PoM with the LoDi-ProgrammerFX has been a fixed part of our software from the start.\nOur own accessory decoders have been settable with it ever since as well.\nTo reach the programming dialogue, click \"Steuerung\" > \"Programmieren\" at the top of the ProgrammerFX and select your command station there, that is the \"LoDi-Rektor\".\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — CV programming with the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nThe programming dialogue now opens, in which you can enter and change the CVs you want.\nOn the left you see a booster symbol which gives you the option of switching boosters on and off.\nThen you select whether you want to use the main track or the programming track.\nTo edit a locomotive, set the type to locomotive.\nThe DCC address is greyed out, since we want to change the locomotive specifically through the programming track.\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — CV programming with the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nClicking \"Lesen\" shows the current value in the \"Wert\" field.\nIn that field you can now also enter a new value and then transfer it straight to the locomotive decoder through the programming track with \"Schreiben\".\nSetting Märklin locomotive decoders in DCC: for most DCC users, programming CVs has long been part of everyday life. For Märklin operators, by contrast, this approach is often still new. Using a practical example, we would therefore like to show you step by step how to switch a Märklin locomotive with an mSD or mLD decoder from generation 2 onwards to DCC — by setting the locomotive address to 700, for instance.\nThe goal: the locomotive should run at DCC address 700 in future and be prepared for PC operation (iTrain, Win-Digipet and others).\nFirst compatibility has to be checked, since not every Märklin decoder can be configured over DCC. Here is a short note on the various decoder generations: mfx decoders from about 2004–2012 (before mLD/mSD) as well as mLD/mSD Gen1 from about 2012–2015 can only be programmed over mfx.\nWe will make the basic parameters settable for those as well; as of 10/2025, however, that is not yet possible — work is already under way and it should be possible shortly; more on that further down.\nOn the mLD/mSD Gen2 to Gen3 (current), DCC is possible. On TRIX, RailCom is usually available as well.\nNow place the locomotive on the programming track on its own. CVs can be written or read directly with the LoDi-ProgrammerFX, the LoDi-Con or model railway software such as iTrain or Win-Digipet.\nWe now start with step 1, switching the locomotive to DCC. Normally the decoders are open to all protocols; where possible we will run the locomotives in DCC. The mfx protocol can of course still be used, but our recommendation is DCC.\nThe protocols are set in CV50. Please read this CV out first before changing it. It is not always the same and should be noted down if need be. We now write CV50 = 0 → DCC protocol only. That applies to mLD/mSD Gen2/Gen3; if the CV differs or does not exist, please check the decoder's manual.\nIn step 2 we reduce the braking and acceleration times for PC control: CV3 (acceleration) = 1, CV4 (braking) = 1.\nThat way the model railway software takes over the acceleration and braking ramps.\nIn step 3 the long address 700 is now written. You can work the addresses out below with our CV calculator; in our example, 700 gives CV17 = 194 and CV18 = 188. These two values are now also entered through the programming track. Once both values are written, we still have to adjust CV29 and enable the long address there. For that, enter 34 in CV29 on Märklin locomotives and 42 on TRIX locomotives with a RailCom-capable decoder.\nTo sum up which CV values we have now entered or changed one after another: CV50 = 0\nCV3 = 1\nCV4 = 1\nCV 17 = 194\nCV 18 = 188\nCV 29 = 34\nNot sure which value has to be set in CV29? Use our CV calculator.\nSetting Märklin locomotive decoders in mfx: this function is in progress . . .\n7. CV calculator\nThis CV calculator helps you set decoder parameters quickly and reliably. Enter the locomotive address you want and have CV17 and CV18 calculated automatically — or read existing CV values back the other way. Beyond that, a few clicks let you set the RailCom channels (CV28) and the basic decoder options (CV29).\n8. Connecting and setting up the LoDi-CV-Programmer\nClick here to reach the LoDi-CV-Programmer hardware description.\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Connecting and setting up the LoDi-CV-Programmer\n LoDi-CV-Programmer — Connecting and setting up the LoDi-CV-Programmer\nAny questions still open?\nWould you simply like to ask us in person?\nOr go to our forum, where experienced users are glad to help you further.\ninfo@lokstoredigital.de","1. Changing the LoDi-CV-Programmer's address","2. The LoDi-CV-Programmer's settings","3. Status and displays","4. Searching for a locomotive in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX","5. Updating the LoDi-CV-Programmer's firmware","6. CV programming with the LoDi-ProgrammerFX","7. CV calculator","8. Connecting and setting up the LoDi-CV-Programmer","sw-installation-linux","software/installation/linux","Linux","Installing and updating the LoDi-ProgrammerFX on Linux.",[956,957,958],"Here we describe in a few short steps how to install, update and start the LoDi-ProgrammerFX on your computer.\nTo use the LoDi-ProgrammerFX you need a 64-bit computer with Java 14.x or newer already installed.\n1. Download and installation\nClick the \"Download LoDi-Start-Installer-Linux\" button below to download the current version of the installer.\nDownload LoDi-Installer.jar\n software-installation-linux-01-e39065.png\n software-installation-linux-02-501bdc.png\nAfter the download, open the file LoDi-Installer-Linux; the setup assistant starts.\n software-installation-linux-03-5d5b05.png\n software-installation-linux-04-1167b6.png\n software-installation-linux-05-9735fc.png\n software-installation-linux-06-e7d07d.png\n software-installation-linux-07-bc34b2.png\nFirst choose the language, then the setup assistant starts.\nFollow the instructions in the assistant until the software is installed.\n software-installation-linux-08-7e4b5e.png\n software-installation-linux-09-8515bd.png\nOnce the assistant has finished, the start icon appears among the applications.\n2. Starting and updating\nDouble-clicking the LoDi-Start icon now starts the update program. On every start it checks whether a new version of the Programmer or new firmware for one or more parts of the LoDi system is available, and downloads it automatically.\n\nIf your model railway computer has no internet connection, we offer an offline package in which every update is published.\n software-installation-linux-10-d3f7c7.png\n software-installation-linux-11-0b2626.png\nThe LoDi-ProgrammerFX now starts.\nYou can have the release notes shown to you directly in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\n3. Offline updates\nIn progress…\n software-installation-linux-12-f996cf.png\n software-installation-linux-13-6287e0.jpg\nAny questions left?\nWould you simply like to ask us in person?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nOr head to our forum, where experienced users are glad to help you.","1. Download and installation","2. Starting and updating","3. Offline updates","lodi-con-handbuch","lodi-con","LoDi-Con manual","The handheld controller from Lokstoredigital: setup, operation and connecting it to any common command station.",[965,966,967,968,969,970,971,972,973,974]," lodi-con-index-01-6ebfc4.png\nStraight to the shop\nLong awaited – finally released:\nThe LoDi-Con\n– born to make dreams come true!\nFor years we have been asked when we would bring out a handheld controller. After months of intensive and carefully considered development work, we can finally present our LoDi-Con.\nThe handheld controller from Lokstoredigital\n lodi-con-index-02-da3d00.png\nThe model railway market teems with command stations, bus systems, protocols and operating philosophies, each wanting to be handled its own way. All the modeller really wants is to run their trains without trouble. That is exactly where the LoDi-Con comes in:\nThanks to its strong Wi-Fi antenna the LoDi-Con can talk to and control every common command station. Which protocol is used matters less than one thing: the station has to be reachable at an IP address on the network.\nDrive your locomotives comfortably from the control.\nThrow whole turnout streets at the push of a button.\nPlay, or do whatever you like – the LoDi-Con takes care of the details.\nWhat the LoDi-Con does\nEffortless operation through a capacitive touch screen and an incremental rotary knob Visual feedback through the rotary knob for speed steps, short circuits and much more Full integration of the LoDi components Connections to several command stations at once over Wi-Fi Driving locomotives and managing them in a locomotive database Showing your own locomotive images Double and multiple traction Throwing turnouts, signals and turnout streets Model time display CV programming in plain language, on the programming track and on the main (PoM) Feedback monitor Locking functions behind a password Up to 68 locomotive functions Club mode Integration into the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nSupported command stations and protocols\nSince the LoDi-Con has Wi-Fi and slots into your home network effortlessly — or even talks to command stations directly where they have a Wi-Fi module of their own — there are plenty of ways to bring it in. You can be connected to up to five command stations at the same time.\nA number of common protocols are available already, and we work on supporting more manufacturers every day.\nSo far the following devices can be connected to the LoDi-Con:\nLoDi-Rektor LoDi-Shift-Commander LoDi-S88-Commander z21 and every command station that supports the Z21 protocol Märklin CS2/3 XpressNet ESU ECoS WiThrottle LocoNet (in preparation)\nThe LoDi-Con can already communicate with a great many model railway control software products.\nWe continue to work closely with the manufacturers so that we can build even more functionality into the LoDi-Con.\nThe operating concept\nThe operating concept of the LoDi-Con is kept simple. We tried to put as little as possible, and as much as necessary, onto the device. LoDi-OS came out of that.\nThe LoDi-Con itself has a high-quality capacitive touch display.\n\nClear menu structures and simple operation were one of our goals. The touch display is supported by a rotary control that is a pleasure to use and even signals different actions through LED feedback — the current speed step, among other things, is shown by the LEDs in the knob.\n lodi-con-index-03-980d8e.jpg\nAlways quickly where you want to be…\nThe menu bar takes you straight to the individual areas:\nThrowing turnouts and routes Home menu Back button Locomotive overview / direct control\n lodi-con-index-04-3f6e28.jpg\nEverything at a glance, thanks to the filter in the locomotive and accessory overview.\nSince the screen would fill up quickly and the sheer number of objects would make the right one hard to find, we built in a small pre-selection filter.\nA text search is possible as well.\n lodi-con-index-05-3f8fac.png\n lodi-con-index-06-78eb3f.png\n lodi-con-index-07-85a388.png\nWhichever way round you hold the LoDi-Con, the screen turns with it. Thanks to a built-in orientation sensor the LoDi-Con knows how you are holding it — and it learns your habits, so it will not flip the display the moment you tilt the device.\nAuto-rotation can of course also be switched off, or locked to one orientation.\n\n \nVideos say more than a thousand words, but a short guide to the individual functions is of course here as well. The deeper details are in the videos. In future we will collect every video about the device behind this link.\nThe LoDi-Con and its variants\nImportant!!!\nFrom 12 December 2024 the LoDi-Con B is no longer available; only the LoDi-Con A variant is offered.\nSince LoDi-Con B units are out there, we keep covering it in this description.\nFor the details of the individual variants, click the LoDi-Con variant below.\nIn short:\nThe LoDi-Con A (black knob) = the battery-pack variant, with the pack already built in. The LoDi-Con A has a USB-C connector for charging it.\nThe LoDi-Con B (grey knob) = the battery variant, taking 3 × AAA batteries or rechargeable cells in the back.\n(click here or on the picture for the description)\n(click here or on the picture for the description)\nOperating the LoDi-Con\nContents\nThe LoDi-Con does quite a lot. We have therefore tried to describe everything as precisely as possible, and in as much detail as necessary, to explain its functions to you. Click whichever point you want to set up.\n1. First start / connecting to Wi-Fi\n2. Setting up command stations\n3. Setting up a locomotive / driving\n4. Multiple traction\n5. Throwing turnouts and signals\n6. Creating routes\n7. Showing feedback\n8. Device settings\n9. Building a track diagram\n10. CV programming\n11. Club mode\n12. Online database\n13. Firmware update\n14. Technical data\n15. Properties in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\n16. Creating your own locomotive images\n lodi-con-index-10-05bf88.png\n17. Download the LoDi-Con as a PDF\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-Con hardware and software as a PDF file.\nLoDi-Con hardware manual Adobe Acrobat document, 13.3 MB\n lodi-con-index-12-b513f6.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","Long awaited – finally released:","The LoDi-Con","The handheld controller from Lokstoredigital","What the LoDi-Con does","Supported command stations and protocols","The operating concept","The LoDi-Con and its variants","Operating the LoDi-Con","Contents","17. Download the LoDi-Con as a PDF","con-01-erstes-einschalten","lodi-con/first-start","First start and Wi-Fi","Starting the LoDi-Con for the first time and connecting it to Wi-Fi.",[],"Once the batteries or cells are in the LoDi-Con, you can start the device with a long press (> 2 seconds) on the rotary knob.\nThe LoDi-Con has a high-quality capacitive touch display. Beyond that, almost every menu entry can be set or reached with the rotary control — a combined operating concept that responds quickly and is easy to grasp.\n lodi-con-01-erstes-einschalten-01-805f84.jpg\nAt the moment of starting, the rotary control begins to light up in colour, clockwise. That is the loading indicator: whenever the LoDi-Con turns the control in rainbow colours, it is loading or saving data.\nWhile that happens you still see the start screen of the device, which always shows the installed version.\nFirst comes the language prompt, where you can currently choose between two languages:\n1. English\n2. German\n3. Dutch (in progress)\n lodi-con-01-erstes-einschalten-02-26f56f.png\n lodi-con-01-erstes-einschalten-03-0c2ef4.png\n lodi-con-01-erstes-einschalten-04-4eb1dd.png\nOnce the LoDi-Con has started, it asks you straight away to connect to a Wi-Fi network.\nThe LoDi-Con has a Wi-Fi module and two Wi-Fi antennas, to give it the best possible reception.\nChoose your network and enter your password when prompted.\nIs there a router on the network? Then the LoDi-Con should be given an IP address over DHCP right away.\nAfter you enter it, the LoDi-Con connects to the network.\n lodi-con-01-erstes-einschalten-05-526b3f.png\n lodi-con-01-erstes-einschalten-06-8f3c06.png\n lodi-con-01-erstes-einschalten-07-93fa9d.png\nFor advanced users:\nIf you have built a small network of your own, you may have to adjust the IP address.\nIn that case go back to the house symbol > Settings > Network.\nYou are now in the network settings menu.\nThere you can connect to a different network or set an IP address by hand.\n lodi-con-01-erstes-einschalten-08-97874b.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","api-lodi-shift-commander","api/lodi-shift-commander","LoDi-Shift-Commander API","The protocol for the switching system and the LoDi-Operators.",[665,666,667,818,987,988,989,990,991,992,993,994,995,996,997,998,999],"Introduction\nThe device type is always 0x09 on the LoDi-Shift-Commander.\nBasic commands\nGetVersion\nThis command returns the device identifier and the FW version of the device.\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x20 0x0F 0x00 .. 0xFF\nPacket type Command Packet number Device type Major Minor Patch\n0x21 0x0F 0x00 .. 0xFF 0x09 \nThe firmware version is made up of the three parts major, minor and patch. It is shown in the format \"v..\". Example: \"v01.01.01\"\nThis command reads the settings of the LoDi-Shift-Commander.\nThe major version only changes when completely new hardware with different characteristics and a different feature set is released.\nThe minor version changes when the API is extended. Individual commands may also become incompatible.\nThe patch version changes for general bug fixes that do not touch the API.\nDeviceConfigGet\nBus config\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x20 0x64 0x00 .. 0xFF\nPacket type Command Packet number MaxAktivWeichen WeichenStart The bus config field holds the configuration of the bus. It is split into several bits.\n0x21 0x64 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 1 0 .. 10 0 .. 2\nBit 0: bus 1 active\n0: bus 1 inactive 1: bus 1 active 0: bus 2 inactive\n1: bus 2 active 0: light bus (96 outputs)\n1: switching bus (384 outputs) The MaxAktivWeichen field defines how many turnouts may be thrown at the same time. This avoids overloading the power supply when solenoid accessories are used.\n0: no limit\n>0: the number of turnouts set can be active at once. Otherwise execution waits until the other turnouts have finished throwing. The WeichenStart entry sets how the turnouts are initialised at switch-on.\n0: the turnouts are not initialised\n1: the turnouts are set to their last state. 2: every turnout state is cycled through once. After that the last state known before switch-off is set. OperatorNameGet\nReads the name of a LoDi-Operator.\nBusNr\nPacket type Command Packet number OperatorPos Character n\n0x20 0x73 0x00 .. 0xFF 1..2 0..47\nPacket type Command Packet number Length Character 1 .. BusNr names the bus to use. Within that bus, OperatorPos determines whose operator name is read. Each LoDi-Operator counts as one device.\n0x21 0x73 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 16 \nThe length determines the number of characters that follow.\nSwitching commands\nCommandListGet\nReads the list of every command the LoDi-Shift-Commander supports.\nKommandoNr\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x20 0x61 0x00 .. 0xFF\nPacket type Command Packet number Count States Outputs Category The count field carries the number of possible commands. It determines how many command descriptions follow.\n0x21 0x61 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 255 1 .. 16 1 .. 10 0 .. 3\nThe KommandoNr field is the identifier of the command.\nThe states entry says how many states, counted from 0, the command can take. A simple turnout typically has 2 states; signals may well have 10 or more.\nOutputs describes how many hardware outputs the command occupies. A simple turnout occupies two, signals quite possibly 6 and more.\nThe category field returns the classification of the command. The following values are possible:\n0: turnouts – turnouts are initialised at start-up if the device is set to do so\n1: signals – every track signal, light or semaphore 2: effects – every lighting effect 3: special – every special decoder command, such as those for the LoDi-Light-Operator CommandNameGet\nReads the name of a command together with additional information.\nThe KommandoNr field holds the identifier of the command to be read.\nPacket type Command Packet number States\n0x20 0x62 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 255\nCharacter 0\nPacket type Command Packet number Length The length field determines the number of characters that follow in character 0 to character n. The resulting string is to be read as follows: .. BusNr names the bus to use. Within that bus, OperatorPos determines whose operator name is read. Each LoDi-Operator counts as one device.\n0x21 0x62 0x00 .. 0xFF \n||..|\nThe colours are defined as follows:\nws: white\nrt: red gn: green ge: yellow bl: blue The colours are assigned to the respective outputs. They mainly serve the display.\nFor some commands only the command name is returned, without additional colour information.\nExample:\n\"DB BS|rt|gn\" -> Deutsche Bahn block signal with the colours red and green\nNodeConfigGet\nReads the configuration of every node from the LoDi-Shift-Commander.\nGlobDelay\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x20 0x66 0x00 .. 0xFF\nPacket type Command Packet number AusgangHi Count AusgangLo Delay States GlobDelay gives the duration of a command when delay is set to 0. The duration is read in steps of 20 ms, so a value of 10 means 200 ms. What it does exactly depends on the command.\n0x21 0x66 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 250 0 .. 255 0 .. 255\nThe count field gives the number of node records that follow. Each record is four bytes long. The index of the record determines the address of the node. Counting starts at 0 (the display adds 1).\nAusgangHi and AusgangLo together give the first output the node addresses. The output number is calculated as follows:\nOutput = AusgangHi256 + AusgangLo\nThe KommandoNr entry determines the command to be carried out. If the command is 0, there is no function at this address.\nNodeNameGet\nReads the name of one or more nodes.\nNodes\nPacket type Command Packet number Count The count field says how many nodes are read. The nodes (addresses) may be given in any order.\n0x20 0x71 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 255 0 .. 255\nPacket type Command Packet number Count Length Character 1 .. BusNr names the bus to use. Within that bus, OperatorPos determines whose operator name is read. Each LoDi-Operator counts as one device.\n0x21 0x71 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 255 0..16 \nThe reply carries as many names as the count says, in the order of the request, each preceded by its length and followed by that many characters.\nNodeStatusGet\nReads the current (permanently stored) state of every node from the LoDi-Shift-Commander.\nThe count field gives the number of status fields that follow. Only as many status fields are sent as the highest occupied address needs. Each status field corresponds to one address; counting starts at address 0.\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x20 0x6A 0x00 .. 0xFF\nPacket type Command Packet number Count Status\n0x21 0x6A 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 255 0..15\nNodeStatusSend\nSets the state of one or more nodes (addresses) — that is, throws turnouts, sets signals and so on.\nState\nPacket type Command Packet number Count The count field says how many nodes are read. The nodes (addresses) may be given in any order. The count field gives the number of node/state pairs that follow.\n0x20 0x6C 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 255 0 .. 255 0 .. 15\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x21 0x6C 0x00 .. 0xFF\nEvery node (every address) can take a state from 0 to 15.\nExample for address 5: 0x20 0x6C 0xXX 0x01 0x05 0x01\nThe Shift-Commander then sends a confirmation: 0x21 0x6C 0xXX\nExample for sending several addresses (1,2,3,4): 0x20 0x6C 0xXX 0x04 0x01 0x01 0x02 0x01 0x03 0x01 0x04 0x01\nNotes:\nExample for sending several addresses (1,2,3,4): 0x20 0x6C 0xXX 0x04 0x01 0x01 0x02 0x01 0x03 0x01 0x04 0x01\nThere is no need to delay sending turnout commands. The LoDi-Shift-Commander makes sure that not too many turnouts throw at once.\nThe state that was set is stored permanently and is therefore known to the LoDi-Shift-Commander after the next switch-on. OutputsGet\nReads the status of every output.\nAnzahlHigh\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x20 0x60 0x00 .. 0xFF\nPacket type Command Packet number AnzahlLow The fields AnzahlHigh and AnzahlLow together give the number of output states that follow. The count field gives the number of node/state pairs that follow.\n0x21 0x60 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 255\nCount = AnzahlHigh256 + AnzahlLow\nHow many outputs follow depends on the setting of bus 2. If both buses are set to light bus, 192 output states are transmitted. If bus 2 is set to switching bus, 480 outputs are transmitted.\nBus 1 starts at the first byte and ends at the 96th. Bus 2 starts at the 100th byte.\nThe state field holds the internal output state. It is to be read as follows:\nValue <= 100: output is on.\nValue between 100 and 164: output is dimmed. Value >= 164: output is off. Room lighting control\nThe room lighting control is in principle just another LoDi-Operator, only with a few extra functions. The LoDi-Operator 4-C-LED can be switched with NodeStatusSend in exactly the same way.\nThe states are assigned as follows:\n0: lighting off\n1: light curve 1 2: light curve 2 3: light curve 3 8: flash 9: double flash 10: random flashing 11: passing clouds The LoDi-Shift-Commander simulates a 24-hour day. The simulated time is transmitted to every LoDi-Operator 4-C-LED at regular intervals. The operators are also able to keep counting the time themselves without that synchronisation.\nTimeSpeedSet\nSets the speed at which time passes, as a multiple of normal time.\nFactor\nPacket type Command Packet number The factor field gives the time acceleration as a multiple of normal time. A value of 0 stops time.\n0x20 0x76 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 250\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x21 0x76 0x00 .. 0xFF\nAt a value of 120, an hour is only 30 seconds long.\nTimeGet\nReads the current simulated time.\nZeitHigh\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x20 0x78 0x00 .. 0xFF\nPacket type Command Packet number ZeitLow The current time is counted in steps of 2 seconds. It is calculated as follows:\n0x21 0x78 0x00 .. 0xFF \nTime = ZeitHigh256 + ZeitLow\nAn hour is 1800 time units long. The highest value for the time is 43199.\nA time of 36000 therefore corresponds to 20:00.\nTimeSet\nSets the current simulated time.\nLoDi-Shift-Commander API Service\nPacket type Command Packet number ZeitLow The current time is counted in steps of 2 seconds. It is calculated as follows:\n0x20 0x77 0x00 .. 0xFF \nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x21 0x77 0x00 .. 0xFF\nTime = ZeitHigh256 + ZeitLow\nAn hour is 1800 time units long. The highest value for the time is 43199.\nAdobe Acrobat document, 174.1 KB The commands the LoDi-S88-Commander LX understands are listed below. Communication with the device is explained in General API.","Reads the name of a LoDi-Operator.","CommandListGet","Reads the list of every command the LoDi-Shift-Commander supports.","Reads the name of a command together with additional information.","Reads the configuration of every node from the LoDi-Shift-Commander.","Reads the name of one or more nodes.","Reads the current (permanently stored) state of every node from the LoDi-Shift-Commander.","Sets the state of one or more nodes (addresses) — that is, throws turnouts, sets signals and so on.","Reads the status of every output.","The room lighting control is in principle just another LoDi-Operator, only with a few extra functions. The [LoDi-Operator 4-C-LED](docs:lodi-operator-4-c-led) can be switched with NodeStatusSend in exactly the same way.","Sets the speed at which time passes, as a multiple of normal time.","Reads the current simulated time.","Sets the current simulated time.","con-zentrale-s88c","lodi-con/command-stations/lodi-s88-commander","Setting the LoDi-S88-Commander LX up in the LoDi-Con.",[],"\n lodi-con-zentrale-s88c-02-c2d8c2.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-s88c-03-ea7d75.png\nShift-Commander. You still configure the LoDi-Shift-Commander itself through the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\n lodi-con-zentrale-s88c-04-21f03c.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-s88c-05-89fc09.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-s88c-06-00a9d8.png\nTo connect the LoDi-Rektor to the LoDi-Con, proceed as follows:\nFirst tap the \"house\", which always takes you back to the main screen.\nFrom there go to \"Settings\" > \"Command station\" >\n lodi-con-zentrale-s88c-07-59fcc8.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-s88c-08-4f5499.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-s88c-09-73ee04.png\nTo connect the LoDi-S88-Commander (LX) to the LoDi-Con, proceed as follows:\nThe LoDi-Con now searches the network for compatible command stations. Any it finds are shown.\nNow choose the LoDi-S88-Commander (LX) you want to connect to the\nThat is because the LoDi-Rektor understands the z21 protocol as well, so that a Roco Wi-Fi handheld can connect to it. In this case please use the LoDi-Rektor.\nLoDi-Con. In our example it is the top one.\n lodi-con-zentrale-s88c-10-a960ff.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-s88c-11-b65f11.png\nYou can change the name of the LoDi-S88-Commander (LX) if you like.\nThe LoDi-Con now connects to the LoDi-Rektor.\nThe LoDi-Con now connects to the LoDi-S88-Commander (LX).\nA new symbol (L88) for the LoDi-S88-Commander (LX) now has to appear at the top left. If that L88 is steady, the connection is up. If it blinks, the LoDi-Con has no connection to the\nLoDi-S88-Commander (LX) or is trying to establish one.\n lodi-con-zentrale-s88c-12-86e30f.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","lodi-rektor","hardware/driving/lodi-rektor","The network command station of the LoDi system: generates the track signal in DCC, mfx® and Motorola and drives the boosters over the LoDi bus.",[1010,601,1011,1012,1013,1014,1015,1016,1017,1018,456,1019,1020]," LoDi-Rektor\nThe director of the locomotives. It provides the all-important signal for the locos.\nThe LoDi-Rektor is a labour of love for us — a command station that handles every task and is broadly compatible.\nIt is a compact network command station, developed specifically for the needs of the computer-controlled model railway.\nFeatures of the LoDi-Rektor\nIt is the link between computer and locomotive. The raw loco data is generated by the computer and sent to the LoDi-Rektor, which then produces the track signal required. For sending, the LoDi-Rektor currently supports the following protocols: DCC, mfx® and Motorola. (To use M3 the loco's UID must be known; the Rektor cannot read it.) The LoDi-Rektor drives the connected components over the LoDi bus (formerly µCon bus). The LoDi bus was developed as a booster bus and has been developed further by us. It is fully backwards compatible with the old µCon devices, which can be connected to the µCon bus. The LoDi-Rektor can be used purely as a booster interface, with your own command station connected to C D E. The C D E is switched from OUT to IN comfortably through our LoDi-ProgrammerFX. The C D E-IN can be used as a sniffer for conventional DCC command stations. (From version 2023.08.) A modern network interface, and therefore driver-free operation. Command station and track signal generator in the latest version 2.0. Faster processing from PC to LoDi-Rektor, less data traffic, more efficient handling. Suitable for layouts of every size — small, large or larger still. The LoDi-Rektor has ample power to handle even the biggest layouts with ease. Should your layout nonetheless reach a size at which ordinary command stations meet their limits, simply add a second LoDi-Rektor to the system. So-called hand-over points can be configured comfortably for that.\nVideos from partners\nWalkthrough by Wolfgang Radermacher covering the LoDi-Rektor and LoDi-Booster.\n \nA short demonstration of the LoDi-Rektor with the DC-Car system.\n \n1. The LoDi-Rektor and its connections\nThe LoDi-Rektor is the interface needed to generate the required loco data formats.\nAt present the LoDi-Rektor supports DCC, M3 and Motorola in all their variations.\nThe only limit here is the control software. It connects through a modern, forward-looking and driver-free interface.\nIt is therefore entirely independent of the operating system installed.\nYou should, however, have the latest Java version installed.\n LoDi-Rektor — The LoDi-Rektor and its connections\nAbout the connections on the LoDi-Rektor:\n(1) Network port: connect your network switch or router here. (2) LoDi bus OUT: LoDi bus components such as the LoDi-Booster, or other LoDi bus components, connect here. You may also mix in components from other manufacturers — the LoDi-Rektor detects which device is attached. (3) CDE: conventional boosters supporting the CDE standard can be connected here. If you already have a command station and want to work with it, the CDE output can be reconfigured as an input or sniffer-in through the LoDi-ProgrammerFX. (4) USB-C port: the USB-C connection serves solely as the 5 volt supply for the LoDi-Rektor.\n2. LEDs and buttons of the LoDi-Rektor\n LoDi-Rektor — LEDs and buttons of the LoDi-Rektor\nThe LoDi-Rektor has several LEDs and buttons to help you read the state of the device and understand faults quickly.\n(1): this shows the activity of the µCon bus, and the green LED shows DCC. It lights as soon as the LoDi-Rektor sends a data signal. The red LoDi bus LED pulses at a steady rate, which tells you the bus is active. (2) Start-stop button: think of this as an emergency stop. Pressing it interrupts the track signal and all boosters stop immediately. (3) Prog. IP button and LED: this button is used whenever you want to change the IP address of your LoDi-Rektor. More on that in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX description.\n3. Connecting the power supply to the LoDi-Rektor\n LoDi-Rektor — Connecting the power supply to the LoDi-Rektor\nWe deliver the LoDi-S88-Commander LX with a high-quality USB power supply. You are of course welcome to use your own USB power supply, but it should provide at least\n1 ampere at 5 volts.\n(Chargers from newer Apple MacBooks or iPads unfortunately cannot be used. They work with\n\"USB Power Delivery\", where the devices have to negotiate the current — a function the LoDi components do not support.)\nImportant note on the power supply: use only the external power supply for our interface. Powering it from the PC can cause a ground loop and interference because of the network connection.\n4. Connecting the LoDi-Rektor to the network\n LoDi-Rektor — Connecting the LoDi-Rektor to the network\nAll our devices work with a modern network interface.\nThat brings you plenty of advantages in handling the devices. This network interface lets you integrate several interfaces into your system without trouble.\nThere are almost no limits to your imagination here.\nThis technology lets you build large and very large layouts, but small layouts benefit from it too.\nThanks to networking, controlling your layout from a laptop or tablet is no longer a problem. Today's Wi-Fi routers are perfectly able to carry these connections quickly enough.\nThere is little to watch out for when bringing the LoDi interface into your network.\nIt is always easier to integrate the LoDi interface into an existing network than to install another network card in the computer.\nIf you need help with the integration, do get in touch with us through the contact form, or turn to our users in the forum, who will gladly help.\nAs the picture above shows, we pay close attention to the colour coding of network cables. Yellow is the international standard for computer networks.\nYou are of course free to use other colours; we stick to these standards.\nIn the example shown, the computer is connected to a switch or router.\nYou can of course also connect the computer over Wi-Fi.\nThe LoDi-Shift-Commander is attached to the switch or router as well.\nThe cable running off to the left could be your internet line, or other devices connected to your network.\nIf the ports on the switch or router run out, simply connect another switch to the existing one. The link channels of the switches route the data to the right device automatically; you only have to plug the cables in. Please take care not to build a loop, though — a loop is a circle, so to speak, that will bring your network down.\nOnce the LoDi interface is connected correctly, the next step is configuring the network address (the IP address) through our LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\n5. Connecting the LoDi-Rektor to the LoDi bus\nThe LoDi-Rektor carries the LoDi bus, formerly the µCon bus. It was originally developed as a pure booster bus for the µCon system of the day. As the LoDi bus it has been, and continues to be, developed and maintained.\nThe LoDi bus offers many advantages for boosters in particular, because it lets us run long network cable lengths — up to 1500 metres is possible.\nBoosters receive the same signal everywhere; there is no timing offset in the track protocol.\nFor large installations in particular the LoDi bus is the perfect choice.\nBeyond that, the LoDi bus brings us plenty of information such as:\nCurrent draw of the individual booster outputs Booster status Voltage reading Temperature monitoring Free addressing of the connected LoDi bus components\nHere you see a LoDi-Booster connected to the LoDi-Rektor. The LoDi bus needs a terminating plug; one is supplied with every LoDi-Rektor.\n LoDi-Rektor — Connecting the LoDi-Rektor to the LoDi bus\nOur system is fully compatible with other LoDi bus components. The LoDi-Rektor automatically detects the connected component, whether that is a LoDi-Booster, a µCon booster or a Railspeed.\n LoDi-Rektor — Connecting the LoDi-Rektor to the LoDi bus\nThe Railspeed by LSdigital works fully on the LoDi-Rektor. It makes no difference where on the bus it is inserted.\n LoDi-Rektor — Connecting the LoDi-Rektor to the LoDi bus\n6. Conventional boosters on the LoDi-Rektor\nIf you have boosters, are happy with them, and want to attach the LoDi-Rektor only as a command station or generator, you are of course free to do so.\nCustomers have also asked us repeatedly what they should do with their old boosters.\nWe say: connect them too!\nPerhaps you still have a stretch of track that is not part of the layout, or you want to switch turnouts and signals over DCC, M3 or Motorola. All of that is possible.\n LoDi-Rektor — Conventional boosters on the LoDi-Rektor\nIf the connected booster reports a short circuit on E, that is shown in our tool.\n7. The LoDi-Rektor as a booster interface over C D E or sniffer-in\nThe LoDi-Rektor can be used as a command station with sniffer-in, or as a booster interface.\nWhat does booster interface mean?\nMany control programs support recognising where a short circuit is. There are ways to give the control software a pulse through feedback modules, saying that a particular booster circuit has a short.\nThe LoDi-Rektor, by contrast, collects the boosters' data itself and then sends it to the control software.\nThat lets you evaluate more data:\nIndividual boosters are shown with their address Current draw and voltage can be displayed Booster temperature Booster status on/off, short circuit\nThe LoDi-Rektor has a switchable C D E input or output. You decide through the LoDi-ProgrammerFX how the connector is configured. To configure the C D E connection, click here.\nHere you see a conventional Lenz command station with a C D E output connected. You should only connect C and D, though. If E is connected as well, the LoDi-Rektor passes a short circuit on to the command station, which then cuts the entire track power again.\nEvery command station with a C D E output can be connected to the LoDi-Rektor!\n LoDi-Rektor — The LoDi-Rektor as a booster interface over C D E or sniffer-in\nThe C D (E) cable should be no longer than 2 metres!\n8. The LoDi-Rektor as a booster interface for conventional command stations\nThe market is full of command stations, and as a customer it is genuinely hard to keep an overview. In principle they all do one thing alike: they are meant to control your trains and/or turnouts. There are all sorts, from high-end units down to small USB sticks.\nBut there really are command stations on the market that have no C D E connection.\nDo they have to stay outside, then?\nNo! Any command station at all can be connected to the LoDi-Rektor — it only has to speak DCC or Motorola.\nThe question naturally arises why a command station should be connected to the LoDi-Rektor when it is one itself. Quite simply: you know your system and are happy with it, but want the benefits of RailCom and booster logic.\nOr perhaps you have grown so used to your handheld controller that you do not want to be without it.\nThat is exactly where the sniffer-in comes in — carry on using your old command station as a handheld controller.\nEvery command station has a track output to which you can connect your track.\nIt is of course not possible to connect that track output straight to the LoDi-Rektor.\nTwo resistors of 2.2 kΩ each have to be inserted into the line for that, as the picture below shows.\nThat way almost every command station can be connected to the LoDi-Rektor. Use your station as the main command station, or only as manual control through the sniffer-in.\nThe sniffer-in can only be used from hardware version 6/23 onwards. See the thread in the forum.\n LoDi-Rektor — The LoDi-Rektor as a booster interface for conventional command stations\n9. Technical data\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length 8.9 cm\nWidth 10 cm\nHeight 3.5 cm\nWeight 89 grams\nThe USB-C connection can be powered from any common USB-C cable or power supply.\nThe maximum load of the USB power supply may be up to 3 amperes.\n10. Setting up the LoDi-Rektor in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nHere is how to commission the IP address of the LoDi-Rektor\nHere is how to set up the LoDi-Rektor\n LoDi-Rektor — Setting up the LoDi-Rektor in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\n11. LoDi-Rektor PDF download\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-Rektor hardware and software as a PDF.\nLoDi-Rektor manual PDF, 1.4 MB — as of 23 January 2025","Features of the LoDi-Rektor","1. The LoDi-Rektor and its connections","2. LEDs and buttons of the LoDi-Rektor","3. Connecting the power supply to the LoDi-Rektor","4. Connecting the LoDi-Rektor to the network","5. Connecting the LoDi-Rektor to the LoDi bus","6. Conventional boosters on the LoDi-Rektor","7. The LoDi-Rektor as a booster interface over C D E or sniffer-in","8. The LoDi-Rektor as a booster interface for conventional command stations","10. Setting up the LoDi-Rektor in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX","11. LoDi-Rektor PDF download","schalten","hardware/switching","Switching","Switch turnouts, light signals, lamps and effects with the LoDi-Shift-Commander.",[],"Switch turnouts, signals, lamps, LEDs and effects on the layout — over the LoDi system's SC switching bus, or classically over DCC.\nSC system The LoDi-Shift-Commander and the Operator modules on the SC switching bus.\nDCC system Accessory decoders that work straight off the DCC track signal.","sc-system","hardware/switching/sc-system","SC-System","The LoDi-Shift-Commander and the Operator modules on the SC switching bus.",[],"The SC system: the LoDi-Shift-Commander as the network interface for the SC switching bus, and the Operator modules that switch turnouts, signals, lamps and room lighting on it.\nLoDi-Shift-Commander The LoDi-Shift-Commander — the network interface for the SC switching bus, built for reliability and speed.\nLoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC If you are looking for a reliable turnout decoder for your solenoid or motor drives, look no further. The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC switches\nLoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC — the ultimate accessory decoder for everything that runs on DC! This decoder is able to\nLoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) The LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL is a powerful accessory decoder with 16 outputs in total, each providing 150 mA. This decoder is\nLoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED With the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED we developed a device that has no real equal on the market.\nLoDi-SC-Booster The LoDi-SC-Booster is a compact bus booster for the SC bus. When decoders are chained together with patch cables, the voltage can drop with every further LoDi","lodi-84","hardware/switching/dcc-system/lodi-84","LoDi-84","A decoder with built-in bistable relays for switching loads.",[1039,1040,1041,1042,1043,1044,1045,609,1046]," LoDi-84\nA simple decoder with built-in bistable relays for switching external loads; it is also suitable for cutting power to sections of track such as staging yard roads or dead sections. Thanks to its simple wiring the decoder is ready for use in no time.\nFeatures of the LoDi-84\nAn accessory decoder for the DCC and Motorola track protocols. Four channels are available, which can be operated alternately, each rated at 4 amperes of contact load. Ideal for cutting power to sections of track or staging yard roads. The LoDi-84 also suits switching consumers that need AC, such as stop sections, old solenoids or universal motors. Easily configured over DCC and RailCom.\n1. The LoDi-84 and its connections\nThere are several screw terminals on the LoDi-84:\n(1) The loads or track sections to be switched connect here. (2) This is the decoder's supply. At the DCC terminal (red, blue) it has to be connected to a digital signal (command station or booster). An external supply connects to the AC/DC terminal.\n LoDi-84 — The LoDi-84 and its connections\n2. The LoDi-84 LEDs and button\nThe decoder has three LEDs for status and a button, used to give the decoder an address, for instance.\n(1) The red LED (Info) lights as soon as the decoder receives a signal valid for it, or when RailCom data is sent. The green LED (DCC) lights as soon as DCC is present at the decoder. The orange LED (PW) lights as soon as the decoder is connected to a transformer. Should there be a short circuit on an output, the orange LED goes out. The LED is also off when the transformer is not connected or is switched off.\n LoDi-84 — The LoDi-84 LEDs and button\n3. Connecting a model railway transformer and DCC\nThe LoDi-84 has two terminals for feeding in the model railway transformer. If you want to connect several decoders to one transformer, we can recommend the LoDi distribution board series under Accessories.\nCAREFUL!\nPlease do not use cable below 0.75 mm²!\nPlease watch the polarity of the power supply!\nAC ONLY!\n LoDi-84 — Connecting a model railway transformer and DCC\nOnce the decoder is supplied with power, that is E (energy), it has to be able to receive data. For that the decoder should be connected to a command station or a booster.\nIn the example here we use a LoDi-Booster.\n LoDi-84 — Connecting a model railway transformer and DCC\nCAREFUL!\nFor reliable switching of DCC accessories, a separate circuit or booster output should always be used.\nBecause the LoDi-84 draws very little current, it only has to supply the internal electronics and switch the relays. It is therefore also possible to power the LoDi-84 without an external supply, directly from the booster voltage.\n LoDi-84 — Connecting a model railway transformer and DCC\n4. Connecting consumers\nExternal consumers can be switched through the decoder with a bistable relay. Here are a few examples, which we will explain briefly:\n LoDi-84 — Connecting consumers\nHere is a simple first example: the supply voltage for the load comes from the same model railway transformer as the decoder's. TIP: if you also use this transformer for switching turnouts, it makes sense to use a separate transformer for switching the lighting. Switching a turnout can otherwise make the light flicker briefly.\n LoDi-84 — Connecting consumers\nIn most cases the decoder is used to switch lamps or street lighting. The source of the supply voltage makes no difference here. Another power supply could equally be used.\n LoDi-84 — Connecting consumers\nIn this example we use a light signal still fitted with bulbs. This signal can be switched excellently through the LoDi-84.\n5. Cutting track power with the LoDi-84\nWith the LoDi-84 you can cut power to individual tracks simply and efficiently. Whether at a signal, before a bridge, or in a staging yard with several roads. This example shows how.\n LoDi-84 — Cutting track power with the LoDi-84\nHere we show a simple interruption of the centre rail. The track is now switched off through the LoDi-84. The DCC supply (red and blue track feed wires) comes from a separate booster.\n LoDi-84 — Cutting track power with the LoDi-84\nThe decoder can of course also be used for interruptions on two-rail systems.\n6. CV list, addressing and settings\nThe LoDi-84 is set through CVs.\nIf you have the LoDi-Rektor with a LoDi-Booster or CDE booster connected, you can write the CVs over PoM (programming on main) with the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\nThe decoder can equally be programmed with any conventional command station that has a DCC programming output or handles PoM.\nIf you have a RailCom capable system, you can read the decoder's CVs live at any time.\nSetting the DCC address: you have now installed the decoder successfully, the DCC cable is plugged in and the LoDi-84 glows orange continuously to show it is ready.\nThe green LED lights as soon as a signal is present at the DCC terminal.\nAs delivered, the decoder responds to turnout or accessory addresses 1–4.\nIf you want to change an address quickly, proceed as follows: there is a prog. button (2) on the decoder. Press it for 3 seconds.\n LoDi-84 — CV list, addressing and settings\nThe info LED (red) (1) starts to flash quickly. That is the decoder telling you it is ready for a new address.\nNow send the new address from the control software directly to a command station or the LoDi-ProgrammerFX (the LoDi-Rektor is required).\nThe decoder takes the address and the info LED changes from flashing to steady. It is now reachable at the address you chose. Only the first address has to be sent; the other three are assigned automatically. With 1, for instance, 1–4, and so on.\n7. Technical data\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length 8.9 cm\nWidth 10 cm\nHeight 3.5 cm\nWeight 96 grams\nAt the digital terminal, that is in digital operation, the decoder can be supplied with up to 22 volts.\nDo mind the specifications of your command station or booster manufacturer here.\nPermissible from 7 to 24 volts DC, digital or AC.\nLoad per contact output of 4 amperes at a maximum of 60 volts.\n8. LoDi-84 PDF download\nLoDi-84 manual and CV list, 18 January 2025 PDF, 1.9 MB","Features of the LoDi-84","1. The LoDi-84 and its connections","2. The LoDi-84 LEDs and button","3. Connecting a model railway transformer and DCC","4. Connecting consumers","5. Cutting track power with the LoDi-84","6. CV list, addressing and settings","8. LoDi-84 PDF download","lodi-operator-4-wd-ac","hardware/switching/sc-system/lodi-operator-4-wd-ac","LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC","A turnout decoder for AC drives on the SC bus.",[1053,1054,1055,1056,1057,1058,1059,1060,1061,456,1062,1063]," LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC\nIf you are looking for a reliable turnout decoder for your solenoid or motor drives, you need look no further. The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC switches with true AC — an important factor, since almost all solenoid coils available on the market are designed to be switched with AC. Unfortunately most decoders on the market use DC, which can lead to remanence in the drive. With the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC your drives always switch perfectly and reliably. Beyond that, configuring the decoder is simple and user-friendly thanks to the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\nFeatures of the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC\nAn AC decoder for the SC bus, for connection to the LoDi-Shift-Commander. Eight channels are available, each with 1 ampere per output; the total of the connected channels must not exceed 2 A. You can connect all common motor turnout drives, solenoid drives and lamps to the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC. The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC is equally suitable for other loads that require AC, such as stopping sections or other old coils. It demagnetises drives with coils! Every output is separately protected against overload. Easily configured with the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\n1. The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC and its connections\nThe LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC is a switching decoder connected to the LoDi-Shift-Commander. It can be run on the slow and on the fast bus.\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC — The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC and its connections\nAbout the connections on the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC\n(1) Here you can connect the loads, turnouts, lamps and so on; you will also find more on this in the wiring examples further down. (2) The AC model railway transformer is connected here. ! ! ! AC ONLY ! !\nIMPORTANT! Please only use authorised model railway transformers. (3) The SC bus from the LoDi-Shift-Commander is connected at the SC-OUT and SC-IN sockets. More on this in the section on connecting to the SC bus.\n2. LEDs on the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC\nThe LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC has two LEDs to help you recognise the state of the device and understand faults more quickly.\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC — LEDs on the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC\n(1) This LED lights when you connect the transformer voltage to the socket !!!!! AC ONLY !!!!!!! (2) The bus LED lights as soon as the SC bus coming from the LoDi-Shift-Commander is plugged in and that unit is powered.\n3. Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC to the SC bus\nThe LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC is connected to the SC bus coming from the LoDi-Shift-Commander. You can see this in the first wiring picture here.\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC to the SC bus\nIn this picture you see the LoDi-Shift-Commander together with the decoder connected to it, here the\nLoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC.\nThe decoder is connected to SC bus Out 1. 96 outputs are available here.\nOn the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC you can use the connections as your layout requires. It does not matter whether you connect a LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC or a LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC first.\nThe LoDi-Shift-Commander is able to detect the connected decoders automatically.\nYou can then programme the assignment with our tool, the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\n.\nThe bus has to be terminated at the last operator.\nThat means you always have to plug the terminating plug, called the bus terminator, into the last module.\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC to the SC bus\nIn this example you now see how the operators can be chained one after another.\nIt is important to take care to connect the network cables correctly. That is, from In to Out, as you can see in the picture.\nThe last example picture shows SC bus 1 and 2 taken to their limits. The order of the modules is entirely irrelevant here.\nOnly with the LoDi-Light-Controller should you take care that it is connected to bus 2.\nIt is important to add a new LoDi-SC-Booster to the system after every 16th module.\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC to the SC bus\nThe bus length, or rather the number of modules, is very easy to calculate.\nOn bus 1 you have 96 channels available.\nHere you could connect 12 LoDi-Operators 4-WD-DC or AC, for instance, since each module needs 8 channels.\nOn the slow bus 384 channels are available to you. That would be 48 LoDi-Operators 4-WD-AC or DC, LoDi-Light-Controller 4-C-LED or LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL.\nAs you can see, our system lets you work very flexibly.\n4. Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC to the model railway transformer\nThe LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC has 4 terminals.\nBoth do not have to be connected to the transformer; they serve to pass the power on.\nYou can start the cable at one decoder and keep passing it on to the next.\nAfter 15 decoders a new power feed should be provided.\nThis makes wiring the system easier.\nCAREFUL: do not choose cable below 0.75 mm².\nPlease watch the polarity of the power supply!\nAC ONLY!\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC to the model railway transformer\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC to the model railway transformer\n5. The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC and its advantages\nWe mentioned at the outset that the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC demagnetises the iron armatures in the coils. Why is that?\nPicture an ordinary decoder from one of the usual manufacturers. These always switch with DC, which means the iron armature is gradually magnetised by that DC. This is known as magnetic remanence. The consequence is that the armature can no longer be switched reliably by the coils, because their magnetic field is no longer strong enough. The decoder becomes unreliable.\nThe principle of a twin-coil drive\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC — The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC and its advantages\nThe iron armature of a twin-coil drive with remanence\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC — The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC and its advantages\nThe iron armature of a twin-coil drive without remanence\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC — The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC and its advantages\nWe developed this decoder to rule that effect out. It only passes AC through to the drives. That now prevents magnetisation, because no lasting remanence can build up. Your drives therefore always switch at full strength.\n6. Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC to the loads\nIn the following examples you see turnout drives from a few manufacturers connected to the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC.\nDrives from different manufacturers can of course be mixed on the decoder.\nFour twin solenoids from any manufacturer can be connected per decoder.\nExample with the Piko® solenoid drive\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC to the loads\nExample with the Fleischmann® solenoid drive\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC to the loads\nExample with the Märklin® K track solenoid drive\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC to the loads\nExample with the Märklin® C track solenoid drive\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC — Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC to the loads\n7. The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC works perfectly for motor turnouts too\nNot only for AC coils, but also excellently suited to motor turnouts of every kind.\nDrives from different manufacturers can of course be mixed on the decoder.\nExample with the MTB motor drives (MP1, MP5, etc.)\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC — The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC works perfectly for motor turnouts too\nExample with the LGB® motor drive (EPL)\nSome motor drives require two diodes; these can be type 1N4001, for instance.\nYou can get them from us in the shop or from other electronics suppliers.\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC — The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC works perfectly for motor turnouts too\nExample with the Tillig motor drive\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC — The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC works perfectly for motor turnouts too\nFurther drives that have been tested with the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC in continuous use.\nThe Märklin M track system, including old Märklin signals with coil drives Fulgurex motor turnout drives Viessmann signals with solenoid lift drives Hoffmann motor turnout drive Conrad motor turnout drive\nMany other drives can be run on the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC AC decoder without trouble. We are happy to extend the wiring example pictures.\nIf a drive you use is missing, do let us know.\nRoco contact drives are better switched with the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC, because the switching travel is too small. The drive may snap back.\n8. The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC for other loads\nOther AC loads such as street lamps, house lighting and AC motors can also be switched easily with the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC. The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC is designed specifically for that. As shown above, the loads can be connected to the output and then configured in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\nIn this example we see a motor turnout drive on outputs 1 and 2 as well as 3 and 4. Two lamps have been installed on outputs 5 and 6.\nOutputs 7 and 8 stay free in this example. The decoder can of course also be run with lamps alone.\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC — The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC for other loads\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC — The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC for other loads\n9. Technical data\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length 8.9 cm\nWidth 10 cm\nHeight 3.5 cm\nWeight 97 grams\nThe decoder must be powered with AC!\nPermitted from 12 to 24 volts AC.\nLoadable by consumers with 1 ampere.\nThe supply voltage can be passed on to the next decoder through the AC terminal on the decoder. The current may be 10 amperes at most.\n10. Setting up the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC in the LoDi-Programmer\nHere you can find out how to set up the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC\n LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC — Setting up the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC in the LoDi-Programmer\n11. LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC PDF download\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC as a PDF.\nLoDi-Operator 4 WD-AC, 21 November 2025 PDF, 2.6 MB","Features of the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC","1. The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC and its connections","2. LEDs on the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC","3. Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC to the SC bus","4. Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC to the model railway transformer","5. The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC and its advantages","6. Connecting the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC to the loads","7. The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC works perfectly for motor turnouts too","8. The LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC for other loads","10. Setting up the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC in the LoDi-Programmer","11. LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC PDF download","lodi-8-gbm","hardware/feedback/lodi-8-gbm","LoDi-8-GBM v2","A RailCom-capable track occupancy module with eight sections for two-rail track.",[1070,1071,1072,1073,1074,1075,1076,1077,590,1078,1079]," LoDi-8-GBM v2\nUpdate late 2022:\nOur LoDi-8-GBM gets a small update too: the LoDi-8-GBM v2. It is now fully updatable and prepared for DCC-A.\nIntroducing: our new occupancy detection module — the second component of our new feedback system, which has already proved itself very successfully on layouts from small to very large. Simplicity of setup and of monitoring are what count here.\nWith the new S88.2 standard and unconditional RailCom compatibility we offer a new dimension of certainty: where there was once only hope, there is now sure knowledge of where the vehicles actually are on the layout.\nFeatures of the LoDi-8-GBM v2\nThe LoDi-8-GBM v2 is an occupancy detector developed for the S88.2 bus. It serves 8 track sections, each of which can carry 3 amperes. All 8 track sections, that is detection channels, are RailCom capable and can be monitored over channels 1 and 2. (With channel 2 a maximum of 8 locomotives can be identified in a detection channel.) Beyond that the occupancy detector also delivers a precise current draw per track section, and can even detect short circuits within the block itself. Universally usable with two-rail and three-rail track systems. The LoDi-8-GBM v2 is easily configured through the LoDi-ProgrammerFX. A display for checking the detectors directly and showing the module's address. Fully backwards compatible. The LoDi-8-GBM v2 can equally be run on s88N and, with an adapter, on an old s88 bus. There you will not have the full functions of the S88.2 bus, however.\n1. The LoDi-8-GBM v2 and its connections\nAbout the connections on the LoDi-8-GBM v2:\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — The LoDi-8-GBM v2 and its connections\n(1): the S88.2 bus connects here. The S88.2-OUT arrow points towards the interface, since this is where the data from the track is reported back to the computer. The LoDi-8-GBM v2 is of course s88N compatible too; you can simply integrate it into existing layouts, but will then not have all the benefits of the new S88.2 bus. (2): the block sections, or detection sections, connect at 1–8 here, and the booster IN voltage to their right at +. You will find more under track connection below.\n2. The LoDi-8-GBM v2 and its LEDs\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — The LoDi-8-GBM v2 and its LEDs\n(1) DCC LED and BUS LED: the bus LED lights as soon as the S88.2 bus is plugged in and supplied with power. The bus LED then glows a light blue. The DCC LED lights as soon as booster voltage is present at the module. (2) Display: during operation this shows the detector currently occupied. The dot to the right of the number shows whether the module has detected the bus.\n3. Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to the S88.2 bus\nAs mentioned several times, the LoDi-8-GBM v2 carries the new S88.2 bus. That is provided by the LoDi-S88-Commander FX. You can connect up to 96 LoDi-8-GBM v2 units to one LoDi-S88-Commander FX.\nWhen the module is run on an S88.2 bus, the following features are available to you:\nOccupancy reporting of the individual blocks with a display Short-circuit detection for the individual blocks. This works through a further register, which means: should a short be detected on output 1.1, for instance, 1.9 is reported as occupied. The short can therefore already be displayed by any control software. Current measurement per detection channel, with the option of displaying it in the software. Setting the short-circuit thresholds per detection channel. Setting the current detection threshold per detection channel RailCom detection on channels 1 and 2 per detection channel (max. 8 locomotives per detection channel). Freely addressable — the module now keeps its address, there are no more shifts!\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to the S88.2 bus\n4. Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to the s88 and s88N bus\nThe LoDi-8-GBM v2 is fitted with the new S88.2 bus, which does not mean the module cannot also be run on conventional command stations with s88 or s88N.\nThese functions are available to you when running on the old s88 bus:\nOccupancy reporting of the individual blocks with a display Short-circuit detection for the individual blocks, here through a further register, which means: if a short is detected on output 1.1, for instance, 1.9 is reported as occupied. The short can therefore already be displayed by any control software.\nHere you see a LoDi-8-GBM v2 connected to a µCon-s88 master. It makes no difference whether the LoDi-8-GBM units are connected to bus 1, 2 or 3; they behave like perfectly ordinary s88 modules.\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to the s88 and s88N bus\nHere you see a LoDi-8-GBM v2 connected to an LDT-HSI. Any kind of s88N module can of course be hung in between.\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to the s88 and s88N bus\nIt is possible to connect the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to a conventional command station. To use the devices on an older station without the s88N connector, you need an adapter.\nWe offer the LoDi-S88 adapter for that, which can be used universally\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to the s88 and s88N bus\n5. Connecting booster voltage to the LoDi-8-GBM v2\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — Connecting booster voltage to the LoDi-8-GBM v2\nThe LoDi-8-GBM v2 has a booster input terminal. A booster or a conventional command station has to be connected to it.\nThe first example shows the LoDi-Booster supplying the LoDi-8-GBM v2 with power.\nPlease take care that the red wire, that is the + connection, is connected to the right-hand booster terminal at outputs A and B respectively. If the red wire is on the other side, it can affect the RailCom signal.\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — Connecting booster voltage to the LoDi-8-GBM v2\nA complete view, in which the modules' buses are now shown as well.\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — Connecting booster voltage to the LoDi-8-GBM v2\nYour wiring might look like this, for instance. You can of course also have several detection modules supplied from one booster section.\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — Connecting booster voltage to the LoDi-8-GBM v2\n6. Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to two-rail track\nOccupancy reporting for two-rail track is easy to arrange with the LoDi-8-GBM v2, always depending on how many detection sections your control software needs.\nIn our diagram we assume one detector per block; entry and braking detectors could of course also be needed or wanted. If you are interested in the cable colours we use, click here under \"Useful information\"\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to two-rail track\n7. Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to three-rail track\nThe three-rail system is very widespread among modellers. That is exactly why three-rail operators matter to us. With the LoDi-8-GBM v2 it is possible to run MFX® and DCC on one track.\nWhat advantages does that bring?\nVehicle position accurate to the detector or block You place a locomotive on the track, the computer detects it and puts the locomotive into the block automatically. Monitoring of the route Short-circuit reporting accurate to the detector Current draw accurate to the detector\nAll the locomotive needs for that is a RailCom transmitter. If you already have another decoder in the locomotive that can do DCC, you can run it in DCC directly.\nMost decoders on the market handle RailCom.\nOne more note: Motorola has to stay outside here. If you do not want to do without Motorola, you have to use the conventional solution with common reporting.\nWe developed the LoDi-RM-16+ for that; it even offers a common return to the track (the diode trick).\nDo note, however, that with this version of the LoDi-RM-16+ no locomotive-specific reporting can be evaluated.\nIf you have questions about that, do contact us.\nFirst of all let us look at the wiring of the three-rail layout.\nIt takes a little rethinking, which we explain briefly here: (a similar explanation can also be found under LoDi-Booster, section 7)\nImagine the centre rail simply becoming the common. Since the common on the layout may always be one, you do not have to separate the new common either.\nWhich means the centre rail is always joined throughout.\nIf you have already separated the centre rail on an existing layout, it can be joined again, or you can run the booster sections with the common separated.\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to three-rail track\nHere you see the normal standard method used with three-rail.\nSo the centre rail, RED, is B; the common rails above and below, BLUE, are O\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to three-rail track\nIn this example you see the upper side carrying the common, here BLUE, that is O.\nThe centre rail stays RED, that is B.\nThe lower side of the track is now the detector for the common report, that is GREEN, as has been usual for reporting with the three-rail method\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to three-rail track\nSo that the locomotive's RailCom data also reaches the control software per block, we have to route the current through the LoDi-8-GBM, which is used for this application in the three-rail method.\nIt takes a little rethinking, but we know from numerous customers that this solution works perfectly.\nOccupancy reporting for three-rail track is easy to arrange with the LoDi-8-GBM v2, always depending on how many detection sections your control software needs.\nIn our diagram we assume one detector per block; entry and braking detectors could of course also be needed or wanted. If you are interested in the cable colours we use, click here under \"Useful information\"\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to three-rail track\nHere we have separated the track on the right and left and left the centre rail joined. With this variant the fishplates on C track, for instance, do not have to be separated. In this variant, however, only current-drawing items are detected, meaning only locomotives or coaches with a pickup shoe.\nAnother variant is wagon detection. That means a report is produced as soon as you place a wagon in a detection area. For that, though, we have to separate the connection from the left to the right rail, as with C track.\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to three-rail track\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to three-rail track\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to three-rail track\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to three-rail track\nIn pictures 1 and 2 you see the connection in C track, contacted from the right to the left side on the underside of the track.\nIn picture 3 we put a small pair of side cutters to the right-hand fishplate 0. The connection can be severed there.\nIn picture 4 you see the connection severed. When separating, take care that both sides have to be separated from the track. It is worth having a voltmeter in the house for this. A continuity tester can show you that the right side really is separated from the left.\nBoth sleepers in a block are still isolated, but a resistor of 10 kilohms is now fitted between the centre rail, that is the common (blue), and the non-current-carrying sleeper, in purple.\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to three-rail track\nHere is another example picture in which a long single-track stretch has been divided into several blocks or detectors. A resistor is now fitted in each section.\nThe turnouts are not separated; as shown in the diagram above, they are simply wired in as well.\nTurnouts are not separated. In principle it can be done with some effort, but we advise against it.\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to three-rail track\nSo if you have decided on the variant with the resistors, the question remains how occupancy of the turnout can be monitored.\nLet us explain that here: the turnouts do not have to be cut or the fishplates separated. It is technically possible, but laborious and inadvisable, since we would have to take one side of the common away from the turnout. For smaller locomotives in particular that does not help contact, so the rails of the turnout stay joined.\nThe turnouts should nevertheless always be reported. Most accidents and derailments happen on turnouts. Here the LoDi-8-GBM can show precisely, through its short-circuit detection in the control software, where a short has occurred. A train running the wrong way can also be spotted at the turnout.\nWe explain that here with the diagram: (all pictures can be enlarged by clicking.)\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to three-rail track\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to three-rail track\nThis example shows a five-road station leading out onto one track.\nAll four turnouts can be put on one detector here, since only one locomotive or train can ever be on the route at a time.\nSo the general rule is: if a route ends on a single-track stretch, the turnouts can be combined onto one detector.\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to three-rail track\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to three-rail track\nThings look different when two or more trains can run over a route.\nThen, if you run with RailCom, the route has to be divided so that the paths across the turnouts are separated from one another. In the example here we see the lower turnout in BLUE. It gets a detector of its own. A train could run straight ahead without affecting the double slip or the upper turnouts. That double slip can now serve the attached turnouts with one detector. Here the rule applies again: only one train can run out over the upper turnouts and the double slip.\nIf you are unsure how best to divide up the routes, contact us or our partners. We will gladly help.\n8. Technical data\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length 130 cm\nWidth 115 cm\nHeight 4.5 cm\nWeight 169 grams\n! ! ! Careful ! ! ! The S88.2 bus may only be run at 5 volts. Do therefore check what voltage your S88 bus runs at. ! ! ! Careful ! ! !\nAt the digital terminal the detector can be supplied with 12 to 24 volts.\nDo mind the specifications of your command station or booster manufacturer here.\nLoadable by consumers with 5 amperes briefly and 3 amperes continuously per output.\nSuitable for every common scale.\n9. Setting up the LoDi-8-GBM v2 in the LoDi-Programmer\nHere is how to set up the LoDi-8-GBM\n LoDi-8-GBM v2 — Setting up the LoDi-8-GBM v2 in the LoDi-Programmer\n10. LoDi-8-GBM PDF download\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-8-GBM hardware and software as a PDF.\nLoDi-8-GBM hardware manual PDF, 2.0 MB","Features of the LoDi-8-GBM v2","1. The LoDi-8-GBM v2 and its connections","2. The LoDi-8-GBM v2 and its LEDs","3. Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to the S88.2 bus","4. Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to the s88 and s88N bus","5. Connecting booster voltage to the LoDi-8-GBM v2","6. Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to two-rail track","7. Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM v2 to three-rail track","9. Setting up the LoDi-8-GBM v2 in the LoDi-Programmer","10. LoDi-8-GBM PDF download","lodi-switcher","hardware/accessories/lodi-switcher","LoDi-Switcher",[1085,1086,1087,392]," LoDi-Switcher\nIntroducing:\nThe LoDi-Switcher series.\nFor switching all sorts of extras on the layout.\nWe use the relay when switching our two/three-rail layout over.\nYou can also use it to cut power to track, or for analogue sections.\nFor anything, in short, that can be switched in.\nAs always, we paid attention to build quality.\nPlease note: always work with ferrules where you can.\nYou will find those and the matching model railway cable in our LoDi shop.\nFeatures of the LoDi-Switcher\nA relay board for switching monostable or bistable relays. LED indication showing that the relay is being driven Switches consumers up to 2 amperes. 12 to 24 volt range for the coil supply\n1. The LoDi-Switcher and its versions\nThe LoDi-Switcher comes in a 1/2 monostable and a 2/2 bistable version.\nHere are the different versions:\n LoDi-Switcher — The LoDi-Switcher and its versions\n LoDi-Switcher — The LoDi-Switcher and its versions\n2. The LoDi-Switcher and its connections\n LoDi-Switcher — The LoDi-Switcher and its connections\nThe LoDi-Switcher has a connection for the supply that switches the relay. Any conventional decoder can be used for this. Here we show a version with the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL.\nThis shows version 1/2.\nThe monostable relay needs continuous current to hold the contact. If the current drops, it releases or switches over.\nOn the side of the LoDi-Switcher there is an LED; that is where you connect the decoder.\nOn the opposite side is the relay's switching channel. It switches the centre connection against the upper or the lower one.\n LoDi-Switcher — The LoDi-Switcher and its connections\nHere you see the bistable version of the relay, version 2/2.\nWith this version the relay coil always stays latched to one side and cannot release if the current is lost. A single pulse is enough to switch it over.\n3. Technical data\nThe LoDi-Switcher carries a total of 2 amperes.\n12–24 volt AC or DC input\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length: 26 mm\nWidth 22 mm\nHeight 13 mm at its highest point\nWeight 4 g\n LoDi-Switcher — Technical data\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are glad to help.","Features of the LoDi-Switcher","1. The LoDi-Switcher and its versions","2. The LoDi-Switcher and its connections","lodi-wib-a","hardware/lighting/lodi-wib-a","LoDi-WiB-A v2","The LoDi-WiB-A v2 is a high-quality lighting board for running model railway vehicles in analogue and digital mode.",[1094,1095,1096,1097,1098,1099,624]," LoDi-WiB-A v2\nThe LoDi-WiB-A v2 is a high-quality lighting board for running model railway vehicles in analogue and digital mode.\nThe board can be used universally and is suitable for almost all gauges and vehicle types.\nAn integrated potentiometer lets the brightness be set individually and matched perfectly to the model at hand.\nIts current draw is very low at under 15 mA, allowing safe operation even with several boards installed.\nThe WiB-A v2 offers the option of integrating a buffer capacitor directly on the board.\nWith a 330 µF electrolytic capacitor, flicker-free lighting of up to 1.5 seconds is achieved.\nThe 2026 version uses a new generation of LEDs from Würth Elektronik, which stand out for their particularly even illumination, high efficiency and long life.\nAvailable in two light colours: Daylight 5000 K for modern lighting, Sunrise 2700 K for warm, incandescent-like light.\nFeatures of the LoDi-WiB-A v2\nSimple installation, optimised for vehicles with full RailCom capability.\nA lighting board for coaches up to 27 centimetres long In 2 colours: Daylight 5000 K for modern lighting, and Sunrise 2700 K for warm, incandescent-like light. The board can be shortened at several points The separated parts of the board can be used further The brightness can be set with a potentiometer Very low current draw, <15 mA Power transfer across the board (up to 5 poles)\nIf you can solder and have already lit one coach or another, the conversion should come easily to you.\nIf you are a beginner, however, or do not feel up to a conversion, do get in touch with our partners. They will be glad to make you an individual offer.\n1. Connections on the LoDi-WiB-A v2\nThere are a number of solder points on the LoDi-WiB-A v2, which we explain here: the red and blue arrows mark IN1 and IN2.\nThis is where the board is supplied with power.\nIn most cases from the front and the back; the many connection options arise from the board being separable. Unlike version 1, the new board is now white.\nAll pads are labelled on the front of the board. Here is an overview of the designations: IN1 = rail, IN2 = rail, U+ = the board's positive conductor, LED+ = output for the tail light (series resistor included)\nGND = ground of the lighting board, Elko + and − = connection for an electrolytic capacitor\n LoDi-WiB-A v2 — Connections on the LoDi-WiB-A v2\n LoDi-WiB-A v2 — Connections on the LoDi-WiB-A v2\nThe back of the board offers the option of transferring power through 3 further poles in the coach.\nWith powered vehicles or rakes with current-carrying couplings in particular, power can be passed on here as well.\nUp to 5 poles can be carried.\nIn the diagram these are marked with the pink arrows.\n LoDi-WiB-A v2 — Connections on the LoDi-WiB-A v2\n LoDi-WiB-A v2 — Connections on the LoDi-WiB-A v2\nOn the LoDi-WiB-A v2 there are 3 connections at which you can integrate one or more electrolytic capacitors.\nYou can use electrolytic capacitors from 100 µF at 35 volts.\nWith a 330 µF 35-volt capacitor, up to 1.5 seconds can be bridged.\n LoDi-WiB-A v2 — Connections on the LoDi-WiB-A v2\n LoDi-WiB-A v2 — Connections on the LoDi-WiB-A v2\n!!! CAREFUL !!!\nAn electrolytic capacitor always has a polarity, +/−; this has to be observed and is marked on the LoDi-WiB-A v2. Reversing the polarity can destroy both the capacitor and the board.\nYou can of course also hide the capacitor in the coach and connect it to the board with wires.\n2. The length of the LoDi-WiB-A v2\nYou should choose the right length for the board; it can vary depending on the coach.\nThe LoDi-WiB-A v2 was designed for coaches up to 27 centimetres long. The board can however be separated very easily at the prepared markings with a pair of side cutters and matched perfectly to the coach length at hand.\n LoDi-WiB-A v2 — The length of the LoDi-WiB-A v2\nThe LoDi-WiB-A v2 can be separated within the areas marked green here.\nPlease note that the side carrying the electronic components cannot be cut down any further.\nThe minimum length is therefore 7.75 cm.\n LoDi-WiB-A v2 — The length of the LoDi-WiB-A v2\n3. Setting the brightness on the LoDi-WiB-A v2\nOn the LoDi-WiB-A v2 there is a potentiometer with which the brightness can be set. Use a small cross-head or flat screwdriver for that and turn slowly to the right for brighter, or to the left to make the light darker.\n LoDi-WiB-A v2 — Setting the brightness on the LoDi-WiB-A v2\n4. Connecting a tail light\nAdditional loads such as a tail light can be connected to the LoDi-WiB-A v2. Two red LEDs can be connected in series, for instance; the necessary series resistor is already on the board and does not have to be added.\nOn the LoDi-WiB-A there is a GND for the LED's negative pole and a LED+ for its positive pole on every section.\n LoDi-WiB-A v2 — Connecting a tail light\n LoDi-WiB-A v2 — Connecting a tail light\n5. Using separated boards further\nThe separated or cut-off parts of the board do not have to be thrown away; the board already carries solder pads for connection to a DC voltage from an accessory decoder or a locomotive decoder, for instance. They are excellently suited to lighting houses, platforms or coaches switched through a decoder.\n LoDi-WiB-A v2 — Using separated boards further\nFor that, U+ and GND are connected to a power source, preferably DC.\n6. Technical data\nDimensions of the LoDi-WiB-A\nLength: 26.9 mm. Width: 11 mm. Board thickness: 1.55 mm. Overall height: 8 mm. Weight: 16 grams. Colour: Daylight 5000 K and Sunrise 2700 K. The LoDi-WiB-A v2 can be run on AC and DC analogue as well as digital voltage. It lights from 7 volts and can be loaded up to a maximum of 25 volts.\n LoDi-WiB-A v2 — Technical data\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are glad to help.","Features of the LoDi-WiB-A v2","1. Connections on the LoDi-WiB-A v2","2. The length of the LoDi-WiB-A v2","3. Setting the brightness on the LoDi-WiB-A v2","4. Connecting a tail light","5. Using separated boards further","software","Software","The LoDi-ProgrammerFX: installation, commissioning, firmware updates and the settings of every LoDi device.",[1105,973],"The LoDi-ProgrammerFX software\n LoDi-ProgrammerFX — The LoDi-ProgrammerFX software\nContents\nIntroduction and overview Installation Commissioning LoDi devices Firmware update LoDi-Con LoDi-Rektor LoDi-Booster LoDi-Booster 10A (+) LoDi-TrainSpeed LoDi-CV-Programmer\nLoDi-8-GBM (v2) (-P) LoDi-RM-16+\nLoDi Operators LoDi-Light-Operator\nStraight to the LoDi-ProgrammerFX downloads\nHere you will find all the descriptions in the software section in PDF form.\nLoDi-ProgrammerFX manual PDF, 718.1 KB\nLoDi-ProgrammerFX manual [Rektor] PDF, 736.0 KB\nLoDi-ProgrammerFX manual [Booster] PDF, 1.6 MB\nLoDi-ProgrammerFX manual [TrainSpeed] PDF, 1.5 MB\nLoDi-ProgrammerFX manual [S88-Commander] PDF, 816.5 KB\nLoDi-ProgrammerFX manual [8-GBM] PDF, 869.2 KB\nLoDi-ProgrammerFX manual [RM-16+] PDF, 832.9 KB\nLoDi-ProgrammerFX manual [Shift-Commander] PDF, 1.1 MB\nLoDi-ProgrammerFX manual [Operator 4-WD-AC] PDF, 812.2 KB\nLoDi ProgrammerFX manual [Light-Operator 4-C-LED] PDF, 865.8 KB\ninfo@lokstoredigital.de","The LoDi-ProgrammerFX software","sw-installation","software/installation","Installation","The LoDi-ProgrammerFX is available for the most common operating systems.",[]," Installation\nThe LoDi-ProgrammerFX is available for the most common operating systems.\nClick the picture of your operating system to go to the download for it.\nWindows \nmacOS \nLinux \n Installation — Linux\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nVisit our forum, where experienced users will be glad to help you further.\ninfo@lokstoredigital.de","sw-lodi-booster-10a","software/lodi-rektor/lodi-booster-10a","LoDi-Booster 10A (+)","The [LoDi-Booster 10A](docs:lodi-booster-10a) and the [LoDi-Booster 10A+](docs:lodi-booster-10a-plus) convert the control signal coming from the command station over the LoDi bus into the track voltage. The LoDi-Booster has the following features:",[319,1118,1119,944,1120,1121],"Settings and firmware update\nThe LoDi-Booster 10A and the LoDi-Booster 10A+ convert the control signal coming from the command station over the LoDi bus into the track voltage. The LoDi-Booster has the following features:\na single-channel booster adjustable output current RailCom support (generating the RailCom cutout) built-in current, voltage and temperature measurement\nThe LoDi-Booster 10A dialogue tries to present all these properties clearly. All areas can be folded open and closed. That way only the information really needed at the moment is shown.\nThe dialogue is divided up as follows:\nBooster settings: sets the settings stored in the LoDi-Booster. Booster status: shows the current booster status and allows the booster channels to be switched on and off. Booster current: measures the current draw on both booster channels. Booster voltage: measures the track voltage of both booster channels. Booster temperature: shows the temperature inside the device.\n LoDi-Booster 10A (+) — Settings and firmware update\n1. Changing the LoDi-Booster 10A's LoDi bus address\nAs delivered, the LoDi-Booster 10A is set to address 1, as mentioned above. That can stay as it is and only has to be changed if you want to add another LoDi-Booster to the system.\n LoDi-Booster 10A (+) — Changing the LoDi-Booster 10A's LoDi bus address\nNow press the Prog. button (4) on the LoDi-Booster for 3 seconds. The LoDi-Booster now jumps into addressing mode. It signals this through the two alternately flashing LEDs (5).\n LoDi-Booster 10A (+) — Changing the LoDi-Booster 10A's LoDi bus address\nYou can now press the \"Anwenden\" button (6) in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\nThe TrainSpeed stops flashing immediately and has its new address set from now on.\n LoDi-Booster 10A (+) — Changing the LoDi-Booster 10A's LoDi bus address\nThe LoDi-Booster has now saved the new address and is shown on the bus straight away.\n2. The LoDi-Booster 10A(+) settings\n LoDi-Booster 10A (+) — The LoDi-Booster 10A(+) settings\nThe LoDi-Booster 10A(+) stores its settings in internal memory.\nAll settings are applied and stored in the booster by pressing the \"Anwenden\" button.\nThis dialogue offers the following settings:\nSwitch-on delay: the switch-on delay gives the waiting time before the track voltage is switched back on after a short circuit. Max current: here the maximum current limit can be set with a slider in 100 mA steps. (LoDi-Booster 10A from version 1.04, LoDi-Booster 10A+ from version 1.03.) Switch on automatically: if this option is set, the booster automatically switches the track voltage back on after a short circuit, observing the waiting time defined in \"switch-on delay\". If this option is not set, the booster has to be switched back on manually, either from the software or by pressing the button on the booster. RailCom support: if this option is set, the booster generates a RailCom cutout after every DCC packet. That is necessary in order to receive the data sent by the decoders in the LoDi-8-GBM feedback modules. Only set this option if you are using DCC or mfx® with RailCom.\n3. Status and displays\n LoDi-Booster 10A (+) — Status and displays\nFrom LoDi-ProgrammerFX version 5.2025 onwards, the boosters' status is shown directly in the status bar at the top. That does away with folding further tabs open, and the current status of active boosters is immediately visible.\nThe following channel states are possible:\nOn: the channel is switched on. If a track signal is present, the track voltage is switched through. Off: the channel is switched off. No track voltage is present. Short circuit: the channel reports a short circuit. The track voltage is switched off in this state.\nIn further fields, which can be folded open or closed at the bottom of the LoDi-ProgrammerFX, the booster can show current, voltage and, from firmware version 2.00 onwards, the device's temperature.\n LoDi-Booster 10A (+) — Status and displays\nThis area shows the current draw of the two booster channels over time.\n LoDi-Booster 10A (+) — Status and displays\nThis area shows the voltage of the two booster channels over time.\n LoDi-Booster 10A (+) — Status and displays\nThis area shows the temperature of the booster over time near the output stage. If the value rises, the fan output adapts.\n4. Updating the LoDi-Booster 10A(+) firmware\nThe LoDi-Booster 10A(+) can be updated through the LoDi-Rektor.\nFrom the LoDi-ProgrammerFX 2025.01 onwards there is an online updater for the devices' firmware. We show you here how to install firmware.\n LoDi-Booster 10A (+) — Updating the LoDi-Booster 10A(+) firmware\n LoDi-Booster 10A (+) — Updating the LoDi-Booster 10A(+) firmware\nTo upgrade the firmware on the LoDi-Booster 10A (+), you first have to put the device into bootloader mode.\nTo do that, first pull the power cable out of the LoDi-Booster 10A. Or switch off the power supply on your LoDi-Booster 10+.\n LoDi-Booster 10A (+) — Updating the LoDi-Booster 10A(+) firmware\nTo activate the bootloader in the LoDi-Booster 10A (+), you have to hold the Prog. button at the back of the booster down and plug the power connector back into the LoDi-Booster 10A+ at the same time, or switch the power supply back on.\nOnce the power cable is plugged in you can let go of the button.\n LoDi-Booster 10A (+) — Updating the LoDi-Booster 10A(+) firmware\nThe LoDi-Booster 10A+ is now in bootloader mode. It signals this by all the LEDs on the device glowing red.\nOnly the LED at the LoDi bus works as usual and signals an active bus by flickering.\n(Only if the LoDi-Rektor is connected and active.)\nThe booster is now shown in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX, but all the displays are now greyed out; that is how the LoDi-ProgrammerFX signals that the LoDi-Booster 10A+ is in bootloader mode.\nApart from the firmware update, nothing further is possible now.\nAs mentioned already, the LoDi-ProgrammerFX has offered an online update function since version 2025.01. It lets the devices' current versions be shown right in the dialogue and installed immediately.\n LoDi-Booster 10A (+) — Updating the LoDi-Booster 10A(+) firmware\n LoDi-Booster 10A (+) — Updating the LoDi-Booster 10A(+) firmware\nNow click the LoDi-Booster that is in the bootloader. A new menu item now appears in the bar at the top: \"Online-Update\".\nThe update dialogue opens and the server automatically searches for available updates.\nThen select the newest version shown (3) and click Install update (4). In the next dialogue the currently installed version and the version to be installed are shown to you once more.\nAfter opening it, the query window appears straight away, in which the current firmware is compared with the firmware to be loaded.\n LoDi-Booster 10A (+) — Updating the LoDi-Booster 10A(+) firmware\nNow you still have to confirm the update.\nAfter pressing the OK button, a progress bar now runs at the bottom right of the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\n LoDi-Booster 10A (+) — Updating the LoDi-Booster 10A(+) firmware\nThe LoDi-Booster reboots once after the update and then reports back on the LoDi bus as usual straight away. A quick check shows that the current firmware is now installed.\n LoDi-Booster 10A (+) — Updating the LoDi-Booster 10A(+) firmware\n5. Connecting and setting up the LoDi-Booster 10A or 10A+\nClick here to reach the LoDi-Booster hardware description\n LoDi-Booster 10A (+) — Connecting and setting up the LoDi-Booster 10A or 10A+\n LoDi-Booster 10A (+) — Connecting and setting up the LoDi-Booster 10A or 10A+\nAny questions still open?\nWould you simply like to ask us in person?\nOr go to our forum, where experienced users are glad to help you further.\ninfo@lokstoredigital.de","1. Changing the LoDi-Booster 10A's LoDi bus address","2. The LoDi-Booster 10A(+) settings","4. Updating the LoDi-Booster 10A(+) firmware","5. Connecting and setting up the LoDi-Booster 10A or 10A+","sw-lodi-rm-16","software/lodi-s88-commander/lodi-rm-16","The [LoDi-RM-16+ v2](docs:lodi-rm-16) is a three-rail occupancy detector which can however also be used for reed contacts, Hall sensors or as button actions. The module and each of the 16 channels can be given a name of up to 16 characters.",[1127,1128,1129,412,1130],"Setting up in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nThe LoDi-RM-16+ v2 is a three-rail occupancy detector which can however also be used for reed contacts, Hall sensors or as button actions. The module and each of the 16 channels can be given a name of up to 16 characters.\nSince the LoDi-RM-16+ (v2) has its own S88.2 address, it can be moved around the S88.2 bus without the addressing changing.\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — Setting up in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nThe LoDi-RM-16+ (v2) dialogue consists of the following parts:\nthe schematic view of the module with all its channels (top) the settings for the module or the channel (bottom)\n1. Assigning an address\nOn the S88.2 bus, the feedback and track occupancy detectors have to be addressed.\nTo do that, first press the Prog. button (1) on the feedback module briefly.\nThe display (2) then flashes. If you now see two dashes flashing in the display, no address has been programmed into the module yet. Otherwise the address already stored in the module flashes.\nThe module leaves programming mode again after 60 seconds.\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — Assigning an address\nThe LoDi-Programmer shows as soon as a module is in programming mode.\nThe module with an active Prog. button is now red. If the module does not have an address yet, that is shown as well.\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — Assigning an address\nNow select an address, give the module a name of its own — such as Hauptbahnhof, or whatever the module is installed for — and then press Anwenden.\nThe module has now left programming mode and saved the address.\n2. The module overview and settings in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nIn the module view, the 16 channels of the LoDi-RM-16+ (v2) are shown side by side from left to right. Channel 1 is on the left and channel 16 on the right.\nEach channel consists of the S88 addressing shown at the top and the channel name shown below it.\nThe channel occupancy message is shown by colour in the S88 addressing field. Grey means unoccupied, blue means occupied.\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — The module overview and settings in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nThe module settings are activated by clicking the module name above the module view.\nThe module's name can be changed here.\nThe module name can be up to 16 characters long. It is saved on the LoDi-RM-16+ (v2) by clicking the \"Anwenden\" button.\nThe module name can also be changed in the device tree.\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — The module overview and settings in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nThe channel settings are called up by clicking a channel. The selected channel is highlighted in red.\nThe channel name can be changed. It may be 16 characters long.\nThe setting is saved on the LoDi-RM-16+ (v2) by clicking the \"Anwenden\" button.\n3. Firmware update\nAll S88.2-capable modules connected to the LoDi-S88-Commander (LX) can be updated directly over the bus. The update procedure is identical to that for the LoDi interfaces. (All LoDi feedback modules from 2021 onwards.)\nIn the LoDi-ProgrammerFX's S88 bus overview, the module's firmware version is shown on the right-hand side. If no number appears here, the module cannot be updated; that affects modules from before 2020.\nThe firmware can however also be queried directly in the module view.\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — Firmware update\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — Firmware update\nOn the module shown here, an update is now indicated. Clicking the right-hand button starts a further query which you now have to confirm.\nOnce the update is confirmed, the module is put into the bootloader and the update is transferred. At the bottom of the LoDi-ProgrammerFX's footer you see a transfer bar. The module's display also shows the packets received; a number counts up. Once the LoDi-ProgrammerFX has transferred the update, the module is restarted and is now online with the new version.\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — Firmware update\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — Firmware update\nShould the update go wrong...\nDo not worry: the module can always be put back into the bootloader state and flashed again. If an update has failed, you can repeat it straight away; the module has to be in bootloader mode for that.\nThe module shows you \"B0\" for bootloader in the two-digit display.\nThe LoDi-ProgrammerFX also has to detect the module in the bootloader. That is then visible in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX as well.\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — Firmware update\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — Firmware update\nThe module can also be put into bootloader mode by hand, though. Proceed as follows:\nDisconnect the patch cable to the LoDi-S88-Commander (LX). At the front right of the LoDi-RM16+ there is the Prog. button (1), which is also used to assign the module's address. Hold this button down and plug the cable back in. You can let go of the button again straight after plugging in.\nThe display should now show B0. From there the module can be shown in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX again and, if an address is assigned, current firmware can be installed.\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — Firmware update\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — Firmware update\n4. Connecting and setting up the LoDi-RM-16+ v2\nClick here to reach the LoDi-RM-16+ v2 hardware description.\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — Connecting and setting up the LoDi-RM-16+ v2\n LoDi-RM-16+ v2 — Connecting and setting up the LoDi-RM-16+ v2\nAny questions still open?\nWould you simply like to ask us in person?\nOr go to our forum, where experienced users are glad to help you further.\ninfo@lokstoredigital.de","Setting up in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX","1. Assigning an address","2. The module overview and settings in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX","4. Connecting and setting up the LoDi-RM-16+ v2","sw-lodi-operatoren","software/lodi-shift-commander/lodi-operators","LoDi operators","LoDi operators drive actuators such as turnouts, signals, lamps or LEDs. Depending on the design, they have 8 to 32 outputs. In the LoDi-ProgrammerFX all normal LoDi operators are operated through the same interface. Special operators such as the [LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED](docs:sw-lodi-light-o…",[1137,1138,1139,1140,1141,1142,1143],"LoDi operators drive actuators such as turnouts, signals, lamps or LEDs. Depending on the design, they have 8 to 32 outputs. In the LoDi-ProgrammerFX all normal LoDi operators are operated through the same interface. Special operators such as the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED are an exception.\nNormal LoDi operators are, for instance:\nthe LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC (8 outputs) the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-DC (8 outputs) the LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (16 outputs)\n LoDi operators\nThe LoDi operator dialogue consists of the following parts:\nthe schematic view of the module with all its outputs and the commands (top left) the settings for the module or the command (bottom left) the selection area for commands (right)\nThe view of the module\nThe outputs are numbered identically to the printing on the LoDi operator module. What the output is used for, as well as its activity, is shown by colour. On turnout commands, red is always straight and green diverging. On signals and lighting effects the lamp's corresponding colour is shown. A dark colour means the output is off, a light one that the output is on. Unused outputs are shown in light grey.\nBelow the output you see the command placed on it. A command can occupy several consecutive outputs. The address shown in the command matters to the model railway control software: it is what the command is driven through.\nThe command's current state is shown below that as a button. Every command can have several possible states. The command's state can be changed by the model railway control software or directly by clicking the button. Another way of changing the state is the command's context menu.\nModule settings\n LoDi operators — Module settings\nThe settings for a LoDi operator module are activated by clicking the name box above the module's outputs.\nModule name: the module name can be 8 characters long. It can also be edited from the device tree.\nThe module name setting is applied by clicking the \"Anwenden\" button.\nClicking the \"Alle Kommandos löschen\" button deletes all the commands on the module.\nThe selection area for commands\n LoDi operators — The selection area for commands\nThe command selection area lists all the available commands. The commands are divided into the categories turnouts, signals and lamps.\nEvery command is listed with its name, the number of states and the number of outputs it occupies.\nFor even more information about a command, you can leave the mouse over a command for a while. A tooltip appears with all the command's states.\nTo add a command to the module, it can be dragged and dropped onto a free area in the module.\nCreating commands\nCommands can be created on a LoDi operator module in two ways:\n LoDi operators — Creating commands\nDrag and drop: take the command from the selection area on the right and drag it onto a free area in the module. When the mouse is over a suitable slot in the module, that slot is highlighted. Drop the command by releasing the mouse button. The command is now placed on the module and is active immediately.\n LoDi operators — Creating commands\nContext menu: open the context menu over a free area of the LoDi operator module. Then select the command from the corresponding category in the context menu. The command is created automatically and is active immediately.\nMoving commands\n LoDi operators — Moving commands\nCommands can be moved around within a LoDi operator module. That is done by drag and drop.\nTo do that, click an existing command and move the mouse. A free slot is highlighted automatically as the mouse passes over it. Now release the mouse button. The command is moved to the new position if possible.\nDeleting commands\nCommands can be deleted in two ways:\n LoDi operators — Deleting commands\nDrag and drop: take the command to be deleted with the mouse and drop it over the wastebasket symbol at the bottom right. The command is deleted from the module. The outputs it previously occupied are inactive.\n LoDi operators — Deleting commands\nContext menu: open a command's context menu and select the menu item \"Löschen\". The command is deleted from the module. The outputs it previously occupied are inactive.\nCommand settings\n LoDi operators — Command settings\nThere are further settings for every command. They are activated by clicking the command in the LoDi operator module.\nThe settings area is present for every command. There are the following settings:\nCommand type: the kind of command can be changed here. Only commands for which enough free outputs are available are shown. That lets you turn a DB departure signal into an entry signal, for instance. Name: every command can be given a name of its own, which may also be shown in the model railway control software. The name may be 16 characters long. Address: the command's address can be changed here. Only free addresses are offered. The address is assigned automatically when the command is created. Switching time: here either the global switching time set in the LoDi-Shift-Commander or a time of your own can be used. On many commands the switching time affects how long the sequence takes.\nAll settings are applied and become active immediately by pressing the \"Anwenden\" button.\nThe outputs area is only shown for the light bus.\nUse the global dimming value: selects between the global dimming value setting made in the LoDi-Shift-Commander and the individual, per-channel setting. Every output can have its own maximum dimming value. That lets differences in brightness between lamps be evened out, or created deliberately.\n LoDi operators — Command settings\nAny questions still open?\nWould you simply like to ask us in person?\nOr go to our forum, where experienced users are glad to help you further.\ninfo@lokstoredigital.de","The view of the module","Module settings","The selection area for commands","Creating commands","Moving commands","Deleting commands","Command settings","lodi-dmx-interface","hardware/room-lighting/lodi-dmx-interface","The bridge between the LoDi system and the DMX world: drives room lighting, effects and scenes over the DMX bus.",[1149,1150,1151,1152,1153,1154,624,1155,1156]," hardware-raumlicht-lodi-dmx-interface-01-f909bc.png\nStraight to the shop\nDMX is an international stage standard; a great many devices — LED walls, moving heads, dimmer packs, fog machines and much more — are driven over DMX. Since we regularly have to drive DMX devices in customers' layouts too, we came up with a simple network DMX interface that is ArtNet compliant and can therefore be used well beyond the model railway.\nWhat the LoDi-DMX-Interface does\nArtNet compliant DMX interface 512 DMX channels Wi-Fi capable A modern room lighting control with a scheduler is built into the LoDi-ProgrammerFX for the LoDi-DMX-Interface. A modern network interface, and therefore driverless operation!!!\n1. The LoDi-DMX-Interface and its connections\n hardware-raumlicht-lodi-dmx-interface-02-af1934.png\nAbout the connections on the\nLoDi-DMX-Interface:\n(1)Network interface: this is where you connect your network switch or router to the device. (2) DMX512 Out: the DMX devices are connected here. 512 DMX channels are available.\n(3) USB-C interface: don't worry, no USB is connected to the PC here — as mentioned above we work with driverless interfaces only. The USB-C connector merely supplies the LoDi-DMX-Interface with 5 volts.\n2. LEDs and button on the LoDi-DMX-Interface\n hardware-raumlicht-lodi-dmx-interface-03-b98708.png\nThe LoDi-Shift-Commander has several LEDs and a button to help you read the state of the device and understand faults more quickly.\n(1): The \"ON\" LED blinks as soon as the device has power and lights steadily as soon as a client has connected to it. The red \"DMX\" LED blinks whenever the bus sends a change. (2) Prog. IP button and LED: this button is used when you want to change the IP address of your LoDi-Rektor. There is more on this in the description of the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\n3. Connecting the power\n hardware-raumlicht-lodi-dmx-interface-04-d656d3.png\nWe ship the LoDi-DMX-Interface with a high-quality USB power supply. You are of course free to use your own, but it should be able to deliver at least 1 amp.\n4. The LoDi-DMX-Interface and the network connection\n hardware-raumlicht-lodi-dmx-interface-05-1a28ec.png\nAll of our devices work with a modern network interface.\nThat gives you plenty of advantages in handling them. Using this network interface you can integrate several interfaces into your system without any trouble.\nThere are almost no limits to your imagination here.\nThis technology makes large and very large layouts possible, but small layouts benefit from it too.\nThanks to network technology it is no longer a problem to control your layout from your laptop or tablet. Today's Wi-Fi routers are perfectly capable of carrying those connections fast enough.\nThere is little to watch out for when adding the LoDi interface to your network.\nIt is always easier, though, to add the LoDi interface to an existing network than to install another network card in the computer.\nIf you need help with the integration you are welcome to get in touch,\nor turn to our users in the forum, who will gladly help you further.\nAs you can see in the picture above, we pay close attention to the colour coding of the network cables. Yellow is the international standard for computer networks.\nYou are of course welcome to use other colours; we stick to these standards.\nIn the example shown you can see the computer connected to a switch or router.\nYou can of course also connect the computer or the LoDi-DMX-Interface over Wi-Fi.\nThe LoDi-DMX-Interface can also be connected directly to the switch or router.\nThe cable running off to the left could be your internet line or other devices connected to your network.\nIf the ports on your switch or router are not enough, you can simply attach another switch to the existing one. The link channels of the switches route the data to the right device automatically; all you have to do is plug the cables in. Please make sure not to build a loop, though — a loop is effectively a circle, and it can bring your network to a standstill.\nOnce the LoDi interface is connected correctly, the next step is configuring the network address\n(the so-called IP address) with our LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\n5. Connecting to the DMX bus\nWe use a standard patch socket on the LoDi-DMX-Interface, since many DMX devices already have RJ45 patch sockets. Should your DMX device have an XLR connector, you can order the adapters you need directly from us.\n hardware-raumlicht-lodi-dmx-interface-06-b41b5e.png\n hardware-raumlicht-lodi-dmx-interface-07-69c913.png\nThe devices are chained one after another with a patch cable or an XLR cable. DMX splitters available on the market can happily be used with a LoDi-DMX-Interface.\n512 DMX channels are available to you. Every device on the bus uses a different number of channels: a moving head needs 13, for instance, while an LED controller needs only 3. Take the number of channels required from the manual of your DMX device.\n hardware-raumlicht-lodi-dmx-interface-08-062c20.png\n hardware-raumlicht-lodi-dmx-interface-09-39a613.png\nWith DMX the devices are chained into the bus one behind the other. The addresses are set on the devices themselves, usually with a bank of DIP switches or digitally on a display.\nXLR connectors come in 5-pin and 3-pin versions. In most cases the 3-pin XLR connector is the one in use. The key to the numbers is in the table above.\nHere you see an XLR plug and socket.\nDMX uses only 2 conductors — Data + and Data − — plus ground (the shield). The DMX standard also has Aux Data− and Aux Data+, but we do not use those in our LoDi-DMX-Interface.\n hardware-raumlicht-lodi-dmx-interface-10-d0593b.png\n hardware-raumlicht-lodi-dmx-interface-11-09d622.png\n6. Technical data\nDimensions:\nLength 8.9 cm\nWidth 10 cm\nHeight 3.5 cm\nWeight:\n80 Gramm\nThe USB-C connector can be supplied from any common USB-C cable or power supply.\nThe maximum load of the USB power supply may be up to 3 amps.\n7. Setting the LoDi-DMX-Interface up in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nThis way to setting up the IP address of the LoDi-DMX-Interface\nLoDi-Shift-Commander \n8. Download the LoDi-DMX-Interface as a PDF\nLoDi-DMX-Interface Adobe Acrobat document, 1.2 MB\n hardware-raumlicht-lodi-dmx-interface-14-737378.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","What the LoDi-DMX-Interface does","1. The LoDi-DMX-Interface and its connections","2. LEDs and button on the LoDi-DMX-Interface","3. Connecting the power","4. The LoDi-DMX-Interface and the network connection","5. Connecting to the DMX bus","7. Setting the LoDi-DMX-Interface up in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX","8. Download the LoDi-DMX-Interface as a PDF","lodi-motor-wib-ice2m","hardware/lighting/lodi-wib-ice-m/ice-2","ICE 2 with power car or cab car","Step by step: converting an ICE 2 — with two power cars or with a cab car — to the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M.",[1163,1164,1165,1166,348]," hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-01-a0ddf9.jpg\nStraight to the shop\nThere are several ICE 2 variants: digital and Delta.\nIn principle all of them can be converted and brought up to modern technology. In this example we want to show you the ICE 2 with 1 motorised car and 1 cab car in a set with 2 coaches.\nConverting to our LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M gives you the following advantages:\n21-pin MTC interface in the motorised and the unpowered power car No earth springs in the coaches at all (which greatly improves how freely the coaches and the whole train roll) Absolutely flicker-free thanks to reliable transfer through the current-carrying coupling. Speaker preparation right on the board Easy to convert\nWe are often asked whether to go with or without pickup changeover.\nLet us explain briefly:\nIf you run a computer-controlled layout, in most cases you have no power interruptions at signals. If that is the case you do not need pickup changeover. We connect the pickups front to back, which has the advantage that the train draws current from twice as many points. If you still have signals installed that affect the train, you have to use the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M-S. There the pickup has to be switched over from the front one to the rear one.\nIn our current example we do not use pickup changeover.\n1. The motorised power car\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-02-f9648e.jpg\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-03-8ed63c.jpg\nFirst we pull the cover off the coupling.\nOn the underside of the power car there is a slotted screw, which also has to be removed. The body of the power car can then simply be lifted off.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-04-28bbe4.png\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-05-a1ad7e.jpg\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-06-2e62f4.png\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-07-75a85e.jpg\nOnce you have taken the top off, you should first check the condition of the motor. A 5-pole high-performance motor should be fitted in any case. In most cases it already is.\nThere are 3 capacitors on the motor in total. Two of them should be removed. Modern decoders do not support them and they otherwise interfere with motor control.\nYou can now unsolder the old board and take it out of the housing along with the 2 mounting screws.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-08-c4ba8e.png\nNow we fit the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M and screw it down the same way the original board was.\nNow solder the cables from your original train back on as follows: left-hand side\nPickup = black cable RT coupling = red cable GE coupling = yellow cable\nRight-hand side\nGround = brown Aux 5 = amplified output for cab lighting Motor L = green Motor R = blue VCC = orange L_RT = yellow L_WS = grey\nCareful: on the ICE 2 power car the lighting board may be switched over +, whereas our board switches −. We will shortly be offering a conversion kit for this.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-11-32d8df.png\nFor our conversion we use an ESU LokPilot V5 MKL. You can use any 21-pin decoder, though — it only needs amplified outputs on F1 to F4. Aux 5 can be a logic output.\nHere is the breakdown of the functions of the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M:\nLight front = head light white\nLight rear = head light red\nAux 1 = pickup changeover, power car 1\nAux 2 = pickup changeover, power car 2\nAux 3 = high beam (if fitted)\nAux 4 = coach lighting\nAux 5 = cab lighting\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-12-b6c9b4.png\nFrom motor board version 1.50 onwards there are 2 solder jumpers. They can be used if you are not using pickup changeover. With these jumpers the interior lighting of the coaches is switched through the coupling. They exist so that the decoder's Aux 1 function output can be used, which means no loco decoder with amplified Aux 3 and Aux 4 is required (without MKL).\nIf the jumper is set at SJ1, switching happens over Aux 4; at SJ2 it is Aux 1.\nCAUTION!!!\nOnly ever one jumper may be set. If both solder bridges are set, it could destroy the decoder!\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-13-937645.png\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-14-069dd6.png\nShould you want to fit a sound decoder in one power car or even in both, we have left room for a speaker on the board. You can also connect it to separate solder pads.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-15-c4f955.jpg\n2. The unpowered power car\nIn principle this train also runs excellently with 2 motors — that lets us pull train lengths of up to 14 coaches. If it is to stay a short train, though, one motor in the whole train is enough in most cases. Nor does the power car without a motor have to be converted. But if you would like to fit front LED lighting here as well, you can use the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M here too.\nIn that case we can do without the pickup changeover (-S).\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-16-751fda.png\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-17-b6794c.jpg\nLet us start by opening the power car without a motor: again pull the cover off the coupling and remove the screw on the lower part of the power car.\nNow remove the screws of the original board straight away and unsolder the cables.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-18-038dca.png\nIn our example the power car without a motor is also fitted with the LoDi-WiB-ICE1, so that the head lights are LEDs here as well.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-19-9768ed.jpg\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-20-2997cb.jpg\nNow screw the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M into the power car. Connect the cables as follows:\nLeft pickup = black cable Left RT coupling = red cable Left GE coupling = yellow cable Right brown = ground Aux 5 = connection for cab lighting Orange = VCC Grey = L_WS Yellow = L_RT\nThe old changeover for the lighting can be removed; it is no longer needed.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-21-01bd41.png\nFor our conversion we use an ESU LokPilot FX V5. You can use any 21-pin function decoder, though — it only needs amplified outputs on F1 to F4. Aux 5 can be a logic output; we use it to switch the cab lighting and it is amplified on the board.\nHere is the breakdown of the functions of the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M:\nLight front = head light white\nLight rear = head light red\nAux 3 = high beam (if fitted)\nAux 4 = coach lighting\nAux 5 = cab lighting\n3. The head lights on the ICE 2\nThere were a number of different head light assemblies across the various models. That is why we gave the motor board a small update: from motor car board version 1.50 onwards the head lights can also be switched over +. As a rule the LEDs are switched over −.\nThe LoDi-ICE2 front lighting board is available in two versions, positive or negative switching, which makes it fully compatible with your old decoder should you only want to replace the lighting in the power cars.\nThe board has insulation around the middle LEDs, which largely prevents the red LEDs from shining through from below. In addition the light guide can be protected against shine-through with black insulating tape on top.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-22-0a0617.jpg\nThe LoDi-ICE2 Front is fixed with double-sided tape on the back. Simply remove the old board, pull the protective film off the tape and stick the board into your ICE 2. You can also use the board for the cab car — there, however, the positive switching LoDi-ICE2 Front is mandatory.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-23-6def0c.png\nThe LoDi-ICE2 Front has 5 solder pads to which the cables can be soldered.\nIt can switch the upper white LED separately, which would make a high beam at the bottom possible, for example.\nIt also has an upper red LED, which can be used to simulate a warning light in case of a fault, for instance.\nIn this first wiring example you see a positive switching LoDi-ICE2 Front. In this diagram the orange cable carries − (that is, GND), while the red and the white cable are switched over +.\nThe grey cable is connected through pads 3 and 4, so that all white LEDs light when running forwards.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-24-d0d69e.png\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-25-b7dfea.png\nHere is the example for high beam and warning light.\nThe grey cable now goes only to pad 3, which drives the lower white LEDs. The white LED on pad 4 at the top can now be driven separately over another Aux channel. And over pad 5, again with another AUX channel, the red LED at the top can be programmed in the decoder as a fault light.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-26-ee0100.png\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-27-916399.png\nThe LoDi-ICE2 Front is also available as a negative switching variant. The positive board is red, the negative one green.\nThe colours here follow the DCC standard.\nPad 1 U+ = common return\nPad 2 yellow = red, bottom\nPad 3 white = white LED, bottom\nPad 4 green = white LED, top\nPad 5 purple = red LED, top\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-28-8d03a7.png\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-29-ee4e42.png\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-30-275cca.jpg\n4. The ICE 2 cab car\nThere are several ICE 2 train sets with a cab car. Unfortunately the normal LoDi-WiB ICE-M does not fit in them, so we developed a dedicated board for the ICE 2 cab car. It installs just as quickly and easily as the LoDi-WiB ICE-M.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-31-0d8d67.jpg\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-32-c94768.jpg\nStart by pulling the bellows off the coupling end.\nThe upper shell of the coach can be eased apart a little and then pulled off, just as with an ordinary compartment coach.\nUnsolder the cables from the old board and take it out of the coach.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-33-15df4d.png\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-34-e43d58.jpg\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-35-85cfbe.jpg\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-36-1fc7e4.jpg\nNext we have to adapt the head lighting for the new board: the trailing switch on the wheelset is removed completely, and the two cables that ran downwards and were attached to it are pulled up through.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-37-e22f1e.png\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-38-7aa710.jpg\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-39-3bfe6d.jpg\nAt the coupling end, thread the two cables coming up from the coupling through the hole in the board and solder them on according to the labelling.\nThen solder the lighting cables on the front end to the board according to the labelling as well.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-40-615841.png\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-41-1a27d7.jpg\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-42-29824b.png\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-43-4eab5d.jpg\nWe built door and gangway lighting into the LoDi-WiB ICE2 St, but it has to be activated with a solder bridge. You will find the solder bridge on the coupling side, marked with the green arrow in the picture.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-44-b384c0.png\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-45-bb168b.png\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-46-57a937.jpg\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-47-7d25bb.jpg\nA buffer capacitor can optionally be fitted to the LoDi-WiB ICE2 St. There are 2 ways to connect it: C2 as SMD or wired, and C4 wired.\nElectrolytic capacitors from 25 volts and 220 µF upwards can be used.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-48-38a80f.png\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-49-c1a2fa.jpg\nNow plug the function decoder of your choice onto the 21-pin MTC interface. For our train we use an ESU LokPilot FX 4 or 5 here, but you can use decoders from any manufacturer.\nIf your power car is fitted with a LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M, the interior lighting of the cab car has to be switched on the same function.\nHere is the breakdown of the functions of the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M:\nLight front = head light white\nLight rear = head light red\nAux 1 = coach lighting (whole train)\nAux 2 = cab lighting (if fitted)\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-50-2f1671.png\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-51-ce167e.jpg\nNow reassemble the coach: align the board and check that no cables can get trapped against the roof. Then put the roof on and push the bellows back into place.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-52-adaf18.jpg\n5. Technical data\nDimensions of the LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE-M-S:\nLength 180 mm\nWidth 29 mm\nThickness 1.55 mm\nWeight: 18 grams, or 19 grams for the (-S) variant.\nDimensions of the LoDi-WiB ICE2-St:\nLength 220 mm\nWidth 21 mm\nThickness 1.55 mm\nWeight: 17 grams\nThe LoDi-Motor ICE-M(-S) has a standard 21-pin MTC interface and can be fitted with any common loco or function decoder with a 21-pin interface. Do make sure to use a decoder with amplified Aux 3 and 4 if you are using the version with pickup changeover.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice2m-53-83f45a.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","1. The motorised power car","2. The unpowered power car","3. The head lights on the ICE 2","4. The ICE 2 cab car","sw-installation-macos","software/installation/macos","macOS","Installing and updating the LoDi-ProgrammerFX on macOS.",[956,957,958],"Here we describe in a few short steps how to install, update and start the LoDi-ProgrammerFX on your Mac.\nFrom version 2026.04 onwards we ship a Java runtime with the Mac version.\n1. Download and installation\nFirst install the latest version of Java, then click the \"Download LoDi-Start.dmg\" button to download the current version of the installer.\nDownload LoDi-Installer.dmg\n software-installation-macos-01-ff68d6.png\n software-installation-macos-02-c20d35.png\nAfter the download, open the file LoDi-Start.dmg; the DMG opens.\n software-installation-macos-03-057984.png\n software-installation-macos-04-fef331.png\nNow simply drag the LoDi-Start.app into your Applications folder, as shown by the arrow.\n2. Starting and updating\nYou can now start LoDi-Start.app from Launchpad or Spotlight, or drag the icon into the Dock.\nWhen you select and click the LoDi-Start icon, the update program starts. On every start it checks whether a new version of the Programmer or new firmware for one or more components of the LoDi system is available, and downloads it automatically.\n software-installation-macos-05-ee7d26.png\n software-installation-macos-06-d8d20b.png\n software-installation-macos-07-b61fb9.png\nOn macOS Sequoia 15.x and newer, the \"LoDi-Start\" app has to be allowed under \"Privacy & Security\".\nAfter the first start, please go to System Settings and scroll to Privacy & Security. There you will now find an entry: \"LoDi-Start was blocked to protect your Mac.\" Behind it there is an \"Open Anyway\" button. After pressing Open Anyway, LoDi-Start can be opened.\nThe LoDi-ProgrammerFX itself is then loaded from our server and started.\nYou can have the release notes shown to you directly in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\nAfter that you still have to allow network access, and the LoDi-ProgrammerFX is ready to use.\n software-installation-macos-08-4aa85f.png\n software-installation-macos-09-458263.png\n3. Offline updates\nIn progress…\n software-installation-macos-10-e8856a.png\n software-installation-macos-11-6df00b.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","con-b","lodi-con/lodi-con-b","The LoDi-Con B","The features and controls of the B variant of the LoDi-Con.",[1179]," lodi-con-con-b-01-2490eb.png\nThe LoDi-Con in the battery variant\nThe LoDi-Con in the battery variant ships without batteries; it needs 3 AAA alkaline batteries, or rechargeable NiMH or lithium-ion cells, to work.\nHow to fit them into the LoDi-Con B is explained in the next steps.\n1. Fitting the batteries into the LoDi-Con B\n lodi-con-con-b-02-841d81.jpg\n lodi-con-con-b-03-e21076.jpg\nStart by placing the device face down on a safe surface.\nOn the back of the LoDi-Con B there is a flap over the battery compartment; open it.\nIf the compartment will not come open, an old bank card or something similar will help.\nOnce the lid is open, you will find the two screws inside the compartment that fix it in place. The lid holds perfectly well without them, so judge for yourself whether they need to go in.\n lodi-con-con-b-04-8ae674.png\n lodi-con-con-b-05-97276f.jpg\n lodi-con-con-b-06-108a49.jpg\nNow put the batteries into the LoDi-Con;\n+ and − are marked inside the device.\nWe tested several kinds of battery and rechargeable cell beforehand, and we do not want to keep the results from you. The tests were run with the display at 100% brightness and sleep mode disabled.\nAlkaline batteries last about 5-6 hours in continuous use Rechargeable NiMH cells last between 4-5 hours LiPo AAA cells last 3-4 hours\nYou can now switch the LoDi-Con on with the rotary control, which has to be held for 2 seconds.\n3. Properties of the LoDi-Con B in LoDi-OS (setting the battery type)\nDepending on which batteries or rechargeable cells you use, the LoDi-Con has to know the type in order to show a reliable state of charge.\nYou can change this setting under:\nSettings > Device > Battery type >\nSeveral options are offered there:\nLi-ion NiMH Alkaline\nChoose the type of battery or cell you have fitted.\n lodi-con-con-b-07-97e40f.png\n lodi-con-con-b-08-f6c5fe.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","The LoDi-Con in the battery variant","api-lodi-rektor","api/lodi-rektor","LoDi-Rektor API","The protocol of the command station: driving, switching, programming.",[665,666,667,668,818,1186,1187,1188,1189,1190,1191,1192,1193,1194,1195,1196,1197,1198,1199,1200,1201,1202,1203,1204,1205,1206,1207,1208,1209,1210,1211,1212,1213,1214,1215,1216],"Introduction\nThe commands the LoDi-Rektor understands are listed below. Communication with the device is explained in General API.\nBasic commands\nGetVersion\nThis command returns the device identifier and the FW version of the device.\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x20 0x0F 0x00 .. 0xFF\nPacket type Command Packet number Device type Major Minor Patch\n0x21 0x0F 0x00 .. 0xFF 0x03 \nThe device type is always 0x03 on the LoDi-Rektor.\nThe firmware version is made up of the three parts major, minor and patch. It is shown in the format \"v..\". Example: \"v01.03.01\"\nThe major version only changes when completely new hardware with different characteristics and a different feature set is released.\nThe minor version changes when the API is extended. Individual commands may also become incompatible.\nThe patch version changes for general bug fixes that do not touch the API.\nCloseConnection\nThis command should be sent before the connection is closed.\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x20 0x0C 0x00 .. 0xFF\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x21 0x0C 0x00 .. 0xFF\nDeviceConfigGet\nThis command reads the settings of the LoDi-Rektor.\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x20 0x99 0x00 .. 0xFF\nPacket type Command Packet number Fault reaction StartStop CDE Acc offset Default protocol\n0x21 0x99 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 1 0 .. 1 0 .. 6 0 .. 1 0 .. 3\nThe fault reaction field defines what happens at the CDE connector when a fault occurs.\n0: the fault line on the CDE output is left unchanged 1: the fault is passed through to the CDE output. Boosters connected there switch off.\nThe StartStop field sets the behaviour on start/stop at the LoDi-Rektor. This applies both to the button and to the command over the API.\n0: the states of the boosters do not change. 1: the boosters are switched with the start/stop signal.\nThe CDE entry sets the behaviour of the CDE connector.\n0: the CDE connector is switched off. It is electrically inactive 1: the CDE connector is set to output. The error input is not evaluated. 2: the CDE connector is set to input. The track signal comes in over the CDE connector from another command station. 3: the CDE connector is set to output. The track signal is generated by the LoDi-Rektor. Further boosters can be connected to the CDE connector. 6: the CDE connector is configured as a sniffer. It listens for DCC commands, interprets them and passes them on in the track signal the Rektor generates. This mode is suitable for attaching another command station as a handheld controller.\nThe \"Default protocol\" field defines the protocol to be generated by default while there are no commands yet.\n1 = DCC\n2 = Motorola\n3 = M3 / MFX®\nSetWatchdog\nOnce the watchdog command has been received, the LoDi-Rektor expects it again at least every 2 seconds. If it fails to arrive, the boosters are switched off.\nPacket type Command Packet number Status\n0x20 0x9A 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 1\nThe status field switches watchdog monitoring on or off.\n0: monitoring is switched off. 1: monitoring is switched on.\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x21 0x9A 0x00 .. 0xFF\nGetModules\nThis command reads the whole µCon bus.\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x20 0xA0 0x00 .. 0xFF\nPacket type Command Packet number Count Type0 .. Type63\n0x21 0xA0 0x00 .. 0xFF 64 \nThe 64 type fields are filled in ascending order with every µCon address starting at 0. The values correspond to the types of the devices present.\nStructure of type:\nBit 7: the device is waiting to be assigned a new LoDi bus address. Bit 6: the device is in the bootloader. New firmware can be downloaded. Bits 5..0: device type:\n0: no device at this address 1: µCon-Booster 2: Railspeed 3: LoDi-Booster 4: CDE connector 5: LoDi-TrainSpeed 6: LoDi-Booster 10A 7: LoDi-Booster 10A+ 8: LoDi-DC-Car-Booster 9: LoDi-OpenCar-Booster 10: LoDi-CV-Programmer\nGetModulName\nReads the name of a µCon device on the bus. The names are stored in the LoDi-Rektor against the µCon address.\nPacket type Command Packet number µCon address\n0x20 0xA3 0x00 .. 0xFF 1 .. 63\nµCon address holds the µCon address of the device to be read.\nPacket type Command Packet number Length Character 1 .. Character 16\n0x21 0xA3 0x00 .. 0xFF 0 .. 16 \nThe length field carries the number of characters in the name.\nThe fields character 1 to character 16 hold the characters of the device name.\nGetModuleVersion\nReads the firmware version of a µCon device on the bus. If the device does not support this command, 0 is returned for MajorVersion and MinorVersion.\nPacket type Command Packet number µCon address\n0x20 0x8F 0x00 .. 0xFF 1 .. 63\nµCon address holds the µCon address of the device to be read.\nPacket type Command Packet number µCon address MajorVersion MinorVersion\n0x21 0x8F 0x00 .. 0xFF 1 .. 63 0 .. 255 0 .. 255\nSetModuleName\nSets the name of a µCon device. The names are stored in the LoDi-Rektor against the µCon address.\nPacket type Command Packet number Address Length Character 1 .. Character 16\n0x20 0xA2 0x00 .. 0xFF 1 .. 63 0 .. 16 \nThe address field holds the µCon address of the device.\nThe length field determines the length of the string to be set, and with it the length of the packet.\nThe entries character 1 to character 16 hold the individual characters of the string. The string is not 0-terminated.\n api-lodi-rektor-01-54b11d.png\nBooster commands\nBoosterOn\nThis command switches one or more boosters on.\nPacket type Command Packet number Booster address Status A Status B\n0x20 0x90 0x00 .. 0xFF 1..63, 255 0x00 .. 0x01 0x00 .. 0x01\nThe booster address addresses either a single booster (1 to 63) or every booster (255).\nThe two booster channels A and B are switched with status A and status B:\nStatus X = 0: booster channel off Status X = 1: booster channel on\nThe device answers with an ACK packet when the command has been carried out, or with a NACK packet when, for instance, the booster number given does not exist.\nBoosterStatus\nThis command asks for the status of one booster or of all of them.\nPacket type Command Packet number Booster address New\n0x20 0x91 0,1 .. 0xFF 1..63, 255 0 .. 2\nThe booster address addresses either a single booster (1 to 63) or every booster (255).\nThe new field has the following meanings:\n0: all boosters 1: new boosters\nPacket type Command Packet number Count Booster address Status A Status B\n0x21 0x91 0x00 .. 0xFF 1..63 0 .. 2 0 .. 2\nThe count field returns the number of boosters read; each booster takes three bytes in the packet.\nBooster address is the µCon address of the booster found. Status A and status B hold the status of the two booster channels according to the following pattern:\nStatus X = 0: booster channel off Status X = 1: booster channel on Status X = 2: booster channel short circuit\nBoosterDiagnostics\nThis command asks for the voltage, the current on both channels and the temperature.\nPacket type Command Packet number Booster address\n0x20 0x92 0x00 .. 0xFF 1..63, 255\nThe booster address addresses either a single booster (1 to 63) or every booster (255).\nPacket type Command Packet number Count Booster address Voltage Current A Current B Temp.\n0x21 0x92 0x00 .. 0xFF 1..63 0..255 0..255 0..255 0..255\nThe count field returns the number of boosters read; each booster takes five bytes in the packet.\nBooster address is the µCon address of the booster found.\nThe voltage field holds the output voltage measured at the booster. It is calculated as: voltage17.0/146.0.\nThe fields current A and current B hold the current measured on the respective booster channel. For the LoDi-Booster the current is calculated as: current2.5A/127.0.\nFor the LoDi-Booster 10A the calculation is: current50mA\nFor the LoDi-Booster 20A the calculation is: current100mA\nThe temperature is calculated as: temp-82.0 in degrees Celsius.\nGetBoosterConfig\nThis command reads the settings of a booster.\nPacket type Command Packet number Booster address\n0x20 0x93 0x00 .. 0xFF 1 .. 63\nThe booster address names the booster to be read (1 to 63).\nPacket type Command Packet number Booster address Sensitivity Switch-off time Start mode RailCom Max. current\n0x21 0x93 0x00 .. 0xFF 1 .. 63 10 .. 50 0 .. 15 0 .. 1 0 .. 1 0..255\nThe booster address names the booster whose settings were read.\nThe sensitivity sets how long it takes before a short circuit is triggered. The following settings are possible:\n10: 50 ms \"very fast\" 20: 100 ms \"fast\" 30: 300 ms \"normal\" 40: 500 ms \"slow\" 50: 700 ms \"very slow\"\nThe switch-off time says how long the booster should stay off after a short circuit before switching itself back on. This value is given in seconds.\nThe start mode sets the behaviour after a short circuit.\n0: after a short circuit the booster is switched back on once the time set in sensitivity has elapsed. 1: the booster stays off after a short circuit.\nThe RailCom field says whether the booster generates a RailCom cutout.\n0: the booster generates no RailCom cutout. 1: the booster generates a RailCom cutout.\nThe max. current entry is sent from firmware version 3.3.2 onwards. It gives the permitted maximum current per channel, calculated as: max. current 50mA. If max. current is 0, the booster's own maximum applies.\n api-lodi-rektor-02-d6f67f.png\nTrainSpeed and Railspeed commands\nGetTrainspeedConfig\nReads the settings of a TrainSpeed sensor.\nPacket type Command Packet number Address\n0x20 0x9E 0x00 .. 0xFF 1 .. 63\nThe address field holds the µCon address of the TrainSpeed sensor to be set.\nPacket type Command Packet number Address ScaleHigh ScaleLow Language LenAktiv TolAktiv\n0x21 0x9E 0x00 .. 0xFF 1 .. 63 0 .. 1 0 .. 1 0 .. 1\nThe address field holds the µCon address of the TrainSpeed or Railspeed sensor to be set.\nThe two fields ScaleHigh and ScaleLow give the scale 1:n for the measurement, where n is calculated as: n = (ScaleHigh256 + ScaleLow) / 10.\nThe language field sets the language of the Railspeed sensor's display.\n0: German 1: English\nThe LenAktiv setting enables length measurement.\n0: length measurement inactive 1: length measurement active\nTolAktiv enables tolerance measurement.\n0: tolerance measurement of the speed is inactive 1: tolerance measurement of the speed is active.\nTrainspeedSetConfig\nSets the settings of a connected TrainSpeed sensor.\nPacket type Command Packet number Address ScaleHigh ScaleLow Language LenAktiv TolAktiv\n0x20 0x9B 0x00 .. 0xFF 1 .. 63 0 .. 1 0 .. 1 0 .. 1\nThe address field holds the µCon address of the TrainSpeed sensor to be set.\nThe two fields ScaleHigh and ScaleLow set the scale 1:n for the measurement, where n is calculated as: n = (ScaleHigh256 + ScaleLow) / 10. For scale H0 (n=87), ScaleHigh is therefore set to 3 and ScaleLow to 102.\nThe language field sets the language of the Railspeed sensor's display.\n0: German 1: English\nThe LenAktiv setting enables length measurement.\n0: length measurement inactive 1: length measurement active\nTolAktiv enables tolerance measurement.\n0: tolerance measurement of the speed is inactive 1: tolerance measurement of the speed is active.\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x21 0x9B 0x00 .. 0xFF\nTrainspeedSetText\nChanges the text shown on the Railspeed sensor.\nPacket type Command Packet number Address Type Length Character 1 .. Character 16\n0x20 0x9F 0x00 .. 0xFF 1 .. 63 0 0 .. 16 \nThe address field holds the µCon address of the TrainSpeed sensor.\nThe type field is not used further; 0 should be sent.\nThe length field determines the length of the string to be shown, and with it the length of the packet.\nThe entries character 1 to character 16 hold the individual characters of the string. The string is not 0-terminated.\nTrainspeedSetActive\nEnables and disables the events of TrainSpeed sensors.\nPacket type Command Packet number Address Active\n0x20 0x9C 0x00 .. 0xFF 1 .. 63, 255 0 .. 1\nThe address field holds the µCon address of the TrainSpeed sensor to be enabled. If 255 is given, the events of every TrainSpeed sensor on the bus are enabled or disabled.\nThe active entry says whether the sensor's events are to be enabled or disabled.\n0: disable events 1: enable events\nTrainspeedEvent\nThis event is sent by the device automatically when TrainSpeed events are switched on.\nPacket type Command Packet number Address Type WertHi WertLo Status Valid SensorL SensorR\n0x22 0x9D 0x00 .. 0xFF 1 .. 63 1, 2, 4 0 .. 1 0 .. 1 0 .. 1 0 .. 1\nThe address field holds the µCon address of the TrainSpeed sensor that triggered.\nType determines the kind of event.\n1: speed measurement 2: length measurement 3: tolerance of the speed\nThe entries WertHi and WertLo give the measured value. For speed and tolerance measurement the unit is mm/s, for length measurement mm. If WertHi and WertLo are 0, the measurement is invalid.\nThe measured value is calculated as: value = WertHi256 + WertLo.\nThe status field shows whether the measurement has finished.\n0: measurement finished, ready for the next one 1: measurement still running\nValid says whether the value shown in WertHi and WertLo is valid.\n0: WertLo and WertHi are invalid. 1: WertLo and WertHi are valid.\nThe entries SensorL and SensorR show whether the left and right sensor are currently covered.\n0: sensor clear 1: sensor covered\nThe valid bit can already carry a usable value while a measurement is still running — namely once the locomotive reaches the second sensor. That value may be used, but the locomotive must not be stopped, nor its direction changed, before the status field says the measurement has finished.\n api-lodi-rektor-03-5a02e6.png\nCommand station\nThe command station can generate the DCC, Motorola and M3 / MFX® track signals. It is only active when the CDE connector is either switched off or set to output.\nTrack-Commander\nThe track commands are optional for the LoDi-Rektor and can be set first.\nEvery command is acknowledged (0x21) without returning additional data, unless defined otherwise.\nType Cmd SeqNr\n0x21 0xC0-0xCF 0-255\nActiveTrackProtocols\nThis command sets the active track protocols.\nNote: the default protocol set with the TrackProtocols command is switched on in addition to the protocols enabled by this command.\nType Cmd SeqNr ActiveProtocols\n0x20 0xCA 0-255 Bit 7, 0..2\nActiveProtocols is bit-coded:\nBit 0: DCC active Bit 1: Motorola active Bit 2: mfx active Bit 7: store the setting permanently\nIf bit 7 is set, the choice of protocols is stored permanently and is available again after the next start of the device.\nThe setting 0x85 enables the protocol selection DCC + mfx and stores it permanently.\nIf ActiveProtocols is not given, nothing is changed.\nThe reply packet always returns the protocols currently enabled.\nTrackProtocols\nThis command selects the track protocol and starts track generation if nothing was selected.\nType Cmd SeqNr Default protocol\n0x20 0xCE 0-255 Bit 7, 3..0\nThe \"Default protocol\" field defines the protocol to be generated by default while there are no commands yet.\n1 = DCC\n2 = Motorola\n3 = M3 / MFX®\nIf the highest bit in the field (bit 7) is set, the value is stored permanently and is used after a restart of the Rektor as well (0x81 for DCC, for instance).\nRemoveProtocols\nThis command stops generation of the track protocol. It should be used when an external command station is connected to the CDE input.\nType Cmd SeqNr\n0x20 Decoder commands 0-255\nEvery command starts in the same field as described and is not repeated.\nProtocol\nType Cmd SeqNr AddrL AddrH Sub bit 7..4 / Main bit 3..0\n0x20 0xC0-0xC6 0-255 The \"Protocol\" field has two parts. The first (sub) specifies the protocol, the second (main) the details of that protocol. bit 7..0 bit 15..8\nDCC, Main = 1;\nSub 1 = 14 steps\nSub 2 = 27 steps (reserved, but not supported)\nSub 3 = 28 steps\nSub 4 = 126 steps\nSub 5 = 126 steps extended (new track commands, F29+ among others)\nMotorola, Main = 2;\nSub 1 = 14 steps (the official number of speed steps).\nSub 2 = 27 steps, with 2 packets sent one after another (27A) (reserved, but not supported)\nSub 3 = 27 steps in one packet (27B) for newer MFX locomotives.\nSub 4 = 28 steps in one packet for older MFX locomotives.\nSub 6 = Motorola function decoder (old)\nM3 / MFX®, Main = 3\nNo sub needed, so 0.\nOnce the sub part has been sent, it does not necessarily have to be sent every time. If a 0 is sent, the number of speed steps is not changed; any other value causes a change.\nThe locomotive address is given in the bytes AddrL and AddrH. How it is laid out depends on the protocol in use.\nShort addresses (1-127) are given in AddrL. AddrH has to be zero.\nDCC\nLong addresses (1-9999) are given in AddrL and AddrH.\nMotorola\nWith Motorola, addresses (1-255) can be set in AddrL. AddrH has to stay 0,\nWith M3 / MFX®, addresses (1-16383) can be specified in AddrL and AddrH.\nM3 / MFX®\nLocoRelease\nUsed to take an address out of the refresh cycle when the locomotive is no longer on the track.\nSub / Main\nType Cmd SeqNr AddrL AddrH Sub bit 7..4 / Main bit 3..0\n0x20 0xC0 0-255 LocoSpeed bit 7..0 bit 15..8\nSets the speed step and the direction.\nMask\nType Cmd SeqNr AddrL AddrH Sub bit 7..4 / Main bit 3..0 Speed The mask field only uses the upper bits:\n0x20 0xC1 0-255 LocoSpeed bit 7..0 bit 15..8 bit 7..6 0-255\nBit 7, 1 = forwards, 0 = backwards\nBit 6, 1 = emergency stop (speed has to be 0), 0 for normal speed control.\nThe speed field specifies the speed step (0 = stop, 1 the first step up to the maximum). The step depends on the protocol chosen and its maximum speed step.\nIf the command is sent without parameters, the stored data is read out and the packet is sent back as a reply (with 0x21). The packet can also be sent as an event (0x22) when another client changes the settings.\nLocoFunctions\nSets the functions that are part of the refresh cycle.\nIndex\nType Cmd SeqNr AddrL AddrH Sub bit 7..4 / Main bit 3..0 Data The index field specifies which functions are changed:\n0x20 0xC2 0-255 LocoSpeed bit 7..0 bit 15..8 0-255 0..1\nIndices 0-127 can be set individually (0 = f0, 1 = f1). Data has to be 0 or 1.\nTo set functions more efficiently, function groups can be selected with the upper bit of the index field (bit 7).\nGroup 1: index = 0x81, data = 0 0 0 f0 f4 f3 f2 f1\nDCC (f0-f28)\nGroup 2: index = 0x82, data = 0 0 0 0 f8 f7 f6 f5\nGroup 3: index = 0x83, data = 0 0 0 0 f12 f11 f10 f9\nGroup 4: index = 0x84, data = f20 f19 f18 f17 f16 f15 f14 f13\nGroup 5: index = 0x85, data = f28 f27 f26 f25 f24 f23 f22 f21\nFor DCC 126 extended there are additional groups:\nGroup 6: index = 0x86, data = f36 f35 f34 f33 f32 f31 f30 f29\nGroup 7: index = 0x87, data = f44 f43 f42 f41 f40 f39 f38 f37\nGroup 8: index = 0x88, data = f52 f51 f50 f49 f48 f47 f46 f45\nGroup 9: index = 0x89, data = f60 f59 f58 f57 f56 f55 f54 f53\nGroup 10: index = 0x8a, data = f68 f67 f66 f65 f64 f63 f62 f61\nThese groups are the same original DCC packets that have to be sent.\nMotorola (f0-f4)\nThese functions can be set individually, since each one sends its own packet to the track. Should you want to set every function at once, do the following:\nIndex = 0x81, data = 0 0 0 f0 f4 f3 f2 f1\nFor Motorola function decoders it is more efficient to set index 0x81 with f1-f4: every function is then set at once.\nGroup 1: index = 0x81, data = f7 f6 f5 f4 f3 f2 f1 f0\nM3 / MFX® (f0-f31)\nGroup 2: index = 0x82, data = f15 f14 f13 f12 f11 f10 f9 f8\nGroup 3: index = 0x83, data = f23 f22 f21 f20 f19 f18 f17 f16\nGroup 4: index = 0x84, data = f31 f30 f29 f28 f27 f26 f25 f24\nFunctions f16-f31 can be set individually, since for these an individual packet is sent to the track after all.\nThe command without parameters reads the data out and sends the packet described back as a reply (with 0x21). The packet can also be sent as an event (0x22) when another client changes something.\nLocoBinary\nSets the binary functions (possible in DCC only).\nExtra\nType Cmd SeqNr AddrL AddrH Sub bit 7..4 / Main bit 3..0 The index field specifies which functions are changed: on/off / indexL\n0x20 0xC3 0-255 LocoSpeed bit 7..0 bit 15..8 indexH The extra field is optional and is only used for binary functions starting at index 128.\nThe field can also be set to zero for the same effect.\nAccessoryState\nFor setting the state of any function decoder.\nbasic / extended / aspect\nType Cmd SeqNr AddrL AddrH Sub bit 7..4 / Main bit 3..0 The index field specifies which functions are changed:\n0x20 0xC4 0-255 LocoSpeed bit 7..0 bit 15..8 The address field for accessories specifies the individual address, not the decoder address of a decoder with 4 paired outputs. The address starts at 0 as it does in DCC.\nThere are two settings: a standard and an extended accessory command. The standard command has two states (aspect 0 and 1) and is supported by DCC and Motorola.\nWith the extended command for DCC, 128 aspects can be set (value 0-127).\nIf zero is used for the protocol, the default protocol is used. If M3/MFX® is selected, Motorola is used for switching.\nDepending on how the addresses are interpreted, you should normally add 4 to them to match the general standard (RCN-213). Addresses 0-3 are a kind of shadow address used by a few systems only (Roco, for instance).\nDCC\nIf the highest bit of the data field (bit 7) is set, standard commands are sent. In that case the lowest bit of the data field (bit 0) gives the state and has to be 0 or 1. Whether the output is active is indicated by bit 3. Normally the command is sent twice, to activate and deactivate, since it is usually a pulse.\nMotorola\nSupports basic accessories only, with bit 0 as the state (1 = green, 0 = red) and bit 3 to indicate whether the output is active.\nLocoCV / AccessoryCV\nFor setting the configuration variables of vehicles (0xC5) and of accessories (0xC6).\nAddL\nType Cmd SeqNr AddrL IndexL Sub bit 7..4 / Main bit 3..0 Speed IndexH Besides the protocol and the address already described for vehicles and accessories, there are three additional fields. The index field specifies which functions are changed:\n0x20 0xC5-0xC6 0-255 LocoSpeed bit 7..0 bit 15..8 bit 7, 3..0 bit 7..0 bit 15..8 0-255\nThe mask field holds the action in the lowest nibble (bits 3..0):\n0 = write byte, the data field holds the byte value\n1 = write bit, the data field has the bit value in the upper bit (bit 7) and the index in the other bits.\n2 = read byte, the data field is ignored and should be set to zero.\nFor accessories, bit 7 of the mask field decides whether basic (1) or extended (0) is used.\nAt present configuration variables are supported for DCC only, with indices from 0-1023.\nProgTrackCv\nThis command can only be carried out when a LoDi-CV-Programmer (the programmer from here on) is connected to the LoDi bus. If no programmer is connected, the answer is NACK. Since operations on the programming track take longer, a command may already be running; in that case BUSY is returned. If the programmer accepted the command, ACK is returned.\nFor read operations the answer comes as a ProgResponseEvent. Write operations produce no event.\nValue\nType Cmd SeqNr AddrL CV_H CV_L Operation, bits 8..9\n0x20 0xC8 0-255 1 The CV register to work on is given in the fields CV_L and CV_H. CV_L takes the lower 8 bits, CV_H the upper ones. bit 7..0 0..255\nAll CV registers (1..1024) are addressed directly. Subtract 1 from the CV address, which gives addressing from 0 to 1023 corresponding to CV addresses 1 to 1024.\nFor write operations, bit 7 in CV_H is set.\nThe value field is optional and is only needed for write commands.\nProgTrackCvEvent\nThis event is the answer to CV commands sent to a locomotive or an accessory on the programming track.\nEvent from the device\nType Cmd SeqNr AddrL CV_H CV_L Operation, bits 8..9\n0x22 0xC8 0-255 1 bit 8..9 bit 7..0 0..255\nCV_H and CV_L: see ProgTrackCV (read only)\nValue: the contents of the CV or register addressed.\nLocoID\n0xCC\nType Cmd SeqNr AddrL AddrH Sub bit 7..4 / Main bit 3..0 ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4\n0x20 To set the ID, the UID of the decoder has to be known. 0-255 3 bit 7..0 bit 15..8 bit 7..0 bit 15..8 bit 16..23 bit 31..24\nThe UID is specified in ID1-4.\nLoDi-Rektor API Service\nAdobe Acrobat document, 253.6 KB The commands the LoDi-Shift-Commander understands are listed below. Communication with the device is explained in General API.","SetWatchdog","GetModules","GetModulName","GetModuleVersion","SetModuleName","Booster commands","BoosterOn","BoosterStatus","BoosterDiagnostics","GetBoosterConfig","TrainSpeed and Railspeed commands","GetTrainspeedConfig","TrainspeedSetConfig","TrainspeedSetText","TrainspeedSetActive","TrainspeedEvent","Command station","Track-Commander","ActiveTrackProtocols","TrackProtocols","RemoveProtocols","Every command starts in the same field as described and is not repeated.","Used to take an address out of the refresh cycle when the locomotive is no longer on the track.","Sets the speed step and the direction.","Sets the functions that are part of the refresh cycle.","Sets the binary functions (possible in DCC only).","For setting the state of any function decoder.","For setting the configuration variables of vehicles (0xC5) and of accessories (0xC6).","This command can only be carried out when a **LoDi-CV-Programmer** (the programmer from here on) is connected to the LoDi bus. If no programmer is connected, the answer is **NACK**. Since operations on the programming track take longer, a command may already be running; in that case **BUSY** is returned. If the programmer accepted the command, **ACK** is returned.","This event is the answer to CV commands sent to a locomotive or an accessory on the programming track.","0xCC","einsteiger-3-leiter-konventionell","getting-started/three-rail/conventional-operation","Conventional operation","A three-rail layout in conventional operation.",[40],"This page is still being written…\n einsteiger-3-leiter-konventionell-01-91fe49.jpg",[40],"This page is still being written…\n einsteiger-2-leiter-01-3446d6.jpg","con-zentrale-sc","lodi-con/command-stations/lodi-shift-commander","Setting the LoDi-Shift-Commander up in the LoDi-Con.",[],"\n lodi-con-zentrale-sc-02-d4007f.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-sc-03-a82540.png\nFor the LoDi-Rektor, the station overview shows every connected µCon bus component together with its status.\n lodi-con-zentrale-sc-04-f6ca94.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-sc-05-c41e4b.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-sc-06-a367f0.png\nTo connect the LoDi-Rektor to the LoDi-Con, proceed as follows:\nFirst tap the \"house\", which always takes you back to the main screen.\nFrom there go to \"Settings\" > \"Command station\" >\n lodi-con-zentrale-sc-07-99094d.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-sc-08-f7641e.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-sc-09-0bd5ad.png\nTo connect the LoDi-Shift-Commander to the LoDi-Con, proceed as follows:\nThe LoDi-Con now searches the network for compatible command stations. Any it finds are shown.\nThat is because the LoDi-Rektor understands the z21 protocol as well, so that a Roco Wi-Fi handheld can connect to it. In this case please use the LoDi-Rektor.\nNow choose the Shift-Commander you want to connect to the LoDi-Con. In our example it is the top one.\n lodi-con-zentrale-sc-10-0b3687.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-sc-11-ab9c2f.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-sc-12-554702.png\nYou can change the name of the Shift-Commander if you like.\nThe LoDi-Con now connects to the LoDi-Rektor.\nThe LoDi-Con now connects to the Shift-Commander.\nA new symbol (LSC) for the LoDi-Shift-Commander now has to appear at the top left. If that LSC is steady, the connection is up. If it blinks, the LoDi-Con has no connection to the\nLoDi-Shift-Commander or is trying to establish one.\n lodi-con-zentrale-sc-13-8a5588.png\nTapping the top left takes you to the overview of command stations, which also shows whether a connection is active. You can now tap the Shift-Commander to see its IP address and status.\nOnce the LoDi-Shift-Commander is set up, no further steps are needed. You can now reach every article created in the Shift-Commander straight from the\nturnout and signal symbol.\nRoutes can also be created for the\n lodi-con-zentrale-sc-14-183dcf.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-sc-15-fae8b0.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","hardware","Hardware","The LoDi system at a glance — command station, boosters, feedback modules, accessory decoders and lighting.",[1235,1236,1237,1238],"The LoDi system – innovation meets precision. Since its introduction the LoDi system has established itself as one of the most advanced digital control solutions in model railroading.\nWhether in large club layouts, with passionate individual users or on impressive show layouts — LoDi is in use wherever uncompromising technology is called for. Our devices stand for the highest precision, innovative functions and a well thought-out, future-proof architecture.\nThey have been on the market since 2018 and are firmly established thanks to their outstanding performance and ease of use. They are available from our LoDi shop and from selected specialist dealers.\nMany of you will remember the µCon system we developed and brought to market in 2010 under the LSdigital brand. But technology does not stand still — and neither do we. Looking firmly ahead, we developed a completely new and powerful successor: the LoDi system, tomorrow of digital model railway control, available today.\nThe LoDi system at a glance\nEvery main component uses the same colour throughout, so each device can be assigned to its function at a glance. Overview of all LoDi system components, grouped by function through colour\nThe LoDi system essentially consists of three main components:\nDriving — the LoDi-Rektor and the LoDi-Booster generate the track signal for the rolling stock. The LoDi-Con controls and monitors every component, the LoDi-CV-Programmer reads and configures locomotives, and the LoDi-Trainspeed measures their speed. Feedback — the LoDi-S88-Commander LX and the connected feedback modules such as LoDi-8-GBM (-P) (v2) and LoDi-RM-16+ detect the locomotives on the track and report them back to the control software. Switching — the LoDi-Shift-Commander and modules such as LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC and 4-WD-DC drive the turnouts. The LoDi-Operator 16-SD-FL (1k) handles light signals, lamps, LEDs and effects, and the LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED the room lighting.\nEthernet throughout\nThe LoDi system relies entirely on Ethernet for control, which brings the following advantages:\nExtremely fast control of functions Straightforward commissioning Works from anywhere in the house No tedious setup of special USB drivers or the like Platform independent\nSetup and control software\nThe system is set up either through our own LoDi-ProgrammerFX interface or through supported model railway software. In compatibility mode the basic functions are available.\nSupport for the LoDi products in the common control programs. Table of supported model railway control software per LoDi product\nFor developers Are you a developer? Feel free to request the APIs for our devices.\nSections\nDriving Command station, boosters, handheld controller, reverse loop module\nSwitching Drive turnouts, signals and effects\nFeedback Report vehicles back to the control software\nAccessories Cables, connectors and additions to the system\nRoom lighting Control room lighting through the LoDi system\nLighting Lighting on the layout","The LoDi system at a glance","Ethernet throughout","Setup and control software","Sections","fahren","hardware/driving","Command station, boosters, handheld controller and reverse loop module — everything that puts signal and power on the track.",[],"The Driving section covers every device that generates the track signal and brings the necessary power to the layout — from the command station through the boosters to the reverse loop module.\nFor each device you will find the description, the manual as a PDF and videos.\nLoDi-Con The Wi-Fi handheld controller that operates the entire system — and works with third-party command stations too.\nLoDi-Rektor Generates the DCC or Motorola track signal for the LoDi boosters. Now with a revised CDE connector usable as output, input or sniffer-in.\nLoDi-CV-Programmer For configuring locomotives and accessory decoders, with a small booster up to 1 ampere. Reads DCC and mfx® locomotives.\nLoDi-Booster Generates the track voltage needed for operation. Depending on the scale, 14 to 20 volts are supported — RailCom capable, of course.\nLoDi-Booster 10A The powerhouse: the booster for large scales, likewise RailCom capable.\nLoDi-Booster 10A+ The top-of-the-range powerhouse with an output current of up to 14.99 amperes, adjustable through the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\nLoDi-KSM The reverse loop module for the digital model railway — with built-in automation or manual control through a decoder.","hardware/driving/lodi-con","Wi-Fi handheld controller for the whole LoDi system — third-party command stations included.",[1248,969,970,1249,1175,972,973,1250]," LoDi-Con\nLong awaited — finally released:\nThe LoDi-Con — born to make dreams come true!\nFor years we have been asked when we would present a handheld controller. After months of intensive and carefully considered development, we can finally introduce our LoDi-Con.\nThe handheld controller from Lokstoredigital. The model railway market teems with command stations, bus systems, protocols and operating philosophies, each wanting to be handled its own way — while all the modeller really wants is to run trains without trouble. That is exactly where the LoDi-Con comes in: thanks to its strong Wi-Fi antenna it can talk to and control every common command station. The protocol used is secondary at first; what matters is that the station is reachable at an IP address on the network.\nDrive your locomotives comfortably from the throttle.\nSet routes at the push of a button.\nPlay, or do whatever you like — the LoDi-Con takes care of the details.\nFeatures and capabilities of the LoDi-Con\nEffortless operation through a capacitive touch screen and an incremental rotary knob Visual feedback through the knob for speed steps, short circuits and much more Full integration of the LoDi components Can be connected to several command stations at once over Wi-Fi Driving locomotives and managing them in a loco database Display of your own loco images Double and multiple heading Switching turnouts, signals and routes Model clock display CV programming in plain text on the programming track and on the main (PoM) Feedback monitor Locking functions behind a password Up to 68 loco functions Club mode Integration with the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nSupported command stations and protocols\nBecause the LoDi-Con has Wi-Fi and slots effortlessly into your home network — or even talks directly to command stations that have a Wi-Fi module of their own — there are plenty of ways to bring it in. You can be connected to up to five command stations at the same time.\nA number of common protocols are already available, and we work daily on supporting further manufacturers.\nSo far the following devices can be connected to the LoDi-Con:\nLoDi-Rektor LoDi-Shift-Commander LoDi-S88-Commander z21 and every command station that supports the Z21 protocol Märklin CS2/3 XpressNet ESU ECoS WiThrottle Loconet (in preparation)\nEven now the LoDi-Con can talk to a wide range of model railway control software.\nWe continue to work closely with the manufacturers so that even more functionality can be built into the LoDi-Con.\nThe operating concept\nThe operating concept of the LoDi-Con is deliberately simple. We tried to put as little as possible, but as much as necessary, on the device itself. LoDi-OS grew out of that.\nThe LoDi-Con itself carries a high-quality capacitive touch display.\n LoDi-Con — The operating concept\nClear menu structures and simple operation were one of our goals. The touch display is backed by a rotary control that is a pleasure to use and even signals different actions through LED feedback — the current speed step is shown by the LEDs in the knob, among other things.\n LoDi-Con — The operating concept\nAlways one tap from where you want to be...\nThe menu bar takes you straight to each area:\nSwitching turnouts and routes Home menu Back button Loco overview / direct control\n LoDi-Con — The operating concept\nEverything at a glance, thanks to filtering in the loco and accessory overview.\nBecause the screen would quickly get crowded and the right objects hard to find among the many you have created, we added a small pre-selection filter.\nA text search is available too.\n LoDi-Con — The operating concept\n LoDi-Con — The operating concept\nWhichever way you turn the LoDi-Con, the screen turns with it. A built-in orientation sensor lets the LoDi-Con work out how you are holding it. It learns your habits along the way and does not flip the display the moment you tilt the device.\nAuto-rotation can of course also be switched off, or locked to one orientation.\n LoDi-Con — The operating concept\n LoDi-Con — The operating concept\n \nVideos say more than a thousand words, but a short guide to the individual functions is of course included here as well. The deeper details are in the videos. In future we will gather all videos about the device under this link.\nThe LoDi-Con and its versions — important!\nFrom 12 December 2024 the LoDi-Con B is no longer available; only the LoDi-Con A version is offered.\nSince LoDi-Con B units are still in circulation, we continue to cover it here.\nFor the details of the different versions, click the LoDi-Con version below.\nIn brief: the LoDi-Con A (black knob) = the battery-pack version, with the rechargeable pack already built in. The LoDi-Con A has a USB-C connection for charging it.\nThe LoDi-Con B (grey knob) = the battery version, taking three AAA batteries or rechargeables in the back.\nThe LoDi-Con A\n(click here or on the picture for the description)\n LoDi-Con — The LoDi-Con A\nThe LoDi-Con B\n(click here or on the picture for the description)\n LoDi-Con — The LoDi-Con B\nOperating the LoDi-Con\nContents\nThe LoDi-Con can do a great deal. We have therefore tried to describe everything as precisely as possible, and in as much detail as necessary, to explain its functions to you. Click the point you want to set up.\n1. First power-up / connecting to Wi-Fi 2. Setting up command stations 3. Setting up and driving a locomotive 4. Multiple heading 5. Switching turnouts and signals 6. Creating routes 7. Showing feedback 8. Device settings 9. Building a track diagram 10. CV programming 11. Club mode 12. Online database 13. Firmware update 14. Technical data 15. Settings in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\n16. Creating your own loco images\n LoDi-Con — Contents\n17. LoDi-Con PDF download\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-Con hardware and software as a PDF.\nLoDi-Con manual PDF, 5.3 MB — as of 27 January 2025","Features and capabilities of the LoDi-Con","The LoDi-Con A","17. LoDi-Con PDF download","dcc-system","hardware/switching/dcc-system","DCC-System","Accessory decoders that work straight off the DCC track signal.",[],"The DCC accessory decoders of the LoDi system: turnout, servo and relay decoders that sit directly on the track signal and work with any DCC command station.\nLoDi-83-AC Inspired by our LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC, we designed the LoDi-83-AC for the DCC signal.\nLoDi-84 A simple decoder with built-in bistable relays for switching external loads; it is also suitable for cutting power to sections of track such as staging yard roads\nLoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC The LoDi dual servo decoder, for when it may be a little bit more . . .\nLoDi-Dual-Servo-DCC-H The dual servo decoder, for when it may be a little bit more . . .\nLoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC Simply a small servo decoder . . . For individual servos, quickly fitted, the\nLoDi-Mono-Servo-DCC-H Simply a small servo decoder . . . For individual servos, quickly fitted, the","lodi-83-ac","hardware/switching/dcc-system/lodi-83-ac","LoDi-83-AC","An AC turnout decoder, inspired by the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC.",[1263,726,1264,1265,1266,1267,1268,1269,1270,590,1271]," LoDi-83-AC\nInspired by our LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC, we designed the LoDi-83-AC for the DCC signal.\nThe advantages of switching with AC, simply in one decoder with 8 outputs that can drive up to 4 turnouts.\nIt is RailCom-capable and can be programmed live on the track. No more tired drives, thanks to true AC at the output.\nFeatures of the LoDi-83-AC\nAn AC decoder for the DCC and Motorola protocols. Eight channels are available, each with 1 ampere per output; the total of the connected channels must not exceed 2 A. You can connect all common motor turnout drives, solenoid drives and lamps to the LoDi-83-AC. The LoDi-83-AC is equally suitable for loads that require AC, such as stopping sections, other old coils or universal motors. It demagnetises drives with coils! Every output is separately protected against overload. Easily configured over DCC RailCom.\nThe LoDi-83-AC and its advantages — the LoDi-83-AC demagnetises the iron armatures in your drive's coils.\nWhy is that?\nPicture an ordinary decoder from one of the usual manufacturers.\nIt always switches with DC, which means the iron armature is gradually magnetised by that DC. This is known as magnetic remanence. The consequence is that the armature can no longer be switched reliably by the coils, because their magnetic field is no longer strong enough.\nThe decoder, or rather the drive, becomes unreliable.\nThe principle of a twin-coil drive\n LoDi-83-AC — Features of the LoDi-83-AC\nThe iron armature of a twin-coil drive with remanence\n LoDi-83-AC — Features of the LoDi-83-AC\nThe iron armature of a twin-coil drive without remanence\n LoDi-83-AC — Features of the LoDi-83-AC\nWe developed this decoder to rule that effect out. It only passes AC through. That prevents magnetisation, because no lasting remanence can build up.\nYour drives therefore keep switching at full strength.\nVideos about the device from YouTubers\nHere we show contributions from customers who use LoDi devices and have taken the time to create tutorials.\n \n \n \n1. The LoDi-83-AC and its connections\nThe LoDi-83-AC is connected to a digital command station for the data signal and to a transformer for the switching power supply.\n LoDi-83-AC — The LoDi-83-AC and its connections\nAbout the connections on the LoDi-83-AC\n(1) Here you can connect the loads, turnouts, lamps and so on; you will find more on this in the wiring examples further down. (2) The AC model railway transformer is connected here, at yellow and brown. ! ! ! AC ONLY ! ! ! IMPORTANT! Please only use authorised model railway transformers. The DCC coming from the booster or command station is connected at red and blue.\n2. The LoDi-83-AC LEDs and button\n LoDi-83-AC — The LoDi-83-AC LEDs and button\nThe decoder has three LEDs for status and a button, used to give the decoder an address, for instance.\n(1) The red LED (Info) lights as soon as the decoder receives a signal valid for it, or when RailCom data is sent. The green LED (DCC) lights as soon as DCC is present at the decoder. The orange LED (PW) lights as soon as the decoder is connected to a transformer. Should there be a short circuit on an output, the orange LED goes out. The LED is also off when the transformer is not connected or is switched off.\n3. Connecting a model railway transformer\nThe LoDi-83-AC has 2 terminals for feeding in the model railway transformer. If you want to connect several decoders to one transformer, we can recommend the LoDi-Verteiler series under Accessories.\nCAREFUL!\nPlease do not use cable below 0.75 mm²!\nPlease watch the polarity of the power supply!\nAC ONLY!\n LoDi-83-AC — Connecting a model railway transformer\n4. Connecting a digital command station\nOnce the decoder is supplied with power, that is E (energy), it has to be able to receive data. For that the decoder should be connected to a command station or a booster.\nIn the example here we use a LoDi-Booster.\n LoDi-83-AC — Connecting a digital command station\nThe LoDi-83-AC can be run with any commercially available command station, as long as the station supports the DCC or Motorola signal. We do however recommend running the decoder in DCC where possible. CVs can only be configured over DCC.\n LoDi-83-AC — Connecting a digital command station\nCAREFUL!\nFor reliable switching of DCC accessories, a separate circuit or booster output should be used if one is available.\n5. Connecting the LoDi-83-AC to the loads\nIn the following example you see turnout drives from various manufacturers connected to the LoDi-83-AC.\nDrives from a wide range of manufacturers can of course be mixed on the decoder.\nFour twin solenoids or motor drives can be connected per decoder.\nExample with the Märklin® K track solenoid drive\n LoDi-83-AC — Connecting the LoDi-83-AC to the loads\nExample with the Märklin® C track solenoid drive\n LoDi-83-AC — Connecting the LoDi-83-AC to the loads\nExample with the Piko® solenoid drive\n LoDi-83-AC — Connecting the LoDi-83-AC to the loads\nExample with the Fleischmann® solenoid drive\n LoDi-83-AC — Connecting the LoDi-83-AC to the loads\nExample with the LGB® motor drive (EPL)\nSome motor drives require two diodes; these can be type 1N4001, for instance.\nYou will be able to get them from us in the shop shortly, or from other electronics suppliers.\n LoDi-83-AC — Connecting the LoDi-83-AC to the loads\nExample with the MTB motor drives (MP1, MP5, etc.)\n LoDi-83-AC — Connecting the LoDi-83-AC to the loads\nExample with the Tillig motor drives\n LoDi-83-AC — Connecting the LoDi-83-AC to the loads\nFurther drives that have been tested with the LoDi-83-AC in continuous use.\nThe Märklin M track system, including old Märklin signals with coil drives Fulgurex motor turnout drives Hoffmann motor turnout drives Conrad motor turnout drives Viessmann signals with solenoid lift drives\nMany other drives can be connected to the LoDi-83-AC AC decoder without trouble.\nWe are happy to extend the wiring example pictures accordingly.\nIf a drive you use is missing, do let us know.\n6. CV list, settings, addressing\nThe LoDi-83-AC is set through CVs.\nIf you have the LoDi-Rektor with a LoDi-Booster or CDE booster connected, you can write the CVs over PoM (programming on main) with the LoDi-ProgrammerFX from version 2.2.\nThe decoder can equally be programmed with any conventional command station that has a DCC programming output or handles PoM.\nIf you have a RailCom capable system, you can read the decoder's CVs live at any time.\nSetting the data format in the LoDi-83-AC\nYou have now installed the decoder successfully, the power and data cables are plugged in, and the LoDi-83-AC glows orange continuously to show it is ready.\nThe green LED lights as soon as a DCC signal is present at the DCC terminal.\nAs delivered, the LoDi-83-AC is set to DCC. To switch the decoder to Motorola, proceed as follows: press the Prog button (2) briefly; the red \"INFO LED\" (1) now glows steadily. Now press the button again and hold it until the decoder restarts. It is now set to Motorola. If you want to switch the decoder back to DCC, repeat this step.\nSetting a DCC or Motorola address: as delivered, the decoder responds to turnout or accessory addresses 1–4.\nIf you want to change an address quickly, proceed as follows: there is a prog. button (2) on the decoder. Press it for 3 seconds.\n LoDi-83-AC — CV list, settings, addressing\nThe info LED (red) (1) starts to flash quickly. That is the decoder telling you it is ready for a new address.\nNow send the new address from your command station, from your model railway control software or from the LoDi-ProgrammerFX (the LoDi-Rektor is required).\nThe decoder takes the address and the info LED stops flashing. It is now reachable at the address you chose. Only the first address has to be sent. All three further addresses are assigned automatically. With 1, for instance, 1–4, and so on.\nSetting the CVs: as mentioned several times, the LoDi-83-AC can be programmed over PoM (programming on main).\nLet us assume you have a motor turnout, an MP1 for instance, connected to output 1, that is 1+2.\nOn the other outputs there are ordinary solenoid accessories such as Märklin drives.\nThe first pair of outputs is now to be given a longer switching time.\nFirst go to the programming menu of your command station, model railway software or the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\nNow select the decoder's address.\nCAREFUL!!!\nOnly the decoder's first accessory address may be selected. This means that if the decoder listens on addresses 1–4, only the first address of the decoder may ever be used; that is the address at which the station reaches the decoder and can programme it.\nIn this case address 1.\nNow send the value 70 for CV51 (this is output pair 1). The decoder now works for about 2.5 seconds per output. That is enough time to drive the MP1.\nNow we also want to give the Märklin drives on outputs 2–4 a longer switching time. The default is 15, which is 375 ms. We now raise that value for output pairs 2, 3 and 4 in CVs 52, 53 and 54 to 30.\nThe drive is therefore switched on for 750 ms.\nThese values can be read back later over RailCom.\n7. Setting up different loads on the LoDi-83-AC\nAs described several times, the LoDi-83-AC can drive or switch any universal motors, lamps, solenoids, stopping sections and much more.\nLet us assume you still have outputs free on a decoder, or want to use the outputs directly for switching other loads instead of turnouts.\nThat gives us 8 outputs, which can then be switched over 8 DCC addresses.\n LoDi-83-AC — Setting up different loads on the LoDi-83-AC\nIn this example we have now connected several lamps to the first and to the second output.\nSince these are now connected to the first output pair, that is 1 and 2, we now have to tell the decoder through a CV that these outputs are to be split and can be driven as their own addresses.\nTo do that, send a 0 in CV51 (the first address pair) to decoder address 1, which is the address in our example.\nThe lamps can now be switched separately with turnout addresses 1 and 2.\n LoDi-83-AC — Setting up different loads on the LoDi-83-AC\nLet us look at the example shown here a little more closely.\nOn outputs 1 and 2 you see connected lamps, as shown in the picture. So we have to set CV51 to 0. That now means outputs 1 and 2 can be switched on and off over DCC addresses 1 and 2.\nOn the next output pair we now have a turnout drive; we leave CV 52 at the value 15, which means this turnout is reachable at address 3.\nThe third output pair also stays unchanged and has address 4.\nOn the fourth output pair we have again installed 2 lamps.\nSo here we set CV 54 to 0. These lamps therefore now need DCC addresses 5 and 6.\nThis can be applied to up to 8 DCC addresses.\n8. Technical data\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length 8.9 cm\nWidth 10 cm\nHeight 3.5 cm\nWeight 97 grams\nAt the digital terminal, that is in digital operation, the decoder can be supplied with up to 22 volts.\nDo mind the specifications of your command station or booster manufacturer here.\nThe decoder must be powered with AC!\nPermitted from 12 to 24 volts AC.\nLoadable by loads with 3 amperes briefly and 1.5 amperes continuously in total.\n9. LoDi-83-AC PDF download\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-83-AC as a PDF.\nManual and CV list for the LoDi-83-AC PDF, 2.0 MB","Features of the LoDi-83-AC","1. The LoDi-83-AC and its connections","2. The LoDi-83-AC LEDs and button","3. Connecting a model railway transformer","4. Connecting a digital command station","5. Connecting the LoDi-83-AC to the loads","6. CV list, settings, addressing","7. Setting up different loads on the LoDi-83-AC","9. LoDi-83-AC PDF download","lodi-shift-commander","hardware/switching/sc-system/lodi-shift-commander","A network interface for the SC switching bus.",[1277,1278,1279,1280,1281,348,1282,1283]," LoDi-Shift-Commander\nThe LoDi-Shift-Commander — the network interface for the SC switching bus, built for reliability and speed.\nThanks to the separated switching system, the LoDi-Shift-Commander could throw up to 253 turnouts at the same time, provided enough transformer power is available. But it is not only the speed that convinces our customers again and again. The high reliability of the LoDi-Shift-Commander is another factor that makes this switching interface the first choice for dependable layouts with solenoid accessories, motor turnouts, lighting and room lighting control.\nSo if you are planning a dependable layout with solenoid accessories or motor turnouts, do take a look at the LoDi-Shift-Commander and its LoDi-Operators. With them you can control your layout reliably and precisely!\nFeatures of the LoDi-Shift-Commander\nIt forms the link between the computer and the accessory decoders, the LoDi-Operators, as well as the room lighting control. It is therefore an interface for every switching task around the layout or the car system. If you are looking for a device for switching tasks on your layout, the LoDi-Shift-Commander is the right choice. Purple patch cables are used to wire the devices. Every module attached to the LoDi-Shift-Commander is also marked with purple side stripes, purple arrows and even purple LEDs, so that even in the dark under the layout you can see at once which device belongs where. Automatic bus detection is built into the LoDi-Shift-Commander. When you add a new module to the bus, you can assign it freely straight away and configure it in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX. A total of 480 switching outputs is provided per LoDi-Shift-Commander. A modern room lighting control with time control is built into the LoDi-Shift-Commander. A modern network interface, and therefore driver-free operation!\n1. The LoDi-Shift-Commander and its connections\nThe LoDi-Shift-Commander is the interface for every switching task on your layout.\nWhether lights, signals or turnouts, the LoDi-Shift-Commander handles every task with ease and is effortless to configure.\nNo more tiresome CV programming is needed; through our programming tool, the LoDi-ProgrammerFX, you can set every device simply and easily. More on that in our videos.\n LoDi-Shift-Commander — The LoDi-Shift-Commander and its connections\nAbout the connections on the\nLoDi-Shift-Commander:\n(1) Network port: connect your network switch or router to the device here. (2) SC bus Out 1: this bus is treated as the fast lighting bus. That means every module connected to it is able to dim consumers through its outputs. 96 outputs are available in total here.\n(3) SC bus Out 2: this bus can also provide 96 dimmable outputs; if you switch the bus over to Switch, 384 channels are available. As a rule you would connect your turnouts here, along with room lighting decoders or stepper motor decoders.\n(4) USB-C port: no need to worry, no USB is connected to the PC here — as mentioned above we work only with driver-free interfaces. The USB-C connection serves solely as the 5 volt supply for the LoDi-Shift-Commander.\n2. LEDs and button on the LoDi-Shift-Commander\n LoDi-Shift-Commander — LEDs and button on the LoDi-Shift-Commander\nThe LoDi-Shift-Commander has several LEDs and a button to help you read the state of the device and understand faults more quickly.\n(1,2): the two purple LEDs and the orange LED show you the state of the bus. When it is switched active, the purple one lights on the left at bus 1. The second bus can act as a fast or a slow bus, which you can configure in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX. If you have the bus set to slow, the orange LED lights; as a fast bus the purple one lights at bus 2 (2) Prog. IP button and LED: this button is used whenever you want to change the IP address of your LoDi-Rektor. More on that in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX description\n3. Connecting power\n LoDi-Shift-Commander — Connecting power\nWe deliver the LoDi-S88-Commander LX with a high-quality USB power supply. You are of course welcome to use your own USB power supply, but it should provide at least\n1 ampere at 5 volts.\n(Chargers from newer Apple MacBooks or iPads unfortunately cannot be used. They work with\n\"USB Power Delivery\", where the devices have to negotiate the current — a function the LoDi components do not support.)\nImportant note on the power supply: use only the external power supply for our interface. Powering it from the PC can cause a ground loop and interference because of the network connection.\n4. Connecting the LoDi-Shift-Commander to the network\n LoDi-Shift-Commander — Connecting the LoDi-Shift-Commander to the network\nAll our devices work with a modern network interface.\nThat brings you plenty of advantages in handling the devices. This network interface lets you integrate several interfaces into your system without trouble.\nThere are almost no limits to your imagination here.\nThis technology lets you build large and very large layouts, but small layouts benefit from it too.\nThanks to networking, controlling your layout from a laptop or tablet is no longer a problem. Today's Wi-Fi routers are perfectly able to carry these connections quickly enough.\nThere is little to watch out for when bringing the LoDi interface into your network.\nIt is always easier to integrate the LoDi interface into an existing network than to install another network card in the computer.\nIf you need help with the integration, do get in touch with us through the contact form, or turn to our users in the forum, who will gladly help.\nAs the picture above shows, we pay close attention to the colour coding of network cables. Yellow is the international standard for computer networks.\nYou are of course free to use other colours; we stick to these standards.\nIn the example shown, the computer is connected to a switch or router.\nYou can of course also connect the computer over Wi-Fi.\nThe LoDi-Shift-Commander is attached to the switch or router as well.\nThe cable running off to the left could be your internet line, or other devices connected to your network.\nIf the ports on the switch or router run out, simply connect another switch to the existing one. The link channels of the switches route the data to the right device automatically; you only have to plug the cables in. Please take care not to build a loop, though — a loop is a circle, so to speak, that will bring your network down.\nOnce the LoDi interface is connected correctly, the next step is configuring the network address (the IP address) through our LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\n5. Technical data\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length 8.9 cm\nWidth 10 cm\nHeight 3.5 cm\nWeight 89 grams\nThe USB-C connection can be powered from any common USB-C cable or power supply.\nThe maximum load of the USB power supply may be up to 3 amperes.\n6. Setting up the LoDi-Shift-Commander in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nHere is how to commission the IP address of the LoDi-Shift-Commander\nHere is how to set up the LoDi-Shift-Commander\n LoDi-Shift-Commander — Setting up the LoDi-Shift-Commander in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\n7. LoDi-Shift-Commander PDF download\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-Shift-Commander hardware and software as a PDF.\nLoDi-Shift-Commander hardware manual PDF, 1.1 MB\nLoDi-Shift-Commander software manual PDF, 1.2 MB","Features of the LoDi-Shift-Commander","1. The LoDi-Shift-Commander and its connections","2. LEDs and button on the LoDi-Shift-Commander","3. Connecting power","4. Connecting the LoDi-Shift-Commander to the network","6. Setting up the LoDi-Shift-Commander in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX","7. LoDi-Shift-Commander PDF download","lodi-s88-commander","hardware/feedback/lodi-s88-commander","A network interface for the s88 and S88.2 feedback bus, configurable through its own web UI.",[1289,601,1290,1291,1292,1293,1294,1295,609,1296,1297]," LoDi-S88-Commander LX\nUpdate late 2022:\nThe successor to the S88-Commander, the LoDi-S88-Commander LX. A completely reworked version of our S88.2 interface. With a new 32-bit dual-core processor it offers far more performance than its predecessor. Beyond that it now has Wi-Fi built in (from version 6.2.0). With DHCP integrated it is easier to bring into networks, and alongside UDP it now also speaks TCP for even more secure transfer of data to the software or to other components such as the LoDi-Con. It is also prepared for automatic registration over DCC-A to RCN-218. That will become available in future through a software update and in combination with the LoDi-8-GBM v2.\nIntroducing: our new, thoroughly thought-through feedback system. The first component is the interface, the LoDi-S88-Commander.\nS88 is a familiar term to every modeller. Its advantages and drawbacks, the pros and cons — almost everyone has met them. We took stock of what modellers need and considered how we could develop the S88 system further while staying compatible. With us, s88 and s88N now become S88.2, a new standard that allows more to be sent over the bus than just \"detector on\" or \"detector off\".\nFeatures of the LoDi-S88-Commander LX\nThe LoDi-S88-Commander and LoDi-S88-Commander LX is the interface for the S88.2 bus and the s88 bus, and thus the link between the computer and the detection modules. Very fast processing of every detector on the bus. Up to ten times faster data processing thanks to the latest technology. You can connect and read up to 2 × 48, that is 96 in total, 16-fold detection modules on the LoDi-S88-Commander LX. Automatic module detection on bus 1 and 2 (for S88.2 bus devices only) Modules with the new S88.2 standard can now be addressed and keep their address. Extended feedback options with the LoDi-8-GBM, LoDi-8-GBM-P, LoDi-RM-16+ Simple configuration thanks to the LoDi-ProgrammerFX The new S88.2 data bus is a development of the s88 bus which now also lets us pass data such as RailCom®, current measurement, short-circuit detection and even QoS (quality of service) on to the control software. The LoDi-S88-Commander LX is prepared for Wi-Fi and DCC-A. That will be available in 2023 through a software update in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX. The LoDi-S88-Commander LX supports DHCP, which makes it even easier to integrate into an existing network. A modern network interface, and therefore driver-free operation!\nVideos from partners\nSetting up the LoDi-S88-Commander (LX) in TrainController.\n \nSetting up the LoDi-S88-Commander (LX) and the LoDi-Rektor in iTrain.\n \n1. The LoDi-S88-Commander LX and its connections\nThe LoDi-S88-Commander LX is the interface for the feedback bus. It processes S88.2 and s88 bus commands very quickly. It connects through a modern, forward-looking and driver-free interface.\nIt is therefore entirely independent of the operating system installed.\n LoDi-S88-Commander LX — The LoDi-S88-Commander LX and its connections\nAbout the connections on the LoDi-S88-Commander LX:\n(1) Network port: connect your network switch or router here. (2) S88.2 bus IN 1: your feedback modules connect here. A maximum of 48 modules can be connected to one bus. (The total of bus 1 and bus 2 must not exceed 96.) (3) S88.2 bus IN 2: further S88.2 or s88 modules can be connected here. In total, however, they must not exceed 96 × 16-fold detectors. (4) USB-C port: the USB-C connection provides the 5 volt supply for the LoDi-S88-Commander LX.\n2. LEDs and button of the LoDi-S88-Commander LX\n LoDi-S88-Commander LX — LEDs and button of the LoDi-S88-Commander LX\nThe LoDi-S88-Commander LX has several LEDs and a button to help you read the state of the device and understand faults quickly.\n(1,2): the two blue bus LEDs light as soon as the buses are switched active by the LoDi-S88-Commander LX. The two red RX LEDs flash whenever the LoDi-S88-Commander LX receives a change. (3): Prog. IP button and LED. This button is used whenever you want to change the IP address of your LoDi-S88-Commander LX. More on that in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX description.\n3. Connecting the power supply to the LoDi-S88-Commander LX\n LoDi-S88-Commander LX — Connecting the power supply to the LoDi-S88-Commander LX\nWe deliver the LoDi-S88-Commander LX with a high-quality USB power supply. You are of course welcome to use your own USB power supply, but it should provide at least\n1 ampere at 5 volts.\n(Chargers from newer Apple MacBooks or iPads unfortunately cannot be used. They work with\n\"USB Power Delivery\", where the devices have to negotiate the current — a function the LoDi components do not support.)\nImportant note on the power supply: use only the external power supply for our interface. Powering it from the PC can cause a ground loop and interference because of the network connection.\n4. Connecting the LoDi-S88-Commander LX to the network\n LoDi-S88-Commander LX — Connecting the LoDi-S88-Commander LX to the network\nAll our devices work with a modern network interface.\nThat brings you plenty of advantages in handling the devices. This network interface lets you integrate several interfaces into your system without trouble.\nThere are almost no limits to your imagination here.\nThis technology lets you build large and very large layouts, but small layouts benefit from it too.\nThanks to networking, controlling your layout from a laptop or tablet is no longer a problem. Today's Wi-Fi routers are perfectly able to carry these connections quickly enough.\nThere is little to watch out for when bringing the LoDi interface into your network.\nIt is always easier to integrate the LoDi interface into an existing network than to install another network card in the computer.\nIf you need help with the integration, do get in touch with us through the contact form, or turn to our users in the forum, who will gladly help.\nAs the picture above shows, we pay close attention to the colour coding of network cables. Yellow is the international standard for computer networks.\nYou are of course free to use other colours; we stick to these standards.\nIn the example shown, the computer is connected to a switch or router.\nYou can of course also connect the computer over Wi-Fi.\nThe LoDi-S88-Commander LX is attached to the switch or router as well.\nThe cable running off to the left could be your internet line, or other devices connected to your network.\nIf the ports on the switch or router run out, simply connect another switch to the existing one. The link channels of the switches route the data to the right device automatically; you only have to plug the cables in. Please take care not to build a loop, though — a loop is a circle, so to speak, that will bring your network down.\nOnce the LoDi interface is connected correctly, the next step is configuring the network address (the IP address) through our LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\n5. Connecting s88 and s88N modules\nBefore we talk about the new S88.2 bus, let us first explain the current s88 and s88N variant.\nHere you see conventional s88N compatible modules connected.\nThree modules are connected to bus 1 of the LoDi-S88-Commander LX here.\nA total of 96 × 16-fold modules, or 96 × LoDi-8-GBM and LoDi-RM-16+, can be connected to the LoDi-S88-Commander LX.\n LoDi-S88-Commander LX — Connecting s88 and s88N modules\nIf you now want to hang another module in between — the third module, shown in red, in this case — all addresses behind it shift. The blue module would previously have had addresses 3.1 to 3.16, but now has 4.1 to 4.16.\nModern software can of course help here, but for modular layouts that are set up differently each time, s88 was never a great choice.\nInterference immunity is no longer an issue today and was solved well with the move to s88N.\nWith our new S88.2 we of course assume patch cables!\n LoDi-S88-Commander LX — Connecting s88 and s88N modules\nFor bringing in old s88 modules with a 6-pin connector we have an adapter you can use as follows.\nThe adapter is compatible with s88, s88N and S88.2.\n LoDi-S88-Commander LX — Connecting s88 and s88N modules\nThe adapter works for one module or for several at once.\nThe LoDi-S88-Commander LX detects whether it is dealing with s88 modules or S88.2 modules.\n LoDi-S88-Commander LX — Connecting s88 and s88N modules\n6. Connecting S88.2 modules\nAs mentioned above, the LoDi-S88-Commander LX has two extended buses, or rather a development of the old s88 system. The new S88.2 protocol is open and can be requested from us.\nThe LoDi-S88-Commander LX has bus 1 and bus 2.\nA total of 96 standard 16-fold modules, or 96 × LoDi-8-GBM, LoDi-8-GBM-P or LoDi-RM-16+, can be connected.\nOn the S88.2 bus the modules have to be given an address. The bus addresses are therefore no longer fixed by the s88 shift register, but set by your programming.\nAs shown in the example above with the old s88 and s88N modules, the new bus has no assigned addresses any more — you programme them into the device yourself.\nS88.2 is therefore perfectly usable for modular layouts!\nAnother advantage!\nThrough the additional data layer we give the S88.2 bus, data such as current draw, short circuits within the block and RailCom data from the locomotive or consumer can now be reported back to the software as well.\nHere you see the layout of the S88.2 modules. In this example there are several LoDi-8-GBM units.\nModules that are S88.2 capable have to be addressed on the bus.\nHow that works can be seen here: programming S88.2 modules\n LoDi-S88-Commander LX — Connecting S88.2 modules\nOld s88 modules can of course also be inserted between S88.2 modules through our LoDi-S88 adapter; the LoDi-S88-Commander LX is able to detect which module is S88.2 capable and which is not.\nWith the conventional s88N capable modules on the market it only has to be checked whether the eighth conductor — which we use in the network cable as the TX channel of the S88.2 bus — is carried through. Otherwise the LoDi-S88-Commander LX no longer detects the S88.2 modules.\n7. Technical data\nProperty Value\nDimensions LoDi-S88-Commander and LoDi-S88-Commander LX\nLength 8.9 cm\nWidth 10 cm\nHeight 3.5 cm\nWeight 89 grams\n90 grams. The USB-C connection can be powered from any common USB-C cable or power supply.\nThe maximum load of the USB power supply may be 3 amperes.\n8. Setting up the LoDi-S88-Commander LX in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nHere is how to commission the IP address of the LoDi-S88-Commander\nHere is how to set up the LoDi-S88-Commander\nHere is how to set up the LoDi-8-GBM and LoDi-8-GBM-P and the LoDi-RM-16+\n LoDi-S88-Commander LX — Setting up the LoDi-S88-Commander LX in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\n9. LoDi-S88-Commander and LX PDF download\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-S88-Commander LX hardware and software as a PDF.\nLoDi-S88-Commander LX manual PDF, 1.8 MB\nLoDi-S88-Commander hardware manual PDF, 1.1 MB","Features of the LoDi-S88-Commander LX","1. The LoDi-S88-Commander LX and its connections","2. LEDs and button of the LoDi-S88-Commander LX","3. Connecting the power supply to the LoDi-S88-Commander LX","4. Connecting the LoDi-S88-Commander LX to the network","5. Connecting s88 and s88N modules","6. Connecting S88.2 modules","8. Setting up the LoDi-S88-Commander LX in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX","9. LoDi-S88-Commander and LX PDF download","lodi-trainspeed","hardware/accessories/lodi-trainspeed",[1302,600,601,1303,1304,1305,1306,1307,1308,609,1309,1310]," LoDi-TrainSpeed\nIntroducing:\nThe LoDi-TrainSpeed.\nLife is too short to measure vehicles in the traditional way over detectors . . .\nOur efficient measuring device for vehicles of every kind and scale.\nCompletely reworked, faster and more accurate in its measurements, the LoDi-TrainSpeed delivers results at speed and sends them over the µCon bus to the LoDi-Rektor.\nFeatures of the LoDi-TrainSpeed\nMeasuring device for trains, locomotives, cars . . . suitable for every scale Tolerance measurement with deviation detection during the run. Length measurement of locomotives and of whole trains. µCon bus compatible and backwards compatible with the µCon-Manager. No difficult installation — plug the cable in and set it beside the measuring section. Can also be fitted under the track. Up to three TrainSpeeds can be run one after another. Connections for external LEDs provided.\nVideos of the device\n \nVideos from partners\nMeasuring in with the LoDi-TrainSpeed in iTrain.\n \nMeasuring in with the LoDi-TrainSpeed in Win-Digipet\n \nMeasuring in with the LoDi-TrainSpeed in TrainController\n \n1. The LoDi-TrainSpeed and its connections\nThe LoDi-TrainSpeed is a bus device and simply hooks into the existing µCon bus.\nµCon bus IN, the connection to the TrainSpeed µCon bus OUT carries the signal on to further devices on the µCon bus Connection for external LEDs\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — The LoDi-TrainSpeed and its connections\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — The LoDi-TrainSpeed and its connections\n2. LEDs and button on the LoDi-TrainSpeed\nThe LoDi-TrainSpeed has two LEDs that show you whether the sensor is measuring or ready.\nWhen the red LED flashes, a measurement is under way. The green LED is lit whenever the device is ready for use. Address button: every µCon bus device gets its own address, through which it reports back on the bus. Jumper: this jumper has to be fitted if you want to install a second LoDi-TrainSpeed directly after the first.\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — LEDs and button on the LoDi-TrainSpeed\n3. Connecting to the µCon bus\nConnecting to the µCon bus could hardly be simpler.\nHere are a few wiring examples.\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Connecting to the µCon bus\nHere is the configuration with a single TrainSpeed.\nOne LoDi-Rektor with one LoDi-TrainSpeed.\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Connecting to the µCon bus\nThis diagram shows how the LoDi-TrainSpeed connects to a LoDi-Booster.\nCareful: only the right-hand socket on the LoDi-Booster supplies the current the LoDi-TrainSpeed needs.\nFor that reason, always watch the arrows.\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Connecting to the µCon bus\nThis diagram shows the LoDi-Rektor supplying two LoDi-TrainSpeeds with power and bus. In this configuration the jumper mentioned in section 2 has to be fitted.\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Connecting to the µCon bus\nHere you see the maximum number of LoDi-TrainSpeeds that can be chained one after another.\nThe bus itself can hold 63 devices in total, but only three TrainSpeeds may be chained in a row.\nIf you need more TrainSpeeds, you can add another three after inserting a booster.\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Connecting to the µCon bus\n4. The LoDi-TrainSpeed and its sensors\nThere are two sensors on the LoDi-TrainSpeed, marked 1 in the picture . . .\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — The LoDi-TrainSpeed and its sensors\nThese sensors pick up your vehicles as they pass and hand the data on to the control software or the LoDi-Programmer.\n5. Positioning the LoDi-TrainSpeed for measuring\nThe LoDi-TrainSpeed can be connected straight to the µCon bus and laid beside the track.\nIt is then ready for use immediately.\nMake sure the sensors are triggered at the height of the locomotive wheels or of the car.\nIdeally — and necessarily for length measurement — the LoDi-TrainSpeed should be mounted at buffer height.\nGetting the LoDi-TrainSpeed to see the vehicles well is easy, because its straight network sockets let it simply be laid beside the track. It can be fixed with a small blob of hot glue, with a cable tie on the lead, a little insulating tape, or run entirely unfixed. The height should be adjusted a little in any case.\nIf need be, raise the LoDi-TrainSpeed on a small plate.\nIn most cases that is no problem with ordinary track without ballast.\nWith ballasted track the height of the LoDi-TrainSpeed has to be matched to the buffer height.\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Positioning the LoDi-TrainSpeed for measuring\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Positioning the LoDi-TrainSpeed for measuring\n6. Connecting external LEDs\nNote: this option is gone in the 2021 version. The 2025 version has SMD LEDs.\nIf you have installed your LoDi-TrainSpeed under the baseboard, inside a building or similar, and can no longer see the LEDs, we give you the option of fitting two additional LEDs (green / red) to the TrainSpeed.\nWe offer ready-made LEDs for this in our shop. You can also connect your own LEDs to the two outputs — no series resistor is needed.\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Connecting external LEDs\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Connecting external LEDs\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Connecting external LEDs\n7. Technical data\nProperty Value\nDimensions Length 11 cm\nWidth 3 cm at its widest point, 5 cm with the patch cable\nHeight 2 cm\nWeight 17 grams\nPower comes from the LoDi bus, which runs at a maximum of 5 volts.\n8. Setting up and updating the firmware of the LoDi-TrainSpeed in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nHere is how to commission the LoDi-TrainSpeed\n LoDi-TrainSpeed — Setting up and updating the firmware of the LoDi-TrainSpeed in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\n9. LoDi-TrainSpeed PDF download\nHere you can download a summary of the LoDi-TrainSpeed as a PDF.\nLoDi-TrainSpeed manual PDF, 1.5 MB","Features of the LoDi-TrainSpeed","1. The LoDi-TrainSpeed and its connections","2. LEDs and button on the LoDi-TrainSpeed","3. Connecting to the µCon bus","4. The LoDi-TrainSpeed and its sensors","5. Positioning the LoDi-TrainSpeed for measuring","6. Connecting external LEDs","8. Setting up and updating the firmware of the LoDi-TrainSpeed in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX","9. LoDi-TrainSpeed PDF download","dmx","hardware/room-lighting/dmx","DMX","The LoDi-DMX-Interface is an Art-Net compliant network interface with 512 DMX channels.",[]," DMX\nThe LoDi-DMX-Interface is a\nDMX 512 channel Ethernet interface for controlling DMX stage technology such as moving heads, LED controllers and much more.\nIt works to the Art-Net standard and can be used straight away in most common software solutions.\nHere you will find the description and manual for the\nLoDi-DMX-Interface","lodi-21mtc","hardware/lighting/lodi-21mtc","LoDi-21MTC(-S)","The LoDi-21MTC(-S) board. Would you like to convert your old locomotives simply and quickly, without having to do without the latest decoder technology?",[1323,1324,1325,1326,392],"The LoDi-21MTC(-S) board\n LoDi-21MTC(-S)\n LoDi-21MTC(-S) — The LoDi-21MTC(-S) board\nThe LoDi-21MTC(-S) board. Would you like to convert your old locomotives simply and quickly, without having to do without the latest decoder technology?\nWith the LoDi-21MTC board, converting older locomotives cleanly and quickly is child's play . . .\nAnd now even the LoDi-21MTC-S board with built-in series resistors ! ! !\nWhen converting locomotives you want to be as flexible as possible.\nThat is why we developed the LoDi-21MTC(-S) board and brought all 21 poles out to solder pads.\nIt is suitable for boards with or without sound.\n LoDi-21MTC(-S) — The LoDi-21MTC(-S) board\nFeatures of the LoDi-21MTC board\nA simple 21-pin MTC interface for all common 21-pin locomotive and sound decoders A space-saving design All poles brought out to solder pads Independent of gauge or two- and three-rail system\n1. The LoDi-21MTC board and its connections\n LoDi-21MTC(-S) — The LoDi-21MTC board and its connections\nConnection information, NMRA colour scheme:\nTR-R = right-hand rail = red TR-L = left-hand rail = black MOT 1 = motor right = orange MOT 2 = motor left = grey LV = front light = white LH = rear light = yellow U+ = shared + = blue AUX1 = switchable channel 1 = green AUX2 = switchable channel 2 = purple LS− / LS+ = loudspeaker = brown\n LoDi-21MTC(-S) — The LoDi-21MTC board and its connections\nAn example wiring diagram with a locomotive. Front and rear lights with directional lighting, switchable through AUX1 and AUX2.\n LoDi-21MTC(-S) — The LoDi-21MTC board and its connections\nConnection information, Märklin® colour scheme:\nTR-R = right-hand rail = red TR-L = left-hand rail = brown MOT 1 = motor right = green MOT 2 = motor left = blue LV = front light = grey LH = rear light = yellow U+ = shared + = orange AUX1 = switchable channel 1 = brown-red AUX2 = switchable channel 2 = brown-green AUX3 = switchable channel 3 = brown-yellow AUX4 = switchable channel 4 = brown-white LS− / LS+ = loudspeaker = white\n LoDi-21MTC(-S) — The LoDi-21MTC board and its connections\nThe LoDi-21MTC board has further outputs which can be used differently depending on the manufacturer, such as SUSI or further AUX or logic channels.\nCAREFUL! The board must not be mounted directly onto the metal of the locomotive; the locomotive and the board have to be insulated from each other. For a perfect fixing, use foam adhesive tape to fasten the board in the locomotive. Using double-sided adhesive tape also ensures the locomotive body and the board are insulated.\n LoDi-21MTC(-S) — The LoDi-21MTC board and its connections\n2. The LoDi-21MTC-S board and its connections\nOn the LoDi-21MTC-S board we have done without the higher outputs such as AUX6–AUX12. These are mostly logic outputs or are used in manufacturer-specific ways.\nWe have used the space for series resistors. That means the board can be used directly in locomotives with LEDs. You do not have to add any resistors on top.\n LoDi-21MTC(-S) — The LoDi-21MTC-S board and its connections\nConnection information, NMRA colour scheme:\nTR-R = right-hand rail = red TR-L = left-hand rail = black MOT 1 = motor right = orange MOT 2 = motor left = grey LV = front light = white, 1k built in LH = rear light = yellow, 1k built in U+ = shared + = blue AUX1 = switchable channel 1 = green, 1k AUX2 = switchable channel 2 = purple, 1k LS− / LS+ = loudspeaker = brown\n LoDi-21MTC(-S) — The LoDi-21MTC-S board and its connections\nHere we have now fitted LEDs with directional lighting in the locomotive, using 4 light channels. On the LoDi-21MTC-S, 1 kilohm resistors are fitted at F0V/H as well as at AUX1 and AUX2. You therefore do not have to fit any additional resistors for the directional lighting in the locomotive.\n LoDi-21MTC(-S) — The LoDi-21MTC-S board and its connections\nConnection information, Märklin® colour scheme:\nTR-R = right-hand rail = red TR-L = left-hand rail = brown MOT 1 = motor right = green MOT 2 = motor left = blue LV = front light = grey, 1k built in LH = rear light = yellow, 1k built in U+ = shared + = orange AUX1 = switchable channel 1 = brown-red, 1k AUX2 = switchable channel 2 = brown-green, 1k AUX3 = switchable channel 3 = brown-yellow AUX4 = switchable channel 4 = brown-white LS− / LS+ = loudspeaker = white\n LoDi-21MTC(-S) — The LoDi-21MTC-S board and its connections\nIn this example we have removed a board from a Märklin locomotive and left the original LED lighting in place. The series resistors would now be missing here, which we now have again with the LoDi-21MTC-S, so no additional resistors have to be added.\nHere is a small example of the LoDi-21MTC-S in a Märklin Köf, where the old Motorola decoder is removed and replaced by a 21-pin decoder of your choice.\n LoDi-21MTC(-S) — The LoDi-21MTC-S board and its connections\n3. Technical data\n LoDi-21MTC(-S) — Technical data\nLoDi-21MTC\n0–24 volts AC, DC or digital\nDimensions\nLength: 23 mm\nWidth: 16 mm\nHeight: 13 mm at its highest point (can vary from decoder to decoder)\nWeight: 2 g\n LoDi-21MTC(-S) — Technical data\nLoDi-21MTC-S\n0–24 volts AC, DC or digital\nDimensions\nLength: 23 mm\nWidth: 16 mm\nHeight: 13 mm at its highest point (can vary from decoder to decoder)\nWeight: 2 g\n LoDi-21MTC(-S) — Technical data\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are glad to help.","The LoDi-21MTC(-S) board","Features of the LoDi-21MTC board","1. The LoDi-21MTC board and its connections","2. The LoDi-21MTC-S board and its connections","sw-einfuehrung","software/introduction","Introduction and overview","The LoDi-ProgrammerFX is the innovative setup interface of the LoDi system. All the functions of the LoDi system can be edited and tested with this program. Particular value was placed on a consistent appearance and intuitive operation.",[]," Introduction and overview\nThe LoDi-ProgrammerFX is the innovative setup interface of the LoDi system. All the functions of the LoDi system can be edited and tested with this program. Particular value was placed on a consistent appearance and intuitive operation.\nThe LoDi-ProgrammerFX runs under: Windows 7, 8, 10 and 11\n macOS from 10.8 onwards Linux. After starting, the LoDi-ProgrammerFX automatically searches the network for the modules present.\nThe modules found are shown as a tree on the left-hand side.\nTo make assignment easier, every control unit has its own colour:\nLoDi-Rektor: green LoDi-S88-Commander: blue LoDi-Shift-Commander: violet LoDi-DMX-Interface: yellow LoDi-WS28-Interface: grey\nThis colour scheme is found on the hardware as well.\nThe main part of the program window holds setting dialogues for the individual modules, buses and sub-modules. You open them by simply clicking the corresponding entry in the overview tree on the left-hand side.\nA toolbar with the most important functions as well as a menu are shown in the upper part of the window.\nAll changes are either saved directly to the hardware immediately or, for more complex operations, can be applied by pressing the Apply button.\n Introduction and overview\nAny questions still open?\nWould you simply like to ask us in person?\nOr go to our forum, where experienced users are glad to help you further.\ninfo@lokstoredigital.de","sw-lodi-booster","software/lodi-rektor/lodi-booster","The [LoDi-Booster](docs:lodi-booster) converts the control signal coming from the command station over the LoDi bus into the track voltage. The LoDi-Booster has the following features:",[319,1338,1339,944,1340,1341],"Settings and firmware update\nThe LoDi-Booster converts the control signal coming from the command station over the LoDi bus into the track voltage. The LoDi-Booster has the following features:\ntwo separately switchable booster channels adjustable sensitivity for short circuits RailCom support (generating the RailCom cutout) built-in current, voltage and temperature measurement\nThe LoDi-Booster dialogue tries to present all these properties clearly. All areas can be folded open and closed. That way only what is really needed at the moment is shown.\nThe dialogue is divided up as follows:\nBooster settings: sets the settings stored in the LoDi-Booster. Booster status: shows the current booster status and allows the booster channels to be switched on and off. Booster current: measures the current draw on both booster channels. Booster voltage: measures the track voltage of both booster channels. Booster temperature: shows the temperature inside the device.\n LoDi-Booster — Settings and firmware update\n1. Changing the LoDi-Booster's µCon bus address\nAs delivered, the LoDi-Booster is set to address 1, as mentioned above. That can stay as it is and only has to be changed if you want to add another LoDi-Booster to the system.\n LoDi-Booster — Changing the LoDi-Booster's µCon bus address\nNow select the new address the device is to be given (2). A name for the device can then also be entered at (3).\nNow press the Prog. button (4) on the LoDi-Booster for 3 seconds. The LoDi-Booster now jumps into addressing mode. It signals this through the two LEDs (5), which flash alternately.\n LoDi-Booster — Changing the LoDi-Booster's µCon bus address\nNow the \"Anwenden\" button (6) in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX can be pressed. The TrainSpeed stops flashing immediately and has its new address set from now on.\n LoDi-Booster — Changing the LoDi-Booster's µCon bus address\nThe LoDi-Booster has now saved the new address and is shown on the bus again straight away.\n2. The LoDi-Booster's settings\n LoDi-Booster — The LoDi-Booster's settings\nThe LoDi-Booster stores its settings in internal memory.\nAll settings are applied and stored in the booster by pressing the \"Anwenden\" button.\nThis dialogue offers the following settings:\nSensitivity: sets the time after which, once the short-circuit threshold is exceeded, a short circuit is detected. The actual sensitivity also depends on how often the short circuit occurs. Three-rail operators should set a higher threshold here to avoid problems when running over turnouts. very fast: 100 ms fast: 200 ms normal: 300 ms slow: 400 ms very slow: 500 ms Individual short-circuit times up to 2500 ms can also be entered in the sensitivity field. That is possible on the LoDi-Booster from firmware version 2.03 onwards.\n LoDi-Booster — The LoDi-Booster's settings\nSwitch-on delay: the switch-on delay gives the waiting time before the track voltage is switched back on after a short circuit. Max current: here the maximum current limit can be set with a slider in 100 mA steps. (From FW V4.03.) Switch on automatically: if this option is set, the booster automatically switches the track voltage back on after a short circuit, observing the waiting time defined in \"switch-on delay\". If this option is not set, the booster has to be switched back on manually, either from the software or by pressing the button on the booster. RailCom support: if this option is set, the booster generates a RailCom cutout after every DCC packet. That is necessary in order to receive the data sent by the decoders in the LoDi-8-GBM feedback modules. Only set this option if you are using DCC or mfx® with RailCom.\n3. Status and displays\n LoDi-Booster — Status and displays\nFrom LoDi-ProgrammerFX version 5.2025 onwards, the boosters' status is shown directly in the status bar at the top. That does away with folding further tabs open, and the current status of active boosters is immediately visible.\nOn: the channel is switched on. If a track signal is present, the track voltage is switched through. Off: the channel is switched off. No track voltage is present. Short circuit: the channel reports a short circuit. The track voltage is switched off in this state.\nIn further fields, which can be folded open or closed at the bottom of the LoDi-ProgrammerFX, the booster can show current, voltage and, from firmware version 2.00 onwards, the device's temperature.\n LoDi-Booster — Status and displays\nThis area shows the current draw of the two booster channels over time.\n LoDi-Booster — Status and displays\nThis area shows the voltage of the two booster channels over time.\n LoDi-Booster — Status and displays\nThis area shows the temperature of the booster over time, measured near the output stage. If the value rises, the fan output adapts.\n4. Updating the LoDi-Booster's firmware\nThe LoDi-Booster can be updated through the LoDi-Rektor.\nFrom the LoDi-ProgrammerFX 2025.01 onwards there is an online updater for the devices' firmware. We show you here how to install firmware.\n LoDi-Booster — Updating the LoDi-Booster's firmware\nTo upgrade the firmware on the LoDi-Booster, you first have to put the device into bootloader mode.\nTo do that, first pull the power cable out of the LoDi-Booster.\n LoDi-Booster — Updating the LoDi-Booster's firmware\nTo activate the bootloader in the LoDi-Booster, you have to hold the Prog. button at the back of the booster down and plug the power connector back into the LoDi-Booster at the same time.\nOnce the power cable is plugged in you can let go of the button.\n LoDi-Booster — Updating the LoDi-Booster's firmware\nThe LoDi-Booster is now in bootloader mode. It signals this by all the LEDs on the device glowing red.\nOnly the LED at the µCon bus works as usual and signals an active bus by flickering.\n(Only if the LoDi-Rektor is connected and active.)\nThe booster is now shown in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX, but all the displays are now greyed out; that is how the LoDi-ProgrammerFX signals that the LoDi-Booster is in bootloader mode.\nApart from the firmware update, nothing further is possible now.\n LoDi-Booster — Updating the LoDi-Booster's firmware\nAs mentioned already, the LoDi-ProgrammerFX has offered an online update function since version 2025.01. It lets the devices' current versions be shown right in the dialogue and installed immediately.\n LoDi-Booster — Updating the LoDi-Booster's firmware\n LoDi-Booster — Updating the LoDi-Booster's firmware\nNow click the LoDi-Booster that is in the bootloader. A new menu item now appears in the bar at the top: \"Online-Update\".\nThe update dialogue opens and the server automatically searches for available updates.\nThen select the newest version shown (3) and click Install update (4). In the next dialogue the currently installed version and the version to be installed are shown to you once more.\n LoDi-Booster — Updating the LoDi-Booster's firmware\nNow you still have to confirm the update.\nAfter pressing the OK button, a progress bar now runs at the bottom right of the LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\n LoDi-Booster — Updating the LoDi-Booster's firmware\nThe LoDi-Booster reboots once after the update and then reports back on the LoDi bus as usual straight away. A quick check shows that the current firmware is now installed. Should it keep flashing red after the update, disconnect the booster from the power briefly and plug it back in.\n LoDi-Booster — Updating the LoDi-Booster's firmware\n5. Connecting and setting up the LoDi-Booster\nClick here to reach the LoDi-Booster hardware description.\n LoDi-Booster — Connecting and setting up the LoDi-Booster\n LoDi-Booster — Connecting and setting up the LoDi-Booster\nAny questions still open?\nWould you simply like to ask us in person?\nOr go to our forum, where experienced users are glad to help you further.\ninfo@lokstoredigital.de","1. Changing the LoDi-Booster's µCon bus address","2. The LoDi-Booster's settings","4. Updating the LoDi-Booster's firmware","5. Connecting and setting up the LoDi-Booster","sw-lodi-8-gbm","software/lodi-s88-commander/lodi-8-gbm","LoDi-8-GBM(-P) (v2)","The [LoDi-8-GBM v2](docs:lodi-8-gbm) and the [LoDi-8-GBM-P (v2](docs:lodi-8-gbm-p)) are RailCom-capable two- and three-rail feedback modules. They have 8 channels, shown as 8 occupancy detectors and 8 short-circuit detectors. Every channel can be given its own name of up to 16 characters.",[1348,1128,1349,1350,1351,1352,1353],"Setting up and updating the firmware in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nThe LoDi-8-GBM v2 and the LoDi-8-GBM-P (v2) are RailCom-capable two- and three-rail feedback modules. They have 8 channels, shown as 8 occupancy detectors and 8 short-circuit detectors. Every channel can be given its own name of up to 16 characters.\nEach of the 8 channels is RailCom-capable. Several RailCom-capable DCC decoders can be detected on each channel. Both the DCC address and the direction the locomotive is placed in are detected.\nIn addition, the LoDi-8-GBM (P) (v2) is able to measure the current draw for each channel.\n LoDi-8-GBM(-P) (v2) — Setting up and updating the firmware in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nThe dialogue for the LoDi-8-GBM v2 and the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 consists of the following parts:\nthe schematic view of the module with all its channels (top) the settings for the module or the channel (bottom)\n1. Assigning an address\nOn the S88.2 bus, the feedback and track occupancy detectors have to be addressed.\nTo do that, first press the Prog. (1) button on the feedback module for 3 seconds.\nThe display (2) then flashes. If you now see two dashes flashing in the display, no address has been programmed into the module yet. Otherwise the address already stored in the module flashes.\nThe module leaves programming mode again after 60 seconds.\n LoDi-8-GBM(-P) (v2) — Assigning an address\nTo check a module's address quickly, a short press on the Prog. button shows the address in the display.\nThe LoDi-Programmer shows as soon as a module is in programming mode.\nThe module with an active Prog. button is now red. If the module does not have an address yet, that is shown as well.\n LoDi-8-GBM(-P) (v2) — Assigning an address\nNow select an address, give the module a name of its own — such as Hauptbahnhof, or whatever the module is installed for — and then press Anwenden.\nThe module has now left programming mode and saved the address.\n2. The module overview in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nIn the module view, the 8 channels of the LoDi-8-GBM are shown side by side from left to right. Channel 1 is on the left and channel 8 on the right.\nThe occupancy detectors run from x.1 to x.8, the short-circuit detectors from x.9 to x.16.\n LoDi-8-GBM(-P) (v2) — The module overview in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX\nEach channel shows the number of the occupancy detector, x.1 to x.8, at the top. The state of the occupancy detector is shown in grey for unoccupied and blue for occupied.\nBelow it comes the short-circuit detector with its S88 designation, x.9 to x.16. If no short circuit has been found, it is pink. In the event of a short circuit it is shown in red.\nThe channel name and the current measurement are shown side by side.\nThe channel name can be up to 16 characters long.\nThe current measurement responds even to small currents. It only reaches its maximum, however, at 3 amperes for the LoDi-8-GBM and 9.5 amperes for the LoDi-8-GBM-P.\nThe RailCom message is shown in the left-hand area. The locomotive's direction corresponds to the direction it is placed in on the track (two-rail only). If several locomotives are detected, as in the picture here, they are shown one above the other.\n3. Module settings\n LoDi-8-GBM(-P) (v2) — Module settings\nThe module settings are activated by clicking the module name above the module view.\nThe module's name can be changed here.\nThe module name can be up to 16 characters long. It is saved on the LoDi-8-GBM (v2) and LoDi-8-GBM-P (v2) by clicking the \"Anwenden\" button.\nThe module name can also be changed in the device tree.\nHere the 8 individual channels of the LoDi-8-GBM (-P)(v2) can be set.\n LoDi-8-GBM(-P) (v2) — Module settings\nThe channel settings are called up by clicking a channel. The selected channel is highlighted in red.\nThe channel name can be changed on the left-hand side. The channel name may be 16 characters long. The setting is saved on the LoDi-8-GBM (-P)(v2) by clicking the \"Anwenden\" button.\nOn the right-hand side the thresholds for the occupancy message and the short-circuit threshold can be set. For easier orientation, the current reading from the ammeter is shown.\nThe detection threshold should be below the current value shown when a stationary locomotive is on the track.\nThe short-circuit threshold has to be worked out individually. As a rule the preset value works.\nThe RailCom threshold should only be changed in exceptional cases.\nAll values are applied for the selected channel by pressing the \"Anwenden\" button.\nIf the values are to be transferred to all the channels of the LoDi-8-GBM, please press the \"Überall Anwenden\" button.\nNote: saving the values only works if a DCC signal is present on the track.\n4. Updating the S88.2 modules\nAll S88.2-capable modules connected to the LoDi-S88-Commander (LX) can be updated directly over the bus. The update procedure is identical to that for the LoDi interfaces. (All LoDi feedback modules from 2021 onwards.)\nIn the LoDi-ProgrammerFX's S88 bus overview, the module's firmware version is shown on the right-hand side. If no number appears here, the module cannot be updated; that affects modules from before 2020.\n LoDi-8-GBM(-P) (v2) — Updating the S88.2 modules\nOn the module shown here, an update is now indicated. Clicking the right-hand button starts a further query which you now have to confirm.\nOnce the update is confirmed, the module is put into the bootloader and the update is transferred. At the bottom of the LoDi-ProgrammerFX's footer you see a transfer bar. The module's display also shows the packets received; a number counts up. Once the LoDi-ProgrammerFX has transferred the update, the module is restarted and is now online with the new version.\n LoDi-8-GBM(-P) (v2) — Updating the S88.2 modules\n LoDi-8-GBM(-P) (v2) — Updating the S88.2 modules\nShould the update go wrong...\nDo not worry: the module can always be put back into the bootloader state and flashed again. If an update has failed, you can repeat it straight away; the module has to be in bootloader mode for that.\nThe module shows you \"B0\" for bootloader in the two-digit display.\nThe LoDi-ProgrammerFX also has to detect the module in the bootloader. That is then visible in the Programmer as well.\n LoDi-8-GBM(-P) (v2) — Updating the S88.2 modules\n LoDi-8-GBM(-P) (v2) — Updating the S88.2 modules\nThe module can also be put into bootloader mode by hand, though. Proceed as follows:\nDisconnect the patch cable to the LoDi-S88-Commander (LX). At the front right of the LoDi-8-GBM(v2)(-P) there is the Prog. button (1), which is also used to assign the module's address. Hold this button down and plug the cable back in. You can let go of the button again straight after plugging in.\nThe display should now show B0. From there the module can be shown in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX again and, if an address is assigned, current firmware can be installed.\n LoDi-8-GBM(-P) (v2) — Updating the S88.2 modules\n LoDi-8-GBM(-P) (v2) — Updating the S88.2 modules\n5. Rain mode for the LoDi-8-GBM-P (v2)\nThe LoDi-8-GBM-P (v2) has a rain mode. This mode was developed specifically for garden railwayers. Most occupancy detectors on the market cannot be used in the rain, because the moisture getting in makes currents flow and the occupancy detector therefore reports the track as occupied.\nTo avoid that, we have built a rain mode into the S88-Commander.\nIf no LoDi-8-GBM-P (v2) or other updatable modules are shown on the bus, rain mode (1) is greyed out and cannot be enabled. So make sure only modules that can be updated are on the bus.\n LoDi-8-GBM(-P) (v2) — Rain mode for the LoDi-8-GBM-P (v2)\nAs soon as a LoDi-8-GBM-P (v2) is on the bus and/or further updatable modules are connected to the bus, rain mode can be enabled by moving the slider.\nAfter pressing \"Anwenden\" a query appears asking whether you want to publish the values you set to the modules. Once you confirm with OK, the information is now sent to all LoDi-8-GBM-P (v2) modules; the 8-GBM-P (v2) display now also shows the figure by which you have raised the module for rain mode.\n LoDi-8-GBM(-P) (v2) — Rain mode for the LoDi-8-GBM-P (v2)\n LoDi-8-GBM(-P) (v2) — Rain mode for the LoDi-8-GBM-P (v2)\nIf you now click the LoDi-8-GBM-P (v2), you get the overview as usual. At the top right we have now built in a further tab, \"RM\" for rain mode. If it is not clicked, rain mode is active. If RM is clicked, that is visible in red, rain mode is inactive for this module. You now have to close the module window and click the module again for the change to become visible.\nThis function is specifically for layouts run outdoors as well as indoors. A module in the house cannot do much with a rain mode, since hopefully it does not rain indoors :)\n LoDi-8-GBM(-P) (v2) — Rain mode for the LoDi-8-GBM-P (v2)\n LoDi-8-GBM(-P) (v2) — Rain mode for the LoDi-8-GBM-P (v2)\n LoDi-8-GBM(-P) (v2) — Rain mode for the LoDi-8-GBM-P (v2)\n6. Connecting and setting up the LoDi-8-GBM (-P)(v2)\nClick here to reach the LoDi-8-GBM v2 hardware description.\nClick here to reach the LoDi-8-GBM-P v2 hardware description.\n LoDi-8-GBM(-P) (v2) — Connecting and setting up the LoDi-8-GBM (-P)(v2)\n LoDi-8-GBM(-P) (v2) — Connecting and setting up the LoDi-8-GBM (-P)(v2)\nAny questions still open?\nWould you simply like to ask us in person?\nOr go to our forum, where experienced users are glad to help you further.\ninfo@lokstoredigital.de","Setting up and updating the firmware in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX","2. The module overview in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX","3. Module settings","4. Updating the S88.2 modules","5. Rain mode for the LoDi-8-GBM-P (v2)","6. Connecting and setting up the LoDi-8-GBM (-P)(v2)","sw-lodi-light-operator","software/lodi-shift-commander/lodi-light-operator","The LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED serves to control the room lighting. Three 24-hour light curves as well as various additional effects can be configured.",[1359,1360,1361,1362,1363,1364,1365,1366,1367,1368]," LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED\nThe LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED serves to control the room lighting. Three 24-hour light curves as well as various additional effects can be configured.\nWhen the editor is opened for the first time, all the settings are loaded from the device. That can take a few seconds. So you can follow it more easily, the progress of the loading operation is shown at the bottom of the LoDi-ProgrammerFX's status line.\nThe layout of the dialogue\nThe configuration dialogue consists essentially of five parts:\nthe toolbar (top) sliders for red, green, blue and white (top left) the 24-hour light curve display (top right) settings for the module and the effects (bottom centre) a table of all the light curve's control points (bottom right)\nThe toolbar\n LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED — The toolbar\nThe toolbar gives access to important functions of the LoDi-Light-Operator. The functions are explained below from left to right:\nCurve selection: here one of three 24-hour light curves can be selected. The curves are always shown in the order in which they are stored. Curve 1 is therefore always at the top, curve 2 in the middle and curve 3 is the last entry in the list. In the model railway control software the curves can be driven through states (aspects) 1–3. The curve's name is edited in the text field of the selection box. The entry is applied by pressing the Return or Enter key at the end. Import a curve from a file: loads a curve from the hard disk into the editing area. The curve is loaded with all its control points and the curve name. Export a curve to a file: saves a curve from the editing area to the hard disk. The curve is saved with all its control points and the curve name. Load the curve from the device: loads the active curve from the device. Write the curve to the device: stores the active curve on the device. Start: starts the active curve on the device. If an edited curve has not yet been transferred back to the device, the actual light curve can differ from the display in the dialogue. Time runs at the speed set previously. Pause: stops the time on the device. Light on/off: switches the LoDi-Light-Operator's outputs on or off. Time factor: sets the speed of the clock. The time factor can be set in the range between 1× and 250×. Note that there is only one clock in the LoDi-Shift-Commander, which applies to all connected LoDi-Light-Operators. Simulated time: this is the LoDi-Shift-Commander's current simulated time. It is only shown in the toolbar and cannot be changed there. Lightning effect: triggers a simple lightning effect. In the model railway control software this effect sits on state (aspect) 8. Double lightning effect: triggers a double flash, where the second flash is somewhat weaker than the first. In the model railway control software this effect sits on state (aspect) 9. Random lightning effect: triggers flashes at random over a period of time. This effect can be changed in the effect settings (bottom centre). In the model railway control software this effect sits on state (aspect) 10. Cloud effect: darkens the light to a certain degree and for a certain time. This effect only makes sense when several LoDi-Light-Operators are used and coordinated in time. The duration and intensity of this effect can be changed in the effect settings (bottom centre). In the model railway control software this effect sits on state (aspect) 11.\nAll effects are played in addition to any light curve already running and are overlaid on it.\nThe colour sliders\n LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED — The colour sliders\nThe colour sliders let you set the four channels red, green, blue and white directly. The value set is put out on the LoDi-Light-Operator's outputs straight away, so you can judge the light while setting it.\nIf an entry in the light curve is selected, it is changed by the sliders as well.\nThese sliders are also used to set the LoDi-Light-Operator's starting value, which is adopted automatically when the layout is switched on. The corresponding settings area is at the bottom centre.\nThe light curve display\n LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED — The light curve display\nThe light curve display combines many functions. On the one hand it serves to edit the light curve, on the other the current simulated time can be changed here.\nThe light curve covers a full 24-hour day. The time axis runs from left to right between 0 and 24 hours.\nThe individual colour channels red, green, blue and white are shown as curves in their colours. A value is defined for every colour at every control point. Between the control points the colour channels are interpolated linearly.\nWhen the simulated time is stopped, the control points can be moved along the time axis with the mouse.\nThe 0:00 control point is always present and cannot be moved. Its colour values are identical to those at 24:00.\nA control point can be selected with the mouse and the individual colour channels changed with the colour sliders on the left-hand side.\nThe background of the light curve display shows the approximate result. It will not match the light produced by the hardware. So check the light yourself on site.\nPlease note that all changes only take effect after being downloaded to the device. Use the \"Schreibe Kurve auf das Gerät\" button in the toolbar for that.\nThe current simulated time is shown as a dashed line (seen at about 15:30 in the picture above). This line can be grabbed with the mouse and moved. The new simulated time is transferred to the LoDi-Shift-Commander when the mouse button is released and is active immediately.\nThe control point table\n LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED — The control point table\nThe control point table is at the bottom right of the dialogue. It shows all the control points of the 24-hour light curve, sorted chronologically. The individual colour values of the light channels can be edited. The permitted range is between 0 and 1024 (10 bit).\nPlease note that all changes only take effect after being downloaded to the device. Use the \"Schreibe Kurve auf das Gerät\" button in the toolbar for that.\nSettings\nEvery LoDi-Light-Operator has the following settings dialogues:\nModule: module name and address Starting value: defines the colour slider settings that become active immediately after the layout is switched on. Lightning: settings for the random lightning effect Cloud: settings for the cloud effect\nModule\n LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED — Module\nThe settings for the LoDi-Light-Operator module comprise the module name and the address. These settings are transferred to the device by clicking the \"Anwenden\" button.\nThe module name may be 8 characters long.\nIn the address field, apart from the address currently active in the module, only free addresses are shown. The address matters for driving it from the model railway control software.\nIn the lower area the firmware active in the LoDi-Light-Operator is shown for information.\nStarting value\n LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED — Starting value\nThe starting value sets the colour settings that become active immediately after the LoDi-Light-Operator is switched on. That way you have light in the room right away, without having to start the model railway control software first.\nThe values set for red, green, blue and white are shown channel by channel in the upper area. The range is between 0 and 1023. 0 means off and 1023 full brightness.\nPressing the \"Anzeigen\" button transfers the values set to the colour sliders as well as to the LoDi-Light-Operator's outputs. They can now be changed with the colour sliders.\nThe new starting values are saved on the LoDi-Light-Operator by pressing the \"Speichern\" button and are set automatically the next time it is switched on.\nLightning\n LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED — Lightning\nThe lightning setting changes the parameters for the random lightning effect, which can be selected through state (aspect) 10 in the model railway control software.\nThis effect is suited to simulating a thunderstorm. It works particularly well when the lightning is combined with thunder sounds played at the same time.\nThe following values can be changed:\nDuration: defines the period over which the storm is to be active. Intensity: defines the strength (brightness) of the flashes. The white and blue channels are always overlaid here. Probability: sets the percentage probability of lightning.\nAll settings are applied to the LoDi-Light-Operator and saved by pressing the \"Anwenden\" button.\nCloud\n LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED — Cloud\nThe cloud setting changes the parameters for the cloud effect, which can be selected through state (aspect) 11 in the model railway control software.\nWith this effect the light level of all channels is reduced within one second by the value defined in Intensity and held for the duration of the effect.\nAfter the effect ends, the original brightness is restored within one second\nThis effect is suited to simulating passing clouds. That of course only works if several LoDi-Light-Operators are driven in a time-coordinated way by the model railway control software.\nThe following values can be changed:\nDuration: defines the period over which the darkening is to be active. Intensity: defines the strength of the darkening. All colour channels are darkened by the corresponding percentage. So take care the cloud does not turn into a solar eclipse.\nAll settings are applied to the LoDi-Light-Operator and saved by pressing the \"Anwenden\" button.\n LoDi-Light-Operator 4-C-LED — Cloud\nAny questions still open?\nWould you simply like to ask us in person?\nOr go to our forum, where experienced users are glad to help you further.\ninfo@lokstoredigital.de","The layout of the dialogue","The toolbar","The colour sliders","The light curve display","The control point table","Settings","Module","Starting value","Lightning","Cloud","lodi-motor-wib-ice1m","hardware/lighting/lodi-wib-ice-m/ice-1","ICE 1 with two power cars","Step by step: converting an ICE 1 with two power cars to the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M.",[1163,1164,217]," hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-01-5e7fe2.jpg\nStraight to the shop\nThere are several ICE 1 variants: digital, Delta and analogue with a changeover switch.\nIn principle all of them can be converted and brought up to modern technology. In this example we want to show you the ICE 1 with 2 power cars, 1 motorised car and 1 dummy from set 33701 with 2 coaches.\nConverting to our LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M gives you the following advantages:\n21-pin MTC interface in the motorised and the unpowered power car No earth springs in the coaches at all (which greatly improves how freely the coaches and the whole train roll) Absolutely flicker-free thanks to reliable transfer through the current-carrying coupling. Speaker preparation right on the board Easy to convert\nWe are often asked whether to go with or without pickup changeover.\nLet us explain briefly:\nIf you run a computer-controlled layout, in most cases you have no power interruptions at signals. If that is the case you do not need pickup changeover. We connect the pickups front to back, which has the advantage that the train draws current from twice as many points. If you still have signals installed that affect the train, you have to use the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M-S. There the pickup has to be switched over from the front one to the rear one.\nIn our current example we do not use pickup changeover.\n1. The motorised power car\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-02-ac03b2.jpg\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-03-066622.jpg\nFirst we pull the cover off the coupling.\nOn the underside of the power car there is a slotted screw, which also has to be removed. The body of the power car can then simply be lifted off.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-04-45a654.png\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-05-4f4307.jpg\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-06-0040a3.png\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-07-228dda.jpg\nOnce you have taken the top off, you should first check the condition of the motor. A 5-pole high-performance motor should be fitted in any case. In most cases it already is.\nThere are 3 capacitors on the motor in total. Two of them should be removed. Modern decoders do not support them and they otherwise interfere with motor control.\nYou can now unsolder the old board and take it out of the housing along with the 2 mounting screws.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-08-2b5441.png\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-09-df2330.jpg\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-10-9b7b32.jpg\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-11-28be2f.png\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-12-44afeb.jpg\nOlder ICE 1s still have bulbs for the head lights, in most cases one white and one red at the front. In principle they can still be used, but we have already provided series resistors on the board for conversion to LEDs — especially since the younger sibling, the ICE 2, comes with LEDs.\nWe also offer a conversion kit complete with a board that already has LEDs fitted. All you have to do is unsolder the cables from the old holder and solder them to the new one.\nIf you want to keep using the old bulbs, please bridge resistors R4 and R5 on the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M(-S). (The arrows marked green in the picture.)\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-13-0717df.png\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-14-2ef997.jpg\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-15-21d7ec.jpg\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-16-0d94e1.jpg\nFor the rest of the conversion we use our own LoDi-ICE1-Front retrofit inserts with the LEDs and a new holder.\nSolder the cables to the board as shown in the picture. You can use the original cables; only the brown or orange cable should be shortened a little, as it previously ran straight to both sockets.\nThe cable colours are:\nWhite LED = grey cable\nRed LED = yellow cable\n+ = brown or orange\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-17-e06d5c.png\nNow we fit the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M and screw it down the same way the original board was.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-18-08ff3d.jpg\nNow solder the cables from your original train back on as follows: left-hand side\nPickup = black cable RT coupling = red GE coupling = yellow\nRight-hand side\nGround = brown, drive AUX 5 = amplified output for cab lighting Motor L = green Motor R = blue VCC = orange L_RT = yellow L_WS = grey\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-19-4228cd.png\nFor our conversion we use an ESU LokPilot V5 MKL. You can use any 21-pin decoder, though — it only needs amplified outputs on F1 to F4 if you are using the version with pickup changeover. Aux 5 can be a logic output.\nHere is the breakdown of the functions of the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M:\nLight front = head light white\nLight rear = head light red\nAux 1 = pickup changeover, power car 1\nAux 2 = pickup changeover, power car 2\nAux 3 = high beam (if fitted)\nAux 4 = coach lighting\nAux 5 = cab lighting\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-20-6e6227.png\nFrom motor board version 1.50 onwards there are 2 solder jumpers. They can be used if you are not using pickup changeover. With these jumpers the interior lighting of the coaches is switched through the coupling. They exist so that the decoder's Aux 1 function output can be used, which means no loco decoder with amplified Aux 3 and Aux 4 is required (without MKL).\nIf the jumper is set at SJ1, switching happens over Aux 4; at SJ2 it is Aux 1.\nCAUTION!!!\nOnly ever one jumper may be set. If both solder bridges are set, it could destroy the decoder!\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-21-071123.png\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-22-432e98.png\nShould you want to fit a sound decoder in one power car or even in both, we have left room for a speaker on the board. You can also connect it to separate solder pads.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-23-e24fab.jpg\n2. The unpowered power car\nIn principle this train also runs excellently with 2 motors — that lets us pull train lengths of up to 14 coaches. If it is to stay a short train, though, one motor in the whole train is enough in most cases. Nor does the power car without a motor have to be converted. But if you would like to fit front LED lighting here as well, you can use the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M here too.\nIn that case we can do without the pickup changeover (-S).\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-24-273c44.png\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-25-8a71bb.jpg\nLet us start by opening the power car without a motor: again pull the cover off the coupling and remove the screw on the lower part of the power car.\nNow remove the screws of the original board straight away and unsolder the cables.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-26-98c407.png\nIn our example the power car without a motor is also fitted with the LoDi-WiB-ICE1, so that the head lights are LEDs here as well.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-27-a200c1.jpg\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-28-0cf09d.jpg\nNow screw the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M into the power car. Connect the cables as follows:\nLeft pickup = black cable Left RT coupling = red Left GE coupling = yellow Right brown = ground Aux 5 = connection for cab lighting Orange = VCC Grey = L_WS Yellow = L_RT\nThe old changeover for the lighting can be removed; it is no longer needed.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-29-0f2306.png\nFor our conversion we use an ESU LokPilot FX V5. You can use any 21-pin function decoder, though — it only needs amplified outputs on F1 to F4. Aux 5 can be a logic output; we use it to switch the cab lighting and it is amplified on the board.\nHere is the breakdown of the functions of the LoDi-Motor WiB ICE-M:\nLight front = head light white\nLight rear = head light red\nAux 3 = high beam (if fitted)\nAux 4 = coach lighting\nAux 5 = cab lighting\n2. Technical data\nDimensions of the LoDi-(Motor) WiB ICE-M-S:\nLength 180 mm\nWidth 29 mm\nThickness 1.55 mm\nWeight: 18 grams, or 19 grams for the (-S) variant.\nThe LoDi-Motor ICE-M(-S) has a standard 21-pin MTC interface and can be fitted with any common loco or function decoder with a 21-pin interface. Do make sure to use a decoder with amplified Aux 3 and 4 if you are using the version with pickup changeover.\n hardware-beleuchtung-lodi-motor-wib-ice1m-30-0dedde.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","sw-installation-windows","software/installation/windows","Windows","Installing and updating the LoDi-ProgrammerFX on Windows.",[956,957,958],"Here we describe in a few short steps how to install, update and start the LoDi-ProgrammerFX on your computer.\nTo use the LoDi-ProgrammerFX you need a 64-bit Windows computer.\nFor the best experience we recommend Windows 10 64-bit or newer.\n1. Download and installation\nClick the \"Download LoDi-Start-Installer\" button to download the current version of the installer. You may have to confirm that you want to run the file anyway.\nDownload LoDi-Installer.exe\n software-installation-windows-01-3306ad.png\n software-installation-windows-02-5346b1.png\nAfter the download, open the file LoDi-Installer.exe; the setup assistant starts.\n software-installation-windows-03-9732a9.png\n software-installation-windows-04-c9c8d9.png\n software-installation-windows-05-e88bc9.png\n software-installation-windows-06-2b301e.png\nFirst choose the language, then the setup assistant starts.\nFollow the instructions until the software is installed.\n software-installation-windows-07-4572a6.png\n software-installation-windows-08-f558e4.png\nWhen the assistant has finished, an icon is placed on the desktop: the LoDi-Start icon.\n2. Starting and updating\nDouble-clicking the LoDi-Start icon now starts the LoDi-ProgrammerFX directly.\nWe have reworked the update procedure: updates used to be fetched through LoDi-Start — since version 2025.10 this happens in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX itself.\nThere you can install updates or, where we have released them, restore earlier versions.\nHere is how you stay up to date from now on:\n\nIf your PC is online, the available update is now shown\nin the LoDi-ProgrammerFX itself.\nClicking the update symbol opens a new dialog in which a drop-down shows you the new version and lets you start the update.\nOnce the update is finished, the LoDi-ProgrammerFX closes automatically and reopens with the new version.\n software-installation-windows-09-9ee2d7.png\n software-installation-windows-10-868ba5.png\n3. Offline updates\nin progress…\n software-installation-windows-11-c1a6ac.png\n software-installation-windows-12-bc7861.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.","con-a","lodi-con/lodi-con-a","The features and controls of the A variant of the LoDi-Con.",[1386]," lodi-con-con-a-01-0565ae.png\nThe LoDi-Con in the battery-pack variant.\nThe LoDi-Con in the battery-pack variant ships with the pack included.\n1. The LoDi-Con A, its connections and LEDs\nOn the back of the LoDi-Con A you will find:\nUSB-C connector = a 5-volt power source with a USB-C connector goes here. It supplies the LoDi-Con with power for the battery pack. The device can charge and be used at the same time. The maximum charging current is 1 amp. Reset button = should the LoDi-Con ever hang so badly that it stops responding, this button cuts the power to the CPU. Charge indicator LED = this LED shows the charge state: red = charging, blue = pack full.\n lodi-con-con-a-02-baf720.png\n lodi-con-con-a-03-3901dc.png\nWhen charged, the LoDi-Con A shows a blue LED.\n lodi-con-con-a-04-91c4bb.jpg\nAs soon as a USB-C cable is plugged in, the LoDi-Con starts charging the pack, which is shown by a red LED.\n lodi-con-con-a-05-90a058.jpg\n2. About charging\nThe LoDi-Con has a charging mechanism that treats the battery pack well. Switched off, the LoDi-Con draws less than 0.05 mA. If you expect not to use the device for a while, charge it once more first.\nIf the device has been unused for a long time and the pack is completely flat, the LoDi-Con first has to be charged to a certain point. That can take up to an hour before it will start. After that the device is fully ready again and can be used normally.\n3. Properties of the LoDi-Con A in LoDi-OS\nIn terms of software the LoDi-Con A and B are essentially identical; the LoDi-Con A only has one menu entry more:\nGo to Settings > Device > Screen, where you will find an option:\n\"Always on while charging\"\nTicking this option stops the LoDi-Con A from going to sleep or switching off while a USB-C cable is in the charging socket supplying it with power.\n lodi-con-con-a-06-3c43d5.png\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.\n lodi-con-con-a-07-3b8851.jpg","The LoDi-Con in the battery-pack variant.","api-allgemeines","api/general","General API","The frame every LoDi protocol shares: transport, the layout of a telegram and device discovery.",[1393,1394,1395,1396,827,1397,1398],"Ports used\nEvery LoDi device has an IP address of its own. Communication runs over UDP on port 11092.\nPing requests over ICMP are answered so that communication can be checked. That facility is meant for the user rather than the control software; see Establishing a connection below.\nLoDi LX devices such as the LoDi-S88-Commander LX also communicate over TCP on port 11092.\nPacket format\nA UDP data packet consists of at least 3 bytes.\nPacket type Command Packet number Payload\n \nA TCP data packet consists of at least 5 bytes.\nLength high Length low Packet type Command Packet number Payload\n \nThe length covers every byte from the packet type through to the last payload byte. This information is needed to tell packets apart within a TCP stream.\nThe following packet types are defined:\n0x20: REQ – request; answered with ACK, NACK or BUSY 0x21: ACK – the REQ packet was processed successfully 0x22: EVT – packet sent automatically about changes at the sensors 0x23: BUSY – the REQ packet has not finished executing yet 0x3F: NACK – the REQ packet is faulty. The request cannot be processed.\nThe command field has to hold a command the device supports. The packet number can be chosen freely; it is mirrored in the reply packet. The packet number of EVT packets is assigned sequentially by our devices.\nThe payload is optional. Its length depends on the command in question.\nCourse of communication\nRequests from the control software\nCommunication is half duplex. Every request from the control software starts with a REQ packet. The device answers with an ACK or a NACK packet.\nFor commands that need to talk to sub-devices, a REQ packet may also be acknowledged with BUSY. In that case the REQ packet is to be sent repeatedly until either ACK or NACK comes back; other requests may be sent in between. Commands that can answer with BUSY are marked accordingly.\nIf no answer comes from the device within 200 ms over UDP, packet loss can be assumed. The REQ packet is then to be sent again. If there is no answer after three REQ packets, assume loss of communication with that device.\nOver TCP retransmission on packet loss happens automatically.\nExample: requesting the firmware version of the device\nPacket type Command Packet number\n0x20 0x0F 0x01\nPacket type Command Packet number Payload\n0x21 0x0F 0x01 0x03 0x01 0x03 0x01\nEvents\nA device can send an unsolicited event to the control software. Events are always sent in an EVT packet. EVT packets must not be acknowledged by the control software. EVT packets are sent with an ascending packet number, which is how a missed EVT packet is noticed.\nExample: an event from a LoDi-S88-Commander\nPacket type Command Packet number Payload\n0x22 0x31 0x02 0x02 0x02 0x06 0x01 0x02 0x07 0x00\nEstablishing a connection\nA connection should be established in the following steps:\nOpen a UDP port locally in the control software, or open a TCP connection to the device. The local port number does not matter. Send a REQ packet with command 0x0F (query FW version) to the IP address of the device on port 11092. Check the answer, timeout 200 ms Repeatedly: handle event packets, send further commands, and poll for the information you need where necessary\nSearching for devices\nOur devices also answer UDP broadcast requests. To scan for devices it is enough to send a REQ packet with command 0x0F by UDP broadcast to the broadcast address of every network interface whose netmask is not 255.255.255.255. The devices then answer with an ACK packet carrying their device identifier and firmware version. The following device identifiers are defined:\n0x03: LoDi-Rektor 0x09: LoDi-Shift-Commander 0x0A: LoDi-S88-Commander (LX)\nThe LoDi-S88-Commander can be told apart from the LX: the LX has firmware from version v06.00.00 onwards.\nIf the network interfaces cannot be queried, the general broadcast address 255.255.255.255 can be used.\nExample:\nnetworks found:\nwlan: 192.168.1.2 netmask 255.255.255.0 broadcast 192.168.1.255\nlan0: 192.168.2.1 netmask 255.255.255.0 broadcast 192.168.2.255\nTwo UDP broadcast packets are to be sent:\nDestination address 192.168.1.255, destination port 11092, contents of the UDP packet 0x20, 0x0F, 0x00 Destination address 192.168.2.255, destination port 11092, contents of the UDP packet 0x20, 0x0F, 0x01\nAnswer from the devices:\nAddress 192.168.2.88, contents of the UDP packet 0x21, 0x0F, 0x01, 0x0A, 0x04, 0x02, 0x04 LoDi-S88-Commander v04.02.04 Address 192.168.2.44, contents of the UDP packet 0x21, 0x0F, 0x01, 0x03, 0x01, 0x03, 0x01 LoDi-Rektor v01.03.01\nEvery device is therefore on network interface lan0.\nLoDi API – General API Service Adobe Acrobat document, 88.6 KB","Ports used","Packet format","Course of communication","Requests from the control software","Establishing a connection","Searching for devices","einsteiger-3-leiter","getting-started/three-rail","The LoDi system and three-rail","The LoDi system working with three-rail track, Märklin® for instance.",[],"The LoDi system working together with three-rail track, from Märklin® for instance.\nThree-rail has a very large share of the model railway market. Many customers chose it because Märklin® was, quite simply, the synonym for model railways.\nOur customers value us because they know how much thought we put into keeping a layout free of trouble. So in this section we would like to pass our experience on. The possibilities in the technology keep growing, and with them come new expectations and new offerings that get more and more out of it. To name a few of the demands: where on the layout is a locomotive? How do I read and set CVs directly? How much current is being drawn?\nWhere did the short circuit happen?\nAll of this information is something we can already provide today!\nWe would like to help you decide on a technology that is, first of all, future-proof and easy to understand.\nSo many questions come up right at the start — \"what do I actually need to run a reliable layout?\", for example.\nThe most important decision a three-rail operator has to make is which data format to choose.\nMärklin® locomotives from 2018 onwards, for instance, have an mSD or mLD decoder that also understands DCC. Unfortunately those decoders cannot do RailCom, which is what reports the locomotive's position. There are small RailCom transmitters, from ESU among others, that can simply be built into the locomotive.\nLocomotives built before 2018 can usually only do MFX or Motorola; older models built before 2006 may only do Motorola.\nOur recommendation has therefore always been to convert everything to DCC or MFX. Locomotives that only speak Motorola are best converted.\nIf you would rather not give Motorola up, though, you lose a fair amount of the comfort the new system offers.\nWe have put together a choice for you, with more information written up behind each option.\nYou can now decide between these two topics. Click \"I want to use the latest technology!\" if you want to run your railway with the newest technology. The clear advantages: locomotive positions and short-circuit detection down to the block, and settings made live from the control software.\nIf you would rather run conventionally, click \"I want to run conventionally!\". We will then take you to another information page.\nI want to use the latest technology!\nDo you want precise feedback with locomotive position, and to run MFX® and/or DCC? Then click here.\n einsteiger-3-leiter-01-2e3e34.jpg\nI want to run conventionally!\nDo you want to run conventionally, with Motorola and other protocols over the traditional kind of feedback? Then click here.\n einsteiger-3-leiter-02-f63bca.jpg","einsteiger-3-leiter-digital","getting-started/three-rail/digital-operation","Digital operation","Building a three-rail layout digitally: command station, boosters, feedback and wiring, all in context.",[1411,1412,1413,1414,1415,1416,1417],"This variant offers the most comfort and the greatest safety for your models. The model railway software knows exactly where a locomotive or a train is. If you re-rail a locomotive, the computer knows immediately where it is. Long hunts for short circuits on the layout are a thing of the past, because our technology shows you in the software exactly where the short is.\n1. The locomotives and the data format\nThe most common question is of course: can I keep using my vehicles?\nYes of course — although you should convert your locomotives either to MFX or to DCC with RailCom if they still speak Motorola.\n(Would you rather not give Motorola up? Then click here.)\nFirst we have to check whether we can add to or change the technology in the locomotives.\nFor Märklin locomotives with MFX that can do DCC, please set them to DCC and fit a RailCom transmitter. For Märklin locomotives with MFX older than 2018, you should fit a RailCom transmitter and give it an address of its own. The locomotive is then addressed in the system with an MFX UID and a DCC address. For locomotives with DCC — Brawa, Roco and the like — you should check whether they already do RailCom. If yours does not, we recommend a more recent decoder or fitting a RailCom transmitter. For locomotives with Motorola: please convert to DCC RailCom or MFX — or grant them a life in the display cabinet ;)\nOnce the locomotives have been checked and it is clear which principle to go with, we recommend running everything in DCC, or in DCC and MFX, for the sake of driving comfort.\n2. The track system\nSince we are talking about three-rail track here, we should of course briefly mention the kind of track system.\nLooking at Märklin® three-rail track, there are 3 variants:\n1. C track\nC track is a popular choice where running reliability in hidden yards matters. It is an absolutely top-class track when it comes to play layouts where the scenery is secondary. Reporting carriages is a little more involved here, because on C track two contact tabs have to be separated to isolate the left rail profile from the right. Only then can a feedback system be run on C track, conventionally or with carriage detection.\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-01-7e551d.png\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-02-2ecf4c.png\n2. K track\nProbably the most common track system: a sturdy plastic-sleeper track that is a favourite in layout building. General vehicle detection is possible here without much effort.\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-03-79143d.png\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-04-3118b1.png\n3. M track\nOnce widespread, M track still has plenty of devotees.\nIt runs without any trouble on our system; here we report over the centre rail.\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-05-1aae36.png\n3. The first small setup\nA small test layout is the best way to feel your way into all of this. That is why we use this small plan to show you which steps have to be taken where, to arrive at a fully computer-controlled model railway.\nAn example with C track. (Click the pictures to enlarge them)\nThe isolation points come later; for now the point is simply to run a locomotive in a circle.\nBuild this stretch on a small board. You can download the parts list and the track plan as a PDF right here:\nLoDi track plan, three-rail test.pdf Adobe Acrobat document, 513.6 KB\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-07-83c429.png\n4. The computer\nFirst we need a computer to install the LoDi-ProgrammerFX on. That can be a Windows computer from Windows 8 64-bit onwards, a Linux machine such as Ubuntu, or a Mac from macOS 10.11.x onwards.\nJava has to be able to run on the machine. Our LoDi-ProgrammerFX runs on Java 14 and newer.\nThe LoDi-ProgrammerFX for Windows and Linux ships with Java; all you have to do is install\nthe LoDi-ProgrammerFX.\nYou can control our components over a LAN — that is, wired — or from a laptop connected to the network over Wi-Fi (provided the Wi-Fi router has good signal quality).\nThe LoDi components then have to be on that network too. A combination of a desktop machine and a laptop is of course possible as well, and depending on the size of the layout it can be a great help.\nHere we show an example with a wired network connected to a router.\nTo find out how to configure an IP address for the LoDi-Rektor, LoDi-S88-Commander or LoDi-Shift-Commander, click here.\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-08-f9934c.png\n5. Driving\nTo begin with we want to get one locomotive running on the new system.\nFor that we use:\nThe LoDi-Rektor as the command station; it speaks DCC, M3 and Motorola. In this example we use DCC only. The LoDi-Booster, a double booster that delivers 2 track sections with 2.3 amps each, or up to 5 amps when combined.\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-09-c98eee.png\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-10-3eb679.png\nFirst we mount the devices on the board. Then we connect the LoDi-Rektor and the LoDi-Booster to their power supplies (included in the delivery).\nAfter that the patch cable for the IP network is plugged in. This can now be connected to your home network through a switch.\nNow we connect the LoDi-Rektor to the LoDi-Booster over the µCon bus; these are joined with a green patch cable.\nEvery device has its own colour and an arrow marking. To find your way around the layout more easily, we recommend sticking to this colour code. The µCon bus terminator supplied is the last thing to be plugged into the µCon Out socket of the LoDi-Booster.\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-11-be5ee6.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-12-0ea2f1.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-13-0821f5.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-14-4aa7c2.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-15-9c4640.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-16-7c21b6.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-17-1b5d46.png\nNow that the Rektor and the Booster are connected, we can wire up the track.\nFor that we use a 0.75 mm² cable.\nWe strip one end of the cable with a stripping tool and use a 0.75 mm² ferrule. The ferrule is easily crimped with a ferrule crimper.\nNow we cut the cable to length and solder it to a piece of track — in this case we fed the power in at the siding. That is enough to get a locomotive running briefly.\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-18-4089a8.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-19-626cdd.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-20-fc91cb.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-21-4ac8ee.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-22-4ee587.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-23-624720.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-24-6c7f8b.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-25-4c56c5.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-26-5c3e31.png\nWe have now connected every device, hooked up the power and put the LoDi-Rektor on the network. (If the LoDi-Rektor is not configured yet, click here)\nThe LoDi-ProgrammerFX now shows you the LoDi-Rektor on the left-hand side.\nIn this configuration we use, as described above, a network switch, a PC and — if there is one — an internet connection.\nThe LoDi-ProgrammerFX now serves as the driving software.\nThe LoDi-Rektor can also be used directly with control software such as iTrain or WinDigipet. Please note that the LoDi-ProgrammerFX is not an automation system: it exists to monitor and configure the LoDi products.\nFor this first test we use a locomotive with a DCC decoder that has RailCom.\nThe overview in the LoDi-ProgrammerFX shows the connected LoDi-Booster alongside the LoDi-Rektor.\nClicking a device takes you to its settings. We will not go into detail here — we want to get a locomotive running. If you want to know more about configuring the devices, click here.\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-27-c6983b.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-28-9bff94.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-29-6f465b.png\nNow we click the DCC tab.\nA dialog opens in which we can drive locomotives, throw turnouts and programme DCC CVs (PoM).\nFirst click the \"Activate DCC\" button and then \"Booster voltage\".\nThe buttons turn dark green and are now active. Both green LEDs on outputs A and B of the LoDi-Booster should now be lit.\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-30-069465.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-31-030486.png\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-32-995d2a.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-33-9f73e2.png\nNow we enter the address of our DCC locomotive in the \"DCC address\" field. Press \"Add locomotive\" and the address is entered into the locomotive list.\nThe locomotive can now be driven from the \"DCC commands\" menu, and its functions switched.\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-34-3495da.png\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-35-b37f17.png\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-36-fb560b.png\nWe have successfully got a locomotive running with the LoDi-Rektor and the LoDi-Booster. To close this chapter, one more thing:\nThe LoDi-ProgrammerFX does not replace control software. It exists to configure and check the LoDi components. It can also be used to drive locomotives and throw turnouts, but our aim here was only a quick test, not proper operation.\nThe LoDi-ProgrammerFX is developed continuously and keeps gaining new functions from us. If something is missing for you, talk to us, or turn to our forum.\n6. Switching\nThe next thing we turn to is throwing the 3 turnouts on our test layout. As this is only a small layout, we went for the LoDi-83-AC in this variant. It is a turnout decoder that works over the DCC protocol.\nShould your layout grow larger, we recommend switching over our SC system with the operators and the LoDi-Shift-Commander. That gives you a high-performance switching bus of its own, on which you can run a total of 230 turnouts using the LoDi-Operators 4-WD-AC, for example.\nBut back to the matter at hand.\nThe LoDi-83-AC and its sibling the LoDi-Operator 4-WD-AC switch alternating current. Together with the solenoid drives of most manufacturers that is a perfect combination. Our outputs therefore switch genuine AC and not, as most decoders on the market do, DC.\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-37-6f433f.png\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-38-216f5f.png\nFirst we install our LoDi-83-AC on the board next to the LoDi-Booster.\nIf you have not installed any turnout drives yet, now is the time; in our example we went for the original C-track drives.\nWe connect track output B of the LoDi-Booster to the DCC input of the LoDi-83-AC.\nThe LoDi-83-AC absolutely requires an AC transformer for its power supply!!! It must not be fed with DC. There is more on this in the wiring examples for the LoDi-83-AC.\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-39-02811b.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-40-fcdb4b.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-41-0bb222.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-42-a0165d.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-43-49235f.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-44-c98b3a.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-45-04da37.jpg\nAs a cable junction on the way to the turnout we recommend our LoDi distributor, 3-way. You are of course free to use other junctions.\nNow we connect our 3 turnouts to the LoDi-83-AC, using a 0.25 mm² cable which we again crimp with the matching ferrules.\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-46-d8b2fe.jpg\nThe decoder is connected now, and the LEDs show that it is ready.\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-47-eaf7d8.png\nThe LoDi-ProgrammerFX has a tab called \"Turnouts\". Every DCC turnout decoder can be driven from it.\nThe LoDi-83-AC is programmed to addresses 1 – 4 as delivered; pressing red and green in turnout fields 1 – 3 should now throw the 3 turnouts back and forth.\nThe CV programming tab also lets you adjust the switching times of the LoDi-83-AC comfortably — although the decoder's default settings are already ideal for solenoid drives.\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-48-df6b96.png\n7. Feedback\nThe basic prerequisite for a computer-controlled railway is feedback, which we implement with the LoDi-S88-Commander and the LoDi-8-GBM. This becomes the eye of the computer.\nThe computer can only sensibly control what it can see.\nIn the earlier — the old — variant, feedback modules were simply triggers, set off by a connection to ground.\nThink of it like a light switch. You walk into a room and turn the light on. Nothing else happens when the locomotive enters a block, or, in the comparison, enters the room.\nBut here we have the biggest change compared with the old systems. Not only reporting axles, but capturing the locomotive's data in the block — in the feedback module — is new in these decoders. On top of that this variant gives us short-circuit detection down to the block, which three-rail operators in particular benefit from a great deal.\nThe LoDi-8-GBM actually comes from two-rail operation, where it is used as an occupancy detector by measuring current.\nSo why not use that technology on every three-rail layout as well?\nThat is exactly where we come in.\nYou could of course already report M track to the LoDi-8-GBM before — although on M track only the centre rail can be reported, which is no problem in itself, but it means no carriages are detected and locomotives are only seen through the pickup shoe.\nWith C and K track it is a little different: here we can use the rail profiles as the measuring point, and carriage detection on both of these track systems is perfectly possible with the LoDi-8-GBM too. The turnouts are monitored along with everything else, so the computer can see when 2 locomotives are in one turnout street and stop them.\nSo what do we have to change for that?\nThere is a detailed description of this in the manual of the LoDi-8-GBM; please scroll to point 7, “Connecting the LoDi-8-GBM to three-rail track”.\nWe will go over it briefly here as well.\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-49-080e40.png\nFrom now on we use the centre rail as ground. That means we no longer break the centre rail anywhere on the layout — in the LoDi system all grounds may be connected, since the blocks already separate all the profiles, the blocks and the turnouts from one another anyway.\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-50-9ddea4.png\nIn this example you see a form of detection we already use in many layouts today. It picks up the first current-carrying wheel that touches the block and can generate feedback from it directly.\nThis variant does not detect carriages yet, but that comes on top in the next chapter.\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-51-849b74.png\nLet us start with dividing our small test layout into blocks. In our example we use one feedback module per block. Once the locomotives are all well adjusted and measured in, this variant can control entire halls of layouts. If the software you use needs several detectors per block, you have to adjust the number of detectors for your software: you may need an entry, a braking and a stopping detector. In our example we use iTrain, which gets along well with one detector per block.\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-52-272bd4.png\nNow we separate the rail profiles on the right and left sides directly at the turnouts and on the tracks, using the matching insulating shoes for C track. If you use K track, we recommend insulating rail joiners.\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-53-cdec27.jpg\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-54-e0fb29.png\nFor our example we now need 18 insulating shoes; if you have fitted them as in the drawing above, the result is 8 feedback contacts.\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-55-d084be.png\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-56-6c66cf.png\n einsteiger-3-leiter-digital-57-bb05fe.png","1. The locomotives and the data format","2. The track system","3. The first small setup","4. The computer","5. Driving","6. Switching","7. Feedback","con-zentrale-rektor","lodi-con/command-stations/lodi-rektor","Setting the LoDi-Rektor up as a command station in the LoDi-Con.",[],"\n lodi-con-zentrale-rektor-02-9d4d40.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-rektor-03-cc9b39.png\nIn progress…\nThe LoDi-Rektor is compatible with the LoDi-Con from firmware version 3.1.0 onwards.\n lodi-con-zentrale-rektor-04-e6405e.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-rektor-05-704aa1.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-rektor-06-7d240b.png\nTo connect the LoDi-Rektor to the LoDi-Con, proceed as follows:\nFirst tap the \"house\", which always takes you back to the main screen.\nFrom there go to \"Settings\" > \"Command station\" >\n lodi-con-zentrale-rektor-07-a15a4e.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-rektor-08-fdca62.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-rektor-09-d4d9b8.png\nIf command stations are already listed here, you can click \"Search for command stations\".\nThe LoDi-Con now searches the network and shows the compatible stations it finds.\nNow choose the LoDi-Rektor you want to connect to the LoDi-Con. In our example it is the top one.\nNote:\n(If you only have the LoDi-Rektor on the network, this menu will also show a z21.\nThat is because the LoDi-Rektor understands the z21 protocol as well, so that a Roco Wi-Fi handheld can connect to it. In this case please use the LoDi-Rektor.\n(Devices shown green in the \"Search for command stations\" overview are already known to the LoDi-Con.)\n lodi-con-zentrale-rektor-10-fd3388.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-rektor-11-f80487.png\nYou can change the name of the LoDi-Rektor if you like.\nThe LoDi-Con now connects to the LoDi-Rektor.\nEvery connected command station is shown at the top left of the display.\nA new symbol (LRe) for the LoDi-Rektor now has to appear at the top left. If that LRe is steady, the connection is up. If it blinks, the LoDi-Con has no connection to the LoDi-Rektor or is trying to establish one.\n lodi-con-zentrale-rektor-12-05aa78.png\nTapping the top left takes you to the overview of command stations, which also shows whether a connection is active. You can now tap the LoDi-Rektor to see its IP address and status.\n lodi-con-zentrale-rektor-13-246dea.png\n lodi-con-zentrale-rektor-14-c0d208.jpg\nWould you like to see the quality of the devices for yourself?\nGet in touch with us HERE!\nVisit our forum, where experienced users are happy to help you.",{"_14":1418,"_1542":833,"_1543":1560,"_20":1419,"_16":649,"_18":1420},{"_14":1405,"_1542":1399,"_1543":1560,"_20":1406,"_16":1407,"_18":1408},{"_14":1399,"_1542":678,"_1543":1560,"_20":1400,"_16":1401,"_18":1402},{"_14":1387,"_1542":807,"_1543":1560,"_20":1388,"_16":1389,"_18":1390},{"_14":1381,"_1542":959,"_1543":1560,"_20":1382,"_16":1249,"_18":1383},{"_14":1375,"_1542":1106,"_1543":1560,"_20":1376,"_16":1377,"_18":1378},{"_14":1369,"_1542":634,"_1543":1560,"_20":1370,"_16":1371,"_18":1372},{"_14":1354,"_1542":404,"_1543":1560,"_20":1355,"_16":594,"_18":1356},{"_14":1342,"_1542":518,"_1543":1560,"_20":1343,"_16":1344,"_18":1345},{"_14":1333,"_1542":647,"_1543":1560,"_20":1334,"_16":699,"_18":1335},{"_14":1327,"_1542":1100,"_1543":1560,"_20":1328,"_16":1329,"_18":1330},{"_14":1317,"_1542":459,"_1543":1560,"_20":1318,"_16":1319,"_18":1320},{"_14":1311,"_1542":569,"_1543":1560,"_20":1312,"_16":1313,"_18":1314},{"_14":1298,"_1542":713,"_1543":1560,"_20":1299,"_16":798,"_18":290},{"_14":1284,"_1542":860,"_1543":1560,"_20":1285,"_16":520,"_18":1286},{"_14":1272,"_1542":1027,"_1543":1560,"_20":1273,"_16":406,"_18":1274},{"_14":1257,"_1542":1251,"_1543":1560,"_20":1258,"_16":1259,"_18":1260},{"_14":1251,"_1542":1021,"_1543":1560,"_20":1252,"_16":1253,"_18":1254},{"_14":960,"_1542":1239,"_1543":1560,"_20":1244,"_16":351,"_18":1245},{"_14":1239,"_1542":1230,"_1543":1560,"_20":1240,"_16":303,"_18":1241},{"_14":1230,"_1542":-5,"_1543":1560,"_20":1230,"_16":1231,"_18":1232},{"_14":1225,"_1542":833,"_1543":1559,"_20":1226,"_16":406,"_18":1227},{"_14":15,"_1542":678,"_1543":1559,"_20":21,"_16":17,"_18":19},{"_14":1217,"_1542":1399,"_1543":1559,"_20":1218,"_16":1219,"_18":1220},{"_14":1180,"_1542":807,"_1543":1559,"_20":1181,"_16":1182,"_18":1183},{"_14":1173,"_1542":959,"_1543":1559,"_20":1174,"_16":1175,"_18":1176},{"_14":1167,"_1542":1106,"_1543":1559,"_20":1168,"_16":1169,"_18":1170},{"_14":1157,"_1542":634,"_1543":1559,"_20":1158,"_16":1159,"_18":1160},{"_14":1144,"_1542":569,"_1543":1559,"_20":1145,"_16":315,"_18":1146},{"_14":1131,"_1542":404,"_1543":1559,"_20":1132,"_16":1133,"_18":1134},{"_14":1122,"_1542":518,"_1543":1559,"_20":1123,"_16":751,"_18":1124},{"_14":1112,"_1542":647,"_1543":1559,"_20":1113,"_16":1114,"_18":1115},{"_14":1106,"_1542":1100,"_1543":1559,"_20":1107,"_16":1108,"_18":1109},{"_14":1100,"_1542":-5,"_1543":1559,"_20":1100,"_16":1101,"_18":1102},{"_14":1088,"_1542":459,"_1543":1559,"_20":1089,"_16":1090,"_18":1091},{"_14":1080,"_1542":713,"_1543":1559,"_20":1081,"_16":1082,"_18":308},{"_14":1064,"_1542":860,"_1543":1559,"_20":1065,"_16":1066,"_18":1067},{"_14":1047,"_1542":1027,"_1543":1559,"_20":1048,"_16":1049,"_18":1050},{"_14":1033,"_1542":1251,"_1543":1559,"_20":1034,"_16":1035,"_18":1036},{"_14":1027,"_1542":1021,"_1543":1559,"_20":1028,"_16":1029,"_18":1030},{"_14":1021,"_1542":1230,"_1543":1559,"_20":1022,"_16":1023,"_18":1024},{"_14":1005,"_1542":1239,"_1543":1559,"_20":1006,"_16":649,"_18":1007},{"_14":1000,"_1542":833,"_1543":38,"_20":1001,"_16":520,"_18":1002},{"_14":981,"_1542":807,"_1543":38,"_20":982,"_16":983,"_18":984},{"_14":975,"_1542":959,"_1543":38,"_20":976,"_16":977,"_18":978},{"_14":959,"_1542":-5,"_1543":38,"_20":960,"_16":961,"_18":962},{"_14":950,"_1542":1106,"_1543":38,"_20":951,"_16":952,"_18":953},{"_14":937,"_1542":647,"_1543":38,"_20":938,"_16":847,"_18":939},{"_14":928,"_1542":1100,"_1543":38,"_20":929,"_16":930,"_18":931},{"_14":917,"_1542":459,"_1543":38,"_20":918,"_16":919,"_18":920},{"_14":908,"_1542":713,"_1543":38,"_20":909,"_16":910,"_18":911},{"_14":893,"_1542":860,"_1543":38,"_20":894,"_16":895,"_18":896},{"_14":878,"_1542":1027,"_1543":38,"_20":879,"_16":880,"_18":881},{"_14":866,"_1542":1251,"_1543":38,"_20":867,"_16":868,"_18":869},{"_14":860,"_1542":1230,"_1543":38,"_20":861,"_16":862,"_18":863},{"_14":845,"_1542":1239,"_1543":38,"_20":846,"_16":847,"_18":848},{"_14":839,"_1542":833,"_1543":1558,"_20":840,"_16":841,"_18":842},{"_14":833,"_1542":959,"_1543":1558,"_20":834,"_16":835,"_18":836},{"_14":812,"_1542":807,"_1543":1558,"_20":813,"_16":814,"_18":815},{"_14":807,"_1542":-5,"_1543":1558,"_20":807,"_16":808,"_18":809},{"_14":796,"_1542":647,"_1543":1558,"_20":797,"_16":798,"_18":799},{"_14":790,"_1542":1100,"_1543":1558,"_20":791,"_16":204,"_18":792},{"_14":779,"_1542":459,"_1543":1558,"_20":780,"_16":781,"_18":782},{"_14":766,"_1542":713,"_1543":1558,"_20":767,"_16":768,"_18":769},{"_14":749,"_1542":860,"_1543":1558,"_20":750,"_16":751,"_18":752},{"_14":734,"_1542":1027,"_1543":1558,"_20":735,"_16":736,"_18":737},{"_14":719,"_1542":1251,"_1543":1558,"_20":720,"_16":721,"_18":722},{"_14":713,"_1542":1230,"_1543":1558,"_20":714,"_16":715,"_18":716},{"_14":697,"_1542":1239,"_1543":1558,"_20":698,"_16":699,"_18":700},{"_14":691,"_1542":959,"_1543":1557,"_20":692,"_16":693,"_18":694},{"_14":684,"_1542":833,"_1543":1557,"_20":685,"_16":686,"_18":687},{"_14":678,"_1542":-5,"_1543":1557,"_20":679,"_16":680,"_18":681},{"_14":659,"_1542":807,"_1543":1557,"_20":660,"_16":661,"_18":662},{"_14":647,"_1542":1100,"_1543":1557,"_20":648,"_16":649,"_18":650},{"_14":634,"_1542":459,"_1543":1557,"_20":635,"_16":636,"_18":637},{"_14":626,"_1542":713,"_1543":1557,"_20":627,"_16":628,"_18":629},{"_14":612,"_1542":860,"_1543":1557,"_20":613,"_16":614,"_18":615},{"_14":592,"_1542":1027,"_1543":1557,"_20":593,"_16":594,"_18":595},{"_14":578,"_1542":1251,"_1543":1557,"_20":579,"_16":580,"_18":581},{"_14":569,"_1542":1230,"_1543":1557,"_20":570,"_16":571,"_18":572},{"_14":557,"_1542":1239,"_1543":1557,"_20":558,"_16":559,"_18":560},{"_14":544,"_1542":807,"_1543":1556,"_20":545,"_16":546,"_18":547},{"_14":538,"_1542":959,"_1543":1556,"_20":539,"_16":540,"_18":541},{"_14":531,"_1542":833,"_1543":1556,"_20":532,"_16":533,"_18":534},{"_14":518,"_1542":1100,"_1543":1556,"_20":519,"_16":520,"_18":521},{"_14":504,"_1542":459,"_1543":1556,"_20":505,"_16":506,"_18":507},{"_14":497,"_1542":713,"_1543":1556,"_20":498,"_16":499,"_18":500},{"_14":485,"_1542":1027,"_1543":1556,"_20":486,"_16":487,"_18":488},{"_14":467,"_1542":1251,"_1543":1556,"_20":468,"_16":469,"_18":470},{"_14":459,"_1542":1230,"_1543":1556,"_20":460,"_16":461,"_18":462},{"_14":441,"_1542":1239,"_1543":1556,"_20":442,"_16":443,"_18":444},{"_14":435,"_1542":959,"_1543":1555,"_20":436,"_16":437,"_18":438},{"_14":428,"_1542":833,"_1543":1555,"_20":429,"_16":430,"_18":431},{"_14":414,"_1542":1027,"_1543":1555,"_20":415,"_16":416,"_18":417},{"_14":404,"_1542":1100,"_1543":1555,"_20":405,"_16":406,"_18":407},{"_14":393,"_1542":459,"_1543":1555,"_20":394,"_16":395,"_18":396},{"_14":384,"_1542":713,"_1543":1555,"_20":385,"_16":386,"_18":387},{"_14":371,"_1542":1239,"_1543":1555,"_20":372,"_16":373,"_18":374},{"_14":365,"_1542":959,"_1543":1554,"_20":366,"_16":367,"_18":368},{"_14":349,"_1542":1100,"_1543":1554,"_20":350,"_16":351,"_18":352},{"_14":337,"_1542":459,"_1543":1554,"_20":338,"_16":339,"_18":340},{"_14":331,"_1542":713,"_1543":1554,"_20":332,"_16":333,"_18":308},{"_14":325,"_1542":959,"_1543":1553,"_20":326,"_16":327,"_18":328},{"_14":313,"_1542":1100,"_1543":1553,"_20":314,"_16":315,"_18":316},{"_14":305,"_1542":713,"_1543":1553,"_20":306,"_16":307,"_18":308},{"_14":295,"_1542":959,"_1543":1552,"_20":296,"_16":297,"_18":298},{"_14":287,"_1542":713,"_1543":1552,"_20":288,"_16":289,"_18":290},{"_14":268,"_1542":959,"_1543":1551,"_20":269,"_16":270,"_18":271},{"_14":259,"_1542":713,"_1543":1551,"_20":260,"_16":261,"_18":262},{"_14":253,"_1542":959,"_1543":1550,"_20":254,"_16":255,"_18":256},{"_14":244,"_1542":713,"_1543":1550,"_20":245,"_16":246,"_18":247},{"_14":235,"_1542":959,"_1543":1549,"_20":236,"_16":237,"_18":238},{"_14":226,"_1542":713,"_1543":1549,"_20":227,"_16":228,"_18":229},{"_14":218,"_1542":959,"_1543":1548,"_20":219,"_16":220,"_18":221},{"_14":208,"_1542":713,"_1543":1548,"_20":209,"_16":210,"_18":211},{"_14":202,"_1542":959,"_1543":1547,"_20":203,"_16":204,"_18":205},{"_14":196,"_1542":959,"_1543":1546,"_20":197,"_16":198,"_18":199},{"_14":180,"_1542":959,"_1543":1545,"_20":181,"_16":182,"_18":183},{"_14":164,"_1542":959,"_1543":1544,"_20":165,"_16":166,"_18":167},"parent","order",18,17,16,15,14,13,12,11,10,9,8,7,6,5,4,2,1,"cart",["P",1562],"isLoggedIn",["P",1564],"footer",["P",1566],"header",{"_1575":1605,"_1606":1607},"selectedLocale",{"_1586":1587,"_1584":1585,"_1602":1603,"_1604":1583},"seo",{"_1588":1589,"_1590":1591},"publicStoreDomain","ihprze-k8.myshopify.com","shop",["P",1576],"consent",{"_1579":-7,"_1580":1581,"_1582":1583,"_1584":1585,"_1586":1587},"checkoutDomain","storefrontAccessToken","75b85937d9ebcd0ae442b19370e8a2d3","withPrivacyBanner",false,"country","DE","language","EN","canonical","https://ihprze-k8.myshopify.com/en/docs/getting-started/two-rail","alternates",[1592,1593,1594],{"_1595":1600,"_1597":1601},{"_1595":1599,"_1597":1589},{"_1595":1596,"_1597":1598},"hrefLang","x-default","href","https://ihprze-k8.myshopify.com/docs/getting-started/two-rail","en","de","https://ihprze-k8.myshopify.com/de/docs/getting-started/two-rail","pathPrefix","/en","isDefault",{"_14":1636,"_1637":1638,"_1639":-5,"_1640":1641,"_1642":1643},"menu",{"_14":1608,"_1609":1610},"gid://shopify/Menu/340140130636","items",[1611,1612,1613],{"_14":1630,"_1615":-5,"_1617":1631,"_16":1632,"_26":1633,"_1621":1634,"_1609":1635},{"_14":1624,"_1615":-5,"_1617":1625,"_16":1626,"_26":1627,"_1621":1628,"_1609":1629},{"_14":1614,"_1615":1616,"_1617":1618,"_16":1619,"_26":1620,"_1621":1622,"_1609":1623},"gid://shopify/MenuItem/868232757580","resourceId","gid://shopify/Page/732065956172","tags",[],"Kontakt","PAGE","url","https://ihprze-k8.myshopify.com/en/pages/contact",[],"gid://shopify/MenuItem/868232724812",[],"Katalog","CATALOG","https://ihprze-k8.myshopify.com/en/collections/all",[],"gid://shopify/MenuItem/868232692044",[],"Startseite","FRONTPAGE","https://ihprze-k8.myshopify.com/en",[],"gid://shopify/Shop/107274928460","name","Mein Shop","description","primaryDomain",{"_1621":1645},"brand",{"_1644":-5},"logo","https://ihprze-k8.myshopify.com"]